2011 Cadillac SRX Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1
Additional Storage Features . . . 4-3
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Rear Seat Infotainment . . . . . . . 7-38
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Performance and
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-40
Universal Remote System . . . . 5-46
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 2-1
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1
Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-17
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-26
Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-34
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-40
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-62
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
iii
This manual describes features
that may or may not be on your
specific vehicle either because
they are options that you did
not purchase or due to changes
subsequent to the printing of this
owner manual. Please refer to the
purchase documentation relating
to your specific vehicle to confirm
each of the features found on your
vehicle. For vehicles first sold in
Canada, substitute the name
Canadian Vehicle Owners
Propriétaires Canadiens
A French language copy of this
manual can be obtained from your
dealer or from:
The names, logos, emblems,
slogans, vehicle model names, and
vehicle body designs appearing in
this manual including, but not limited
to, GM, the GM logo, CADILLAC,
the CADILLAC Crest and Wreath,
and SRX are trademarks and/or
service marks of General Motors
LLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates,
or licensors.
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
ce guide en français auprès du
concessionnaire ou à l'adresse
suivante:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
“General Motors of Canada Limited”
for Cadillac Motor Car Division
wherever it appears in this manual.
1-800-551-4123
Numéro de poste 6438
de langue française
www.helminc.com
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 20784402 A First Printing
© 2010 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iv
Introduction
Using this Manual
Symbols
WARNING
{
To quickly locate information
about the vehicle, use the Index
in the back of the manual. It is an
alphabetical list of what is in the
manual and the page number
where it can be found.
The vehicle has components and
labels that use symbols instead of
text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or
information relating to a specific
component, control, message,
gauge, or indicator.
These mean there is something
that could hurt you or other
people.
Notice: This means there is
something that could result
in property or vehicle damage.
This would not be covered by
the vehicle's warranty.
Danger, Warnings, and
Cautions
Warning messages found on vehicle
labels and in this manual describe
hazards and what to do to avoid or
reduce them.
M : This symbol is shown
when you need to see your owner
manual for additional instructions or
information.
* : This symbol is shown when
you need to see a service manual
for additional instructions or
information.
Danger indicates a hazard with a
high level of risk which will result in
serious injury or death.
Warning or Caution indicates a
hazard that could result in injury or
death.
A circle with a slash through it
is a safety symbol which means
“Do Not,” “Do not do this,” or
“Do not let this happen.”
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
v
Vehicle Symbol Chart
. : Fuel Gauge
+ : Fuses
Here are some additional symbols
that may be found on the vehicle
and what they mean. For more
information on the symbol, refer
to the Index.
3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer
j : LATCH System Child
Restraints
0 : Adjustable Pedals
* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
: : Oil Pressure
g : Outside Power Foldaway
Mirrors
9 : Airbag Readiness Light
# : Air Conditioning
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)
g : Audio Steering Wheel Controls
or OnStar®
} : Power
/ : Remote Vehicle Start
> : Safety Belt Reminders
7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak
M : Windshield Washer Fluid
$ : Brake System Warning Light
" : Charging System
I : Cruise Control
B : Engine Coolant Temperature
O : Exterior Lamps
# : Fog Lamps
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
vi
Introduction
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-1
Throttle and Brake Pedal
Performance and Maintenance
Traction Control
System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-24
Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-25
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 1-25
Driving for Better Fuel
Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Roadside Service . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
In Brief
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-14
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Initial Drive Information
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Heated and Ventilated
Vehicle Features
Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-19
Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-20
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Driver Information
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 1-21
Rear Vision
Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 1-22
Storage Compartments . . . . . . 1-22
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Universal Remote System . . . 1-23
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Head Restraint
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Sensing System for
Passenger Airbag . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Steering Wheel
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-2
In Brief
Instrument Panel
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-3
A. Air Vents on page 8‑6.
I. Safety Locks on page 2‑13.
P. Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 5‑3.
B. Turn and Lane‐Change Lever.
See Turn and Lane-Change
Signals on page 6‑5.
Power Door Locks on
page 2‑12.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer on
page 5‑5.
Hazard Warning Flashers on
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Controls. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 5‑28.
page 6‑5.
Q. Heated Front Seats on
page 3‑10 (If Equipped).
J. Exterior Lamp Controls on
page 6‑1.
Heated and Ventilated
Front Seats on page 3‑11
(If Equipped).
C. Cruise Control on page 9‑38.
Front Fog Lamps on page 6‑6
(If Equipped).
D. Instrument Cluster on
page 5‑11.
R. Parking Brake on page 9‑31.
Instrument Panel Illumination
E. Steering Wheel Controls on
page 5‑2.
Control on page 6‑6.
S. Shift Lever. See Shifting Into
Park on page 9‑22.
T. StabiliTrak® System on
page 9‑35.
K. Data Link Connector (DLC).
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 5‑19.
F. AM-FM Radio on page 7‑12.
Navigation System
(If Equipped). See Navigation
System Manual.
L. Steering Wheel Adjustment on
page 5‑2.
Ultrasonic Parking Assist on
page 9‑40 (If Equipped).
G. Driver Information Center (DIC)
Display. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 5‑28.
M. Horn on page 5‑3.
Economy Mode (If Equipped).
See Fuel Economy Mode on
page 9‑29.
N. Adjustable Pedal Control
(If Equipped). See Adjustable
Throttle and Brake Pedal on
page 9‑17.
H. Clock (Analog Clock) on
page 5‑7 or Clock (Digital
Clock) on page 5‑8.
U. Dual Automatic Climate Control
System on page 8‑1.
O. Start/Stop Button. See Ignition
Positions on page 9‑18.
V. Glove Box on page 4‑1.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-4
In Brief
Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter is used to lock and
unlock the doors from up to 60 m
(195 ft) away from the vehicle.
Q : Press to lock all doors.
Lock and unlock feedback can
be personalized. See Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑40.
Initial Drive
Information
This section provides a brief
overview about some of the
& : Press and hold to open the
liftgate.
important features that may or may
not be on your specific vehicle.
L : Press and release to locate
For more detailed information, refer
to each of the features which can be
found later in this owner manual.
the vehicle.
Press and hold L for
three seconds to sound the
panic alarm.
Press L again to cancel the panic
alarm.
Press the key release button near
the bottom of the transmitter to
remove the key. The key can be
used for the driver door and the
glove box.
K : Press to unlock the driver
door or all doors depending on the
vehicle personalization settings.
See Keys on page 2‑2 and Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 2‑4.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-5
Canceling a Remote Start
Remote Vehicle Start
To cancel a remote start:
With this feature the engine can be
started from outside of the vehicle.
.
Press and hold / until the
parking lamps turn off.
Starting the Vehicle
.
Turn on the hazard warning
flashers.
1. Press Q on the RKE transmitter.
2. Within two seconds, press
.
Turn the vehicle on and then off.
and hold / until the turn
signal lamps flash. Or for about
2 seconds if the vehicle is not
in view.
See Remote Vehicle Start on
page 2‑10.
The power door lock switches are
on the instrument panel.
Door Locks
To lock or unlock a door, use
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter from the outside.
When the vehicle starts, the parking
lamps will turn on and remain on
as long as the engine is running.
The doors will be locked and
the climate control system may
come on.
K : Press to unlock the doors.
Q : Press to lock the doors.
See Power Door Locks on
page 2‑12.
From inside the vehicle with the
doors locked, pull once on the door
handle to unlock it, and a second
time to open it or use the power
door lock switch.
The engine will continue to run for
10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a
10-minute time extension. Remote
start can be extended only once.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-6
In Brief
Choose the power liftgate mode
by turning the dial on the switch
until the indicator lines up with the
desired position. Press the center
of the switch.
Power Liftgate Operation
Liftgate
Manual Liftgate Operation
For vehicles without keyless access,
unlock the vehicle before opening
the liftgate.
See Liftgate (Manual) on page 2‑14
or Liftgate (Power) on page 2‑15 for
more information.
Press the touchpad located in the
handle of the liftgate, above the
license plate, and lift up to open.
Do not press the touchpad while
closing the liftgate. This will cause
the liftgate to be unlatched.
On vehicles with a power liftgate the
switch is located on the driver door.
The vehicle must be in P (Park) to
use the power feature. The taillamps
flash when the power liftgate
moves.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-7
3. Release the handle to stop the
seat from moving.
Windows
Seat Adjustment
Manual Seats
4. Try to move the seat back and
forth to be sure it is locked in
place.
To raise or recline the seatback, use
the lever on the outboard side of
the seat.
See Seat Adjustment on page 3‑4
and Reclining Seatbacks on
page 3‑8 for more information.
Driver Side Shown
The power window controls are on
each of the side doors.
To adjust a manual seat:
The driver door also has switches
that control the passenger and rear
windows.
1. Pull the handle at the front of the
seat cushion.
2. Move the seat forward or
rearward to adjust the seat
position.
Operate the switch for the window
by pressing to open and pulling to
close.
Pushing or pulling the switch part
of the way will open or close the
window as long as the switch is
operated.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-8
In Brief
To adjust a power seat, if equipped:
Power Seats
Memory Features
.
Slide control (A) forward or
rearward, and up or down to
adjust the power seat.
See Power Seat Adjustment on
page 3‑4.
.
Raise or recline the seatback
by tilting control (B) forward or
rearward.
See Reclining Seatbacks on
page 3‑8.
.
Increase or decrease the lumbar
support by pressing and holding
the front or rear of control (C).
See Lumbar Adjustment on
page 3‑7.
A. Power Seat Adjustment
B. Seatback Adjustment
C. Lumbar Adjustment
On vehicles with the memory
feature, the “1” and “2” buttons
on the outboard side of the driver
seat are used to manually save
and recall the positions of the
driver seat, outside mirrors, and
adjustable throttle and brake pedals,
if available. These manually stored
positions are referred to as Button
Memory positions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-9
The vehicle will also automatically
save driver seat, outside mirror,
and adjustable throttle and brake
pedal positions to the current driver
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter when the ignition is
turned off. These automatically
stored positions are referred to
as RKE Memory positions.
To recall the manually saved
Button Memory positions, press
and hold “1” or “2.” The driver seat,
outside mirrors, and adjustable
pedals, if available, move to the
positions stored to those buttons
when pressed. Releasing “1” or “2”
before the stored positions are
reached stops the recall.
See “Memory Seats” under Power
Seat Adjustment on page 3‑4 for
more information.
Easy Exit Driver Seat
This feature moves the seat
rearward allowing the driver more
room to exit the vehicle.
To activate, place the ignition in
OFF and open the driver door. If the
driver door is already open, placing
the ignition in OFF will activate the
easy exit driver seat.
To automatically recall RKE Memory
positions, unlock the driver door
with the RKE transmitter, and open
the driver door. On vehicles with
Keyless Access, opening the driver
door when an RKE transmitter
is present will activate the RKE
Memory recall. If the driver door
is already open, pressing the
RKE transmitter K button will also
activate the RKE Memory recall.
The driver seat, outside mirrors,
and pedals, if available, will move to
the previously saved RKE Memory
positions.
Storing Button Memory Positions
To save positions into Button
Memory:
1. Adjust the driver seat,
seatback recliner, both outside
mirrors, and adjustable pedals,
if available, to the desired driving
positions.
This feature is turned on or off using
the vehicle personalization menu.
See “Easy Exit Driver Seat” under
Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑40 for more information.
2. Press and release the
MEM (Memory) button.
3. Press “1” until a beep sounds.
4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for a
second driver using “2.”
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-10
In Brief
Heated and Ventilated
Seats
Head Restraint
Adjustment
Safety Belts
Do not drive until the head restraints
for all occupants are installed and
adjusted properly.
To achieve a comfortable seating
position, change the seatback
recline angle as little as necessary
while keeping the seat and the
head restraint height in the proper
position.
For more information see Head
Restraints on page 3‑2 and Seat
Adjustment on page 3‑4.
Refer to the following sections for
important information on how to use
safety belts properly.
If available, the buttons are near the
climate controls on the instrument
panel. To operate, the ignition must
be in ON/RUN/START.
.
Safety Belts on page 3‑14.
.
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly on page 3‑18.
Press M to heat the seat or H to
cool the seat.
.
.
Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑24.
For more information, see Heated
and Ventilated Front Seats on
page 3‑11.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
page 3‑56.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-11
The passenger airbag status
indicator will be visible on the
overhead console when the vehicle
is started. See Passenger Sensing
System on page 3‑39 for more
information.
To adjust the mirror:
1. Move the selector switch to
Sensing System for
Passenger Airbag
L (left) or R (right) to choose the
driver or passenger mirror.
2. Press the arrows on the control
pad to move each mirror to the
desired position.
Mirror Adjustment
3. Return the selector switch to the
center position.
Exterior
United States
See Power Mirrors on page 2‑22.
Manual Folding Mirrors
Vehicles with manual fold mirrors
are folded inward toward the vehicle
to prevent damage when going
through an automatic car wash.
Push the mirror outward to return
it to the original position.
Canada and Mexico
The passenger sensing system will
turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag under certain
conditions. The driver airbags and
roof‐rail airbags are not affected by
the passenger sensing system.
Controls for the outside power
mirrors are on the driver door.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-12
In Brief
To fold the mirrors:
Power Folding Mirrors
Steering Wheel
Adjustment
1. With the selector switch in
the O position, push the down
arrow on the control pad. Both
mirrors will automatically fold.
2. Push the down arrow on the
control pad again to return the
mirrors to their original position.
See Folding Mirrors on page 2‑22.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
If the vehicle has the automatic
dimming mirror, the driver outside
mirror, and the inside rearview
mirror, automatically adjust for the
glare of headlamps behind you.
See Automatic Dimming Mirror on
page 2‑23 or Automatic Dimming
Rearview Mirror on page 2‑24.
Vehicles with power folding mirrors
have controls on the driver door.
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel up
or down.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-13
3. Pull or push the steering wheel
closer or away from you.
To manually turn the reading lamps
on or off:
Interior Lighting
Dome Lamps
4. Pull the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in place.
For the overhead console reading
lamps, press the button next to
each lamp.
The dome lamp controls are located
in the overhead console.
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.
To change the dome lamp settings,
press the following:
For the rear passenger reading
lamps, press the lamp lens.
Throttle and Brake Pedal
Adjustment
If the vehicle has this feature, the
position of the throttle and brake
pedals can be adjusted.
* : Turns the lamp off, even when
For more information on interior
lighting, see:
a door is open.
.
1 : The lamp comes on
automatically when a door is
opened.
Instrument Panel Illumination
Control on page 6‑6.
+ : Turns the dome lamp on.
The switch used to adjust the
pedals is located on the right side
of the steering column, below the
wiper stalk. Pull the switch toward
you to move the pedals further from
the floor, or push the switch away
from you to move the pedals closer
to the floor.
Reading Lamps
There are reading lamps located on
the overhead console and over the
rear passenger doors. These lamps
come on automatically when any
door is opened.
See Adjustable Throttle and Brake
Pedal on page 9‑17.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-14
In Brief
AUTO : Turns the headlamps on
automatically at normal brightness,
together with the parking lamps,
taillamps, license plate lamps, and
instrument panel lights.
Exterior Lighting
Windshield Wiper/Washer
; : Turns the parking lamps on
together with the taillamps, license
plate lamps, and instrument panel
lights.
The windshield wiper/washer
lever is located on the right side
of the steering column. With the
ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY
or ON/RUN/START, move the
windshield wiper lever to select
the wiper speed.
5 : Turns the headlamps on
together with the parking lamps,
taillamps, license plate lamps and
instrument panel lights.
# : For vehicles with fog lamps,
press to turn the lamps on or off.
The exterior lamps control is located
on the instrument panel to the left of
the steering column.
2: Fast wipes.
1: Slow wipes.
For more information, see:
.
Exterior Lamp Controls on
The exterior lamps control has four
positions:
page 6‑1.
.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
on page 6‑3.
O : Briefly turn to this position to
turn the automatic light control off
or on again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-15
Rainsense™
& : Turn the & band up for
more frequent wipes or down for
less frequent wipes. If the vehicle
has Rainsense™, see following
Rainsense™ information.
For vehicles with Rainsense:
& : Move the windshield wiper
lever to &. Turn the band on
the wiper lever to adjust the
sensitivity.
Turn the band up for more
sensitivity to moisture.
Turn the band down for less
sensitivity to moisture.
To deactivate Rainsense, move
the windshield wiper lever out
( : Turns the wipers off.
Press the upper or lower portion of
the button to control the rear wiper
and rear wiper delay.
8 : Single wipe, briefly move the
wiper lever down. Several wipes,
hold the wiper lever down.
of & position.
The system turns off when the
button is returned to the middle
position.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
Windshield Washer
The rear wiper controls are on the
end of the windshield wiper lever.
Pull the lever toward you to spray
washer fluid on the windshield.
Z : For continuous rear window
wipes.
See Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 5‑3 and Rear Window Wiper/
Washer on page 5‑5, if equipped.
5 : Sets a delay between wipes.
= : Push the windshield wiper
lever forward to spray washer fluid
on the rear window.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-16
In Brief
See Dual Automatic Climate Control
System on page 8‑1 and Rear
Climate Control System on
page 8‑5, if equipped.
Climate Controls
The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled with
this system.
Transmission
Driver Shift Control (DSC)
Notice: If you drive the vehicle
at a high rpm without upshifting
while using Driver Shift Control
(DSC), you could damage the
vehicle. Always upshift when
necessary while using DSC.
Driver Shift Control (DSC)
allows you to shift an automatic
transmission similar to a manual
transmission. To use the DSC
feature:
A. Fan Control
H. Driver and Passenger Heated
and Ventilated Seats
B. Power
I. Air Conditioning
J. Recirculation
1. Move the shift lever to
the left from D (Drive) to
M (Manual Mode).
C. AUTO (Automatic Operation)
D. ZONE
K. Outside Air
E. Defrost
2. To enter M (Manual Mode), press
the shift lever forward (+) to
upshift or rearward (−) to
downshift.
L. Rear Window Defogger
F. Air Delivery Mode Control
G. Driver and Passenger
Temperature Control
See Manual Mode on page 9‑28.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-17
Storing a Favorite Station
l SEEK: Press to seek the next
Vehicle Features
station or track.
Stations from all bands can be
stored in the favorite lists in any
order. Up to six stations can be
stored in each favorite page and
the number of available favorite
pages can be set.
Radio(s)
Buttons 1 ‐ 6: Press to save and
select favorite stations
VOL/ O : Press to turn the system
on and off. Turn to increase or
decrease the volume.
For more information about these
and other radio features, see
Operation on page 7‑7.
RADIO/BAND: Press to choose
between FM, AM, or XM™,
if equipped.
To store the station to a position in
the list, press the corresponding
numeric button 1-6 until the station
can be heard again.
For more information about the Rear
Seat Entertainment (RSE) System,
see Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
System on page 7‑38.
TUNE/INFO: Turn to select radio
stations.
For more information, see “Storing
and Retrieving Favorites” in AM-FM
Radio on page 7‑12.
For more information about the
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) System, see
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) System on
page 7‑49.
Press to show available information
about the current station or track.
g SEEK: Press to seek the
previous station or track.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-18
In Brief
4. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
adjust the highlighted value.
Setting the Month & Day Format
1. Press the CONFIG button.
Setting the Clock
The vehicle has a digital and an
analog clock.
5. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
to select the next value.
2. Select Time and Date Settings.
3. Highlight Month & Day Format.
For detailed instructions on setting
either clock, see Clock (Analog
Clock) on page 5‑7 or Clock (Digital
Clock) on page 5‑8.
6. To save the time or date and
return to the Time and Date
Settings menu, press the
4. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
to select MM/DD (month/day) or
DD/MM (day/month).
BACK 0 button at any time
or press the MENU/SELECT
knob after adjusting the minutes
or year.
Turning the Digital Clock On or Off
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Time and Date Settings.
3. Select Clock Displayed.
Setting the Auto Time Adjust
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Time and Date Settings.
3. Highlight Auto Time Adjust.
Setting the 12/24 Hour Format
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Time and Date Settings.
3. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format.
4. Press the MENU/SELECT
button to turn the clock on or off.
4. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
to turn Auto Time Adjust on
or off.
Setting the Time and Date
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Time and Date Settings.
3. Select Set Time or Set Date.
4. Press the MENU/SELECT
button to select the 12 hour or
24 hour display format.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-19
Satellite Radio
Portable Audio Devices
Bluetooth®
The Bluetooth® system allows users
with a Bluetooth-enabled cell phone
to make and receive hands-free
calls using the vehicle audio
Vehicles with an XM™ Satellite
Radio tuner and a valid XM Satellite
Radio subscription can receive XM
programming.
This vehicle may have a 3.5 mm
(1/8 in) auxiliary input and a USB
port located in the center console.
External devices such as iPods®,
laptop computers, MP3 players, CD
changers, and USB storage devices
may be connected, depending on
the audio system.
system, microphone, and controls.
XM Satellite Radio Service
The Bluetooth-enabled cell phone
must be paired with the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system before it can be
used in the vehicle. Not all phones
will support all functions.
XM is a satellite radio service based
in the 48 contiguous United States
and 10 Canadian provinces. XM
Satellite Radio has a wide variety of
programming and commercial-free
music, coast to coast, and in
For more information, see Auxiliary
Devices (Radio with CD ) on
page 7‑30 or Auxiliary Devices
(Radio with CD/DVD and MEM) on
page 7‑36.
See Bluetooth (Overview ) on
page 7‑51 or Bluetooth
(Infotainment Controls) on
page 7‑52 or Bluetooth (Voice
Recognition) on page 7‑57.
digital-quality sound. A fee is
required to receive the XM service.
For more information refer to:
.
www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-929-2100 (U.S.).
.
www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-438-9677 (Canada).
For more information, see Satellite
Radio on page 7‑15.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-20
In Brief
Steering Wheel Controls
Press the z button to select the
previous favorite radio station or
previous CD, DVD, if equipped,
or MP3 track.
Cruise Control
+ x −: Press + to increase the
volume, press − to decrease the
volume.
b / g : Press to interact with
the available Bluetooth, OnStar,
or Navigation system.
$ / : Press to silence the vehicle
speakers only. Press again to turn
the sound on. For vehicles with
OnStar or Bluetooth systems, press
to reject an incoming call, or end a
current call.
If available, some audio controls
can be adjusted at the steering
wheel.
T : Press to turn cruise control on
and off.
+ RES : Press briefly to make
the vehicle resume to a previously
set speed or press and hold to
accelerate.
SRCE: Press to select an audio
source.
y / z : Press the y button to
select the next favorite radio station
or next CD, DVD, if equipped,
or MP3 track.
For more information, see Steering
Wheel Controls on page 5‑2.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-21
−SET: Press to set the speed and
activate cruise control or make the
vehicle decelerate.
C. MENU: Press to get to the
Driver Information
Center (DIC)
The DIC display is located in the
center of the instrument panel
cluster. It shows the status of many
vehicle systems. The controls for
the DIC are located on the turn
signal lever.
Trip/Fuel Menu and the Vehicle
Information Menu. This button
is also used to return to or exit
the last screen displayed on
the DIC.
[ : Press to disengage cruise
control without erasing the set
speed from memory.
For more information, see Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 5‑28.
See Cruise Control on page 9‑38.
Navigation System
The vehicle's navigation system
(if equipped) provides detailed maps
of most major freeways and roads.
After a destination has been set,
the system provides turn-by-turn
instructions for reaching the
destination. In addition, the system
can help locate a variety of points
of interest (POI), such as banks,
airports, restaurants, and more.
Vehicle Personalization
Some vehicle features can be
programmed by using the audio
system controls. These features
include:
.
Climate and Air Quality
A. SET/CLR: Press to set or
clear the menu item when it is
displayed.
.
Comfort and Convenience
.
.
.
.
.
Language
B. w x: Use the thumbwheel
to scroll through the items in
each menu.
Lighting
See the Navigation System manual
for more information.
Power Door Locks
Remote Lock/Unlock/Start
Return to Factory Settings
See Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑40.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-22
In Brief
The system can be disabled by
pressing the park assist button
located next to the shift lever.
Rear Vision
Camera (RVC)
Ultrasonic Parking Assist
If available, this feature uses
sensors on the front and rear
If available, the rear vision
See Ultrasonic Parking Assist on
page 9‑40 for more information.
bumpers to detect objects while
parking the vehicle. Ultrasonic Front
and Rear Parking Assist (UFRPA)
comes on automatically when the
shift lever is moved into R (Reverse)
and operates at speeds less than
8 km/h (5 mph). UFRPA uses
audible beeps and a display in
the instrument panel to provide
distance and system information.
camera displays a view of the
area behind the vehicle when the
vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
The display will appear on either the
inside rearview mirror or navigation
screen, if equipped.
Storage Compartments
The glove box is air conditioned
and can be used to store items at a
lower temperature. Slide the control
across the small hole to adjust the
air flow. See Glove Box on page 4‑1
for more information.
To clean the camera lens, located
above the license plate, rinse it with
water and wipe it with a soft cloth.
See Rear Vision Camera (RVC) on
page 9‑43.
Keep the sensors on the vehicle's
front and rear bumpers clean to
ensure proper operation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-23
Power Outlets
The accessory power outlets can be
used to plug in electrical equipment,
such as a cell phone or MP3 player.
Universal Remote System
Performance and
Maintenance
Traction Control
System (TCS)
The traction control system limits
wheel spin. The system is on when
the vehicle is started.
The vehicle has four accessory
power outlets. The power outlets
located below the climate control
system inside the front storage
bin, inside the center floor console,
and on the rear of the center floor
console are powered while the
vehicle is in ON/RUN/START or
ACC/ACCESSORY mode, or until
the driver door is opened within
10 minutes of turning off the vehicle.
This system provides a way
to replace up to three remote
control transmitters used to activate
devices such as garage door
openers, security systems, and
home automation devices.
.
To turn off traction control, press
and release g located on the
console. i illuminates and
the appropriate DIC message
displays. See Vehicle Messages
on page 5‑32.
Read the instructions completely
before attempting to program
the Universal Home Remote.
Because of the steps involved, it
may be helpful to have another
person available to assist you with
programming the Universal Home
Remote.
The power outlet located in the rear
cargo area is powered at all times.
.
Press and release g again to
turn traction control back on.
Open the protective cap to use the
accessory power outlet.
For more information, see Traction
Control System (TCS) on
page 9‑34.
See Power Outlets on page 5‑9.
See Universal Remote System on
page 5‑46.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-24
In Brief
StabiliTrak® System
Tire Pressure Monitor
This vehicle may have a Tire
indicator that the tire pressures are
getting low and the tires need to be
inflated to the proper pressure.
The StabiliTrak system assists
with directional control of the
vehicle in difficult driving conditions.
The system is on when the vehicle
is started.
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
The TPMS does not replace normal
monthly tire maintenance. It is the
driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressures.
.
To turn off both Traction Control
See Tire Pressure Monitor System
on page 10‑63.
and StabiliTrak, press and
hold g until g and i illuminate
and the appropriate DIC
message displays. See Vehicle
Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit
This vehicle may come with a jack
and spare tire or a tire sealant and
compressor kit. The kit can be used
to temporarily seal small punctures
in the tread area of the tire.
The TPMS warning light alerts you
to a significant loss in pressure
of one of the vehicle's tires. If the
warning light comes on, stop as
soon as possible and inflate the
tires to the recommended pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9‑12. The warning
light will remain on until the tire
pressure is corrected.
Messages on page 5‑32.
.
Press g again to turn on both
systems.
For more information, see
StabiliTrak® System on page 9‑35.
See Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit on page 10‑79 for complete
operating information.
During cooler conditions, the low tire
pressure warning light may appear
when the vehicle is first started and
then turn off. This may be an early
If the vehicle came with a jack and
spare tire, see If a Tire Goes Flat on
page 10‑77.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-25
The oil life system can also be reset
as follows:
Engine Oil Life System
Driving for Better Fuel
Economy
The engine oil life system calculates
engine oil life based on vehicle use
and displays the CHANGE ENGINE
OIL SOON message when it is time
to change the engine oil and filter.
The oil life system should be reset
to 100% only following an oil
change.
1. Turn the ignition on with the
engine off.
Driving habits can affect fuel
mileage. Here are some driving
tips to get the best fuel economy
possible.
2. Fully press and release the
accelerator pedal three times
within five seconds.
.
Avoid fast starts and accelerate
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
SOON message is not on, the
system is reset.
smoothly.
.
Brake gradually and avoid
Resetting the Oil Life System
abrupt stops.
1. Using the DIC MENU button and
thumbwheel on the turn signal
lever, display REMAINING OIL
LIFE on the DIC. See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 5‑28 and Engine Oil
See Engine Oil Life System on
page 10‑14.
.
Avoid idling the engine for long
periods of time.
.
When road and weather
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)
conditions are appropriate,
use cruise control.
Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge
and a yellow fuel cap can use either
unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel
containing up to 85% ethanol (E85).
See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on
page 9‑50. For all other vehicles,
use only the unleaded gasoline
described under Recommended
Fuel on page 9‑47.
Messages on page 5‑35.
.
Always follow posted speed
2. Press the SET button to reset
the oil life at 100%.
limits or drive more slowly when
conditions require.
.
Be careful not to reset the oil
life display accidentally at any
time other than after the oil is
changed. It cannot be reset
accurately until the next oil
change.
Keep vehicle tires properly
inflated.
.
Combine several trips into a
single trip.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-26
In Brief
.
OnStar®
Replace the vehicle's tires with
the same TPC Spec number
molded into the tire's sidewall
near the size.
Roadside Service and OnStar
(U.S. and Canada)
If you have a current OnStar
subscription, press the Q button
and the current GPS location will
be sent to an OnStar advisor who
will assess your problem, contact
Roadside Service, and relay your
exact location to get the help
you need.
.
Follow recommended scheduled
maintenance.
Roadside Service
U.S. or Canada: 1-800-882-1112
For vehicles with an active OnStar
subscription, OnStar uses several
innovative technologies and live
Advisors to provide a wide range
of safety, security, navigation,
TTY Users (U.S. or Canada):
1-888-889-2438
Online Owner Center
(U.S. and Canada)
Mexico: 01-800-466-0805
The Online Owner Center is a
complimentary service that includes
online service reminders, vehicle
maintenance tips, online owner
manual, special privileges,
and more.
diagnostics, and calling services.
As the owner of a new Cadillac, you
are automatically enrolled in the
Roadside Service program.
Automatic Crash Response
In a crash, built‐in sensors can
automatically alert an OnStar
Advisor who is immediately
connected to the vehicle to see
if you need help.
For more information see Roadside
Service (U.S. and Canada) on
page 13‑8 or Roadside Service
(Mexico) on page 13‑10.
Sign up today at:
www.cadillacownercenter.com
(U.S.) or www.gm.ca (Canada).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-27
OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1‐888‐466‐7827) or TTY
network capacity, reception, and
technology compatible with OnStar's
service. Service involving location
information about your vehicle can’t
work unless GPS signals are
available, unobstructed, and
compatible with the OnStar
hardware. The vehicle has to have
a working electrical system and
adequate battery power for the
OnStar equipment to operate.
How OnStar Service Works
Q : Push this blue button to
connect to a specially trained
OnStar Advisor to verify your
account information and to answer
questions.
1‐877‐248‐2080; or push the Q
button to speak with an OnStar
Advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days
a week.
For a full description of OnStar
services and system limitations, see
the OnStar Owner's Guide in the
glove box.
] : Push this red emergency
button to get priority help from
specially trained OnStar Emergency
Advisors.
OnStar service may not work if the
OnStar equipment isn’t properly
installed or you haven’t maintained
it and your vehicle is in good
OnStar service is subject to the
OnStar Terms and Conditions
included in the OnStar Glove
Box Kit.
X : Push this button for hands‐free,
voice‐activated calling and to give
voice commands for Hands‐Free
Calling and Turn‐by‐Turn
working order and in compliance
with all government regulations.
If you try to add, connect, or modify
any equipment or software in your
vehicle, OnStar service may not
work. Other problems OnStar can’t
control may prevent service to you,
such as hills, tall buildings, tunnels,
weather, electrical system design
and architecture of your vehicle,
damage to important parts of your
vehicle in a crash, or wireless phone
network congestion or jamming.
Navigation.
OnStar service requires wireless
communication networks and the
Global Positioning System (GPS)
satellite network. Not all OnStar
services are available everywhere
or on all vehicles at all times.
Automatic Crash Response,
Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,
Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle
Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,
Roadside Assistance, Turn‐by‐Turn
Navigation, and Hands‐Free Calling
are available on most vehicles.
Not all OnStar services are
available on all vehicles. For more
information, see the OnStar Owner's
Guide; visit www.onstar.com (U.S.)
or www.onstar.ca (Canada); contact
OnStar service can’t work unless
your vehicle is in a place where
OnStar has an agreement with a
wireless service provider for service
in that area, and the wireless
service provider has coverage,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-28
In Brief
See Radio Frequency
Your Responsibility
Statement on page 13‑20 for
information regarding Part 15
of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and
Industry Canada Standards
RSS-210/220/310.
Increase the volume of the radio
if the OnStar Advisor cannot be
heard.
If the light next to the OnStar
buttons is red, the system may
not be functioning properly. Push
OnStar Steering Wheel
Controls
the Q button and request a vehicle
diagnostic. If the light appears clear
(no light appears), your OnStar
subscription has expired and all
services have been deactivated.
This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute
button that can be used to interact
with OnStar Hands-Free calling.
See Steering Wheel Controls on
page 5‑2 for more information.
Push the Q button to confirm that
the OnStar equipment is active.
On some vehicles, the mute button
can be used to dial numbers into
voice mail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner's
Guide for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
Interior Mirrors
2-1
Vehicle Security
Keys, Doors and
Windows
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . 2-19
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-20
Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-23
Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Windows
Keys and Locks
Exterior Mirrors
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . 2-10
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . 2-23
Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Roof
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Doors
Liftgate (Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Liftgate (Power) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-2
Keys, Doors and Windows
Keys and Locks
Keys
WARNING
{
Leaving children in a vehicle with
the keyless access transmitter is
dangerous for many reasons,
children or others could be badly
injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the
vehicle move. The windows will
function with the keyless access
transmitter in the vehicle and they
could be seriously injured or killed
if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave the keyless
access transmitter in a vehicle
with children.
This key, located inside the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter,
is used for the driver door and
glove box.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-3
Notice: If the keys get locked in
If there is a decrease in the RKE
operating range:
the vehicle, it may have to be
damaged to get them out. Always
carry a spare key.
.
Check the distance.
The transmitter may be
too far from the vehicle.
Contact Roadside Service if
you are locked out of the vehicle.
See Roadside Service (U.S. and
Canada) on page 13‑8 or Roadside
Service (Mexico) on page 13‑10.
.
Check the location. Other
vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
.
Check the transmitter's battery.
See “Battery Replacement” later
in this section.
Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System
.
To remove the key, press the button
near the bottom of the transmitter,
and pull the key out. Never pull the
key out without pressing the button.
If the transmitter is still not
working correctly, see your
dealer or a qualified technician
for service.
See Radio Frequency
Statement on page 13‑20 for
information regarding Part 15
of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and
Industry Canada Standards
RSS-210/220/310.
See your dealer if a new key is
needed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-4
Keys, Doors and Windows
Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter functions will work up to
60 m (195 ft) away from the vehicle.
Q (Lock): Press to lock all doors.
The turn signal indicators may
flash and/or the horn may sound
to indicate locking, see “Locking
Feedback” under Vehicle
K (Unlock): Press to unlock
the driver door or all doors, see
“Door Unlock Options” under
Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑40. When remotely
Personalization on page 5‑40.
unlocking the vehicle at night the
fog lamps and reverse lamps will
come on for about 20 seconds to
light your approach to the vehicle.
The turn signal indicators may
flash and/or the horn may sound
to indicate unlocking. See “Unlock
Feedback” under Vehicle
Keep in mind that other conditions,
such as those previously stated,
can impact the performance of the
transmitter.
If the driver door is open when Q is
pressed, all doors lock except the
driver door, if enabled through
the vehicle personalization. If the
passenger door is open when Q is
pressed, all doors lock.
Personalization on page 5‑40.
Pressing Q may also arm
the theft-deterrent system.
See Anti-Theft Alarm System on
page 2‑19.
Memory seat positions may be
recalled when unlocking the vehicle.
See “Memory Remote Recall”
under Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑40 for more information.
With Remote Start and Power
Liftgate Shown, Without Similar
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-5
Keyless Locking
Keyless Access Operation
Pressing K will disarm
the theft-deterrent system.
See Anti-Theft Alarm System on
page 2‑19.
If the vehicle has the keyless
access system, this feature
allows you to select whether the
doors automatically lock during
Some vehicles have the keyless
access system that lets you lock
and unlock the doors and access
the liftgate without removing the
remote transmitter from your pocket,
purse, briefcase, etc. The keyless
entry transmitter must be within 1 m
(3 ft) of the door being opened.
If the vehicle has this feature, there
will be a body colored touch pad on
the outside front door handles.
/ (Remote Start): For vehicles
with this feature, press Q and
then press and hold / within
two seconds to start the engine
from outside the vehicle using the
RKE transmitter. See Remote
Vehicle Start on page 2‑10 for
additional information.
normal vehicle exit. When the
vehicle is turned off and all doors
become closed, the vehicle will
determine how many keyless
access transmitters remain in the
vehicle interior. If at least one
keyless access transmitter has
been removed from the interior
of the vehicle, the doors will lock
after eight seconds.
Keyless Unlocking
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic
Alarm): Press and release
one time to locate the vehicle.
The exterior lamps flash and the
With the transmitter within 1 m (3 ft),
approach the front door and pull
the handle. If the transmitter is
recognized, the door will unlock
and open.
If there are two keyless access
transmitters in the vehicle and
one is removed, the other will be
locked in. A person approaching
the outside of the locked vehicle
without an authorized keyless
access transmitter will not be able
to open the door, even with the
transmitter in the vehicle.
horn chirps. Press and hold L for
three seconds to sound the panic
alarm. The horn sounds and
Entering any door other than the
driver door will always cause all
of the doors to unlock. This is not
customizable.
the turn signal lamps flash for
30 seconds, or until L is pressed
again or the vehicle is started.
To customize which doors unlock
when the driver’s door is opened,
see “Passive Unlock” under Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑40.
& (Remote Liftgate Release):
Press until the liftgate begins to
move to open or close the power
liftgate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-6
Keys, Doors and Windows
You may temporarily disable the
keyless locking feature by pressing
and holding the power door unlock
button on the instrument panel for
several seconds with a door open.
Keyless locking will then remain
disabled until the door lock switch
is pressed, or until the vehicle is
turned on.
Lock Sensor
Keyless Liftgate Opening
Press the touch pad on the liftgate
handle to open the liftgate if the
keyless entry transmitter is within
range.
Programming Transmitters to
the Vehicle
Only keyless entry transmitters
programmed to the vehicle will
work. If a transmitter is lost or
stolen, a replacement can be
purchased and programmed
through your dealer. The vehicle
can be reprogrammed so that lost
or stolen transmitters no longer
work. Each vehicle can have up to
eight transmitters matched to it.
To customize whether the doors
automatically lock when you exit
the vehicle, see “Passive Locking”
under Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑40.
When all doors are closed and the
ignition is off, the vehicle can be
locked by pressing this area on the
door handle. This feature will be
available for several minutes after
the vehicle has been turned off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-7
Programming with a Recognized
Transmitter (Keyless Access
Vehicles Only)
4. Press the ignition. When the
transmitter is learned the DIC
display will show that it is ready
to program the next transmitter.
A new transmitter can be
programmed to the vehicle when
there is one recognized transmitter.
5. Remove the transmitter from
the transmitter pocket and
press K on the transmitter.
To program, the vehicle must be
off and all of the transmitters, both
currently recognized and new, must
be with you.
To program additional
transmitters, repeat Steps 3
through 5.
1. Place the recognized
When all additional transmitters
are programmed, press and hold
the ignition for 10 seconds to
exit programming mode.
transmitter(s) in the cupholder.
3. Place the new transmitter
into the transmitter pocket.
The transmitter pocket is inside
the center console storage
area located between the driver
and front passenger seats.
The storage area will need
to be opened and the storage
tray lifted up to access the
transmitter pocket.
2. Insert the vehicle key of the
new transmitter into the key lock
cylinder located on the outside
of the driver door and turn the
key to the unlock position five
times within ten seconds.
The Driver Information
Center (DIC) displays READY
TO LEARN ELECTRONIC
KEY #2, 3, 4, ETC.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-8
Keys, Doors and Windows
Programming without a
Recognized Transmitter
(Keyless Access Vehicles Only)
2. Wait for ten minutes until the
DIC displays PRESS ENGINE
START BUTTON TO LEARN
and then press the ignition.
If there are no currently recognized
transmitters available, follow this
procedure to program up to eight
transmitters. This feature is not
available in Canada. This procedure
will take approximately 30 minutes
to complete. The vehicle must be off
and all of the transmitters you wish
to program must be with you.
The DIC displays will again
show REMOTE LEARN
PENDING, PLEASE WAIT.
3. Repeat Step 2 two additional
times. After the third time all
previously known transmitters
will no longer work with the
vehicle. Remaining transmitters
can be relearned during the next
steps.
4. Place the new transmitter
into the transmitter pocket.
The transmitter pocket is inside
the center console storage
area located between the driver
and front passenger seats.
The storage area will need
to be opened and the storage
tray lifted up to access the
transmitter pocket.
1. Insert the vehicle key of the
transmitter into the key lock
cylinder located on the outside
of the driver door and turn the
key to the unlock position five
times within ten seconds.
The DIC display should
now show READY FOR
REMOTE # 1.
The Driver Information Center
(DIC) displays REMOTE LEARN
PENDING, PLEASE WAIT.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
Battery Replacement
2-9
5. Press the ignition. When the
transmitter is learned the DIC
display will show that it is ready
to program the next transmitter.
To start the vehicle:
1. Open the center console storage
area and the storage tray.
Notice: When replacing the
battery, do not touch any of the
circuitry on the transmitter. Static
from your body could damage the
transmitter.
6. Remove the transmitter from
the transmitter pocket and
press K on the transmitter.
Replace the battery if the REPLACE
BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
message displays in the DIC.
To program additional
transmitters, repeat Steps 4
through 6.
1. Press the button near the bottom
of the transmitter and pull the
key out.
When all additional transmitters
are programmed, press and hold
the ignition for 10 seconds to
exit programming mode.
Starting the Vehicle with a Low
Transmitter Battery
2. Place the transmitter in the
transmitter pocket.
If the transmitter battery is weak,
the DIC may display NO REMOTE
DETECTED when you try to
start the vehicle. The REPLACE
BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
message may also be displayed
at this time.
3. With the vehicle in P (Park) or
N (Neutral), press the brake
pedal and the START button.
Replace the transmitter battery
as soon as possible.
2. Use the key blade to separate
the two halves of the transmitter.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-10
Keys, Doors and Windows
3. Remove the old battery. Do not
use a metal object.
mode depending on the outside
temperature during a remote start.
When the ON/RUN/START ignition
mode is selected , the climate
control system will return to its
setting from when the vehicle
was last turned off.
Starting the Engine Using Remote
Start
4. Insert the new battery, positive
side facing down. Replace with a
CR2032 or equivalent battery.
To start the engine using the remote
start feature:
1. Press Q on the RKE transmitter.
2. Within two seconds, press and
5. Snap the transmitter back
together.
Laws in some local communities
may restrict the use of remote
starters. For example, some laws
may require a person using remote
start to have the vehicle in view.
Check local regulations for any
requirements.
hold / until the turn signal
lamps flash. This confirms
the request to remote start the
vehicle has been received. If the
vehicle' s lamps are not visible,
Remote Vehicle Start
If available, this feature allows you
to start the engine from outside the
vehicle.
press and hold / for at least
two seconds.
/ (Remote Vehicle Start):
This button will be on the RKE
transmitter if the vehicle has
remote start.
There are other conditions which
can affect the performance of the
transmitter, see Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 2‑3
for additional information.
During the remote start the
vehicle's doors will be locked
and the parking lamps will
remain on as long as the engine
is running.
Vehicles with an automatic climate
control system will automatically
change to a heating or cooling
3. Press the brake pedal and select
the ON/RUN/START ignition
mode to drive the vehicle.
The engine will shut off after
10 minutes unless a time
extension is done or the ignition
is put in ON/RUN/START.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-11
.
The hazard warning flashers
are on.
Extending Engine Run Time
Shutting the Engine Off After a
Remote Start
For a 10 minute extension, repeat
Steps 1 and 2 while the engine is
still running. The remote start can
only be extended once.
.
.
There is an emission control
system malfunction.
To cancel a remote start:
.
Press / until the parking lamps
The engine coolant temperature
is too high.
turn off.
When the remote start is extended,
the second 10 minute period will
start immediately.
.
Turn on the hazard warning
.
.
The oil pressure is low.
flashers.
Two remote vehicle starts have
already been used.
.
Turn the vehicle on and then
For example, if the vehicle has
been running for five minutes, and
10 minutes are added, the engine
will run for a total of 15 minutes.
back off.
.
The vehicle is not in P (Park).
Conditions in Which Remote Start
Will Not Work
A maximum of two remote starts,
or a remote start with an extension,
are allowed between ignition cycles.
The remote start will not operate if:
.
The ignition is in any mode other
than OFF.
The vehicle's ignition must be
.
The transmitter is in the vehicle.
changed to ON/RUN/START and
then back to OFF before the remote
start procedure can be used again.
.
The hood is not closed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-12
Keys, Doors and Windows
Door Locks
Power Door Locks
WARNING (Continued)
WARNING
{
.
Young children who get into
unlocked vehicles may be
unable to get out. A child can
be overcome by extreme heat
and can suffer permanent
injuries or even death from
heat stroke. Always lock the
vehicle whenever leaving it.
Unlocked doors can be
dangerous.
.
Passengers, especially
children, can easily open the
doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. The chance of being
thrown out of the vehicle in
a crash is increased if the
doors are not locked. So,
all passengers should wear
safety belts properly and
the doors should be locked
whenever the vehicle is
driven.
.
Outsiders can easily enter
through an unlocked door
when slowing or stopping
the vehicle. Lock the doors
to help prevent this from
happening.
The power door lock switches are
on the instrument panel.
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the
doors.
(Continued)
To lock or unlock a door, use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter from the outside.
Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors.
From inside the vehicle with the
doors locked, pull once on the door
handle to unlock it, and a second
time to open it.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
Safety Locks
When this feature is enabled and
the doors are locked with the power
lock switch on the instrument panel,
three chimes sound to signal that
the delayed locking feature is in
use. All doors lock five seconds
after the last door is closed.
2-13
Lockout Deterrent
Delayed Locking
Lockout deterrent decreases the
chances that the keys may be
accidentally locked in the vehicle.
When door locking is requested
by pressing Q on the instrument
panel or Q on the keyless access
transmitter and the driver door is
open, all doors will lock and the
driver door will immediately unlock.
The driver door must be closed
When the delayed locking
feature is in use, pressing Q on
the instrument panel or Q on the
keyless access transmitter will
override the feature and lock all
doors immediately.
when Q is pressed for all doors
to remain locked.
Rear door security locks prevent
This feature can be programmed
to provide the lockout deterrent
feature only when the ignition
mode is ACC/ACCESSORY, or
ON/RUN/START. See “Power Door
Locks” in Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑40.
passengers from opening the rear
doors from the inside.
This feature can be programmed by
using the Driver Information Center
(DIC). See “Delayed Door Lock”
in Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑40. The delayed locking
feature is only available if “Unlocked
Door Anti-Lockout” is disabled.
Press the { to activate the safety
locks. Once activated, the LED light
in the switch illuminates.
Pressing the button again
deactivates the safety locks.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-14
Keys, Doors and Windows
Notice: If you open the liftgate
without checking for overhead
obstructions such as a garage
door, you could damage the
liftgate or the liftgate glass.
Always check to make sure
the area above and behind the
liftgate is clear before opening it.
Doors
WARNING (Continued)
Liftgate (Manual)
If the vehicle must be driven with
the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:
WARNING
{
.
Close all of the windows.
.
Exhaust gases can enter the
vehicle if it is driven with the
liftgate, trunk/hatch open,
or with any objects that pass
through the seal between the
body and the trunk/hatch or
liftgate. Engine exhaust contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which
cannot be seen or smelled. It can
cause unconsciousness and even
death.
Fully open the air outlets
on or under the instrument
panel.
For vehicles without keyless access,
unlock the vehicle before opening
the liftgate.
.
Adjust the Climate Control
system to a setting that
brings in only outside air
and set the fan speed to the
highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
Press the touchpad located in the
handle of the liftgate, above the
license plate, and lift up to open.
Do not press the touchpad while
closing the liftgate. This will cause
the liftgate to be unlatched.
.
If the vehicle is equipped with
a power liftgate, disable the
(Continued)
power liftgate function.
Always close the liftgate before
driving.
For more information about
carbon monoxide, see Engine
Exhaust on page 9‑24.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-15
Liftgate (Power)
WARNING (Continued)
Power Liftgate Operation
If the vehicle must be driven with
the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:
WARNING
{
.
Close all of the windows.
Exhaust gases can enter the
vehicle if it is driven with the
liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or
with any objects that pass
through the seal between the
body and the trunk/hatch or
liftgate. Engine exhaust contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which
cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness
and even death.
.
Fully open the air outlets
on or under the instrument
panel.
.
Adjust the Climate Control
system to a setting that
brings in only outside air
and set the fan speed to the
highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
On vehicles with a power liftgate,
the switch is on the driver door.
The vehicle must be in P (Park) to
.
If the vehicle is equipped with
a power liftgate, disable the
power liftgate function.
(Continued)
For more information about
carbon monoxide, see Engine
Exhaust on page 9‑24.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-16
Keys, Doors and Windows
use the power feature.
The taillamps flash when the
power liftgate moves.
Choose the power liftgate mode
by turning the dial on the switch
until the indicator lines up with
the desired position.
In either the MAX or the 3/4 mode,
the liftgate can be power opened
and closed by:
.
Pressing & on the Remote
WARNING
{
The three modes are:
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
until the liftgate starts moving.
See Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation on
page 2‑4.
MAX : The liftgate opens to the full
open height.
You or others could be injured if
caught in the path of the power
liftgate. Make sure there is no one
in the way of the liftgate as it is
opening and closing.
3/4 : The liftgate opens to a
reduced open height that can be set
by the vehicle operator in a range
of approximately 3/4 open to full
open. Use this setting to prevent the
liftgate from opening into overhead
obstructions such as a garage door
or roof mounted cargo during power
operation. The liftgate can still be
opened fully manually.
.
Pressing & on the center of
the mode switch on the driver
door, with the driver door
unlocked.
Notice: If you open the liftgate
without checking for overhead
obstructions such as a garage
door, you could damage the
liftgate or the liftgate glass.
Always check to make sure
the area above and behind the
liftgate is clear before opening it.
.
Pressing the touchpad switch on
the liftgate outside handle, with
all doors unlocked, to open the
liftgate.
OFF: The liftgate only operates
manually in this position.
Manual operation of a liftgate that
also has power operation requires
more effort than with a standard
manual liftgate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-17
Do not force the liftgate open or
closed during a power cycle.
Obstacle Detection Features
If the liftgate encounters an obstacle
during a power open or close
cycle, a warning chime will sound
and the liftgate will automatically
reverse direction to the full closed
or open position. After removing
the obstruction, the power liftgate
operation can be used again.
If the liftgate encounters multiple
obstacles on the same power cycle,
the power function will deactivate.
The Power Liftgate Unavailable
warning message in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) will
The power liftgate may be
temporarily disabled under
extreme temperatures or low
battery conditions. If this occurs,
the liftgate can still be operated
manually.
If you shift the transmission out of
P (Park) while the power function
is in progress, the liftgate power
function will continue to completion.
If you shift the transmission out of
P (Park) and accelerate before the
power liftgate latch is closed, the
liftgate may reverse to the open
position. Cargo could fall out of
the vehicle. Always make sure the
power liftgate is closed and latched
before you drive away.
Press and release & on the
liftgate adjacent to the latch to
close the liftgate.
display. After removing the
obstructions, the liftgate will
resume normal power operation.
Pressing any liftgate button, or the
touchpad switch while the liftgate
is moving, stops it. Pressing the
button or RKE switch again
reverses the direction. There is a
minimum distance that the power
liftgate must already be open for the
system to hold it open. If movement
is stopped below that minimum, the
liftgate closes.
The vehicle has pinch sensors
located on the side edges of the
liftgate. If an object is caught
between the liftgate and the body
and presses against this sensor,
the liftgate will reverse direction and
open fully. The liftgate will remain
open until it is activated again or
closed manually.
If you power open the liftgate and
the liftgate support struts have lost
pressure, the turn signals flash
and a chime sounds. The liftgate
stays open temporarily, then slowly
closes. See your dealer for service
before using the liftgate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-18
Keys, Doors and Windows
If you do not hear the audible and
visual feedback when setting the
intermediate stop position, you are
attempting to set the height below
the 3/4 open height minimum
(approximately 5 feet). The liftgate
cannot be set below that minimum
and the new setting will not be
recorded.
To open the liftgate, press the
touchpad on the handle on the
outside of the liftgate, and lift the
gate open. To close the liftgate,
use the pull cup to lower the liftgate
and close. With the power liftgate
disabled, the liftgate electric latch
will still power latch once contact is
made with the striker. Always close
the liftgate before driving.
Setting the Power Liftgate
3/4 Mode
To change the liftgate stop position:
1. Turn the liftgate switch to either
the MAX, or the 3/4 mode
position and power open the
liftgate.
2. Stop the liftgate movement at
the desired height by pressing
any liftgate switch. Manually
adjust the liftgate position if
required.
Manual Operation of Power
Liftgate
If the RKE button is pressed while
power operation is disabled, the turn
signals flash and the liftgate will
not move.
To change the liftgate to manual
operation, turn the mode switch to
the OFF position.
3. Press and hold the button on the
liftgate adjacent to the latch until
the turn signals flash and a beep
sounds to indicate that the new
setting is recorded.
The liftgate has an electric latch.
If the battery is disconnected or
has low voltage, the liftgate will
not open. The liftgate will resume
operation when the battery is
reconnected and charged.
With the power liftgate disabled
and all of the doors unlocked, the
liftgate can be manually opened
and closed. Manual efforts of a
vehicle equipped with a power
liftgate will be higher than a
When power opened with the
3/4 mode selected, the liftgate
stops at the new set position.
standard non-power liftgate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-19
If a door, the hood, or liftgate is
Arming the System
Vehicle Security
This vehicle has theft-deterrent
features; however, they do not make
it impossible to steal.
opened without first unlocking with
the transmitter, the vehicle’s turn
signals will flash and the horn
will sound for about 30 seconds.
The alarm system will then re-arm
to monitor for the next unauthorized
event.
To arm the system,
1. Close all doors, liftgate
and hood.
2. Lock the vehicle using the
transmitter, or the power door
lock button. The LED on the
instrument panel should come
on and stay on for about
30 seconds.
Anti-Theft Alarm System
This vehicle has an anti-theft alarm
system.
The theft-deterrent alarm system will
not activate if the doors are locked
with the vehicle's key. You can
start the vehicle with a recognized
transmitter in the vehicle if the alarm
has been set off.
The LED light, located on
the instrument panel near the
windshield, indicates the status
of the system.
3. After 30 seconds, the alarm
system will arm, and the
LED will begin to slowly flash
indicating the alarm is operating.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-20
Keys, Doors and Windows
Disarming the System
How to Detect a Tamper
Condition
Immobilizer Operation
This vehicle has a passive
theft-deterrent system.
To disarm the system, either
unlock the doors using the
transmitter, or start the vehicle
with a recognized transmitter in
the vehicle.
If K is pressed and the horn chirps
three times, an attempted break-in
has occurred while the system was
armed.
The system does not have to be
manually armed or disarmed.
The vehicle is automatically
immobilized when the vehicle
is turned off.
To avoid setting off the alarm by
accident:
If the alarm has been activated,
the “Theft Attempted” message will
appear on the DIC. See Key and
Lock Messages on page 5‑36 for
additional information.
.
Lock the vehicle with the
The immobilization system is
disarmed when the pushbutton
start is activated to enter the
ACC/ACCESSORY mode or the
ON/RUN/START mode and a valid
transmitter is present in the vehicle.
transmitter after all occupants
have left the vehicle and all
doors are closed.
Immobilizer
See Radio Frequency
Statement on page 13‑20 for
information regarding Part 15
of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and
Industry Canada Standards
RSS-210/220/310.
.
Always unlock a door with the
transmitter. Unlocking a door any
other way will not disarm the
alarm.
If you set off the alarm by accident,
turn off the alarm by pressing the
unlock button on the transmitter.
The alarm will not stop if you try
to unlock a door any other way.
The security light, located in the
instrument panel cluster, comes on
if there is a problem with arming
or disarming the theft-deterrent
system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-21
The system has one or more
keyless entry transmitters that are
matched to an immobilizer control
unit in your vehicle. Only a correctly
matched keyless entry transmitter
will start the vehicle. If the keyless
entry transmitter is ever damaged,
you may not be able to start your
vehicle.
If the ignition modes will not
Exterior Mirrors
change with the other transmitter,
your vehicle needs service. If the
ignition does change modes, the
first transmitter may be faulty.
See your dealer who can service
the theft-deterrent system and have
a new keyless entry transmitter
programmed to the vehicle.
Convex Mirrors
WARNING
{
A convex mirror can make things,
like other vehicles, look farther
away than they really are. If you
cut too sharply into the right lane,
you could hit a vehicle on the
right. Check the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
When trying to start the vehicle, the
security light comes on briefly when
the ignition is turned on.
It is possible for the immobilizer
system to learn new or replacement
keyless entry transmitters. Up to
eight keyless entry transmitters
can be programmed for the vehicle.
To program additional transmitters,
see “Programming Transmitters
to the Vehicle” Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System Operation on
page 2‑4.
If the engine does not start and
the security light stays on there is a
problem with the system. Turn the
ignition off and try again.
The passenger side mirror is convex
shaped. A convex mirror's surface is
curved so more can be seen from
the driver seat.
If the vehicle will not change
ignition modes (ACC/ACCESSORY,
ON/RUN/START, OFF), and the
keyless entry transmitter appears to
be undamaged, try another keyless
entry transmitter. Or, you may
try placing the transmitter in the
transmitter pocket located in the
center console. See “No Remote
Detected” under Key and Lock
Messages on page 5‑36.
Do not leave the key or device that
disarms or deactivates the theft
deterrent system in the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-22
Keys, Doors and Windows
To fold the mirrors:
Power Mirrors
Folding Mirrors
1. With the selector switch in the
O position, press the down
Manual Foldaway Mirrors
Vehicles with manual fold mirrors
are folded inward toward the vehicle
to prevent damage when going
through an automatic car wash.
Push the mirror outward to return
it to the original position.
arrow on the control pad. Both
mirrors will automatically fold.
2. Press the down arrow on the
control pad again to return the
mirrors to their original position.
Resetting the Power Foldaway
Mirrors
Power Foldaway Mirrors
Reset the power foldaway mirrors if:
.
The mirrors are accidentally
obstructed while folding.
Controls for the outside power
mirrors are located on the
driver door.
.
They are accidentally manually
folded/unfolded.
.
The mirrors do not stay in the
To adjust the mirror:
unfolded position.
1. Move the selector switch to
L (left) or R (right) to choose the
driver or passenger mirror.
.
The mirrors vibrate at normal
driving speeds.
Fold and unfold the mirrors one time
using the mirror controls to reset
them to their normal position.
2. Press the arrows on the control
pad to move each mirror in the
desired direction.
Vehicles with power folding mirrors
have controls on the driver door.
3. Return the selector switch to the
center position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-23
A noise may be heard during the
resetting of the power foldaway
mirrors. This sound is normal after a
manual folding operation.
Reverse Tilt Mirrors
Interior Mirrors
If the vehicle is equipped with
memory seats, there is an option to
have the mirrors tilt down, when in
R (Reverse), to more easily see the
ground near the vehicle.
Manual Rearview Mirror
Adjust the inside rearview mirror
for a clear view of the area behind
your vehicle. To avoid glare of the
headlamps from behind, push the
tab forward for daytime and pull it
for nighttime use.
Vehicles with OnStar® have three
additional control buttons located at
the bottom of the mirror. See your
dealer for more information about
OnStar and how to subscribe to it.
See the OnStar Owner's Guide for
more information about the services
OnStar provides.
Heated Mirrors
< (Rear Window Defogger):
When the vehicle is shifted to
R (Reverse), both the driver and
passenger mirrors will tilt downward.
They will return to their previous
position when the vehicle is shifted
out of R (Reverse), the ignition is
turned to OFF, or the vehicle is left
in R (Reverse).
Press to heat the mirrors.
See “Rear Window Defogger” under
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System on page 8‑1 for more
information.
Automatic Dimming
Mirror
If the vehicle has the automatic
dimming mirror, the driver outside
mirror automatically adjusts for the
glare of headlamps behind you.
This feature can be turned on or
off. See Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑40.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-24
Keys, Doors and Windows
Automatic Dimming
Rearview Mirror
Windows
WARNING
{
The vehicle may have an automatic
dimming inside rearview mirror.
Automatic dimming reduces the
glare from the headlamps of the
vehicle behind you. The dimming
feature and the indicator light come
on each time the vehicle is started.
Vehicles with OnStar® have three
additional control buttons located at
the bottom of the mirror. See your
dealer for more information about
OnStar and how to subscribe to it.
See the OnStar Owner's Guide for
more information about the services
OnStar provides.
Leaving children, helpless adults,
or pets in a vehicle with the
windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by
the extreme heat and suffer
permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a
child, a helpless adult, or a pet
alone in a vehicle, especially with
the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
The vehicle aerodynamics are
designed to improve fuel economy
performance. This may result in a
pulsing sound when either rear
window is down and the front
windows are up. To reduce the
sound, open either a front window
or the sunroof (if equipped).
Cleaning the Mirror
Do not spray glass cleaner directly
on the mirror. Use a soft towel
dampened with water.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-25
The power windows:
Power Windows
.
Can be operated with the
ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY
or ON/RUN/START.
WARNING
{
Leaving children in a vehicle with
the keyless access transmitter is
dangerous for many reasons,
children or others could be badly
injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the
vehicle move. The windows will
function with the keyless access
transmitter in the vehicle and they
could be seriously injured or killed
if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave the keyless
access transmitter in a vehicle
with children.
.
.
Can be operated within
10 minutes of switching the
ignition off. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 9‑22.
Will stop operation when any
door is opened.
Driver Side Shown
Operate the switch for the desired
window by pressing to open and
pulling to close.
The power window controls are on
each of the side doors.
Pushing or pulling the switch part
of the way will open or close the
window as long as the switch is
operated.
The driver door also has switches
that control the passenger and rear
windows.
When there are children in the
rear seat use the window lockout
button to prevent unintentional
operation of the windows.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-26
Keys, Doors and Windows
Express‐Down/Up Windows
Programming the Power
Windows
Obstacle Detection Feature
Windows that have the
express‐down/up feature
The Obstacle Detection Feature is
part of the express-up feature and is
active:
Programming the power windows
may be necessary if the vehicle's
battery has been disconnected or
discharged.
allow the windows to be lowered
and raised fully without holding
the window switch. Press the
window switch fully and release it to
activate the express‐down feature.
Pull the window switch fully up and
release it to activate the express‐up
feature. The express mode can be
canceled at any time by briefly
pressing, or pulling the switch.
1. In the middle and upper portions
of the window opening.
If the window will not express up
after power has been restored and
a message is displayed in the Driver
Information Center:
2. During window up movements.
3. In ignition OFF during all window
up movements and during
express-up window movements
in ignition ON/RUN/START.
1. Close all doors
2. Place the ignition in
ACC/ACCESSORY or
ON/RUN/START.
If there is something blocking the
window during automatic closing,
the window will reverse direction
for a short distance. Weather
conditions such as extreme cold
and/or ice may cause the window to
auto-reverse. The window will return
to normal operation once the object
or condition is removed.
3. From any partial open position,
close the window and continue
to pull the switch briefly after the
window has fully closed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
Sun Visors
2-27
If conditions prevent the window
from closing and the window
continues to auto-reverse, it is
possible to close the window with
the ignition in ON/RUN/START by
holding the window switch in the
partially or fully pulled up position.
Release of the switch from the
partially pulled up position will
cause the window to stop. Release
of the switch from the fully pulled up
position will activate the express-up
and related obstacle detection
features.
Window Lockout
Overload
Pull the sun visor down to block
glare. Detach the sun visor from
the center mount to pivot to the side
window, or to extend along the rod if
available.
o (Window Lockout): The window
lockout switch is on the driver door.
This feature prevents the rear
passenger windows from operating,
except from the driver position.
Press the switch to turn the lockout
feature on or off. An indicator light
shows the feature is on.
If the windows are repeatedly
operated within a short time, the
window operation is disabled for a
short time.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-28
Keys, Doors and Windows
Press the back of the sunroof switch
to the first detent and hold, to open
the sunroof to a desired position at
a normal speed. Press the rear of
the switch to the second detent
and release, to express open the
sunroof to an automatically adjusted
comfort position. Press the rear of
the switch to the second detent and
release again, to open the sunroof
to the full open position. Press the
front of the switch to second detent
and release, to express close the
sunroof.
Roof
Sunroof
On vehicles with a sunroof, the
switches are on the overhead
console.
The sunroof only operates when
the ignition is in ON/RUN/START
or ACC/ACCESSORY, or in
Retained Accessory Power (RAP).
See Ignition Positions on page 9‑18
and Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 9‑22.
A. Sunroof Switch
B. Sunshade Switch
Press the front of the sunroof switch
to the first detent and hold, to close
the sunroof to a desired position at
a normal speed. Press the front of
the switch to the second detent
and release, to express close the
sunroof.
To open the sunroof, press the back
of the sunroof switch (A) to the first
detent and release, the sunroof will
open to the vent position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-29
To open or close the sunshade,
press the open or close sunroof
switch (B).
Press the front or back of the
sunshade switch to the first detent
and hold, to open or close the
sunshade to a desired position at
a normal speed. Press the switch
to the second detent and release,
to express open or close the
sunshade.
Fully close the glass before fully
closing the sunshade.
Dirt and debris may collect on
the sunroof seal or in the track.
This could cause an issue
Anti-Pinch Feature
with sunroof operation, noise,
or plugging the water drainage
system. Periodically open the
sunroof and remove any obstacles
or loose debris. Wipe the sunroof
seal and roof sealing area using a
clean cloth, mild soap, and water.
Do not remove grease from the
sunroof.
If an object is in the path of the
sunroof when it is closing, the
anti-pinch feature detects the
object and stops the sunroof
from closing at the point of the
obstruction. The sunroof then
returns to the full-open position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-30
Keys, Doors and Windows
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
Airbag System
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-33
When Should an Airbag
3-1
Rear Seats
Seats and
Restraints
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Heated Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Rear Seat
Pass-Through Door . . . . . . . . 3-14
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
What Makes an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
How Does an Airbag
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Passenger Sensing
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-44
Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-46
Replacing Airbag System
Head Restraints
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Safety Belts
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
How to Wear Safety Belts
Front Seats
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Safety Belt Use During
Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-29
Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Replacing Safety Belt System
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-4
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Thigh Support Adjustment . . . . 3-8
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Heated and Ventilated Front
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-2
Seats and Restraints
Child Restraints
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Infants and Young
Head Restraints
Front Seats
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-51
Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-53
Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children (LATCH
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
Replacing LATCH System
The vehicle's front seats have
adjustable head restraints in all
outboard seating positions.
WARNING
{
With head restraints that are
not installed and adjusted
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-64
Securing Child Restraints
properly, there is a greater
chance that occupants will suffer
a neck/spinal injury in a crash.
Do not drive until the head
restraints for all occupants are
installed and adjusted properly.
(Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
Securing Child Restraints
(Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 3-66
Adjust the head restraint so that the
top of the restraint is at the same
height as the top of the occupant's
head. This position reduces the
chance of a neck injury in a crash.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-3
Rear Seats
The rear seats have adjustable
head restraints in the outboard
seating positions.
1. To raise or lower the head
restraint, press the release
button while pulling up or
pushing down on the head
restraint.
The center seating position has
an integrated headrest that can be
adjusted the same way as the head
restraints.
If you are installing a child restraint
in the rear seat, see “Securing a
Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System” under Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) on page 3‑56.
2. Release the button then pull
up or push down on the head
restraint to make sure it is
locked in place.
1. Pull the head restraint up to
raise it.
2. To lower the head restraint,
press the release button while
pushing the head restraint down.
The front head restraints are
designed not to be removed.
3. Release the button.
4. Push down on the head restraint
to make sure it is locked in
place.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-4
Seats and Restraints
Power Seat Adjustment
Front Seats
WARNING (Continued)
Seat Adjustment
movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push
a pedal when you do not want to.
Adjust the driver seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
To adjust a manual seat:
1. Pull the handle at the front of the
seat cushion.
2. Move the seat forward or
rearward to adjust the seat
position.
To adjust a power seat, if equipped:
.
Move the seat forward or
3. Release the handle to stop the
seat from moving.
rearward by sliding the control
forward or rearward.
WARNING
{
4. Try to move the seat back and
forth to be sure it is locked in
place.
.
You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a
manual driver seat while the
vehicle is moving. The sudden
Raise or lower the front or rear
part of the seat cushion by
moving the front or rear of the
control up or down.
.
(Continued)
Raise or lower the seat by
moving the control up or down.
To adjust the seatback, see
Reclining Seatbacks on page 3‑8.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-5
To adjust the lumbar support, see
Lumbar Adjustment on page 3‑7.
The vehicle will also automatically
save driver seat, outside mirror,
and adjustable throttle and brake
pedal positions to the current
driver Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter when the ignition is
turned off. These automatically
stored positions are referred
to as RKE Memory positions.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 2‑4 for
more information.
Recalling Button Memory
Positions
To recall the manually saved
Button Memory positions, press
Memory Seats
and hold “1” or “2.” The driver seat,
outside mirrors, and adjustable
pedals, if available, move to the
positions stored to those buttons
when pressed. Releasing “1” or “2”
before the stored positions are
reached stops the recall.
If something has blocked the
Storing Button Memory Positions
driver seat and/or the adjustable
pedals, if available, while recalling
a memory position, the recall may
stop. Remove the obstruction; then
press and hold the appropriate
manual control for the memory item
that is not recalling for two seconds.
Try recalling the memory position
again by pressing the appropriate
memory button. If the memory
position is still not recalling, see
your dealer for service.
To save positions into Button
Memory:
1. Adjust the driver seat,
seatback recliner, both outside
mirrors, and adjustable pedals,
if available, to the desired driving
positions.
On vehicles with the memory
feature, the “1” and “2” buttons on
the outboard side of the driver seat
are used to manually save and
recall the positions of the driver
seat, outside mirrors, and adjustable
throttle and brake pedal positions,
if available. These manually stored
positions are referred to as Button
Memory positions.
2. Press and release the
MEM (Memory) button.
3. Press “1” until a beep sounds.
4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for a
second driver using “2.”
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-6
Seats and Restraints
Recalling RKE Memory Positions
(Memory Remote Recall)
To automatically recall RKE
To stop recall movement, press
one of the memory, power mirror,
or power seat controls, or the
Memory positions, unlock the driver
door with the RKE transmitter, and
open the driver door. On vehicles
with Keyless Access, opening the
driver door when an RKE transmitter
is present will activate the RKE
Memory recall. If the driver door
is already open, pressing the
RKE transmitter K button will also
activate the RKE Memory recall.
The driver seat, outside mirrors,
and pedals, if available, will move to
the previously saved RKE Memory
positions.
The Memory Remote Recall feature
can recall the driver seat, outside
mirrors, and adjustable pedals,
if available, to previously stored
RKE Memory positions when
entering the vehicle.
adjustable pedal switch, if available.
If something has blocked the
driver seat and/or the adjustable
pedals, if available, while recalling
a memory position, the recall
may stop. Remove the obstruction;
then press and hold the appropriate
manual control for the memory item
that is not recalling for two seconds.
Try recalling the memory position
again by opening the driver door
and pressing the RKE transmitter
K button. If the memory position is
still not recalling, see your dealer
for service.
Every time the ignition is
placed in OFF, the positions
of the driver seat, outside mirrors,
and adjustable pedals, if available,
are automatically stored to the RKE
transmitter that was used to start
the vehicle. These positions are
called RKE Memory positions and
may be different than the previously
mentioned Button Memory positions
saved to the “1” or “2” buttons.
This feature is turned on or off using
the vehicle personalization menu.
See “Memory Remote Recall”
under Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑40 for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-7
Easy Exit Driver Seat
To stop recall movement, press one
of the memory, power seat controls,
or the adjustable pedal switch,
if available.
Lumbar Adjustment
This feature moves the seat
rearward allowing the driver more
room to exit the vehicle.
Power Lumbar
If something has blocked the driver
seat while recalling the exit position,
the recall may stop. Remove the
obstruction; then press and hold
the power seat control rearward for
two seconds. Try recalling the exit
position again. If the exit position is
still not recalling, see your dealer for
service.
To activate, place the ignition in
OFF and open the driver door. If the
driver door is already open, placing
the ignition in OFF will activate the
easy exit driver seat.
This feature is turned on or off
using the vehicle personalization
menu. See “Easy Exit Driver Seat”
under Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑40 for more information.
If available, press and hold the front
or rear of the control to increase or
decrease lumbar support. Release
the control when the seatback
reaches the desired level of lumbar
support.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-8
Seats and Restraints
Thigh Support
Adjustment
Reclining Seatbacks
WARNING (Continued)
WARNING
For proper protection when the
vehicle is in motion, have the
seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear the
safety belt properly.
{
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be
dangerous. Even when buckled
up, the safety belts cannot do
their job when reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its
job because it will not be against
your body. Instead, it will be in
front of you. In a crash, you could
go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
Adjust the manual leg extension by
pulling up on the lever, and then
pulling or pushing on the support to
lengthen or shorten it. Release the
lever to lock it in place.
The lap belt cannot do its job
either. In a crash, the belt
could go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there,
not at your pelvic bones. This
could cause serious internal
injuries.
Do not have a seatback reclined if
the vehicle is moving.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-9
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
Power Reclining Seatbacks
WARNING
{
You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a
manual driver seat while the
vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push
a pedal when you do not want to.
Adjust the driver seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
To recline a manual seatback:
1. Lift the lever.
2. Move the seatback to the
desired position, and then
release the lever to lock the
seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
To return the seatback to the upright
position:
1. Lift the lever fully without
applying pressure to the
seatback, and the seatback
will return to the upright position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
To adjust a power seatback,
if available:
WARNING
{
.
Tilt the top of the control
rearward to recline.
If either seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause
injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they are
locked.
.
Tilt the top of the control forward
to raise.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-10
Seats and Restraints
Press the button once for the
highest setting. With each press
of the button, the heated seat
will change to the next lower
setting, and then to the off setting.
The lights indicate three for the
highest setting and one for the
lowest.
Heated Front Seats
WARNING
{
If you cannot feel temperature
change or pain to the skin, the
seat heater may cause burns
even at low temperatures.
To reduce the risk of burns,
people with such a condition
should use care when using
the seat heater, especially for
long periods of time. Do not
place anything on the seat that
insulates against heat, such as
a blanket, cushion, cover or
similar item. This may cause
the seat heater to overheat.
An overheated seat heater may
cause a burn or may damage
the seat.
The passenger seat may take
longer to heat up.
Remote Start Heated Seats
When it is cold outside, the
heated seats can be turned on
automatically during a remote
vehicle start. The heated seats
will be canceled when the ignition
is turned on. Press the button to
use the heated seats after the
vehicle is started.
If available, the buttons are near the
climate controls on the instrument
panel. To operate, the ignition must
be in ON/RUN/START.
Press L or M to heat the driver
or passenger seat cushion and
seatback.
The heated seat indicator lights on
the button do not turn on during a
remote start.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-11
The temperature performance of an
unoccupied seat may be reduced.
This is normal.
The passenger seat may take
longer to heat up.
Remote Start Heated and
Ventilated Seats
The heated seats will not turn on
during a remote start unless the
heated seat feature is enabled in
the vehicle personalization menu.
See Remote Vehicle Start on
page 2‑10 and “Remote Start
Auto Heated Seats” under Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑40 for
more information.
During a remote start, the heated or
ventilated seats can be turned on
automatically. They are canceled
when the ignition is turned on.
Press the button to use the heated
or ventilated seats after the vehicle
is started.
The heated or ventilated seat
indicator lights on the button do
not turn on during a remote start.
If available, the buttons are near the
climate controls on the instrument
panel. To operate, the ignition must
be in ON/RUN/START.
Heated and Ventilated
Front Seats
The temperature performance of an
unoccupied seat may be reduced.
This is normal.
WARNING
Press M to heat the seat or { to
cool the seat.
{
If you cannot feel temperature
change or pain to the skin,
the seat heater may cause
burns even at low temperatures.
See the Warning under Heated
Front Seats on page 3‑10.
The heated or ventilated seats
Press the button once for the
highest setting. With each press of
the button, the seat will change to
the next lower setting, and then to
the off setting. The lights indicate
three for the highest setting and
one for the lowest.
will not turn on during a remote
start unless they are enabled in the
vehicle personalization menu. See
Remote Vehicle Start on page 2‑10
and “Remote Start Auto Heated
Seats” or “Remote Start Auto Seat
Cool” under Vehicle Personalization
on page 5‑40 for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-12
Seats and Restraints
Raising the Seatbacks
Rear Seats
Split Folding Seatbacks
WARNING
{
With this feature, either side of the
rear seatback can be folded down
for more cargo space.
If either seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause
injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they are
locked.
Folding the Seatbacks
Notice: Folding a rear seat with
the safety belts still fastened may
cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the
safety belts and return them to
their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
3. Lift the lever on the top of the
seatback. The rear seatback
lock indicator (A) extends when
the seatback is unlocked.
WARNING
{
A safety belt that is improperly
routed, not properly attached,
or twisted will not provide the
protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could
be seriously injured. After raising
the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts
are properly routed and attached,
and are not twisted.
To fold the seatback:
4. Fold the seatback forward.
The rear seatback lock
1. Unbuckle the rear safety
belts and move the front
seatbacks to the upright
position. See Reclining
Seatbacks on page 3‑8
for more information.
indicator (A) retracts when
the seatback is locked.
Keep the seatback in the upright,
locked position when not in use.
2. Make sure that there is nothing
under, in front of, or on the seat.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-13
To raise the seatback:
2. Tilt the seatback rearward, and
then release the lever when
the seatback is in the desired
position. The rear seatback lock
indicator (A) retracts when the
seatback is locked in place.
1. Lift the lever on top of the
seatback. Raise the seatback
and release the lever. The rear
seatback lock indicator (A)
extends when the seatback is
unlocked.
Heated Rear Seats
2. Push the seatback rearward
until it locks in the upright
WARNING
{
position. The rear seatback lock
indicator (A) retracts when the
seatback is locked in place.
If you cannot feel temperature
change or pain to the skin,
the seat heater may cause
burns even at low temperatures.
See the Warning under Heated
Front Seats on page 3‑10.
With the ignition in ON/RUN/START,
3. Make sure the rear safety
belts are not twisted or caught
between the seat cushion and
the seatback.
press L or M to heat the left or
right seat cushion and seatback.
An indicator on the RSA display
appears when this feature is on.
Reclining the Seatbacks
Press the button once for the
highest setting. With each press of
the button, the heated seat changes
to the next lower setting, and then
the off setting. Three lights indicate
the highest setting, and one light
indicates the lowest.
On vehicles with rear outboard
heated seats, the buttons are on
the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) panel.
To recline the seatback:
1. Lift and hold the lever on top of
the seatback. The rear seatback
lock indicator (A) extends when
the seatback is unlocked.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-14
Seats and Restraints
Rear Seat
Pass-Through Door
Safety Belts
This section of the manual
WARNING
{
It is extremely dangerous to ride
in a cargo area, inside or outside
of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or
killed. Do not allow people to ride
in any area of your vehicle that
is not equipped with seats and
safety belts. Be sure everyone in
your vehicle is in a seat and using
a safety belt properly.
describes how to use safety belts
properly. It also describes some
things not to do with safety belts.
WARNING
{
Do not let anyone ride where
a safety belt cannot be worn
properly. In a crash, if you or
your passenger(s) are not
wearing safety belts, the injuries
can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle harder
or be ejected from the vehicle.
You and your passenger(s) can
be seriously injured or killed.
In the same crash, you might
not be, if you are buckled up.
Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passenger(s)
are restrained properly too.
This vehicle has indicators as a
reminder to buckle the safety belts.
See Safety Belt Reminders on
page 5‑15 for additional information.
Some vehicles have a rear seat
pass-through door in the center of
the rear seatback. Fold down the
center armrest and push down on
the latch to open the door.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-15
In most states and in all Canadian
provinces, the law requires wearing
safety belts. Here is why:
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything,
you go as fast as it goes.
You never know if you will be in
a crash. If you do have a crash,
you do not know if it will be a
serious one.
A few crashes are mild, and some
crashes can be so serious that even
buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in
between. In many of them, people
who buckle up can survive and
sometimes walk away. Without
safety belts they could have been
badly hurt or killed.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose
it is just a seat on wheels.
After more than 40 years of safety
belts in vehicles, the facts are clear.
In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-16
Seats and Restraints
Get it up to speed. Then stop the
vehicle. The rider does not stop.
The person keeps going until
stopped by something. In a real
vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-17
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why
should I have to wear safety
belts?
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle
after a crash if I am wearing a
safety belt?
A: Airbags are supplemental
systems only; so they work
with safety belts — not instead
of them. Whether or not an
airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the
most protection. That is true not
only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other
collisions.
A: You could be — whether you
are wearing a safety belt or not.
But your chance of being
conscious during and after an
accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if
you are belted. And you can
unbuckle a safety belt, even if
you are upside down.
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down
as the vehicle does. You get more
time to stop. You stop over more
distance, and your strongest bones
take the forces. That is why safety
belts make such good sense.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-18
Seats and Restraints
Q: If I am a good driver, and I
never drive far from home,
why should I wear safety
belts?
First, before you or your
passenger(s) wear a safety belt,
there is important information
you should know.
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly
This section is only for people of
adult size.
A: You may be an excellent driver,
but if you are in a crash — even
one that is not your fault — you
and your passenger(s) can be
hurt. Being a good driver does
not protect you from things
beyond your control, such as
bad drivers.
Be aware that there are special
things to know about safety belts
and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and
infants. If a child will be riding in
the vehicle, see Older Children on
page 3‑47 or Infants and Young
Children on page 3‑49. Follow those
rules for everyone's protection.
Most accidents occur within
40 km (25 miles) of home.
And the greatest number of
serious injuries and deaths
occur at speeds of less than
65 km/h (40 mph).
It is very important for all occupants
to buckle up. Statistics show that
unbelted people are hurt more
often in crashes than those who
are wearing safety belts.
Sit up straight and always keep
your feet on the floor in front of you.
The lap part of the belt should be
Safety belts are for everyone.
Occupants who are not buckled up
can be thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash. And they can strike others in
the vehicle who are wearing safety
belts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-19
worn low and snug on the hips,
just touching the thighs. In a crash,
this applies force to the strong
pelvic bones and you would be
less likely to slide under the lap
belt. If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force on your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even
fatal injuries. The shoulder belt
should go over the shoulder and
across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING
{
You can be seriously hurt if
your shoulder belt is too loose.
In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could
increase injury. The shoulder
belt should fit snugly against
your body.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a
sudden stop or crash.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose.
It will not give as much
protection this way.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-20
Seats and Restraints
Q: What is wrong with this?
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING
{
You can be seriously hurt if your
lap belt is too loose. In a crash,
you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries.
The lap belt should be worn
low and snug on the hips,
just touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will
not give nearly as much
protection this way.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong
buckle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-21
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING
WARNING
{
{
You can be seriously injured
if your belt is buckled in the
You can be seriously injured if
your belt goes over an armrest
like this. The belt would be much
too high. In a crash, you can slide
under the belt. The belt force
would then be applied on the
abdomen, not on the pelvic
bones, and that could cause
serious or fatal injuries. Be sure
the belt goes under the armrests.
wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your
abdomen. The belt forces would
be there, not on the pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt
into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-22
Seats and Restraints
Q: What is wrong with this?
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING
{
You can be seriously injured if
you wear the shoulder belt under
your arm. In a crash, your body
would move too far forward,
which would increase the chance
of head and neck injury. Also,
the belt would apply too much
force to the ribs, which are not
as strong as shoulder bones.
You could also severely injure
internal organs like your liver or
spleen. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across
the chest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under
the arm. It should be worn over
the shoulder at all times.
A: The belt is behind the body.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-23
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING
WARNING
{
{
You can be seriously injured by
not wearing the lap-shoulder
belt properly. In a crash, you
would not be restrained by the
shoulder belt. Your body could
move too far forward increasing
the chance of head and neck
injury. You might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt
force would then be applied right
on the abdomen. That could
cause serious or fatal injuries.
The shoulder belt should go over
the shoulder and across the
chest.
You can be seriously injured by a
twisted belt. In a crash, you would
not have the full width of the belt
to spread impact forces. If a belt
is twisted, make it straight so it
can work properly, or ask your
dealer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across
the body.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-24
Seats and Restraints
4. If equipped with a shoulder
belt height adjuster, move it to
the height that is right for you.
See “Shoulder Belt Height
Adjuster” later in this section
for instructions on use and
important safety information.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle
have a lap-shoulder belt.
The following instructions explain
how to wear a lap-shoulder belt
properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is
adjustable, so you can sit up
straight. To see how, see “Seats”
in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull
the belt across you. Do not let it
get twisted.
3. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to
make sure it is secure. If the belt
is not long enough, see Safety
Belt Extender on page 3‑28.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if
you pull the belt across you very
quickly. If this happens, let the
belt go back slightly to unlock it.
Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull
up on the shoulder belt.
If the shoulder portion of a
passenger belt is pulled out
all the way, the child restraint
locking feature may be engaged.
If this happens, let the belt go
back all the way and start again.
It may be necessary to pull
stitching on the safety belt
through the latch plate to fully
tighten the lap belt on smaller
occupants.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-25
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
The vehicle has a shoulder belt
height adjuster for the driver and
right front passenger seating
positions.
Adjust the height so that the
shoulder portion of the belt is on
the shoulder and not falling off of it.
The belt should be close to, but
not contacting, the neck. Improper
shoulder belt height adjustment
could reduce the effectiveness of
the safety belt in a crash. See How
to Wear Safety Belts Properly on
page 3‑18.
To unlatch the belt, just push the
button on the buckle.
Move the height adjuster up to the
desired position by pushing up on
the height adjuster.
Before a door is closed, be sure
the safety belt is out of the way. If a
door is slammed against a safety
belt, damage can occur to both the
safety belt and the vehicle.
After the height adjuster is set to the
desired position, try to move it up or
down without pressing the release
button (A) to make sure it has
locked into position. Press the
release button to lower the height
adjuster.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-26
Seats and Restraints
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Rear Safety Belt Comfort
Guides
This vehicle has safety belt
pretensioners for front outboard
occupants. Although the safety
belt pretensioners cannot be seen,
they are part of the safety belt
assembly. They can help tighten the
safety belts during the early stages
of a moderate to severe frontal and
near frontal crash and will deploy in
side, rear and rollover events if the
threshold conditions for pretensioner
activation are met.
This vehicle may have rear
shoulder belt comfort guides for
the outboard passenger positions
in the rear seat. If not, they are
available through your dealer.
The guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older
children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults.
When installed on a shoulder belt,
and properly adjusted, the comfort
guide positions the belt away from
the neck and head.
2. Place the guide over the belt,
and insert the two edges of the
belt into the slots of the guide.
Pretensioners work only once.
If the pretensioners activate in a
crash, they will need to be replaced,
and probably other new parts for
the vehicle's safety belt system.
See Replacing Safety Belt System
Parts After a Crash on page 3‑29.
Here is how to install a comfort
guide to the safety belt:
1. Remove the guide from its
storage pocket on the side of
the seat.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-27
WARNING
{
A safety belt that is not properly
worn may not provide the
protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could
be seriously injured. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts
of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
3. Be sure that the belt is
not twisted and it lies flat.
4. Buckle, position, and release
the safety belt as described
previously in this section. Make
sure the shoulder portion of the
belt is on the shoulder and not
falling off of it. The belt should
be close to, but not contacting,
the neck.
The elastic cord must be under
the belt and the guide on top.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-28
Seats and Restraints
To remove and store the comfort
guide, squeeze the belt edges
together so that the safety belt
can be removed from the guide.
Slide the guide back into its storage
pocket located on the side of
the seat.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten
around you, you should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long
enough, your dealer will order you
an extender. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you
will wear, so the extender will be
long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone
else use it, and use it only for the
seat it is made to fit. The extender
has been designed for adults.
Never use it for securing child seats.
To wear it, attach it to the regular
safety belt. For more information,
see the instruction sheet that comes
with the extender.
Safety Belt Use During
Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone,
including pregnant women. Like all
occupants, they are more likely to
be seriously injured if they do not
wear safety belts.
A pregnant woman should wear
a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap
portion should be worn as low
as possible, below the rounding,
throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is
to protect the mother. When a safety
belt is worn properly, it is more likely
that the fetus will not be hurt in a
crash. For pregnant women, as for
anyone, the key to making safety
belts effective is wearing them
properly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-29
Safety System Check
Now and then, check that the
safety belt reminder light, safety
belts, buckles, latch plates,
retractors, and anchorages are
working properly. Look for any
other loose or damaged safety
belt system parts that might keep
a safety belt system from doing
its job. See your dealer to have
it repaired. Torn or frayed safety
belts may not protect you in a crash.
They can rip apart under impact
forces. If a belt is torn or frayed,
get a new one right away.
Safety Belt Care
Keep belts clean and dry.
Replacing Safety Belt
System Parts After a
Crash
WARNING
{
WARNING
{
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
It may severely weaken them.
In a crash, they might not be able
to provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
A crash can damage the safety
belt system in the vehicle.
A damaged safety belt system
may not properly protect the
person using it, resulting in
serious injury or even death in
a crash. To help make sure the
safety belt systems are working
properly after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as
possible.
Make sure the safety belt reminder
light is working. See Safety Belt
Reminders on page 5‑15 for more
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry.
See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑29.
After a minor crash, replacement of
safety belts may not be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that
were used during any crash may
have been stressed or damaged.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-30
Seats and Restraints
See your dealer to have the safety
belt assemblies inspected or
replaced.
All of the airbags in the vehicle will
have the word AIRBAG embossed
in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
Airbag System
The vehicle has the following
airbags:
New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the safety belt
system was not being used at the
time of the crash.
.
A frontal airbag for the driver.
For frontal airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear on the middle
part of the steering wheel for the
driver and on the instrument panel
for the right front passenger.
.
A frontal airbag for the right front
passenger.
Have the safety belt pretensioners
checked if the vehicle has been in a
crash, or if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start the vehicle
or while you are driving. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 5‑17.
.
A seat-mounted side impact
airbag for the driver.
With seat-mounted side impact
airbags, the word AIRBAG will
appear on the side of the seatback
closest to the door.
.
A seat-mounted side impact
airbag for the right front
passenger.
.
A roof-rail airbag for the driver
and the passenger seated
directly behind the driver.
With roof-rail airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear along the trim.
Even if you do not have a right front
passenger seat in the vehicle there
is still an active frontal airbag in the
right side of the instrument panel.
Do not place cargo in front of this
airbag.
.
A roof-rail airbag for the
right front passenger and the
passenger seated directly
behind the right front passenger.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-31
Here are the most important things
to know about the airbag system:
WARNING
WARNING (Continued)
{
Be sure that cargo is not near an
airbag. In a crash, an inflating
airbag might force that object
toward a person. This could
cause severe injury or even
death. Secure objects away
from the area in which an
airbag would inflate. For more
information, see Where Are the
Airbags? on page 3‑33 and
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑12.
Wearing a safety belt during a
crash helps reduce your chance
of hitting things inside the vehicle
or being ejected from it. Airbags
are “supplemental restraints” to
the safety belts. Everyone in the
vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is
an airbag for that person.
WARNING
{
You can be severely injured or
killed in a crash if you are not
wearing a safety belt — even if
the vehicle has airbags. Airbags
are designed to work with safety
belts, but do not replace them.
Also, airbags are not designed to
deploy in every crash. In some
crashes safety belts are the only
restraint. See When Should an
Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑34.
Airbags are designed to supplement
the protection provided by safety
belts. Even though today's airbags
are also designed to help reduce
the risk of injury from the force of an
inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
very quickly to do their job.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-32
Seats and Restraints
WARNING
WARNING
{
{
Airbags inflate with great force,
faster than the blink of an eye.
Anyone who is up against, or
very close to, any airbag when it
inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily
close to the airbag, as you would
be if you were sitting on the edge
of the seat or leaning forward.
Safety belts help keep you in
position before and during a
crash. Always wear a safety belt,
even with airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible
while still maintaining control of
the vehicle.
Children who are up against,
or very close to, any airbag
when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus
lap-shoulder belts offer protection
for adults and older children, but
not for young children and infants.
Neither the vehicle's safety belt
system nor its airbag system
is designed for them. Young
children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint
system can provide. Always
secure children properly in
the vehicle. To read how, see
Older Children on page 3‑47 or
Infants and Young Children on
page 3‑49.
There is an airbag readiness light
on the instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag
electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an
electrical problem. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 5‑17
for more information.
Occupants should not lean on or
sleep against the door or side
windows in seating positions with
seat-mounted side impact airbags
and/or roof-rail airbags.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-33
Where Are the Airbags?
Driver Side Shown, Passenger
Side Similar
The right front passenger frontal
airbag is in the instrument panel on
the passenger side.
The seat-mounted side impact
airbags for the driver and right front
passenger are in the side of the
seatbacks closest to the door.
The driver frontal airbag is in the
middle of the steering wheel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-34
Seats and Restraints
When Should an Airbag
Inflate?
WARNING (Continued)
that person causing severe injury
or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept
clear. Do not put anything
between an occupant and an
airbag, and do not attach or put
anything on the steering wheel
hub or on or near any other
airbag covering.
Frontal airbags are designed
to inflate in moderate to severe
frontal or near-frontal crashes to
help reduce the potential for severe
injuries mainly to the driver's or right
front passenger's head and chest.
However, they are only designed
to inflate if the impact exceeds
a predetermined deployment
threshold. Deployment thresholds
are used to predict how severe a
crash is likely to be in time for the
airbags to inflate and help restrain
the occupants.
Driver Side Shown, Passenger
Side Similar
Do not use seat accessories
that block the inflation path of a
seat-mounted side impact airbag.
The roof-rail airbags for the driver,
right front passenger, and second
row outboard passengers are in the
ceiling above the side windows.
Never secure anything to the roof
of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags
by routing a rope or tie down
through any door or window
opening. If you do, the path of
an inflating roof-rail airbag will
be blocked.
Whether the frontal airbags will
or should deploy is not based on
how fast your vehicle is traveling.
It depends largely on what you hit,
the direction of the impact, and how
quickly your vehicle slows down.
WARNING
{
If something is between an
occupant and an airbag, the
airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-35
Frontal airbags may inflate
at different crash speeds.
For example:
Frontal airbags are not intended to
inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts.
crashes. In addition, these roof-rail
airbags are intended to inflate
during a rollover. Seat-mounted
side impact and roof-rail airbags
will inflate if the crash severity is
above the system's designed
threshold level. The threshold level
can vary with specific vehicle
design.
.
If the vehicle hits a stationary
In addition, the vehicle has
dual-stage frontal airbags.
object, the airbags could inflate
at a different crash speed than if
the vehicle hits a moving object.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the
restraint according to crash
severity. The vehicle has electronic
frontal sensors, which help
the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact
and a more severe frontal impact.
For moderate frontal impacts,
dual-stage airbags inflate at a
level less than full deployment.
For more severe frontal impacts,
full deployment occurs.
.
If the vehicle hits an object that
deforms, the airbags could
inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits an object
that does not deform.
Seat-mounted side impact airbags
are not intended to inflate in frontal
impacts, near-frontal impacts,
rollovers, or rear impacts. Roof-rail
airbags are not intended to inflate in
rear impacts. A seat-mounted side
impact airbag is intended to deploy
on the side of the vehicle that is
struck. Both roof-rail airbags will
deploy when either side of the
vehicle is struck, or if the sensing
system predicts that the vehicle is
about to roll over, or in a severe
frontal impact.
.
If the vehicle hits a narrow object
(like a pole), the airbags could
inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide
object (like a wall).
The vehicle has seat-mounted
side impact and roof-rail airbags.
See Airbag System on page 3‑30.
Seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags are intended to
inflate in moderate to severe side
.
If the vehicle goes into an object
at an angle, the airbags could
inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight
into the object.
Thresholds can also vary with
specific vehicle design.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-36
Seats and Restraints
If the vehicle does not have a right
front passenger seat and a rear
seat, only the driver frontal airbag
will deploy in a frontal impact.
What Makes an Airbag
Inflate?
How Does an Airbag
Restrain?
In a deployment event, the sensing
system sends an electrical signal
triggering a release of gas from the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the
airbag causing the bag to break out
of the cover and deploy. The inflator,
the airbag, and related hardware are
all part of the airbag module.
In moderate to severe frontal or
near frontal collisions, even belted
occupants can contact the steering
wheel or the instrument panel.
In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants
can contact the inside of the
vehicle.
In any particular crash, no one
can say whether an airbag should
have inflated simply because of
the damage to a vehicle or because
of what the repair costs were.
For frontal airbags, inflation is
determined by what the vehicle hits,
the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down.
For seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags, deployment is
determined by the location and
severity of the side impact. In a
rollover event, roof-rail airbag
deployment is determined by
the direction of the roll.
Frontal airbag modules are located
inside the steering wheel and
Airbags supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Frontal
airbags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the
occupant's upper body, stopping
the occupant more gradually.
Seat‐mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags distribute the force
of the impact more evenly over the
occupant's upper body.
instrument panel. For vehicles with
seat-mounted side impact airbags,
there are airbag modules in the side
of the front seatbacks closest to
the door. For vehicles with roof-rail
airbags, there are airbag modules in
the ceiling of the vehicle, near the
side windows that have occupant
seating positions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-37
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags
are designed to help contain the
head and chest of occupants in the
outboard seating positions in the
first and second rows. The rollover
capable roof-rail airbags are
designed to help reduce the risk of
full or partial ejection in rollover
events, although no system can
prevent all such ejections.
What Will You See After
an Airbag Inflates?
WARNING
{
When an airbag inflates, there
may be dust in the air. This dust
could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of
After the frontal airbags and
seat-mounted side impact airbags
inflate, they quickly deflate, so
quickly that some people may not
even realize an airbag inflated.
Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
partially inflated for some time after
they deploy. Some components of
the airbag module may be hot for
several minutes. For location of the
airbag modules, see What Makes
an Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑36.
asthma or other breathing trouble.
To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon
as it is safe to do so. If you have
breathing problems but cannot
get out of the vehicle after an
airbag inflates, then get fresh
air by opening a window or a
door. If you experience breathing
problems following an airbag
deployment, you should seek
medical attention.
But airbags would not help in
many types of collisions, primarily
because the occupant's motion
is not toward those airbags. See
When Should an Airbag Inflate? on
page 3‑34 for more information.
The parts of the airbag that come
into contact with you may be warm,
but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming
from the vents in the deflated
Airbags should never be regarded
as anything more than a supplement
to safety belts.
airbags. Airbag inflation does not
prevent the driver from seeing out
of the windshield or being able to
steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent
people from leaving the vehicle.
The vehicle has a feature that may
automatically unlock the doors, turn
on the interior lamps and hazard
warning flashers, and shut off the
fuel system after the airbags inflate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-38
Seats and Restraints
.
The vehicle has a crash sensing
and diagnostic module which
records information after a
crash. See Vehicle Data
Recording and Privacy on
page 13‑18 and Event Data
Recorders on page 13‑18.
You can lock the doors, turn off the
interior lamps and hazard warning
flashers by using the controls for
those features.
In many crashes severe enough to
inflate the airbag, windshields are
broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage
may also occur from the right
front passenger airbag.
WARNING
{
.
Airbags are designed to inflate
.
A crash severe enough to inflate
the airbags may have also
damaged important functions
in the vehicle, such as the fuel
system, brake and steering
systems, etc. Even if the vehicle
appears to be drivable after a
moderate crash, there may be
concealed damage that could
make it difficult to safely operate
the vehicle.
Let only qualified technicians
work on the airbag systems.
Improper service can mean that
an airbag system will not work
properly. See your dealer for
service.
only once. After an airbag
inflates, you will need some
new parts for the airbag system.
If you do not get them, the
airbag system will not be there
to help protect you in another
crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly
other parts. The service manual
for your vehicle covers the need
to replace other parts.
Use caution if you should attempt
to restart the engine after a crash
has occurred.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-39
The words ON and OFF, or the
symbol for on and off, are visible
during the system check. If you
are using remote start, if equipped,
to start the vehicle from a distance,
you may not see the system
check. When the system check is
complete, either the word ON or
OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will
be visible. See Passenger Airbag
Status Indicator on page 5‑18.
The sensors are designed to detect
the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the right
front passenger frontal airbag and
seat‐mounted side impact airbag
should be enabled (may inflate)
or not.
Passenger Sensing
System
The vehicle has a passenger
sensing system for the right front
passenger position. The passenger
airbag status indicator will be visible
on the overhead console when the
vehicle is started.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
secured in a rear seat in the correct
child restraint for their weight
and size.
The passenger sensing system
turns off the right front passenger
frontal airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag under certain
conditions. The driver airbags and
the roof-rail airbags are not affected
by the passenger sensing system.
We recommend that children be
secured in a rear seat, including:
an infant or a child riding in a
rear-facing child restraint; a child
riding in a forward-facing child seat;
an older child riding in a booster
seat; and children, who are large
enough, using safety belts.
United States
The passenger sensing system
works with sensors that are part
of the right front passenger seat.
Canada and Mexico
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-40
Seats and Restraints
A label on the sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat
in the front.” This is because the risk
to the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.
If the vehicle does not have a
rear seat that will accommodate
a rear‐facing child restraint, a
rear‐facing child restraint should
not be installed in the vehicle,
even if the airbag is off.
WARNING (Continued)
Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag
and seat-mounted side impact
airbag (if equipped), no system is
fail-safe. No one can guarantee
that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual
WARNING
{
The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front
passenger airbag and seat‐mounted
side impact airbag if:
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right
front passenger airbag inflates.
This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would
be very close to the inflating
airbag. A child in a forward-facing
child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates and the
passenger seat is in a forward
position.
.
The right front passenger seat is
circumstance, even though
the airbag(s) are off.
unoccupied.
.
The system determines that an
Secure rear-facing child restraints
in a rear seat, even if the
infant is present in a rear-facing
infant seat.
airbag(s) are off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far
back as it will go. It is better to
secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
.
The system determines that a
small child is present in a child
restraint.
.
The system determines that
a small child is present in a
booster seat.
(Continued)
.
A right front passenger takes
his/her weight off of the seat for
a period of time.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-41
.
.
The right front passenger seat is
occupied by a smaller person,
such as a child who has
When the passenger sensing
system has allowed the airbags to
be enabled, the on indicator will light
and stay lit to remind you that the
airbags are active.
WARNING
{
If the airbag readiness light ever
comes on and stays on, it means
that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others,
have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 5‑17 for more
information, including important
safety information.
outgrown child restraints.
Or, if there is a critical problem
with the airbag system or the
passenger sensing system.
For some children who have
outgrown child restraints and for
very small adults, the passenger
sensing system may or may not
turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag, depending
upon the person’s seating posture
and body build. Everyone in the
vehicle who has outgrown child
restraints should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is
an airbag for that person.
When the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag and
seat‐mounted side impact airbag,
the off indicator will light and stay lit
to remind you that the airbags are
off. See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 5‑18.
The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn on (may inflate)
the right front passenger frontal
airbag and seat‐mounted side
impact airbag anytime the system
senses that a person of adult size
is sitting properly in the right front
passenger seat.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-42
Seats and Restraints
5. If, after reinstalling the child
restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is
still lit, turn the vehicle off.
Then slightly recline the vehicle
seatback and adjust the seat
cushion, if adjustable, to make
sure that the vehicle seatback is
not pushing the child restraint
into the seat cushion.
If the On Indicator is Lit for a
Child Restraint
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an
Adult-Size Occupant
If a child restraint has been installed
and the on indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove the child restraint from
the vehicle.
3. Remove any additional items
from the seat such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
Also make sure the child
restraint is not trapped under
the vehicle head restraint.
If this happens, adjust the
head restraint. See Head
Restraints on page 3‑2.
4. Reinstall the child restraint
following the directions
provided by the child restraint
manufacturer and refer to
If a person of adult-size is sitting in
the right front passenger seat, but
the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting
properly in the seat. If this happens,
use the following steps to allow the
6. Restart the vehicle.
“Securing a Child Restraint in
the Right Front Seat Position ”
under Securing Child Restraints
(Rear Seat) on page 3‑64 or
Securing Child Restraints (Front
Passenger Seat) on page 3‑66.
If the on indicator is still lit,
secure the child restraint in a
rear seat position in the vehicle,
and check with your dealer.
If no rear seat is available, do not
install a child restraint in this
vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-43
system to detect that person and
enable the right front passenger
frontal airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag:
system operates. We recommend
that you not use seat covers
Additional Factors Affecting
System Operation
or other aftermarket equipment
except when approved by GM for
your specific vehicle. See Adding
Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3‑44 for more
information about modifications that
can affect how the system operates.
Safety belts help keep the
passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers
and braking, which helps the
passenger sensing system
maintain the passenger airbag
status. See “Safety Belts” and
“Child Restraints” in the Index for
additional information about the
importance of proper restraint use.
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material
from the seat, such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
3. Place the seatback in the fully
upright position.
WARNING
{
Stowing of articles under the
passenger seat or between the
passenger seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the
proper operation of the passenger
sensing system.
4. Have the person sit upright in
the seat, centered on the seat
cushion, with legs comfortably
extended.
A thick layer of additional material,
such as a blanket or cushion,
or aftermarket equipment such
as seat covers, seat heaters,
and seat massagers can affect
how well the passenger sensing
5. Restart the vehicle and have the
person remain in this position for
two to three minutes after the on
indicator is lit.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-44
Seats and Restraints
Servicing the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add
to or change about the vehicle
that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
WARNING
{
For up to 10 seconds after the
ignition is turned off and the
Airbags affect how the vehicle
should be serviced. There are
parts of the airbag system in
several places around the vehicle.
Your dealer and the service manual
have information about servicing
the vehicle and the airbag system.
To purchase a service manual, see
Service Publications Ordering
Information on page 13‑15.
battery is disconnected, an airbag
can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you
are close to an airbag when it
inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.
They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow
proper service procedures, and
make sure the person performing
work for you is qualified to do so.
A: Yes. If you add things that
change the vehicle's frame,
bumper system, height, front end
or side sheet metal, they may
keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or
moving any parts of the front
seats, safety belts, the airbag
sensing and diagnostic module,
steering wheel, instrument
panel, roof-rail airbag modules,
ceiling headliner or pillar garnish
trim, overhead console, front
sensors, side impact sensors,
rollover sensor module, airbag
wiring, or cargo restraint system
and convenience net can affect
the operation of the airbag
system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-45
In addition, the vehicle has a
passenger sensing system
for the right front passenger
position, which includes sensors
that are part of the passenger
seat. The passenger sensing
system may not operate
properly if the original seat
trim is replaced with non-GM
covers, upholstery or trim,
or with GM covers, upholstery
or trim designed for a different
vehicle. Any object, such as
an aftermarket seat heater or
a comfort enhancing pad or
device, installed under or on
top of the seat fabric, could also
interfere with the operation of
the passenger sensing system.
This could either prevent proper
deployment of the passenger
airbag(s) or prevent the
If you have questions,
Q: Because I have a disability,
I have to get my vehicle
modified. How can I find out
whether this will affect my
airbag system?
call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two
of the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure in this manual.
See Customer Satisfaction
Procedure (U.S. and Canada) on
page 13‑1 or Customer
A: If you have questions,
call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two
of the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure in this manual.
See Customer Satisfaction
Procedure (U.S. and Canada) on
page 13‑1 or Customer
Satisfaction Procedure (Mexico)
on page 13‑3.
If the vehicle has rollover
roof-rail airbags, see Different
Size Tires and Wheels on
page 10‑72 for additional
important information.
Satisfaction Procedure (Mexico)
on page 13‑3.
In addition, your dealer and the
service manual have information
about the location of the airbag
sensors, sensing and diagnostic
module and airbag wiring.
passenger sensing system
from properly turning off
the passenger airbag(s).
See Passenger Sensing
System on page 3‑39.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-46
Seats and Restraints
If an airbag inflates, you will need
to replace airbag system parts.
See your dealer for service.
Airbag System Check
Replacing Airbag System
Parts After a Crash
The airbag system does not need
regularly scheduled maintenance
or replacement. Make sure the
airbag readiness light is working.
See Airbag Readiness Light on
page 5‑17 for more information.
If the airbag readiness light stays on
after the vehicle is started or comes
on when you are driving, the airbag
system may not work properly.
Have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness Light
WARNING
{
A crash can damage the
airbag systems in your vehicle.
A damaged airbag system
may not work properly and
may not protect you and your
passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
in serious injury or even death.
To help make sure your airbag
systems are working properly
after a crash, have them
Notice: If an airbag covering is
damaged, opened, or broken,
the airbag may not work properly.
Do not open or break the airbag
coverings. If there are any
opened or broken airbag covers,
have the airbag covering and/or
airbag module replaced. For the
location of the airbag modules,
see What Makes an Airbag
on page 5‑17 for more information.
inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon
as possible.
Inflate? on page 3‑36. See your
dealer for service.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-47
.
Can proper safety belt fit be
maintained for the length of the
trip? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
The manufacturer's instructions that
come with the booster seat state the
weight and height limitations for that
booster. Use a booster seat with a
lap-shoulder belt until the child
passes the fit test below:
Child Restraints
Older Children
Q: What is the proper way to
wear safety belts?
.
Sit all the way back on the seat.
A: An older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the
additional restraint a shoulder
belt can provide. The shoulder
belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit
snugly below the hips, just
touching the top of the thighs.
This applies belt force to the
child's pelvic bones in a crash.
It should never be worn over the
abdomen, which could cause
severe or even fatal internal
injuries in a crash.
Do the knees bend at the seat
edge? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
.
Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.
Does the shoulder belt rest on
the shoulder? If yes, continue.
If no, try using the rear safety
belt comfort guide. See “Rear
Safety Belt Comfort Guides”
under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
page 3‑24 for more information.
If the shoulder belt still does not
rest on the shoulder, then return
to the booster seat.
Older children who have outgrown
booster seats should wear the
vehicle's safety belts.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort
Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
page 3‑24.
.
Does the lap belt fit low and
snug on the hips, touching the
thighs? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-48
Seats and Restraints
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer
when properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position.
WARNING (Continued)
head and neck injury. The child
might also slide under the lap
belt. The belt force would then
be applied right on the abdomen.
That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across
the chest.
In a crash, children who are not
buckled up can strike other people
who are buckled up, or can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Older
children need to use safety belts
properly.
WARNING
{
WARNING
{
Never do this.
Never do this.
Never allow a child to wear the
safety belt with the shoulder belt
behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing
the lap-shoulder belt properly.
In a crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt.
The child could move too far
Never allow two children to wear
the same safety belt. The safety
belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two
children can be crushed together
and seriously injured. A safety
belt must be used by only one
person at a time.
forward increasing the chance of
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-49
Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts
offer protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children
and infants. Neither the vehicle's
safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Every
time infants and young children ride
in vehicles, they should have the
protection provided by appropriate
child restraints.
Infants and Young
Children
WARNING (Continued)
110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's
arms. An infant should be
secured in an appropriate
restraint.
Everyone in a vehicle needs
protection! This includes infants
and all other children. Neither the
distance traveled nor the age and
size of the traveler changes the
need, for everyone, to use safety
restraints. In fact, the law in every
state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says
children up to some age must be
restrained while in a vehicle.
Children who are not restrained
properly can strike other people,
or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING
{
WARNING
{
Never do this.
Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt
is wrapped around their neck
and the safety belt continues to
tighten. Never leave children
unattended in a vehicle and never
allow children to play with the
safety belts.
Never hold an infant or a child
while riding in a vehicle. Due to
crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not
possible to hold it during a crash.
For example, in a crash at only
40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)
infant will suddenly become a
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-50
Seats and Restraints
For most basic types of child
restraints, there are many
different models available.
WARNING
{
Never do this.
When purchasing a child
restraint, be sure it is designed
to be used in a motor vehicle.
If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal
motor vehicle safety standards.
Children who are up against,
or very close to, any airbag when
it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Never put a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front
seat. Secure a rear-facing child
restraint in a rear seat. It is also
better to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in a rear seat. If you
must secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front
seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it
will go.
The restraint manufacturer's
instructions that come with the
restraint state the weight and
height limitations for a particular
child restraint. In addition, there
are many kinds of restraints
available for children with
special needs.
Q: What are the different types of
add-on child restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which
are purchased by the vehicle's
owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular
restraint should take into
consideration not only the child's
weight, height, and age but also
whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor
vehicle in which it will be used.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-51
Child Restraint Systems
WARNING
WARNING
{
{
To reduce the risk of neck and
head injury during a crash,
A young child's hip bones are still
so small that the vehicle's regular
safety belt may not remain low
on the hip bones, as it should.
Instead, it may settle up around
the child's abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a
body area that is unprotected by
any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal
injuries. To reduce the risk of
serious or fatal injuries during a
crash, young children should
always be secured in appropriate
child restraints.
infants need complete support.
This is because an infant's neck
is not fully developed and its head
weighs so much compared with
the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing child
restraint settles into the restraint,
so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest
part of an infant's body, the back
and shoulders. Infants should
always be secured in rear-facing
child restraints.
(A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat
A rear-facing infant seat (A)
provides restraint with the seating
surface against the back of the
infant.
The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to
keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-52
Seats and Restraints
Securing an Add-On Child
Restraint in the Vehicle
WARNING
{
A child can be seriously injured
or killed in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured
in the vehicle. Secure the child
restraint properly in the vehicle
using the vehicle's safety belt or
LATCH system, following the
instructions that came with that
child restraint and the instructions
in this manual.
(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat
(C) Booster Seats
A forward-facing child seat (B)
provides restraint for the child's
body with the harness.
A booster seat (C) is a child
restraint designed to improve
the fit of the vehicle's safety belt
system. A booster seat can also
help a child to see out the window.
To help reduce the chance of injury,
the child restraint must be secured
in the vehicle. Child restraint
systems must be secured in vehicle
seats by lap belts or the lap belt
portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or
by the LATCH system. See Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) on page 3‑56 for
more information. Children can be
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-53
endangered in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured in
the vehicle.
and demonstrate how to correctly
use and install child restraints.
In the U.S., refer to the
Where to Put the
Restraint
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) website
to locate the nearest child safety
seat inspection station. For CPST
availability in Canada, check with
Transport Canada or the Provincial
Ministry of Transportation office.
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer
when properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position.
When securing an add-on child
restraint, refer to the instructions
that come with the restraint which
may be on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both, and to this manual.
The child restraint instructions
are important, so if they are not
available, obtain a replacement
copy from the manufacturer.
We recommend that children and
child restraints be secured in a rear
seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint;
a child riding in a forward-facing
child seat; an older child riding in a
booster seat; and children, who are
large enough, using safety belts.
Securing the Child Within the
Child Restraint
Keep in mind that an unsecured
child restraint can move around in a
collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to
properly secure any child restraint
in the vehicle — even when no
child is in it.
WARNING
{
A child can be seriously injured
or killed in a crash if the child
is not properly secured in the
child restraint. Secure the child
properly following the instructions
that came with that child restraint.
In some areas of the United States
and Canada, Certified Child
Passenger Safety Technicians
(CPSTs) are available to inspect
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-54
Seats and Restraints
A label on your sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat
in the front.” This is because the risk
to the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.
When securing a child restraint in
a rear seating position, study the
instructions that came with your
child restraint to make sure it is
compatible with this vehicle.
WARNING (Continued)
Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag,
no system is fail-safe. No one
can guarantee that an airbag will
not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is
turned off.
If the vehicle does not have a
rear seat that will accommodate
a rear-facing child restraint, we
recommend that rear-facing child
restraints not be transported in the
vehicle, even if the airbag is off.
WARNING
{
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right
front passenger airbag inflates.
This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would
be very close to the inflating
airbag. A child in a forward-facing
child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates and the
passenger seat is in a forward
position.
Secure rear-facing child restraints
in a rear seat, even if the
Child restraints and booster seats
vary considerably in size, and some
may fit in certain seating positions
better than others. Always make
sure the child restraint is properly
secured.
airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far
back as it will go. It is better to
secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System
on page 3‑39 for additional
information.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-55
Depending on where you place
the child restraint and the size
of the child restraint, you may
not be able to access adjacent
safety belt assemblies or LATCH
anchors for additional passengers
or child restraints. Adjacent seating
positions should not be used if the
child restraint prevents access to
or interferes with the routing of the
safety belt.
Configurations for Use of Child
Restraints
A. Child restraint or occupant
using safety belt
A. Child restraint using LATCH
B. Occupant prohibited
Wherever you install a child
restraint, be sure to secure the
child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured
child restraint can move around in a
collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to
properly secure any child restraint in
your vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
A. Child restraint or occupant
using safety belt
B. Child restraint using LATCH
A. Child restraint using LATCH
B. Occupant prohibited
C. Child restraint or occupant
using safety belt
If you need to secure more than
one child restraint in the rear seat,
review the following illustrations.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-56
Seats and Restraints
When installing a child restraint
with a top tether, you must also
use either the lower anchors or the
safety belts to properly secure the
child restraint. A child restraint must
never be installed using only the top
tether and anchor.
Lower Anchors
Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children
(LATCH System)
The LATCH system holds a child
restraint during driving or in a crash.
This system is designed to make
installation of a child restraint easier.
The LATCH system uses anchors in
the vehicle and attachments on the
child restraint that are made for use
with the LATCH system.
In order to use the LATCH
system in your vehicle, you need
a child restraint that has LATCH
attachments. The child restraint
manufacturer will provide you with
instructions on how to use the
child restraint and its attachments.
The following explains how to
attach a child restraint with these
attachments in your vehicle.
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars
built into the vehicle. There are
two lower anchors for each
LATCH seating position that will
accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible
child restraint is properly installed
using the anchors, or use the
vehicle's safety belts to secure the
restraint, following the instructions
that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual.
Not all vehicle seating positions or
child restraints have lower anchors
and attachments or top tether
anchors and attachments.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-57
Your child restraint may have
a single tether (A) or a dual
tether (C). Either will have a single
attachment (B) to secure the top
tether to the anchor.
Top Tether Anchor
Lower Anchor and Top Tether
Anchor Locations
Some child restraints that have
a top tether are designed for use
with or without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top
tether always to be attached.
In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether
be attached. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions for your child
restraint.
A top tether (A, C) anchors the
top of the child restraint to the
vehicle. A top tether anchor is built
into the vehicle. The top tether
attachment (B) on the child restraint
connects to the top tether anchor in
the vehicle in order to reduce the
forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or
in a crash.
Rear Seat
i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
positions with top tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower anchors.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-58
Seats and Restraints
Do not secure a child restraint in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be attached, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached.
To assist you in locating the lower
anchors, each seating position with
lower anchors has two labels, near
the crease between the seatback
and the seat cushion.
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer when
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position. See Where to Put the
Restraint on page 3‑53 for
Top Tether Anchors
The top tether anchors for each rear
seating position are located under
the covers, on the back of the rear
seatback. Be sure to use an anchor
located on the same side of the
vehicle as the seating position
where the child restraint will be
placed.
additional information.
To assist you in locating the top
tether anchors, the top tether anchor
symbol is located on the cover.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-59
Securing a Child Restraint
Designed for the LATCH
System
WARNING
WARNING (Continued)
{
Do not attach more than one
child restraint to a single anchor.
Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could
cause the anchor or attachment
to come loose or even break
during a crash. A child or others
could be injured. To reduce the
risk of serious or fatal injuries
during a crash, attach only one
child restraint per anchor.
of the retractor to set the lock,
if your vehicle has one, after the
child restraint has been installed.
WARNING
{
If a LATCH-type child restraint
is not attached to anchors, the
child restraint will not be able
to protect the child correctly.
In a crash, the child could be
seriously injured or killed. Install
a LATCH-type child restraint
properly using the anchors,
or use the vehicle's safety belts
to secure the restraint, following
the instructions that came with
the child restraint and the
Notice: Do not let the LATCH
attachments rub against the
vehicle’s safety belts. This may
damage these parts. If necessary,
move buckled safety belts to
avoid rubbing the LATCH
attachments.
Do not fold the empty rear
seat with a safety belt buckled.
This could damage the safety
belt or the seat. Unbuckle and
return the safety belt to its
stowed position, before folding
the seat.
WARNING
{
Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt is
wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to
tighten. Buckle any unused safety
belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull
the shoulder belt all the way out
instructions in this manual.
Make sure to attach the child
restraint at the proper anchor
location.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-60
Seats and Restraints
This system is designed to make
installation of child restraints easier.
When using lower anchors, do not
use the vehicle's safety belts.
Instead use the vehicle's anchors
and child restraint attachments
to secure the restraints. Some
restraints also use another vehicle
anchor to secure a top tether.
1.2. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
2.2. Route, attach, and tighten
the top tether according
to your child restraint
For the outboard rear
seating positions, if the
head restraint interferes
with the proper installation
of the child restraint,
the head restraint may
be removed. See “Head
Restraint Removal and
Reinstallation” at the end
of this section.
instructions and the
following instructions:
1. Attach and tighten the
lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child
restraint does not have lower
attachments or the desired
seating position does not have
lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and
the safety belts. Refer to your
child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions
in this manual.
1.3. Attach and tighten the
lower attachments on the
child restraint to the lower
anchors.
.
If you are using a dual
tether in the rear outboard
seating position with an
adjustable head restraint,
route the dual tether around
the head restraint.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer
recommends that the top tether
be attached, attach and tighten
the top tether to the top tether
anchor, if equipped. Refer to the
child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
1.1. Find the lower anchors
for the desired seating
position.
2.1. Find the top tether anchor
and open its cover to
expose the anchor.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-61
.
.
.
If you are using a dual
tether in the rear outboard
seating position and the
head restraint has been
removed, route the dual
tether over the seatback.
If you are using a single
tether in the rear outboard
seating position with an
adjustable head restraint,
route the single tether
under the head restraint
and in between the head
restraint posts.
If you are using a single
tether in the rear outboard
seating position and the
head restraint has been
removed, route the single
tether over the seatback.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-62
Seats and Restraints
3. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it
is securely held in place.
To check, grasp the child
restraint at the LATCH path and
attempt to move it side‐to‐side
and back‐and‐forth. There
should be no more than
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement
for proper installation.
Head Restraint Removal and
Reinstallation
.
.
If you are using a dual
tether in the rear center
seating position, lower the
adjustable headrest down
to its stowed position and
route the dual tether over
the headrest.
If you are using a single
tether in the rear center
seating position, lower the
adjustable headrest down
to its stowed position and
route the single tether over
the headrest.
The rear outboard head restraints
can be removed if they interfere
with the proper installation of the
child restraint. The headrest in the
rear center seating position is not
removable and should be lowered
to the stowed position for child
restraint installation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-63
To remove the head restraint:
3. Store the head restraint in the
cargo area of the vehicle.
To reinstall the head restraint:
1. Partially fold the seatback
forward. See Rear Seats on
page 3‑12 for additional
information.
4. When the child restraint is
removed, reinstall the head
restraint before the seating
position is used.
WARNING
{
With head restraints that are
not installed and adjusted
properly, there is a greater
chance that occupants will suffer
a neck/spinal injury in a crash.
Do not drive until the head
restraints for all occupants are
installed and adjusted properly.
1. Insert the head restraint posts
into the holes in the top of the
seatback. The notches (A) on
the posts must face the driver
side of the vehicle.
2. Press both buttons on the head
restraint posts at the same
time, and pull up on the head
restraint.
2. Push the head restraint all the
way down.
3. Pull up on the head restraint to
be sure that it locks.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-64
Seats and Restraints
In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
Replacing LATCH System Securing Child Restraints
Parts After a Crash
(Rear Seat)
When securing a child restraint in
a rear seating position, study the
instructions that came with the
child restraint to make sure it is
compatible with this vehicle.
WARNING
{
If the child restraint does not have
the LATCH system, you will be
using the safety belt to secure
the child restraint in this position.
Be sure to follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint
when and as the instructions say.
A crash can damage the
LATCH system in the vehicle.
A damaged LATCH system may
not properly secure the child
restraint, resulting in serious
injury or even death in a crash.
To help make sure the LATCH
system is working properly after
a crash, see your dealer to have
the system inspected and any
necessary replacements made
as soon as possible.
If the child restraint has the
LATCH system, see Lower Anchors
and Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3‑56 for how and
where to install the child restraint
using LATCH. If a child restraint
is secured in the vehicle using a
safety belt and it uses a top tether,
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
page 3‑56 for top tether anchor
locations.
If more than one child restraint
needs to be installed in the rear
seat, be sure to read Where to Put
the Restraint on page 3‑53.
1. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
If the head restraint interferes
with the proper installation of
the child restraint, the head
restraint may be removed.
See “Head Restraint Removal
and Reinstallation” under Lower
Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
page 3‑56.
If the vehicle has the LATCH system
and it was being used during a
crash, new LATCH system parts
may be needed.
Do not secure a child seat in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be anchored, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the LATCH
system was not being used at the
time of the crash.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-65
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle's safety belt through
or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.
4. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the
5. To tighten the belt, push down
on the child restraint, pull the
shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt,
and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint,
it may be helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
lock. When the retractor lock is
set, the belt can be tightened but
not pulled out of the retractor.
3. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
Try to pull the belt out of
the retractor to make sure
the retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 4 and 5.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-66
Seats and Restraints
6. If the child restraint has a top
tether, follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions
regarding the use of the top
tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3‑56 for more
information.
To remove the child restraint,
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt
and let it return to the stowed
position. If the top tether is
Securing Child Restraints
(Front Passenger Seat)
This vehicle has airbags. A rear
seat is a safer place to secure
a forward-facing child restraint.
See Where to Put the Restraint on
page 3‑53.
attached to a top tether anchor,
disconnect it. If the head restraint
was removed, reinstall it before
the seating position is used.
See “Head Restraint Removal
and Reinstallation” under Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) on page 3‑56 for
additional information on installing
the head restraint properly.
7. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
safety belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and back
and forth. When the child
In addition, the vehicle has a
passenger sensing system which is
designed to turn off the right front
passenger frontal airbag under
certain conditions. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 3‑39 and
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 5‑18 for more information,
including important safety
restraint is properly installed,
there should be no more than
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
information.
A label on the sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat
in the front.” This is because the risk
to the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-67
If the child restraint has the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
WARNING
WARNING (Continued)
{
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously
Secure rear-facing child
System) on page 3‑56 for how and
where to install the child restraint
using LATCH. If a child restraint is
secured using a safety belt and
it uses a top tether, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) on page 3‑56 for
top tether anchor locations.
restraints in a rear seat, even if
the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far
back as it will go. It is better to
secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
injured or killed if the right
front passenger airbag inflates.
This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would
be very close to the inflating
airbag. A child in a forward-facing
child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates and the
passenger seat is in a forward
position.
Do not secure a child seat in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be anchored, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
See Passenger Sensing System
on page 3‑39 for additional
information.
Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag,
no system is fail-safe. No one
can guarantee that an airbag will
not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is
turned off.
If the vehicle does not have a
rear seat that will accommodate
a rear‐facing child restraint, a
rear‐facing child restraint should
not be installed in the vehicle,
even if the airbag is off.
In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-68
Seats and Restraints
You will be using the lap-shoulder
belt to secure the child restraint in
this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as
it will go before securing the
forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag
and seat‐mounted side impact
airbag, the off indicator on
the passenger airbag status
indicator should light and stay
lit when you start the vehicle.
See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 5‑18.
4. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the
lock. When the retractor lock is
set, the belt can be tightened but
not pulled out of the retractor.
Position the release button on
the buckle, so that the safety
belt could be quickly unbuckled
if necessary.
2. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle's safety belt through
or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-69
If the vehicle does not have a
rear seat and the child restraint
has a top tether, follow the
child restraint manufacturer's
instructions regarding the use
of the top tether. See Lower
Anchors and Tethers for
If the airbags are off, the off
indicator in the passenger airbag
status indicator will come on and
stay on when the vehicle is started.
If a child restraint has been installed
and the on indicator is lit, see
“If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint” under Passenger Sensing
System on page 3‑39 for more
information.
Children (LATCH System) on
page 3‑56 for more information.
7. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
safety belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and back
and forth. When the child
To remove the child restraint,
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
let it return to the stowed position.
6. To tighten the belt, push down
on the child restraint, pull the
shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt,
and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint,
it may be helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
restraint is properly installed,
there should be no more than
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
Try to pull the belt out of the
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked,
repeat Steps 5 and 6.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-70
Seats and Restraints
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storage
4-1
conditioning must be turned on for
the maximum cool air to enter the
glove box. Move the slide control
across the small hole to turn the
cool air flow off. Close the opening
to keep cold air from entering the
vehicle.
Storage
Compartments
Storage
Storage Compartments
Glove Box
Lift the glove box handle up to open
it. Use the key to lock and unlock
the glove box.
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2
Additional Storage Features
Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Cargo Tie Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Cargo Management
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Cargo Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Roof Rack System
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
The glove box is air conditioned
and can be used to store items at a
lower temperature. The vehicle air
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-2
Storage
Cupholders
Front Storage
Armrest Storage
For vehicles with a rear seat
armrest, pull the rear seat armrest
forward to access cupholders with
removable liners and a storage
area. Pull the lever to access the
storage area.
Center Console Storage
Vehicles have an armrest and an
upper storage tray in the center
console.
The armrest on top of the center
console can be adjusted to a
rearward, middle, and forward
position. Slide the top of the armrest
to adjust to the desired position.
This vehicle has a cupholder
equipped with a divider that can
be adjusted to accommodate large
containers or small containers.
A storage area is located in front
of the shift lever. Push upward on
the top of the door and release;
the door automatically opens.
To open the center console with
armrest, move the armrest to the
full rearward position to access the
buttons.
For large containers, push the
button to move aside the divider
and make the cupholder deeper.
For small containers, push down on
the top edge of the divider to lock it
back in place to make the cupholder
shorter.
There is an accessory power outlet
inside. See Power Outlets on
page 5‑9.
For either center console, the
storage area has a storage tray and
a main storage. Push the driver side
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storage
4-3
button to access the storage tray.
Push the passenger side button to
access the main storage.
into the rear compartment, or the
lower (B) position to conceal objects
in the rear compartment.
Additional Storage
Features
There is an accessory power outlet
and input jacks for auxiliary audio
devices. See Power Outlets on
page 5‑9 and Auxiliary Devices
(Radio with CD ) on page 7‑30
or Auxiliary Devices (Radio with
CD/DVD and MEM) on page 7‑36.
Install the cargo cover
Cargo Cover
1. Hold the cartridge so that the
pull‐out shade faces the rear of
the vehicle.
For vehicles with the dual position
cargo cover, it can be used to cover
items in the cargo area of the
vehicle.
2. Align the cartridge over the pins
on the trim panels of the vehicle.
The shade can be set in two
positions. It can be set in a half way
open (A) position for loading objects
3. Push down on the cartridge to
snap it into place.
Push the button to open the storage
area located at the rear of the
center console.
4. Unroll the shade towards the
rear of the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-4
Storage
Remove the cargo cover
WARNING
{
1. Remove the cover from the
channels and carefully roll it
back up.
An improperly stored cargo
cover could be thrown about
the vehicle during a collision or
sudden maneuver. Someone
could be injured. If the cover is
removed, always store it in the
proper storage location. When it
is replaced, always be sure that it
is securely reattached.
5. Insert the shade's pins in the
channels (C) on both sides.
6. Slide the shade to the lower (B)
position, or the half way
open (A) position.
2. Slide the button on the top to
release the cartridge.
3. Pull up to remove the cartridge
from the pins.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storage
4-5
Cargo Tie Downs
For vehicles equipped with cargo
tie‐downs, the four tie-downs are
located in the rear compartment of
the vehicle. Use the tie-downs to
secure small loads.
Cargo Management
System
A prop rod locks to hold the cover
up when opened.
Press the red button on the prop rod
to close the cover.
Four hooks are located on the
inside cover and can be used for
storing items.
There may be additional storage
compartments on each side of the
cargo management system. Lift the
panel up to open.
To open the cargo management
system, press the handle to unlatch
and then lift up.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-6
Storage
Rear Storage Area
WARNING
{
An improperly latched and closed
cargo cover, or cargo cover left
in the open position, could be
thrown about the vehicle during
a crash or sudden maneuver.
Someone could be injured.
Be sure to return the cover to
the closed position and latch
before driving. If the cover is
removed, always store it outside
of the vehicle. When it is
3. Release the prop rod from the
inside cover by sliding the red
clip down.
4. Store the cargo management
system cover by hooking it onto
the weatherstrip.
replaced, always be sure that
it is securely reattached.
Unhook the prop rod from the
pin on the inside cover. Store the
unhooked prop rod by folding it
into the cargo management
compartment.
To access the rear storage areas of
the cargo management system, and
the tire sealant and compressor kit:
1. Remove the cargo cover,
if equipped.
2. Open the cargo management
system cover.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storage
4-7
To move the fence around the u-rail,
disconnect one side:
U-Rail
1. Unlock by turning the latch (A) to
align K with the arrow on the
adapter (B).
2. Push the adapter button to move
the adapters (B) to the desired
position.
3. Reinstall the fence and lock
both latches (A) by turning to
align Q with the arrow on the
Push both adapter buttons to move
the adapters (B) on the straight part
of the u-rail.
adapter (B).
Removing the Fence
For vehicles with a u-rail system,
the fence can be moved to different
positions on the u-rail track to
secure cargo.
Unlock by turning both latches (A)
to align K with the arrow on the
adapter (B). Lift and remove the
fence.
To install, insert the fence into the
adapters and lock both latches (A)
by turning to align Q with the arrow
on the adapter (B).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-8
Storage
Storing the Fence
D-Ring Sliders
1. Lift the cargo management
system cover.
For vehicles with a D-ring system,
there are four D-ring sliders that
move along rails. These can be
used as tie-downs when storing
cargo.
2. Release the cover from the prop
rod as described in the previous
steps.
The loop of the D-ring slider must
be facing inward towards the
storage area and the ring must be in
the up position for proper usage.
Insert the D-ring sliders (A) into the
channel (B) located in the middle of
the rail. Push the button to move the
D-ring slider along the rail.
3. Insert the top of the fence into
the lower two clips (A).
4. Turn the bottom of the fence up
and insert it into the upper two
clips (B).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storage
4-9
There are four openings in the
headliner, two located behind the
front seats and two behind the rear
seats.
Cargo Net
WARNING
{
Do not stack items higher than
the upper end of the cargo net or
hang anything from the net. Avoid
items that have sharp edges or
that apply excessive force to the
net. If items are not properly
stored, damage to the net could
occur and items can be thrown
about the vehicle. You or others
could be injured. Always store
items behind the net.
3. Mount the cargo net to the rear
seat tethers located on the back
of the folded down rear seats
and pull on the straps to tighten
the net.
For vehicles equipped with a cargo
net, it can be used to store light
loads, keeping them from falling
over or being thrown into the cabin
during heavy braking.
1. Insert the top corners of the
cargo net into the large opening
in the headliner and secure
by sliding them into the small
opening.
4. When the net is installed in
the headliner opening located
behind the rear seats, the rear
seat backs should be upright.
The net should not be overloaded or
used to store heavy loads.
2. The rear seat backs should
be folded down, when the
net is installed in the headliner
opening located behind the front
seats.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-10
Storage
Cargo Net Storage
The cargo net can be removed from
the vehicle and stored in the cargo
management system.
1. Disconnect the net from the roof
openings and the tethers.
2. Press the red button on the
center of the net to fold it in half.
3. Roll up the cargo net, storing it
into the attached vinyl bag.
4. Open the cargo management
system cover.
5. Mount the cargo net to the cargo
tie-downs located on the lower
side panels.
6. Pull on the straps to tighten
the net.
5. For vehicles with an inflator
kit, store the cargo net in the
available space next to the kit.
Convenience Net
This vehicle may have a
convenience net located in the rear
of the vehicle. Attach it to the cargo
tie-downs for storing small loads.
Do not use the net to store heavy
loads.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storage
4-11
Notice: Loading cargo on the
roof rack that weighs more than
100 kg (220 lbs) or hangs over the
rear or sides of the vehicle may
damage the vehicle. Load cargo
so that it rests evenly between
the crossrails, making sure to
fasten cargo securely.
fastened. Loading cargo on the roof
rack will make the vehicle’s center
of gravity higher. Avoid high speeds,
sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden
braking or abrupt maneuvers,
otherwise it may result in loss of
control. If driving for a long distance,
on rough roads, or at high speeds,
occasionally stop the vehicle to
make sure the cargo remains in its
place. Do not exceed the maximum
vehicle capacity when loading the
vehicle. For more information on
vehicle capacity and loading, see
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑12.
Roof Rack System
WARNING
{
If something is carried on top of
the vehicle that is longer or wider
than the roof rack— like paneling,
plywood, or a mattress— the wind
can catch it while the vehicle is
being driven. The item being
carried could be violently torn off,
and this could cause a collision,
and damage the vehicle. Never
carry something longer or wider
than the roof rack on top of the
vehicle unless using a GM
Certified accessory carrier.
For vehicles with a roof rack, the
rack can be used to load items.
For roof racks that do not have
cross rails included, GM Certified
cross rails can be purchased as
an accessory. See your dealer for
additional information.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo
when driving, check to make sure
cross rails and cargo are securely
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-12
Storage
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-1
Fuel Economy Gauge
Adaptive Forward Lighting
Instruments and
Controls
(3.0L Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Turbo Gauge (2.8L Only) . . . . 5-14
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-15
Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-17
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-19
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Brake System Warning
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Electric Parking Brake
(AFL) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-28
Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Controls
Information Displays
Driver Information
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-3
Rear Window Wiper/
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Vehicle Messages
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Battery Voltage and Charging
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Brake System Messages . . . . 5-33
Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-34
Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Engine Cooling System
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Headlamp Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Clock (Analog Clock) . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Clock (Digital Clock) . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . 5-24
Traction Control System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-35
Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-36
Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-36
Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-36
Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Object Detection System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Ride Control System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 5-25
Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-26
Fuel Economy Light . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-27
Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-2
Instruments and Controls
Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-38
Safety Belt Messages . . . . . . . 5-38
Anti-Theft Alarm System
3. Pull or push the steering wheel
closer or away from you.
Controls
4. Pull the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in place.
Steering Wheel
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-38 Adjustment
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.
Starting the Vehicle
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-39
Vehicle Reminder
Steering Wheel Controls
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-40
Vehicle Personalization
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-40
Universal Remote System
Universal Remote System . . . 5-46
Universal Remote System
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Universal Remote System
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel up
or down.
Use these controls, if equipped, to
make audio adjustments at the
steering wheel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-3
Recognition) on page 7‑57,
the OnStar Owner's guide,
or the separate navigation
manual for more information.
y / z : Press the y button to
select the next favorite radio station
or next CD, DVD, if equipped,
or MP3 track.
Windshield Wiper/Washer
/ c (End Call / Mute): Press to
silence the vehicle speakers only.
Press again to turn the sound
on. For vehicles with OnStar
or Bluetooth systems, press to
reject an incoming call, or end
a current call.
Press the z button to select the
previous favorite radio station or
previous CD, DVD, if equipped,
or MP3 track.
The windshield wiper/washer lever
is located on the right side of the
steering column. With the ignition
in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/
START, move the windshield wiper
lever to select the wiper speed.
+ x − (Volume): Press + to
increase the volume, press − to
decrease the volume.
SRCE: Press to select an audio
source.
b / g (Push to Talk): For vehicles
with an OnStar®, Bluetooth®,
or navigation system, press
to interact with those systems.
See Bluetooth (Overview ) on
page 7‑51 or Bluetooth
Horn
2: Fast wipes.
1: Slow wipes.
Press near the horn symbols or
press on the steering wheel pad to
sound the horn.
(Infotainment Controls) on
page 7‑52 or Bluetooth (Voice
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-4
Instruments and Controls
Wipe Parking
& (Adjustable Interval Wipes):
If the ignition is turned LOCK/OFF
Turn the & band up for more
frequent wipes or down for less
frequent wipes. If the vehicle
has Rainsense™, see following
Rainsense™ information.
while the wipers are on 1, 2 or &,
they will immediately stop.
If the windshield wiper lever is then
moved to OFF before the driver
door is opened or within 10 minutes,
the wipers will restart and move to
the base of the windshield.
& (Rainsense Wipe Sensitivity
Control): Move the windshield
wiper lever to &. Turn the band
on the wiper lever to adjust the
sensitivity.
If the ignition is turned to LOCK/
OFF while the wipers are performing
wipes due to windshield wash, the
wipers continue to run until they
reach the base of the windshield.
Turn the band up for more
sensitivity to moisture.
( (Off): Turns the wipers off.
8 (Mist): Single wipe, briefly
move the wiper lever down. Several
wipes, hold the wiper lever down.
Turn the band down for less
sensitivity to moisture.
Rainsense™
For vehicles with Rainsense,
To deactivate Rainsense, move
the windshield wiper lever out
a sensor located near the top
center of the windshield detects the
amount of water on the windshield
and automatically controls the
frequency of the windshield wiper.
Clear snow and ice from the wiper
blades before using them. If frozen
to the windshield, carefully loosen
or thaw them. Damaged blades
should be replaced. See Wiper
Blade Replacement on page 10‑31.
of & position.
Keep this area of the windshield
clear of debris to allow for best
system performance.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the
wiper motor.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-5
Wiper Arm Assembly Protection
Windshield Washer
Rear Window
Wiper/Washer
The rear wiper controls are on the
end of the windshield wiper lever.
When using an automatic car wash,
move the windshield wiper lever to
the OFF position. This disables the
automatic Rainsense windshield
wipes and/or rear wipers.
Pull the lever toward you to spray
washer fluid on the windshield.
The spray continues until the lever
is released. The wipers will run a
few times. See Washer Fluid on
page 10‑24 for information on
filling the windshield washer fluid
reservoir.
With Rainsense, if the transmission
is in N (Neutral) and the vehicle
speed is very slow, the wipers will
automatically stop at the base of
the windshield.
WARNING
{
The wiper operations return to
normal when the transmission is no
longer in N (Neutral) or the vehicle
speed has increased.
In freezing weather, do not
use your washer until the
windshield is warmed. Otherwise
the washer fluid can form ice on
the windshield, blocking your
vision.
Press the upper or lower portion of
the button to control the rear wiper
and rear wiper delay.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-6
Instruments and Controls
The system turns off when the
button is returned to the middle
position.
If the rear wiper control is off, the
shift lever is in R (Reverse) and the
front windshield wiper is performing
interval wipes, then the rear wiper
automatically performs interval
wipes.
Headlamp Washer
For vehicles with headlamp
washers, they are located to
the side of the headlamps.
Z (Rear Wiper): For continuous
rear window wipes.
The headlamps must be on in
order to use the headlamp washers.
If the headlamps are not on, only
the windshield will be washed.
5 (Rear Wiper Delay): Sets a
delay between wipes.
The windshield washer reservoir is
used for the windshield and the rear
window. Check the fluid level in the
reservoir if either washer is not
working. See Washer Fluid on
page 10‑24.
= (Rear Washer): Push the
windshield wiper lever forward
to spray washer fluid on the rear
window. The lever automatically
returns to its original position when
released.
Pull the wiper lever towards
you and hold briefly to activate.
The headlamp washers will spray
once, pause, and spray again. The
headlamp washer will spray again
after five windshield wash cycles.
WARNING
{
Reverse Gear Wipes
In freezing weather, do not
use your washer until the
windshield is warmed. Otherwise
the washer fluid can form ice on
the windshield, blocking your
vision.
If the rear wiper control is off,
the rear wiper will automatically
operate continuously when the
shift lever is in R (Reverse) and
the front windshield wiper is
performing low or high speed wipes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
Clock (Analog Clock)
5-7
See Washer Fluid on page 10‑24 for
information on filling the windshield
washer fluid.
Avoid covering the GPS antenna
for long periods of time with objects
that may interfere with the antenna's
ability to receive a satellite signal.
See Multi-Band Antenna on
The analog clock is located on the
instrument panel above the radio.
The clock is not connected with any
other vehicle system and runs by
itself. To adjust the clock:
WARNING
{
page 7‑19 for the location of the
vehicle's antennas. The compass
system is designed to operate for a
certain number of miles or degrees
of turn before needing a signal
from the GPS satellites. When the
compass display shows CAL, drive
the vehicle for a short distance in
an open area where it can receive
a GPS signal. The compass system
will automatically determine when
GPS signal is restored and provide
a heading again. See Compass
Messages on page 5‑34 for more
information on the messages that
may be displayed for the compass.
In freezing weather, do not
use your washer until the
windshield is warmed. Otherwise
the washer fluid can form ice on
the windshield, blocking your
vision.
1. Locate the adjustment buttons
directly below the clock face.
2. Push and hold either adjustment
button to advance or reverse the
clock hands. Holding the buttons
down will cause the clock to
advance faster. Release the
buttons before reaching the
desired time.
Compass
The vehicle may have a compass
display on the Driver Information
Center (DIC). The compass
receives its heading and other
information from Global Positioning
System (GPS) antenna, StabiliTrak,
and vehicle speed information.
3. Push and release the buttons to
increase the time by one minute
increments until the desired time
is reached.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-8
Instruments and Controls
Setting the Time and Date
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Time and Date Settings.
3. Select Set Time or Set Date.
Setting the Month & Day
Format
Clock (Digital Clock)
The infotainment system controls
are used to access the time and
date settings through the menu
system. See Operation on page 7‑7
for information about how to use
the menu system. See the separate
navigation system manual for
instructions on how to operate the
digital clock for the navigation
system.
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Time and Date Settings.
3. Highlight Month & Day Format.
4. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
adjust the highlighted value.
4. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
to select MM/DD (month/day) or
DD/MM (day/month).
5. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
to select the next value.
Setting the Auto Time Adjust
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Time and Date Settings.
3. Highlight Auto Time Adjust.
6. To save the time or date
and return to the Time and
Date Settings menu, press
To turn the digital clock on or off:
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Time and Date Settings.
3. Select Clock Displayed.
the 0 BACK button at any time
or press the MENU/SELECT
knob after adjusting the minutes
or year.
4. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
to turn Auto Time Adjust on
or off.
4. Press MENU/SELECT to turn
the clock on or off.
Setting the 12/24 Hour Format
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Time and Date Settings.
3. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format.
4. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
to select the 12 hour or 24 hour
display format.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-9
battery. Power is always supplied
Power Outlets
The accessory power outlets can be
used to plug in electrical equipment,
such as a cell phone or MP3 player.
Cigarette Lighter
There may be a cigarette lighter
located under the climate control
to the rear cargo outlet. Always
unplug electrical equipment when
not in use and do not plug in
equipment that exceeds the
maximum 20 ampere rating.
system, inside the front storage bin.
The vehicle has four accessory
power outlets. The power outlets
located below the climate control
system inside the front storage bin,
inside the center floor console,
and on the rear of the center floor
console are powered while the
vehicle is in ON/RUN/START or
ACC/ACCESSORY mode, or until
the driver door is opened within
10 minutes of turning off the vehicle.
To activate the cigarette lighter,
push it into the heating element and
let go. The lighter pops out when it
is ready to be used.
Certain accessory power plugs
may not be compatible with the
accessory power outlet and could
overload vehicle or adapter fuses.
If a problem is experienced, see
your dealer.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter
in while it is heating does not let
the lighter back away from the
heating element when it is hot.
Damage from overheating can
occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be
When adding electrical equipment,
be sure to follow the proper
installation instructions included
with the equipment. See Add-On
Electrical Equipment on page 9‑62.
The power outlet located in the rear
cargo area is powered at all times.
blown. Do not hold a cigarette
lighter in while it is heating.
Notice: Hanging heavy
equipment from the power
There is a small cap that must be
removed to access the accessory
power outlet. When not using the
outlet be sure to cover it with the
protective cap.
outlet can cause damage not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
The power outlets are designed
for accessory power plugs only,
such as cell phone charge cords.
Notice: Leaving electrical
equipment plugged in for an
extended period of time while
the vehicle is off will drain the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-10
Instruments and Controls
Gauges can indicate when there
could be a problem with a vehicle
function. Often gauges and warning
lights work together to indicate a
problem with the vehicle.
Ashtrays
Warning Lights,
Gauges, and
Indicators
Warning lights and gauges can
signal that something is wrong
before it becomes serious enough
to cause an expensive repair or
replacement. Paying attention to
the warning lights and gauges
could prevent injury.
There may be an ashtray located
under the climate control system
on the instrument panel. Press the
door to release the ashtray.
When one of the warning lights
comes on and stays on while
driving, or when one of the gauges
shows there may be a problem,
check the section that explains what
to do. Follow this manual's advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly
and even dangerous.
To empty the ashtray, remove it
from the instrument panel by holding
the edges and pulling straight out.
To reinstall, push the tray back into
place.
There may also be ashtrays located
on the center floor console behind
the shift lever and in the rear doors.
Warning lights come on when there
could be a problem with a vehicle
function. Some warning lights come
on briefly when the engine is started
to indicate they are working.
Notice: If papers, pins, or other
flammable items are put in the
ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite
them and possibly damage the
vehicle. Never put flammable
items in the ashtray.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-11
Instrument Cluster
English Shown, Metric Similar
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-12
Instruments and Controls
Speedometer
Tachometer
Fuel Gauge
The speedometer shows the
vehicle's speed in either kilometers
per hour (km/h) or miles per
hour (mph).
The tachometer displays the
engine speed in revolutions per
minute (rpm).
Notice: If the engine is operated
with the tachometer in the shaded
warning area, the vehicle could
be damaged, and the damages
would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Do not operate
the engine with the tachometer
in the shaded warning area.
Odometer
The odometer shows how far the
vehicle has been driven, in either
kilometers or miles.
This vehicle has a tamper-resistant
odometer. If the vehicle needs a
new odometer installed, the new
one is set to the mileage of the old
odometer. If this is not possible, it is
set at zero and a label is put on the
driver door to show the old mileage
reading.
Metric
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-13
Here are four things that some
owners ask about. None of these
show a problem with the fuel gauge:
Fuel Economy Gauge
(3.0L Only)
.
At the service station, the fuel
pump shuts off before the gauge
reads full.
.
It takes a little more or less
fuel to fill up than the gauge
indicated. For example, the
gauge may have indicated the
tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than
half the tank's capacity to fill
the tank.
English
When the ignition is on, the fuel
gauge indicates about how much
fuel is left in the tank.
.
The gauge moves a little while
turning a corner or speeding up.
Metric
An arrow on the fuel gauge
indicates the side of the vehicle
the fuel door is on.
.
The gauge takes a few seconds
to stabilize after the ignition is
turned on, and goes back to
empty when the ignition is
turned off.
When the indicator nears empty,
the low fuel light comes on. There
still is a little fuel left, but the vehicle
should be refueled soon.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-14
Instruments and Controls
Turbo Gauge (2.8L Only)
When the needle is at rest at
the left of the gauge, turbo is not
being used.
As the accelerator peddle is
pressed the needle may move
to the right. This is normal and
means that the vehicle is using
turbo power. Under normal
conditions the needle will not
display a reading in the red.
Once the driver eases off
the accelerator pedal or the
transmission shifts, the needle
moves back into the left area
of the gauge.
English
The gauge shows the fuel usage
that the vehicle is currently
achieving in MPG and in liters
For vehicles with a turbo gauge, it
indicates when the vehicle is using
turbo power.
per 100 kilometers (¹/100 km).
MIN/20: Is when the least efficient
fuel economy usually occurs during
acceleration or when idling.
MAX/¹/100: Is when the best fuel
economy is being achieved.
This gauge moves often as it is an
instantaneous calculation based on
current driving conditions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-15
Engine Coolant
Safety Belt Reminders
Temperature Gauge
Driver Safety Belt Reminder
Light
There is a driver safety belt
reminder light on the instrument
panel cluster.
English
This gauge measures the
temperature of the vehicle's engine.
When the engine is started this
light and a chime come on and stay
on for several seconds to remind
drivers to fasten their safety belts.
The light also begins to flash.
Metric
If the indicator needle moves into
the shaded area, the engine is
too hot.
If the vehicle has been operating
under normal driving conditions, pull
off the road, stop the vehicle and
turn off the engine as soon as
possible.
This cycle repeats if the driver
remains unbuckled and the vehicle
is moving.
If the driver safety belt is already
buckled, neither the light nor chime
come on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-16
Instruments and Controls
If the passenger safety belt is
buckled, neither the chime nor the
light comes on.
Passenger Safety Belt
Reminder Light
Second Row Passenger Belt
Reminder Light
The front passenger safety belt
warning light and chime may turn on
if an object is put on the seat such
as a briefcase, handbag, grocery
bag, laptop or other electronic
device. To turn off the warning light
and/or chime, remove the object
from the seat or buckle the
When the engine is started this light
and the chime come on and stay on
for several seconds to remind the
passenger to fasten their safety belt.
The light also begins to flash.
When the engine is started and the
Trip/Fuel display is chosen, three
gray seatbelt symbols come on
and stay on for several seconds
on the top of the Driver information
Center (DIC) to remind passengers
to fasten their safety belts.
safety belt.
This cycle repeats if the passenger
remains unbuckled and the vehicle
is moving.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-17
If the Vehicle Information display
is selected, a full page screen
displays at start-up that has the
three seatbelt symbols.
Airbag Readiness Light
WARNING
{
This light shows if there is an
electrical problem. The system
check includes the airbag sensor,
the pretensioners, the airbag
modules, the wiring, and the crash
sensing and diagnostic module.
For more information on the airbag
system, see Airbag System on
page 3‑30.
If the airbag readiness light stays
on after the vehicle is started or
comes on while driving, it means
the airbag system might not be
working properly. The airbags in
the vehicle might not inflate in a
crash, or they could even inflate
without a crash. To help avoid
injury, have the vehicle serviced
right away.
Once the passenger seatbelt is
buckled, the corresponding seat
belt symbol in the DIC turns green.
There are no seat position sensors
in the seat. If a seatbelt is not
initially buckled, the cluster
continues to show the gray
seatbelt icon.
While the vehicle is moving, if a
second row passenger that was
previously buckled becomes
unbuckled, a full screen warning
displays with the corresponding
seat belt indicator flashing red.
A chime may sound.
The airbag readiness light comes on
and stays on for several seconds
when the vehicle is started.
Acknowledge warning messages by
pressing any of the DIC switches.
Then the light goes out.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-18
Instruments and Controls
When the vehicle is started, the
passenger airbag status indicator
will light ON and OFF, or the symbol
for on and off, for several seconds
as a system check. If you are using
remote start, if equipped, to start the
vehicle from a distance you may not
see the system check. Then, after
several more seconds, the status
indicator will light either ON or OFF,
or either the on or off symbol to let
you know the status of the right front
passenger frontal and seat‐mounted
side impact airbag.
If, after several seconds, both
status indicator lights remain on,
or if there are no lights at all, there
may be a problem with the lights
or the passenger sensing system.
See your dealer for service.
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator
The vehicle has a passenger
sensing system. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 3‑39
for important safety information.
The overhead console has a
passenger airbag status indicator.
WARNING
{
If the airbag readiness light ever
comes on and stays on, it means
that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others,
have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 5‑17 for more
information, including important
safety information.
If the word ON or the on symbol is
lit on the passenger airbag status
indicator, it means that the right
front passenger frontal airbag and
seat‐mounted side impact airbag
are enabled (may inflate).
United States
If the word OFF or the off symbol
is lit on the passenger airbag
status indicator, it means that the
passenger sensing system has
turned off the right front passenger
frontal and seat‐mounted side
impact airbag.
Canada and Mexico
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-19
If the light stays on, or comes
on while driving, there may be a
problem with the electrical charging
system. Have it checked by your
dealer. Driving while this light is on
could drain the battery.
Charging System Light
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp
A computer system called OBD II
(On-Board Diagnostics-Second
Generation) monitors operation
of the fuel, ignition, and emission
control systems. It ensures that
emissions are at acceptable levels
for the life of the vehicle, helping to
produce a cleaner environment.
When this light comes on, the
Driver Information Center (DIC)
also displays a message.
The charging system light comes on
briefly when the ignition is turned
on, but the engine is not running, as
a check to show the light is working.
The light turns off when the engine
is started. If it does not, have the
vehicle serviced by your dealer.
See Battery Voltage and Charging
Messages on page 5‑33.
If a short distance must be driven
with the light on, be sure to turn off
all accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
This light should come on when the
ignition is on, but the engine is not
running, as a check to show it is
working. If it does not, have the
vehicle serviced by your dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-20
Instruments and Controls
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
comes on and stays on while the
engine is running, this indicates that
there is an OBD II problem and
service is required.
Notice: Modifications made
to the engine, transmission,
exhaust, intake, or fuel system
of the vehicle or the replacement
of the original tires with other
than those of the same Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) can
affect the vehicle's emission
controls and can cause this
light to come on. Modifications
to these systems could lead
to costly repairs not covered
by the vehicle warranty. This
could also result in a failure
to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance
To prevent more serious damage to
the vehicle:
.
Reduce vehicle speed.
.
Avoid hard accelerations.
.
Avoid steep uphill grades.
Malfunctions often are indicated by
the system before any problem is
apparent. Being aware of the light
can prevent more serious damage
to the vehicle. This system assists
the service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
.
If towing a trailer, reduce the
amount of cargo being hauled
as soon as it is possible.
If the light continues to flash, when
it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle.
Find a safe place to park the
vehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait at
least 10 seconds, and restart the
engine. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps and see
your dealer for service as soon as
possible.
Notice: If the vehicle is
continually driven with this light
on, after a while, the emission
controls might not work as well,
the vehicle fuel economy might
not be as good, and the engine
might not run as smoothly.
This could lead to costly repairs
that might not be covered by
the vehicle warranty.
test. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 10‑3.
This light comes on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
Light On Steady: An emission
control system malfunction has
been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be
required.
Light Flashing: A misfire condition
has been detected. A misfire
increases vehicle emissions and
could damage the emission control
system on the vehicle. Diagnosis
and service might be required.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
Emissions Inspection and
5-21
.
Make sure to fuel the vehicle
The following may correct an
emissions system malfunction:
with quality fuel. Poor fuel quality
causes the engine not to run as
efficiently as designed and can
cause: stalling after start-up,
stalling when the vehicle is
Maintenance Programs
.
Make sure the fuel cap is fully
Some state/provincial and local
governments may have programs
to inspect the on-vehicle emission
control equipment. For the
inspection, the emission system
test equipment is connected
to the vehicle’s Data Link
installed. See Filling the Tank on
page 9‑52. The diagnostic
system can determine if the
fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or
missing fuel cap allows fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap
properly installed should turn
the light off.
changed into gear, misfiring,
hesitation on acceleration,
or stumbling on acceleration.
These conditions might go away
once the engine is warmed up.
Connector (DLC).
If one or more of these
conditions occurs, change
the fuel brand used. It will
require at least one full tank
of the proper fuel to turn the
light off.
.
Make sure the electrical system
is not wet. The system could be
wet if the vehicle was driven
through a deep puddle of water.
The condition is usually
corrected when the electrical
system dries out. A few driving
trips should turn the light off.
See Recommended Fuel on
page 9‑47.
The DLC is under the instrument
panel to the left of the steering
wheel. See your dealer if assistance
is needed.
If none of the above have made
the light turn off, your dealer can
check the vehicle. The dealer
has the proper test equipment
and diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems
that might have developed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-22
Instruments and Controls
The vehicle may not pass
inspection if:
Brake System Warning
Light
WARNING
{
.
The malfunction indicator lamp is
The brake system might not be
working properly if the brake
system warning light is on.
Driving with the brake system
warning light on can lead to a
crash. If the light is still on after
the vehicle has been pulled off
the road and carefully stopped,
have the vehicle towed for
service.
The vehicle brake system
on with the engine running, or if
the light does not come on when
the ignition is turned to ON/RUN
while the engine is off.
consists of two hydraulic circuits.
If one circuit is not working, the
remaining circuit can still work to
stop the vehicle. For normal braking
performance, both circuits need to
be working.
.
The critical emission control
systems have not been
completely diagnosed by the
system. This can happen if
the battery has recently been
replaced or if the battery has
run down. The diagnostic
system evaluates critical
emission control systems
during normal driving. This can
take several days of routine
driving. If this has been done
and the vehicle still does not
pass the inspection, your dealer
can prepare the vehicle for
inspection.
If the warning light comes on, there
is a brake problem. Have the brake
system inspected right away.
If the light comes on while driving,
a chime sounds. Pull off the road
and stop. The pedal might be
harder to push or go closer to the
floor. It might also take longer to
stop. If the light is still on, have
the vehicle towed for service.
See Towing the Vehicle on
page 10‑98.
Metric
English
The brake indicator light should
come on briefly as the engine is
started. If it does not come on have
the vehicle serviced by your dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-23
If the light does not come on,
or remains flashing, see your dealer.
Electric Parking Brake
Light
Antilock Brake System
(ABS) Warning Light
Metric
English
For vehicles with the Electric Park
Brake (EPB), the brake warning
light should come on briefly when as
the engine is started. If it does not
come on, have the vehicle serviced
by your dealer.
For vehicles with the Antilock Brake
System (ABS), this light comes on
briefly when the engine is started.
For vehicles with the Electric Park
Brake (EPB), this light should come
on briefly as the engine is started.
If it does not come on, have the
vehicle serviced by your dealer.
If the light does not come on, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn if
there is a problem.
If this light comes on there is a
problem with a system on the
vehicle that is causing the park
brake system to work at a reduced
level. The vehicle can still be driven,
but should be taken to a dealer as
soon as possible. See Parking
Brake on page 9‑31 for more
information.
The park brake status light comes
on when the brake is applied. If the
light continues flashing after the
park brake is released, or while
driving, there is a problem with the
Electric Parking Brake system.
A SERVICE PARKING BRAKE
message may also display in the
Driver Information Center (DIC).
See Brake System Messages on
page 5‑33 for more information.
If the ABS light comes on and stays
on while driving, stop as soon as
possible and turn the ignition off.
Start the engine again to reset the
system. If the light stays on after
driving at a speed above 20 km/h
(13 mph), see your dealer for
service. A chime may also sound
when the light comes on steady.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-24
Instruments and Controls
StabiliTrak® OFF Light
If the regular brake system warning
light is not on, the vehicle still has
brakes, but not antilock brakes.
If the regular brake system warning
light is also on, the vehicle does not
have antilock brakes and there is
a problem with the regular brakes.
See Brake System Warning Light on
page 5‑22.
The traction off light comes on when
the Traction Control System (TCS)
has been turned off by pressing and
releasing the traction control button.
This light and the StabiliTrak Off
light come on when StabiliTrak is
turned off.
If the Traction Control System (TCS)
is off, wheelspin is not limited.
Adjust driving accordingly.
This light comes on when the
See Brake System Messages on
page 5‑33 for all brake‐related DIC
messages.
StabiliTrak system is turned off by
pressing the StabiliTrak/TCS button.
If the Traction Control System (TCS)
is off, wheel spin is not limited.
See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 9‑34 and StabiliTrak®
System on page 9‑35 for more
information.
Traction Off Light
When the StabiliTrak system is off,
the system does not assist in
controlling the vehicle. Adjust
driving accordingly.
The warning light goes off when
traction control and the StabiliTrak
system are enabled.
See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 9‑34 and StabiliTrak®
System on page 9‑35 for more
information.
This light comes on briefly while
starting the engine. If it does not,
have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer. If the system is working
normally, the indicator light then
turns off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-25
If the indicator/warning light is on
and flashing, the TCS and/or the
StabiliTrak system is actively
working.
See StabiliTrak® System on
page 9‑35 and Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 9‑34 for
more information.
When the Light is On Steady
Traction Control System
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light
This indicates that one or more of
the tires are significantly
underinflated.
A tire pressure message can
accompany the light. See Tire
Messages on page 5‑39 for more
information. Stop as soon as
possible, and inflate the tires to
the pressure value shown on the
Tire and Loading Information Label.
See Tire Pressure on page 10‑61
for more information.
Tire Pressure Light
The StabiliTrak system or the
Traction Control System (TCS)
indicator/warning light come on
briefly when the engine is started.
If the light does not come on, have
the vehicle serviced by the dealer.
If the system is working normally,
the indicator light turns off.
When the Light Flashes First and
Then is On Steady
This indicates that there may be
a problem with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System. The light flashes
for about a minute and stays on
steady for the remainder of the
ignition cycle. This sequence
repeats with every ignition cycle.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
For vehicles with a Tire Pressure
Monitor System, this light comes on
briefly when the engine is started.
It provides information about tire
pressures and the Tire Pressure
Monitor System.
If the light is on and not flashing, the
TCS, and potentially the StabiliTrak
system, have been disabled. A DIC
message may display. Check the
DIC messages to determine which
feature(s) is no longer functioning
and whether the vehicle requires
service.
Operation on page 10‑64 for
more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-26
Instruments and Controls
Engine Oil Pressure Light
Fuel Economy Light
WARNING
{
Do not keep driving if the oil
pressure is low. The engine can
become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check
the oil as soon as possible and
have the vehicle serviced.
The oil pressure light should come
on briefly as the engine is started.
If it does not come on have the
vehicle serviced by your dealer.
For vehicles with the fuel economy
mode light, it comes on when the
eco (economy) switch, located
next to the shifter, is pressed.
Press the switch again to turn off
the light and exit the fuel saver
mode. See Driving for Better Fuel
Economy on page 1‑25 for more
information.
If the light comes on and stays on, it
means that oil is not flowing through
the engine properly. The vehicle
could be low on oil and might have
some other system problem. See
your dealer.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil
maintenance can damage the
engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always follow the maintenance
schedule for changing engine oil.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-27
Low Fuel Warning Light
Security Light
Adaptive Forward
Lighting (AFL) Light
This light is located near the fuel
gauge and comes on briefly when
the ignition is turned on as a check
to show it is working.
This light flashes when the security
system is activated.
This light comes on solid when
there is a problem with the
For more information, see Vehicle
Security on page 2‑19.
Adaptive Forward Lighting system
and flashes when the system is
switching between lighting modes.
See Adaptive Forward Lighting
(AFL) on page 6‑3 for more
information.
It also comes on when the fuel tank
is low on fuel. The light turns off
when fuel is added. If it does not,
have the vehicle serviced.
High-Beam On Light
This light comes on when the
high-beam headlamps are in use.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer on page 6‑2 for more
information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-28
Instruments and Controls
Front Fog Lamp Light
Cruise Control Light
Information Displays
Driver Information
Center (DIC)
The DIC displays information about
the vehicle. It also displays warning
messages if a system problem is
detected. See Vehicle Messages on
page 5‑32 for more information.
All messages appear in the DIC
display located in the center of the
instrument panel cluster.
The fog lamp light comes on when
the fog lamps are in use.
The cruise control light is white
whenever the cruise control is set,
and turns green when the cruise
control is active.
The light goes out when the fog
lamps are turned off. See Front
Fog Lamps on page 6‑6 for more
information.
The light turns off when the cruise
control is turned off. See Cruise
Control on page 9‑38 for more
information.
The vehicle may also have features
that can be customized through the
controls on the radio. See Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑40 for
more information.
Lamps On Reminder
The DIC may display an indicator
when the Rainsense wipers are
active.
For vehicles with the lamps on
reminder light, it comes on when
the lights are in use.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
Trip/Fuel Menu Items
5-29
DIC Buttons
DIC Operation and Displays
The DIC has different displays
which can be accessed by using
the DIC buttons located on the turn
signal lever located on the left side
of the steering wheel. The DIC
displays trip, fuel, vehicle system
information, and warning messages
if a system problem is detected.
Press the MENU button on the
turn signal lever until Trip/Fuel
Information Menu is displayed.
Use the thumbwheel to scroll
through the following menu items:
.
Trip
.
Average Fuel Economy or
A. SET/CLR (Set/Clear): Use this
button to set or clear the menu
item when it is displayed.
Average Fuel Economy and
Instantaneous Fuel Economy
The bottom of the DIC display
shows what position the shift
lever is in and the odometer.
The direction the vehicle is driving
will be shown on the top of the
display.
.
Fuel Range
B. w x (Thumbwheel): Use
the thumbwheel to scroll
.
Fuel Used
.
Average Vehicle Speed
through the items in each menu.
A small marker will move up or
down the side of the display as
you scroll through the items.
This shows where each item
is in the menu.
.
Timer
.
Navigation Turn by Turn
.
Speed and Curve Assist
.
Digital Speedometer
C. MENU: Press this button to get
to the Trip/Fuel Menu and the
Vehicle Information Menu.
.
Blank
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-30
Instruments and Controls
Trip
100 kilometers (L/100 km) or miles
Average Vehicle Speed
per gallon (mpg). This number
reflects only the fuel economy
that the vehicle has right now
and changes frequently as driving
conditions change. Unlike average
economy, this display cannot be
reset.
The Trip display shows the current
distance traveled, in either
The Average Vehicle Speed
display shows the average speed
of the vehicle in kilometers per
hour (km/h) or miles per hour (mph).
This average is calculated based on
the various vehicle speeds recorded
since the last reset of this value.
The average speed can be reset by
pressing the SET/CLR button while
the Average Vehicle Speed display
is showing.
kilometers (km) or miles (mi) , since
the trip odometer was last reset.
The trip odometer can be reset to
zero by pressing the trip reset stem
or the SET/CLR button while the trip
odometer display is showing.
Fuel Range
Average Fuel Economy or
Average Fuel Economy and
Instantaneous Fuel Economy
The Fuel Range display shows the
approximate distance the vehicle
can be driven without refueling.
The fuel range estimate is based
on an average of the vehicle's fuel
economy over recent driving history
and the amount of fuel remaining in
the fuel tank. Fuel range cannot be
reset.
Timer
The Average Fuel Economy
display shows the approximate
average liters per 100 kilometers
(L/100 km) or miles per
gallon (mpg). This number is
calculated based on the number of
L/100 km (mpg) recorded since the
last time this menu item was reset.
The Average Fuel Economy can be
reset by pressing SET/CLR while
the Average Fuel Economy display
is showing.
This display can be used as a
timer. To start the timer, press
SET/CLR while Timer is displayed.
The display will show the amount
of time that has passed since the
timer was last reset. To stop the
timer, press SET/CLR briefly while
Elapsed Time is displayed. To reset
the timer to zero, press and hold
SET/CLR.
Fuel Used
The Fuel Used display shows
the approximate liters (L) or
gallons (gal) of fuel that have been
used since last reset. The fuel
used can be reset by pressing the
SET/CLR button while the Fuel
Used display is showing.
The Instantaneous Fuel Economy
display shows the current fuel
economy in either liters per
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-31
Turn by Turn
Remaining Oil Life
Vehicle Information Menu
Items
This display is used for the OnStar
or Navigation System Turn-by-Turn
guidance. See the OnStar Owner's
Guide or the Navigation manual,
if the vehicle has navigation, for
more information.
This display shows an estimate
of the oil's remaining useful life.
If REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% is
displayed, that means 99% of the
current oil life remains.
Press the MENU button on the
turn signal lever until Vehicle
Information Menu is displayed.
Use the thumbwheel to scroll
through the following menu items:
When the remaining oil life is low,
the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message will appear on the display.
See Engine Oil Messages on
page 5‑35. The oil should be
changed as soon as possible.
See Engine Oil on page 10‑10.
In addition to the engine oil life
system monitoring the oil life,
additional maintenance is
.
Speed and Curve Assist
Tire Pressure
.
This display will show the speed
limit or the advised speed as
determined by the information
provided by the navigation system.
If the map disc loaded in the
navigation system is out of date, this
display may not provide accurate
information. See the Navigation
manual for more information.
Remaining Oil Life
.
Battery Voltage
.
Unit
.
Blank
Tire Pressure
The display will show a vehicle
with the approximate pressures
of all four tires. Tire pressure is
displayed in either kilopascal (kPa)
or in pounds per square inch (psi).
See Tire Pressure Monitor System
on page 10‑63 and Tire Pressure
Monitor Operation on page 10‑64
for more information.
recommended in the Maintenance
Schedule in this manual. See
Scheduled Maintenance on
Digital Speedometer
page 11‑2 for more information.
The speedometer shows how
fast the vehicle is moving in either
kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles
per hour (mph). The speedometer
cannot be reset.
Remember, the Oil Life display
must be reset after each oil
change. It will not reset itself.
Also, be careful not to reset
the Oil Life display accidentally
at any time other than when
the oil has just been changed.
Blank Display
This display shows no information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-32
Instruments and Controls
It cannot be reset accurately
until the next oil change.
Unit
Vehicle Messages
Move the thumbwheel up or
down to switch between metric or
English when the Unit display is
active. Press SET/CLR to confirm
the setting. This will change the
displays on the cluster and DIC
to either metric or English
Messages displayed on the DIC
indicate the status of the vehicle or
some action that may be needed
to correct a condition. Multiple
messages may display one after
the other.
To reset the engine oil life system
press the SET/CLR button while
the Oil Life display is active.
See Engine Oil Life System on
page 10‑14.
Battery Voltage
The messages that do not
measurements.
This display, available on some
vehicles, shows the current battery
voltage. If the voltage is in the
normal range, the value will display.
For example, the display may
read Battery Voltage 15.0 Volts.
The vehicle's charging system
regulates voltage based on the
state of the battery. The battery
voltage can fluctuate while viewing
this information on the DIC. This is
normal. See Charging System Light
on page 5‑19 for more information.
If there is a problem with the battery
charging system, the DIC will
display a message. See Battery
Voltage and Charging Messages on
page 5‑33.
require immediate action can be
acknowledged and cleared by
pressing SET/CLR. The messages
that require immediate action cannot
be cleared until that action is
performed. All messages should be
taken seriously and clearing the
messages does not correct the
problem.
Blank Display
This display shows no information.
Compass
The vehicle may have a compass
display in the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See Compass on
page 5‑7.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-33
SERVICE BATTERY
CHARGING SYSTEM
RELEASE PARKING BRAKE
Battery Voltage and
Charging Messages
This message is displayed if the
electric parking brake is on while
the vehicle is in motion. Release it
before you attempt to drive. See
Parking Brake on page 9‑31 for
more information.
This message is displayed when
there is a fault in the battery
charging system. Take the vehicle
to your dealer for service.
BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
This message displays when
the vehicle has detected that the
battery voltage is dropping beyond
a reasonable point. The battery
saver system starts reducing certain
features of the vehicle that you may
be able to notice. At the point that
features are disabled, this message
is displayed. It means that the
vehicle is trying to save the charge
in the battery. Turn off unnecessary
accessories to allow the battery to
recharge.
Brake System Messages
SERVICE BRAKE ASSIST
BRAKE FLUID LOW
This message may be displayed
when there is a problem with
the brake boost assist system.
When this message is displayed,
the brake boost assist motor
might be heard operating and you
might notice pulsation in the brake
pedal. This is normal under these
conditions. Take the vehicle to your
dealer for service.
This message is displayed when the
brake fluid level is low. See Brake
Fluid on page 10‑26.
BRAKES OVERHEATED
This message is displayed when the
brakes are becoming overheated.
You may see this when driving on
hills. Shift to a lower gear.
LOW BATTERY
This message is displayed when the
battery voltage is low. See Battery
on page 10‑28 for more information.
SERVICE PARKING BRAKE
STEP ON BRAKE TO
RELEASE PARK BRAKE
This message is displayed when
there is a problem with the parking
brake. Take the vehicle to your
dealer for service.
This message is displayed if you
attempt to release the electric
parking brake without the brake
pedal applied. See Parking Brake
on page 9‑31 for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-34
Instruments and Controls
Compass Messages
Door Ajar Messages
Engine Cooling System
Messages
CAL
DOOR OPEN
A/C OFF DUE TO HIGH
ENGINE TEMP
This message is displayed when the
compass needs to be calibrated.
See Compass on page 5‑7.
A door open symbol will be
displayed on the DIC showing which
door is open. If the vehicle has been
shifted out of P (Park), a Door Open
message will also be displayed.
Close the door completely.
This message displays when
the engine coolant becomes
hotter than the normal operating
temperature. To avoid added
strain on a hot engine, the
air conditioning compressor
automatically turns off. When
the coolant temperature returns
to normal, the air conditioning
compressor turns back on. You can
continue to drive the vehicle.
– – –
Three dashes will be displayed if the
compass needs service. See your
dealer for service.
HOOD OPEN
This message will display along with
a hood open symbol when the hood
is open. Close the hood completely.
Cruise Control Messages
APPLY BRAKE BEFORE
CRUISE
POWER LIFTGATE
UNAVAILABLE
If this message displays when
attempting to activate cruise control,
apply the brake and then try again.
If this message continues to appear,
have the system repaired by your
dealer as soon as possible to avoid
damage to the engine.
This message will display if the
power liftgate encounters multiple
obstacles on the same power cycle.
After removing the obstructions, the
liftgate will resume normal power
operation.
CRUISE SET TO XXX
COOLANT LEVEL LOW ADD
COOLANT
This message will display when the
cruise control is set and shows the
speed it was set to. See Cruise
Control on page 9‑38 for more
information.
REAR ACCESS OPEN
This message will display if the
coolant is low. See Engine Coolant
on page 10‑19.
This message will display along with
a symbol when the liftgate is open.
Close the liftgate completely.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-35
ENGINE
OVERHEATED — IDLE
ENGINE
ENGINE OIL LOW — ADD OIL
Engine Oil Messages
This message displays when the
engine oil level is too low. Check
the oil level. See Engine Oil on
page 10‑10.
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
This message displays when the
engine oil needs to be changed.
When you change the engine oil,
be sure to reset the Oil Life System.
See Engine Oil Life System on
page 10‑14 and Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 5‑28 for
information on how to reset the
system. See Engine Oil on
This message displays when the
engine coolant temperature is too
hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to
idle until it cools down.
OIL PRESSURE LOW — STOP
ENGINE
ENGINE
OVERHEATED — STOP
ENGINE
This message displays if low oil
pressure levels occur. Stop the
vehicle as soon as safely possible
and do not operate it until the cause
of the low oil pressure has been
corrected. Check the oil as soon
as possible and have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer.
This message displays and a
page 10‑10 and Scheduled
Maintenance on page 11‑2
for more information.
continuous chime sounds if the
engine cooling system reaches
unsafe temperatures for operation.
Stop and turn off the vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so to avoid
severe damage. This message
clears when the engine has cooled
to a safe operating temperature.
ENGINE OIL HOT, IDLE
ENGINE
This message displays when the
engine oil temperature is too hot.
Stop and allow the vehicle to idle
until it cools down.
HIGH COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
This message displays if the coolant
temperature is hot. See Engine
Overheating on page 10‑22.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-36
Instruments and Controls
TIGHTEN GAS CAP
NUMBER OF KEYS
PROGRAMMED
Engine Power Messages
This message displays when the
fuel cap is not on tight. Tighten the
fuel cap.
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
This message displays when
programming new keys to the
vehicle.
This message displays when the
vehicle's engine power is reduced.
Reduced engine power can affect
the vehicle's ability to accelerate.
If this message is on, but there
is no reduction in performance,
proceed to your destination.
The performance may be reduced
the next time the vehicle is driven.
The vehicle may be driven at a
reduced speed while this message
is on, but maximum acceleration
and speed may be reduced.
Anytime this message stays on,
the vehicle should be taken to
your dealer for service as soon
as possible.
Key and Lock Messages
REMOTE LEFT IN VEHICLE
NO REMOTE DETECTED
This message displays when
leaving the vehicle with the RKE
transmitter still inside.
This message displays when trying
to start the vehicle if the keyless
access system does not detect a
RKE transmitter. The transmitter
battery may be weak. See “Starting
the Vehicle with a Low Transmitter
Battery” under Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System Operation on
page 2‑4.
REPLACE BATTERY IN
REMOTE KEY
This message displays when the
battery in the RKE transmitter needs
to be replaced.
NO REMOTE PRESS BRAKE
TO RESTART
This message is displayed if the
remote is no longer detected in the
vehicle. Press the brake pedal to
restart the vehicle.
Fuel System Messages
FUEL LEVEL LOW
This message displays when the
vehicle is low on fuel. Refuel as
soon as possible
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
SERVICE PARK ASSIST
5-37
XXX TURN INDICATOR
FAILURE
Lamp Messages
This message is displayed if there
is a problem with the park assist
system. Take the vehicle to your
dealer for service.
AFL (ADAPTIVE FORWARD
LIGHTING) LAMPS NEED
SERVICE
When one of the turn signals is
out, this message displays to show
which bulb needs to be replaced.
See your dealer to have the front
turn signal bulbs replaced. See Turn
Signal Lamps on page 10‑41 and
Replacement Bulbs on page 10‑45
for more information on the rear
turn signal bulb replacement.
This message displays when
the Adaptive Forward Lighting
(AFL) system is disabled and
needs service. See your dealer.
See Adaptive Forward Lighting
(AFL) on page 6‑3 for more
information.
Ride Control System
Messages
SERVICE REAR AXLE
This message displays when there
is a problem with the All-Wheel
Drive (AWD) System. See your
dealer for service.
TURN SIGNAL ON
AUTOMATIC LIGHT
CONTROL ON
This message is displayed if
the turn signal has been left on.
Turn off the turn signal.
This message is displayed when
the exterior lamp control is in AUTO
and the lights have turned on.
SERVICE STABILITRAK
This message displays if there
is a problem with the StabiliTrak®
system. See StabiliTrak® System on
page 9‑35.
Object Detection System
Messages
See Twilight Sentinel on page 6‑4.
AUTOMATIC LIGHT
CONTROL OFF
PARK ASSIST OFF
SERVICE SUSPENSION
SYSTEM
This message is displayed when the
park assist system has been turned
off. See Ultrasonic Parking Assist
on page 9‑40.
This message is displayed when
the exterior lamp control is in AUTO
and the lights have turned off.
This message displays if there is
a problem with the selective ride
control. See Selective Ride Control
on page 9‑37.
See Twilight Sentinel on page 6‑4.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-38
Instruments and Controls
SERVICE TRACTION
CONTROL
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON
Safety Belt Messages
This message is displayed if there is
a problem with the vehicle. Take the
vehicle to your dealer for service.
BUCKLE SEATBELT
This message displays when
there is a problem with the
Traction Control System (TCS).
See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 9‑34.
This message displays as a
reminder when the safety belt
is not buckled.
Starting the Vehicle
Messages
Anti-Theft Alarm System
Messages
SPORT MODE ON
PRESS BRAKE TO START
VEHICLE
This message displays when
Sport Mode has been activated.
See Selective Ride Control on
page 9‑37 and Manual Mode on
page 9‑28 for more information.
THEFT ATTEMPTED
This message is displayed when
attempting to start the vehicle
without first pressing the brake
pedal.
This message displays if the vehicle
detects a tamper condition.
Service Vehicle Messages
Airbag System Messages
SERVICE KEYLESS START
SYSTEM
SERVICE AC SYSTEM
SERVICE AIRBAG
This message is displayed if there is
a problem with the air conditioning
system. Take the vehicle to your
dealer for service.
This message is displayed if there
is a problem with the keyless start
system. Take the vehicle to your
dealer for service.
This message displays if there is
a problem with the airbag system.
Take the vehicle to your dealer for
service.
SERVICE POWER STEERING
This message is displayed if there is
a problem with the power steering
system. Take the vehicle to your
dealer for service.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-39
This message also displays
Tire Messages
Transmission Messages
LEFT FRONT, RIGHT FRONT,
LEFT REAR, or RIGHT REAR to
indicate the location of the low tire.
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR
SYSTEM
SERVICE TRANSMISSION
This message displays if there is
a problem with the transmission.
See your dealer.
The low tire pressure warning
light will also come on. See Tire
Pressure Light on page 5‑25.
This message displays if there is
a problem with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS). See Tire
Pressure Monitor Operation on
page 10‑64 for more information.
SHIFT TO PARK
If a tire pressure message appears
on the DIC, stop as soon as you
can. Inflate the tires by adding air
until the tire pressure is equal to the
values shown on the Tire Loading
and Information label. See Tires on
page 10‑54, Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑12, and Tire Pressure on
page 10‑61.
This message displays when the
transmission needs to be shifted to
P (Park). This may appear when
attempting to remove the key if the
vehicle is not in P (Park).
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
This message displays when
the system is learning new tires.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation on page 10‑64 for
more information.
TRANSMISSION HOT — IDLE
ENGINE
This message displays and a chime
sounds if the transmission fluid in
the vehicle gets hot. Driving with the
transmission fluid temperature high
can cause damage to the vehicle.
Stop the vehicle and let it idle to
allow the transmission to cool.
TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE
You can receive more than one tire
pressure message at a time. The
DIC also shows the tire pressure
values. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 5‑28.
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS), this
message displays when the
pressure in one or more of the
vehicle tires is low.
This message clears when the fluid
temperature reaches a safe level.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-40
Instruments and Controls
Entering the Personalization
Menus
Vehicle Reminder
Messages
Vehicle
Personalization
1. Press CONFIG to access the
Configuration Settings menu.
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE
WITH CARE
The audio system controls are
used to access the personalization
menus for customizing vehicle
features. Not all features are
available on every vehicle. Only the
features available on a particular
vehicle will be displayed on that
vehicle.
2. Turn the MENU / SELECT knob
to highlight Vehicle Settings.
This message is displayed when ice
conditions are possible.
3. Press the center of the
MENU / SELECT knob to select
the Vehicle Settings menu.
TURN WIPER CONTROL TO
INTERMITTENT FIRST
The following list of menu items will
be available:
This message is displayed when
attempting to adjust the intermittent
wiper speed without intermittent
selected on the wiper control.
See Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 5‑3.
CONFIG (Configuration): Press
to access the Configuration
Settings Menu.
.
Climate and Air Quality
.
Comfort and Convenience
MENU / SELECT Knob: Press
the center of this knob to enter
the menus and select menu items.
Turn the knob to scroll through the
menus.
.
Language
.
Lighting
Washer Fluid Messages
.
Power Door Locks
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD
FLUID
.
Remote Locking, Unlocking,
0 BACK: Press to exit or move
backwards in a menu.
Starting
This message will be displayed
when the washer fluid level is
low. For information on filling the
washer fluid, see Washer Fluid on
page 10‑24.
.
Return to Factory Settings
Turn the MENU / SELECT knob to
highlight the menu. Press the knob
to select it. Each of the menus is
detailed in the following information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-41
Air Quality Sensor
Remote Start Auto Heated Seats
Climate and Air Quality
This will allow you to select whether
the system will operate at high or
low sensitivity. Only vehicles with
the dual zone climate control will
have this option.
When on, this feature will turn the
heated seats on when using remote
start on cold days.
Select the Climate and Air Quality
menu and the following will be
displayed:
.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Remote Start Auto Heated
Seats is highlighted. Turn the knob
to select On or Off. Press the knob
to confirm and go back to the
last menu.
Auto Fan Speed
.
Air Quality Sensor
Press the MENU / SELECT
.
Remote Start Auto Seat Cool
knob when Air Quality Sensor
is highlighted to open the menu.
Turn the knob to highlight High or
Low Sensitivity. Press the knob to
confirm the selection and move
back to the last menu.
.
Remote Start Auto Heated Seats
.
Auto Defog
Auto Defog
.
Auto Rear Defog
This will allow you to turn the auto
defog on or off.
Auto Fan Speed
Remote Start Auto Seat Cool
This will allow you to select the
automatic fan speed. This feature
sets the climate control fan speed to
maintain the interior temperature.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Auto Defog is highlighted to
open the menu. Turn the knob to
highlight On or Off. Press the knob
to confirm the selection and move
back to the last menu.
When on, this feature will turn the
vented seats on when using remote
start on warm days.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Remote Start Auto Seat Cool
is highlighted. Turn the knob to
select On or Off. Press the knob
to confirm and go back to the
last menu.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Auto Fan Speed is highlighted
to open the menu. Turn the knob
to highlight High, Medium, or Low.
Press the knob to confirm the
selection and move back to the
last menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-42
Instruments and Controls
Auto Rear Defog
Easy Exit Driver Seat
Reverse Tilt Mirror
This will allow you to turn the auto
rear defog on or off.
This allows you to turn the easy
exit driver seat feature on or off.
When on, this feature will move the
drivers seat rearward upon turning
the ignition off and the driver door
opened. This may be performed to
make it easier to exit the vehicle.
See Power Seat Adjustment on
page 3‑4 for more information.
This allows you to turn the reverse
tilt mirror feature on or off. When
on, both the driver and passenger
mirrors will tilt downward when
vehicle is shifted to R (Reverse)
to improve visibility of the ground
near the rear wheels. They will
return to their previous driving
position when the vehicle is shifted
out of R (Reverse), the ignition is
turned to OFF, or the vehicle is left
in reverse.
Press the MENU / SELECT
knob when Auto Rear Defog is
highlighted to open the menu.
Turn the knob to highlight On or
Off. Press the knob to confirm the
selection and move back to the
last menu.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Easy Exit Driver Seat is
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
On or Off. Press the knob to confirm
and go back to the last menu.
Comfort and Convenience
Select the Comfort and
Convenience menu and the
following will be displayed:
Press the MENU / SELECT
knob when Reverse Tilt Mirror is
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
Driver & Passenger or Off. Press
the knob to confirm and go back to
the last menu.
.
Easy Exit Driver Seat
Chime Volume
.
Chime Volume
This allows the selection of the
chime volume level.
.
Reverse Tilt Mirror
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Chime Volume is highlighted.
Turn the knob to select Normal or
High. Press the knob to confirm and
go back to the last menu.
.
Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
Power Door Locks
5-43
Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear
Lighting
When on, and the front windshield
wipers are on, the rear window
wiper will turn on automatically
when the vehicle is shifted into
R (Reverse).
Select the Lighting menu and the
following will be displayed:
Select Power Door Locks and the
following will be displayed:
.
.
Vehicle Locator Lights
Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out
.
.
Exit Lighting
Auto Door Unlock
.
Delayed Door Lock
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear is
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
On or Off. Press the knob to confirm
and go back to the last menu.
Vehicle Locator Lights
This allows the vehicle locator lights
to be turned on or off.
Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out
When on, this feature will keep the
driver door from locking when the
door is open. If off is selected, the
Delayed Door Lock menu will be
available and the door will lock as
programmed through this menu.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Vehicle Locator Lights is
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
On or Off. Press the knob to confirm
and go back to the last menu.
Language
Select the Language menu and the
following will be displayed:
.
Press the MENU / SELECT
Exit Lighting
English
knob when Auto Door Unlock is
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
On or Off. Press the knob to confirm
and go back to the last menu.
.
This allows the selection of how
long the exterior lamps stay on
when leaving the vehicle when it is
dark outside.
French
.
Spanish
Turn the MENU / SELECT knob
to select the language. Press the
knob to confirm and go back to the
last menu.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Exit Lighting is highlighted.
Turn the knob to select Off,
30 Seconds, 1 Minute, or 2 Minutes.
Press the knob to confirm and go
back to the last menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-44
Instruments and Controls
Auto Door Unlock
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Delayed Door Lock is
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
On or Off. Press the knob to confirm
and go back to the last menu.
Unlock Feedback (Lights)
This allows selection of which of the
doors will automatically unlock when
the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
When on, the exterior lamps will
flash when unlocking the vehicle
with the RKE transmitter.
Press the MENU / SELECT
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Unlock Feedback (Lights) is
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
Flash Lights or Off. Press the knob
to confirm and go back to the
last menu.
Remote Lock/Unlock/Start
knob when Auto Door Unlock is
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
All Doors, Driver Door, or Off. Press
the knob to confirm and go back to
the last menu.
Select Remote Lock/Unlock/Start
and the following will be displayed:
.
Unlock Feedback (Lights)
.
Locking Feedback
Delayed Door Lock
Locking Feedback
.
Door Unlock Options
When on, this feature will delay
the locking of the doors until
This allows selection of what type of
feedback is given when locking the
vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
.
Passive Door Lock
five seconds after the last door is
closed. You will hear three chimes
to signal delayed locking is in use.
Pressing either the power lock
button or the lock button on the
RKE transmitter twice will override
the delayed locking feature and
immediately lock all of the doors.
.
Passive Door Unlock
Press the MENU / SELECT
knob when Locking Feedback
is highlighted. Turn the knob to
select Lights and Horn, Lights Only,
Horn Only, or Off. Press the knob
to confirm and go back to the
last menu.
.
Memory Remote Recall
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-45
Door Unlock Options
vehicle. It does not matter how far
Memory Remote Recall
away that the transmitter is from the
vehicle. This feature can also be
configured to chirp the horn when
the doors are passively locked.
This allows selection of which doors
will unlock when pressing the unlock
button on the RKE transmitter.
This allows the Memory Remote
Recall feature to be turned on or off.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Memory Remote Recall is
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
On or Off. Press the knob to confirm
and go back to the last menu.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Door Unlock Options is
highlighted. Turn the knob to
select All Doors or Driver Door Only.
When set to Driver Door Only, the
driver door will unlock the first time
the unlock button is pressed and all
doors will unlock when the button is
pressed a second time. When set
to All Doors, all of the doors will
unlock at the first press of the
unlock button. Press the knob
to confirm and go back to the
last menu.
Press the MENU/SELECT knob
when Passive Door Lock is
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
On With Chirp, On, or Off. Press the
knob to confirm and go back to the
last menu.
Return to Factory Settings
Select Return to Factory
Settings to return all of the vehicle
personalization to the default
settings. Turn the knob to select
Yes or No. Press the knob to
confirm and go back to the
last menu.
Passive Door Unlock
If the vehicle has the keyless
access system, this feature allows
you to select which doors will
automatically unlock when you open
the driver’s door with the keyless
access transmitter present.
Passive Door Lock
Press the MENU/SELECT knob
when Passive Door Unlock is
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
All Doors or Driver Door. Press the
knob to confirm and go back to the
last menu.
If the vehicle has the keyless
access system, when enabled,
this feature allows the doors to
lock after several seconds if all
doors are closed and at least one
keyless access transmitter has been
removed from the interior of the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-46
Instruments and Controls
This system provides a way to
replace up to three remote control
transmitters used to activate
devices such as garage door
openers, security systems, and
home automation devices.
Keep the original hand-held
transmitter for use in other vehicles
as well as for future Universal
Home Remote programming. It is
also recommended that upon the
sale of the vehicle, the programmed
Universal Home Remote buttons
be erased for security purposes.
See “Erasing Universal Home
Remote Buttons” later in this
section.
Universal Remote
System
See Radio Frequency
Statement on page 13‑20 for
information regarding Part 15
of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and
Industry Canada Standards
RSS-210/220/310.
Do not use the Universal Home
Remote with any garage door
opener that does not have the stop
and reverse feature. This includes
any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982.
When programming a garage door,
park outside of the garage. Park
directly in line with and facing the
garage door opener motor-head
or gate motor-head. Be sure that
people and objects are clear of
the garage door or gate being
programmed.
Universal Remote System
Programming
Read the instructions completely
before attempting to program
the Universal Home Remote.
Because of the steps involved, it
may be helpful to have another
person available to assist you with
programming the Universal Home
Remote.
It is recommended that a new
battery be installed in your
If the vehicle has this feature,
you will see these buttons with one
LED indicator next to them in the
headliner.
hand-held transmitter for quicker
and more accurate transmission
of the radio-frequency signal.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-47
2. At the same time, press
and hold both the hand-held
transmitter button and one
of the three Universal Home
Remote buttons to be used
to operate the garage door.
Do not release the Universal
Home Remote button or the
hand-held transmitter button
until the indicator light changes
from a slowly to a rapidly
flashing light. You now may
release both buttons.
(the button selected in Step 2)
while observing the indicator
light and garage door activation.
Programming the Universal
Home Remote System
For questions or help programming
the Universal Home Remote
System, call 1‐800‐355‐3515
or go to www.homelink.com.
.
If the indicator light stays
on continuously or the
garage door starts to move
when the Universal Home
Remote button is pressed
and released, then the
programming is complete.
There is no need to
Programming a garage door opener
involves time-sensitive actions, so
read the entire procedure before
starting. Otherwise, the device will
time out and the procedure will have
to be repeated.
continue programming
Steps 4 through 6.
Some entry gates and
garage door openers may
require substitution of Step 2
with the procedure noted in
“Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming” later in this
section.
To program up to three devices:
.
If the Universal Home
Remote indicator
1. Hold the end of your
light blinks rapidly for
two seconds, then turns
to a constant light and the
garage door does not
move, continue with the
programming Steps 4
through 6.
hand-held transmitter about
3 to 8 cm (1 to 3 in) away
from the Universal Home
Remote buttons while keeping
the indicator light in view.
The hand-held transmitter was
supplied by the manufacturer
of your garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit).
3. Press and hold for five seconds
the newly-trained Universal
Home Remote button
It may be helpful to have
another person assist with
the remaining Steps 4
through 6.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-48
Instruments and Controls
5. Firmly press and release the
The Universal Home Remote should
now activate the garage door.
“Learn” or “Smart” button. After
you press this button, you will
have 30 seconds to complete
Step 6.
To program the remaining two
Universal Home Remote buttons,
begin with Step 1 of “Programming
the Universal Home Remote
System.”
6. Immediately return to the
vehicle. Firmly press and hold
for two seconds the Universal
Home Remote button, selected
in Step 2 to control the garage
door, and then release it. If the
garage door does not move or
the lamp on the garage door
opener receiver (motor-head
unit) does not flash, press and
hold the same button a second
time for two seconds, and then
release it. Again, if the door
does not move or the garage
door lamp does not flash, press
and hold the same button a third
time for two seconds, and then
release.
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
If you have questions or need
help programming the Universal
Home Remote System, call
1‐800‐355‐3515 or go to
www.homelink.com.
“Learn” or “Smart” Buttons
4. After Steps 1 through 3 have
been completed, locate the
“Learn” or “Smart” button inside
the garage on the garage door
opener receiver (motor-head
unit). The name and color
of the button may vary by
manufacturer.
Canadian radio-frequency laws
require transmitter signals to time
out or quit after several seconds of
transmission. This may not be long
enough for the Universal Home
Remote to pick up the signal during
programming. Similarly, some U.S.
gate operators are manufactured to
time out in the same manner.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
Reprogramming a Single
5-49
If you live in Canada, or you are
having difficulty programming a
gate operator or garage door opener
by using the “Programming the
Universal Home Remote System”
procedures, regardless of where
you live, replace Step 2 under
“Programming the Universal Home
Remote System” with the following:
Universal Remote System
Operation
Universal Home Remote
Button
Using Universal Home Remote
To reprogram any of the three
Press and hold the appropriate
Universal Home Remote button
for at least half of a second.
Universal Home Remote buttons:
1. Press and hold the desired
Universal Home Remote button.
Do not release the button.
The indicator light will come on
while the signal is being transmitted.
2. Continue to press and hold
the Universal Home Remote
button while you press and
release every two seconds (cycle)
the hand-held transmitter button
until the frequency signal has
been successfully accepted by
the Universal Home Remote.
The Universal Home Remote
indicator light will flash slowly at
first and then rapidly. Proceed with
Step 3 under “Programming the
Universal Home Remote System”
to complete.
2. The indicator light will begin to
flash after 20 seconds. Without
releasing the button, proceed
with Step 1 of the section
Erasing Universal Home
Remote Buttons
All programmed buttons should be
erased when the vehicle is sold or
the lease ends.
“Programming the Universal
Home Remote System.”
If you have questions or need
help programming the Universal
Home Remote System,
To erase all programmed buttons on
the Universal Home Remote device:
1. Press and hold down the
2 outside buttons until the
indicator light begins to
flash, after 10 seconds.
call 1‐800‐355‐3515 or go to
www.homelink.com. You may also
call the customer assistance phone
number under Customer Assistance
Offices (U.S. and Canada) on
page 13‑5 or Customer Assistance
Offices (Mexico) on page 13‑5.
2. Release both buttons.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-50
Instruments and Controls
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lighting
6-1
Interior Lighting
Exterior Lighting
Lighting
Instrument Panel Illumination
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Exterior Lamp Controls
Exterior Lighting
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1
Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Adaptive Forward
Lighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Twilight Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-5
Turn and Lane-Change
Lighting Features
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Battery Load Management . . . . 6-8
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
The exterior lamps control is located
on the instrument panel to the left of
the steering column.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-2
Lighting
It controls the following systems:
; (Parking Lamps): Turns the
parking lamps on together with the
following:
Headlamp High/
Low-Beam Changer
2 3 Headlamp High/Low Beam
Changer: Push the turn signal/lane
change lever away from you to turn
the high beams on.
.
Headlamps
.
Taillamps
.
Taillamps
.
.
.
.
Parking Lamps
.
License Plate Lamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
Fog Lamps
.
Instrument Panel Lights
Pull the lever toward you to return to
low beams.
2 (Headlamps): Turns the
headlamps on together with the
following lamps listed below.
A warning chime sounds if the
driver's door is opened when
the ignition switch is off and the
headlamps are on.
The exterior lamps control has four
positions:
O (Off): Briefly turn to this position
to turn the automatic light control off
or on again.
.
Parking Lamps
AUTO (Automatic): Turns the
headlamps on automatically at
normal brightness, together with
the following:
.
Taillamps
This indicator light turns on in the
instrument panel cluster when the
high beam headlamps are on.
.
License Plate Lamps
.
Instrument Panel Lights
.
Parking Lamps
Flash-to-Pass
The flash‐to‐pass feature works with
the low beams or Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) on or off.
# (Front Fog Lamps): For
vehicles with fog lamps, press to
turn the lamps on or off.
.
Taillamps
.
License Plate Lamps
.
See Front Fog Lamps on page 6‑6.
Instrument Panel Lights
To flash the high beams, pull the
turn signal/lane change lever all the
way toward you, then release it.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lighting
6-3
When the DRL are on, only the
low‐beam headlamps, at a reduced
level of brightness, will be on.
The high‐beam headlamps,
taillamps, sidemarker, instrument
panel and other lamps will not
be on.
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can
make it easier for others to see the
front of your vehicle during the day.
Fully functional daytime running
lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
Adaptive Forward
Lighting (AFL)
For vehicles with Xenon
headlamps, the Adaptive Forward
Lighting System (AFL) adjusts
the headlamps to provide greater
road illumination in various driving
conditions.
The headlamps automatically
change from DRL to the regular
headlamps depending on the
darkness of the surroundings.
The other lamps that come on with
the headlamps will also come on.
A light sensor on top of the
instrument panel makes the DRL
work, so be sure it is not covered.
To enable AFL, set the exterior
lamp control to the AUTO position.
Moving the control out of the AUTO
position will deactivate the system.
AFL will operate when the vehicle
speed is greater than 3 km/h
(2 mph). AFL will not operate when
the transmission is in R (Reverse).
AFL is not immediately operable
after starting the vehicle; driving
a short distance is required to
calibrate the AFL. See Exterior
Lamp Controls on page 6‑1.
The DRL system makes the
low‐beam headlamps come on at a
reduced brightness or for vehicles
with High Intensity Discharge (HID)
headlamps, the DRL lights will come
on when the following conditions
are met:
When it is bright enough outside,
the headlamps go off and the DRL
come on.
To turn the DRL lamps off or on
again, turn the exterior lamps
control to the off position and then
release. For vehicles first sold in
Canada, the DRL lamps cannot be
turned off.
.
The ignition is in the
ON/RUN mode.
.
The exterior lamps control is
in AUTO.
.
The engine is running.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-4
Lighting
Curve Lighting
If the vehicle is started in a dark
garage, the automatic headlamp
system comes on immediately.
If it is light outside when the vehicle
leaves the garage, there is a
slight delay before the automatic
headlamp system changes to
the DRL. During that delay, the
instrument panel cluster may not
be as bright as usual. Make sure
the instrument panel brightness
control is in full bright position.
See Instrument Panel Illumination
Control on page 6‑6 for more
information.
Twilight Sentinel
The Xenon light beam pivots based
on the steering wheel position and
vehicle speed of at least 10 km/h
(6 mph). The headlamps shine at
an angle of up to 15 degrees to the
right or left of the direction of travel.
This feature automatically turns the
lamps on and off. A light sensor on
top of the instrument panel makes
the Twilight Sentinel® work, so be
sure it is not covered.
With Twilight Sentinel the following
will happen:
Highway Lighting
.
If the vehicle is traveling straight
continuously at high speeds, the
light beam automatically raises
slightly to increase the headlamp
range.
When it is dark enough outside,
and the exterior lamps control
is in the AUTO position, the
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
go off, and the headlamps and
parking lamps come on. The
other lamps that come on with
the headlamps also come on.
City Lighting
The vehicle can be idled with the
lamps off, even when it is dark
outside. After starting the vehicle,
turn the exterior lamp control to off,
then release it. The lamps will
remain off until the control is turned
to off again.
If the vehicle speed is less than
50 km/h (31 mph), the headlamp
range is automatically reduced.
.
When it is bright enough outside,
the headlamps go off, and the
DRL come on, as long as the
exterior lamp switch is in the
AUTO position. See Exterior
Lamp Controls on page 6‑1.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lighting
6-5
Twilight Sentinel also provides
exterior illumination as you leave
the vehicle. If Twilight Sentinel has
turned on the lamps when the
ignition is turned off, the lamps
remain on until:
Move the lever all the way up or
down to signal a turn.
Hazard Warning Flashers
| Hazard Warning Flasher:
Press this button located on the
instrument panel near the audio
system, to make the front and rear
turn signal lamps flash on and off.
This warns others that you are
having trouble. Press again to turn
the flashers off.
Raise or lower the lever until the
arrow starts to flash to signal a lane
change. The turn signal flashes
three times.
.
The exterior lamp control is
The lever returns to its starting
position when it is released.
moved from O to the parking
lamp position, or
If after signaling a turn or lane
change the arrow flashes rapidly or
does not come on, a signal bulb
may be burned-out.
.
the delay time selected has
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals
elapsed.
See Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑40 to select the delay time.
You can also select no delay time.
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb
is not burned out, check the fuse.
See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 10‑46 for more information.
If the ignition is turned off with the
exterior lamp control in the parking
lamp or headlamp position, the
Twilight Sentinel delay will not
occur. The lamps will turn off as
soon as the control is turned off.
An arrow on the instrument panel
cluster will flash in the direction of
the turn or lane change.
The regular headlamp system
should be turned on when needed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-6
Lighting
Front Fog Lamps
Cargo Lamp
Interior Lighting
For vehicles with front fog lamps,
the button is located on the exterior
lamp control, on the outboard side
of the steering wheel.
The cargo lamp is located over the
rear compartment and is controlled
by the dome lamp. See Dome
Lamps on page 6‑6.
Instrument Panel
Illumination Control
The ignition and the low‐beam
headlamps must be on to turn on
the fog lamps.
Courtesy Lamps
The courtesy lamps come on
automatically when any door is
opened and the dome lamp is in
the door position.
# : Press to turn the fog lamps
on or off. An indicator light on the
instrument panel cluster comes on
when the fog lamps are on.
Dome Lamps
The dome lamp controls are located
in the overhead console.
The fog lamps come on together
with the parking lamps.
If the high‐beam headlamps are
turned on, the fog lamps will turn off.
If the high‐beam headlamps are
turned off, the fog lamps will turn
back on again.
To change the dome lamp settings,
press the following:
This feature controls the brightness
of the instrument panel lights.
* (Dome Lamp Override): Turns
the lamp off, even when a door
is open.
D (Instrument Panel
Some localities have laws that
require the headlamps to be on
along with the fog lamps.
Brightness): Turn the thumbwheel
up or down to brighten or dim the
instrument panel lights.
1 (Door): The lamp comes on
automatically when a door is
opened.
+ (On): Turns the dome lamp on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lighting
Exit Lighting
6-7
Reading Lamps
Lighting Features
There are reading lamps located on
the overhead console and over the
rear passenger doors. These lamps
come on automatically when any
door is opened.
The headlamps, taillamps, parking
lamps, reverse lamps, and license
plate lamps come on at night, or in
areas with limited lighting, when a
door is opened after the ignition is
turned off. The dome lamps also
come on when a door is opened
after the ignition is turned to off.
See Ignition Positions on page 9‑18.
Entry Lighting
The headlamps, taillamps, license
plate lamps, reverse lamps, dome
lamps, and most of the interior lights
turn on briefly, when the Remote
To manually turn the reading lamps
on or off:
Keyless Entry (RKE) K is pressed,
or when the door handle is pulled.
See Ignition Positions on page 9‑18.
After about 30 seconds the exterior
lamps turn off, and then the dome
and remaining interior lights will dim
to off. Entry lighting can be disabled
manually by changing the ignition
out of the OFF position, or by
For the overhead console reading
lamps, press the button next to
each lamp.
The exterior lights and dome lamps
remain on after the door is closed
for a set amount of time, then
automatically turn off.
For the rear passenger reading
lamps, press the lamp lens.
The exterior lights turn off
immediately by turning the exterior
lamps control to OFF.
pressing the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) Q button.
This feature can be changed.
See Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑40.
This feature can be changed.
See Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑40.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-8
Lighting
The battery can be discharged at
idle if the electrical loads are very
high. This is true for all vehicles.
This is because the generator
(alternator) may not be spinning
fast enough at idle to produce all
the power that is needed for very
high electrical loads.
Normally, these actions occur in
steps or levels, without being
Battery Load
Management
The vehicle has Electric Power
Management (EPM) that estimates
the battery's temperature and state
of charge. It then adjusts the voltage
for best performance and extended
life of the battery.
noticeable. In rare cases at the
highest levels of corrective action,
this action may be noticeable to the
driver. If so, a Driver Information
Center (DIC) message might be
displayed, such as BATTERY
SAVER ACTIVE, BATTERY
VOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY.
If one of these messages displays,
it is recommended that the driver
reduce the electrical loads as much
as possible. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 5‑28.
A high electrical load occurs when
several of the following are on,
such as: headlamps, high beams,
fog lamps, rear window defogger,
climate control fan at high speed,
heated seats, engine cooling fans,
trailer loads, and loads plugged into
accessory power outlets.
When the battery's state of charge
is low, the voltage is raised slightly
to quickly bring the charge back up.
When the state of charge is high,
the voltage is lowered slightly to
prevent overcharging. If the vehicle
has a voltmeter gauge or a voltage
display on the Driver Information
Center (DIC), you may see the
voltage move up or down. This is
normal. If there is a problem, an
alert will be displayed.
EPM works to prevent excessive
discharge of the battery. It does this
by balancing the generator's output
and the vehicle's electrical needs.
It can increase engine idle speed to
generate more power, whenever
needed. It can temporarily reduce
the power demands of some
accessories.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-1
Audio Players
Introduction
Read the following pages to
become familiar with the audio
system's features.
Infotainment
System
CD Player (Radio
with CD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Mass Storage
Media (MEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Auxiliary Devices (Radio
with CD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Auxiliary Devices (Radio with
CD/DVD and MEM) . . . . . . . . 7-36
Introduction
WARNING
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2
Overview (Radio with CD) . . . . . 7-3
Overview (Radio with CD/DVD
and MEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
{
Taking your eyes off the road
for extended periods could
cause a crash resulting in injury
or death to you or others. Do not
give extended attention to
Rear Seat Infotainment
Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
Radio
entertainment tasks while driving.
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
This system provides access to
many audio and non‐audio listings.
Phone
Bluetooth (Overview) . . . . . . . . 7-51
Bluetooth (Infotainment
Controls) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
Bluetooth (Voice
Recognition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-2
Infotainment System
To minimize taking your eyes off the
road while driving, do the following
while the vehicle is parked:
Notice: Contact your dealer
before adding any equipment.
Navigation System
For vehicles with a navigation
system, see the separate Navigation
System Manual.
Adding audio or communication
equipment could interfere with
the operation of the vehicle's
engine, radio, or other systems,
and could damage them. Follow
federal rules covering mobile
radio and telephone equipment.
.
Become familiar with the
operation and controls of the
audio system.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
.
Set up the tone, speaker
The theft-deterrent feature works
by learning a portion of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN)
to the infotainment system.
The infotainment system does
not operate if it is stolen or moved
to a different vehicle.
adjustments, and preset radio
stations.
The vehicle has Retained
For more information, see Defensive
Driving on page 9‑2.
Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP,
the audio system can be played
even after the ignition is turned off.
See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 9‑22 for more
information.
This vehicle's infotainment system
may be equipped with a noise
reduction system which can work
improperly if the audio amplifier,
engine calibrations, exhaust system,
microphones, radio, or speakers are
modified or replaced. This could
result in more noticeable engine
noise at certain speeds.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-3
Overview (Radio with CD)
A. VOL/ O
.
Turns the system on or off
and adjusts the volume.
B. Buttons 1 to 6
.
Radio: Saves and selects
favorite stations.
C. TUNE
.
Radio: Manually selects
radio stations.
.
CD: Selects tracks.
D. FAV
.
Radio: Opens the
favorites list.
E. g SEEK
.
Radio: Seeks the previous
station.
.
CD: Selects the previous
track or rewinds within a
track.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-4
Infotainment System
O. PHONE
F. l SEEK
J. k
.
Opens the phone
.
.
Radio: Seeks the next
CD: Pauses the CD.
main menu.
station.
K. CD Slot
.
Mutes the audio system.
.
CD: Selects the next track
or fast forwards within a
track.
.
Insert a CD.
P. TONE
L. MENU/SELECT
.
Opens the tone menu.
.
Press: Selects menu items.
G. Y CD Eject
Q. AUX
.
Turn: Opens menus,
highlights menu items,
or sets numeric values
while in a menu.
.
Removes a disc from the
.
Selects a connected
external audio source.
CD slot.
H. CD
R. INFO
.
Selects the CD player
when listening to a
.
Radio: Shows available
information about the
current station.
M. BACK 0
.
Menu: Moves one
level back.
different audio source.
I. RADIO/BAND
.
CD: Shows available
information about the
current track.
.
Character Input: Deletes
the last character.
.
Changes the band while
listening to the radio.
N. CONFIG
.
Selects the radio when
listening to a different
audio source.
.
Open the settings menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-5
Overview (Radio with CD/DVD and MEM)
A. VOL/ O
.
Turns the system on or off
and adjusts the volume.
B. Buttons 1 to 6
.
Radio: Saves and selects
favorite stations.
.
MEM: Saves and selects
favorite tracks and
playlists.
C. TUNE/INFO
.
Radio: Manually selects
radio stations and shows
available information about
the current station.
.
.
CD: Selects tracks
and shows available
information about the
current track.
MEM: Selects tracks
and shows available
information about the
current track.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-6
Infotainment System
D. FAV
K. CD/DVD Slot
G. Y CD Eject
.
.
Radio: Opens the
favorites list.
Insert a disc.
.
Removes a disc from the
CD slot.
L. MENU/SELECT
.
MEM: Opens the
favorites list.
.
H. RADIO/BAND
Press: Selects menu items.
.
.
Changes the band while
Turn: Open menus,
highlights menu items,
or sets numeric values
while in a menu.
E. g SEEK
listening to the radio.
.
.
Radio: Seeks the previous
station.
Selects the radio when
listening to a different
audio source.
M. TONE
.
.
CD/DVD: Selects the
previous track or rewinds
within a track.
.
I. MEM/CD/AUX
Opens the tone menu.
.
Selects MEM, CD/DVD,
N. 0 BACK
MEM: Selects the previous
track or rewinds within a
track.
USB, or a connected
auxillary audio or auxillary
audio/video source.
.
Menu: Moves one
level back.
.
Character Input: Deletes
the last character.
F. l SEEK
J. k
.
.
Radio: Seeks the next
Radio: Pauses time shifted
content.
O. CONFIG
station.
.
Open the settings menu.
.
.
.
CD/DVD: Selects the next
track or fast forwards
within a track.
CD/DVD: Pauses
CD/DVD‐A and DVD‐V
playback. Stops DVD‐V
playback.
MEM: Selects the next
track or fast forwards
within a track.
.
MEM: Pauses MEM
playback.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
Volume Control
7-7
P. DEL
Operation
.
MEM: Delete the current
track from MEM.
VOL/ O (Volume/Power): Turn to
adjust the volume.
Controls
The infotainment system is
Q. O REC
PHONE: For vehicles with
operated by using the pushbuttons,
multifunction knobs, menus that are
shown on the display, and steering
wheel controls, if equipped.
OnStar®, press and hold PHONE
to mute the infotainment system.
Press and hold PHONE again,
.
CD/DVD: Records content
from audio CDs and
MP3/WMA CDs.
or turn the VOL/ O knob to
cancel mute.
For vehicles without OnStar®, press
PHONE to mute the infotainment
system. Press PHONE again,
.
AUX: Records content
from USB mass storage
devices.
Turning the System On or Off
VOL/ O (Volume/Power): Press to
turn the system on and off.
R. PHONE
Automatic Switch‐Off
.
Opens the phone
main menu.
or turn the VOL/ O knob to
cancel mute.
If the infotainment system has
been turned on after the ignition is
turned off, the system will turn off
automatically after ten minutes.
.
Mutes the audio system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-8
Infotainment System
Selecting a Menu Option
Activating a Setting
Menu System
Controls
The MENU/SELECT knob and
the BACK 0 button are used to
navigate the menu system.
MENU/SELECT: Press to:
.
Select or activate the highlighted
menu option.
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
move the highlighted bar.
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
highlight the setting.
.
Confirm a set value.
2. Press the MENU/SELECT
button to select the highlighted
option.
2. Press the MENU/SELECT
button to activate the setting.
.
Turn a system setting on or off.
Setting a Value
Turn to:
Submenus
.
Enter the menu system.
.
Highlight a menu option.
.
Select a value.
BACK0 : Press to:
.
Exit a menu.
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
change the current value of the
setting.
.
Return from a submenu screen
to the previous menu screen.
An arrow on the right‐hand edge of
the menu indicates that it has a
submenu with other options.
.
Delete the last character in a
sequence.
2. Press the MENU/SELECT
button to confirm the setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-9
Turning a Function On or Off
Adjusting the Treble, Midrange,
and Bass
Press the BACK 0 button to delete
the last character in the sequence
or press and hold to delete the
entire character sequence.
Audio Settings
The audio settings can be set for
each radio band and each audio
player source.
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
highlight the function.
1. Press the TONE button.
To quickly reset an audio setting
value to 0:
2. Press the MENU/SELECT
button to turn the function on
or off.
2. Select Treble, Midrange,
or Bass.
1. Press the TONE button.
2. Select the audio setting.
3. Select the value.
Entering a Character Sequence
Press the BACK 0 button to go
back to the Tone Settings menu.
3. Press and hold the MENU/
SELECT button until the value
changes to 0.
Press the BACK 0 button to go
back to the Tone Settings menu.
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
highlight the character.
2. Press the MENU/SELECT
button to select the character.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-10
Infotainment System
.
5.1 Surround ‐ The infotainment
system used in conjunction with
the Bose® 5.1 Cabin Surround®
sound system for the vehicle
includes digital 5.1 decoding.
This technology unlocks the
full benefit of digital 5.1
Adjusting the Fader and Balance
DSP (Digital Signal Processing)
Settings
For vehicles with DSP, it is used
to provide a choice of different
listening experiences.
.
2.0 Normal ‐ Select this setting
recordings, so digitally encoded
music and movie soundtracks
can be presented faithfully and
accurately. If the video screens
or Rear Seat Audio (RSA) is on,
5.1 Surround is not available.
to adjust the audio for normal
mode. This provides the best
sound quality for all seating
positions.
Centerpoint ‐ Centerpoint®
signal processing circuitry.
This setting creates a surround
sound listening experience from
stereo CDs and satellite radio.
For more information on Bose®
Centerpoint® signal processing
circuitry, please visit www.
bose.com/centerpoint.
1. Press the TONE button.
2. Select Fader or Balance.
3. Select the value.
.
Press the BACK 0 button to go
back to the Tone Settings menu.
To adjust the DSP settings:
1. Press the TONE button.
2. Select DSP.
Adjusting the EQ (Equalizer)
For vehicles that have an equalizer:
1. Press the TONE button.
2. Select EQ.
3. Select the setting.
Press the BACK 0 button to go
back to the Tone Settings menu.
3. Select the setting.
Press the BACK 0 button to go
back to the Tone Settings menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-11
Auto Volume
Maximum Startup Volume
System Settings
The auto volume feature
The maximum volume played when
the radio is first turned on can
be set.
Configuring the Number of
Favorite Pages
automatically adjusts the radio
volume to compensate for road
and wind noise as the vehicle
speeds up or slows down, so that
the volume level is consistent.
The level of volume compensation
can be selected, or the auto volume
feature can be turned off.
To configure the number of available
favorite pages:
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Radio Settings.
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Radio Settings.
3. Select Radio Favorites.
3. Select Maximum Startup
Volume.
4. Select the setting.
4. Select the number of available
favorite pages.
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Radio Settings.
3. Select Auto Volume.
4. Select the setting.
5. Press the BACK 0 button
to go back to the System
Configuration menu.
5. Press the BACK 0 button
to go back to the System
Configuration menu.
5. Press the BACK 0 button
to go back to the System
Configuration menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-12
Infotainment System
RDS (Radio Data System)
Selecting a Band
Radio
The radio may have RDS. The RDS
feature is available for use only on
FM stations that broadcast RDS
information. This feature only works
when the information from the radio
station is available. In rare cases,
a radio station could broadcast
incorrect information that causes the
radio features to work improperly.
If this happens, contact the radio
station.
Press the RADIO/BAND button
to choose AM, FM, or XM™,
if equipped. The last station that
was playing starts playing again.
AM-FM Radio
Control Buttons
The buttons used to control the
radio are:
Selecting a Station
Seek Tuning (Radio with CD)
RADIO/BAND: Press to turn the
radio on and choose between AM,
FM, and XM™, if equipped.
If the radio station is not known:
Briefly press g SEEK or l SEEK.
To automatically search for the next
available station. If a station is not
found, the radio switches to a more
sensitive search level. If a station
still is not found, the frequency that
was last active begins to play.
MENU/SELECT: Press and turn to
navigate the available menus.
While the radio is tuned to an
FM-RDS station, the station name
or call letters display.
TUNE: Turn to search for stations.
INFO: Press to display additional
information that may be available for
the current song.
Radio Menus
Radio menus are available for AM
and FM.
If the radio station is known:
l SEEK/ g SEEK: Press to
search for stations.
Press and hold g SEEK or
l SEEK until the station on the
display is reached, then release
the button.
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
open the main radio menu for that
frequency.
FAV: Press to open the
favorites list.
1 to 6: Press to select preset
stations.
k (Play/Pause): Press to pause
time shifted content, if equipped.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-13
Seek Tuning (Radio with CD/DVD
and MEM)
Station Lists
To search for a programming type
determined by station:
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
Briefly press g SEEK or l SEEK,
to automatically search for the next
available station. If a station is not
found, the radio switches to a more
sensitive search level. If a station
still is not found, the frequency that
was last active begins to play.
2. Select AM or FM Station List.
All receivable stations in the
current reception area are
displayed. If a station list has
not been created, an automatic
station search is done.
2. Select FM category list. A list of
all programing types available
displays.
3. Select the programming type.
A list of stations that transmit
programming of the selected
type displays.
3. Select the station.
Manual Tuning
Category Lists
Turn the TUNE knob to select the
frequency on the display.
4. Select the station.
Most stations that broadcast an
RDS program type code specify the
type of programming transmitted.
Some stations change the program
type code depending on the
content. The system stores the RDS
stations sorted by program type in
the FM category list.
The category lists are updated
when the station lists are
updated.
Favorites List
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select Favorites List.
3. Select the station.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-14
Infotainment System
Updating Station & Category Lists
Storing Stations
Press the k button to pause the
radio. The radio displays the time
shift status bar. The status bar
shows the amount of content that is
stored in the buffer and the current
pause point.
If stations stored in the station list
can no longer be received.
To store the station to a position in
the list, press the corresponding
button 1 to 6 until a beep is heard.
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
Retrieving Stations
2. Select Update AM or FM Station
List, if the stations stored in
the station list are no longer
received. A station search will
be completed and the first
station in the updated list
will play.
Press the FAV button to open a
favorite page or to switch to another
favorite page. Briefly press one of
the 1 to 6 buttons to retrieve the
station.
To resume playback from the
current pause point, press the k
button again. The radio is no longer
live, but played from the time shift
buffer. A status bar displays below
the station number.
Time Shifting (Radio with
CD/DVD and MEM)
To cancel the station search, press
the MENU/SELECT knob.
Press and hold the g SEEK or
l SEEK buttons to fast forward or
rewind through the time shift buffer.
The radio with MEM time shift
feature can rewind 20 minutes of
FM/AM content. While listening to
the radio, the content from the
current station is always being
buffered.
Storing a Station as a Favorite
Stations from all bands can be
stored in any order in the favorite
pages.
Hold l SEEK until the end of the
recorded buffer resumes live
playback.
Up to six stations can be stored in
each favorite page and the number
of available favorite pages can
be set.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
Control Buttons
7-15
Press and release the g SEEK or
l SEEK buttons to jump forward or
back 30 seconds in the time shift
buffer.
Satellite Radio
The buttons used to control the XM
radio are:
Vehicles with an XM™ Satellite
Radio tuner and a valid XM Satellite
Radio subscription can receive XM
programming.
RADIO/BAND: Press to turn the
radio on and choose between AM,
FM, and XM™, if equipped.
When the radio station is
changed, the buffer is cleared
and automatically restarted for
the current station. Content from
a previously tuned station is no
longer available.
XM Satellite Radio Service
g SEEK / l SEEK: Press to go
XM is a satellite radio service
that is based in the 48 contiguous
United States and 10 Canadian
provinces. XM Satellite Radio
has a wide variety of programming
and commercial-free music,
coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality
sound. A service fee is required to
receive the XM service. For more
information, contact XM at
to the previous or next channel.
FAV: Press to open the
favorites list.
The time shift feature is not
available while recording or with
other sources of playback.
1‐6: Press to select a favorite.
TUNE: Turn to select channel.
Pausing AM/FM with the Vehicle
Turned Off
INFO: Press to display additional
information that may be available
about the current song.
If AM/FM is paused when the
vehicle is turned off, the radio
continues to buffer the current
radio station for up to 20 minutes.
If the vehicle is turned back on
within 20 minutes, the radio
resumes playback from the
paused point.
www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S.
and www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
k (Play/Pause): Press to pause
time shifted content, if equipped.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-16
Infotainment System
Selecting a Channel Using the
TUNE Knob
Selecting the XM Band
Selecting an XM Channel
Press the RADIO/BAND button to
choose between the AM, FM and
XM bands. The last channel played
in that band begins to play when
that band is selected.
XM channels can be selected by
To select an XM channel using the
TUNE knob:
using g SEEK, l SEEK, the
TUNE knob, or the menu system.
Turn the TUNE knob to highlight an
XM channel, the channel is selected
after a short delay.
Selecting a Channel Using
g SEEK or l SEEK
XM Categories
(Radio with CD)
To select a channel using the menu:
XM channels are organized in
categories.
.
Press and release g SEEK or
1. Turn the menu knob and select
Channel List.
l SEEK to go to the previous
Removing or Adding Categories
or next channel.
2. Select the desired channel.
Channels in a category that have
been removed can still be accessed
.
Press and hold g SEEK or
l SEEK to scroll through the
previous or next channel until
the channel is reached.
Selecting a Channel Using the
Menu System
by using the g SEEK or l SEEK
buttons, or the TUNE knob.
1. Turn the menu knob.
2. Select XM Category List.
3. Select the category.
4. Select the channel.
To add or remove categories:
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Radio Settings.
3. Select XM Categories.
Selecting a Channel Using
g SEEK or l SEEK
(Radio with CD/DVD and MEM)
Press and release g SEEK or
l SEEK to go to the previous or
next channel.
4. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
highlight the category.
5. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
to remove or add the category.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-17
Storing an XM Channel as a
Favorite
Time Shifting (Radio with
CD/DVD and MEM)
Press and release the g SEEK or
l SEEK buttons to go to the next
or previous song in the time shift
buffer.
Channels from all bands can be
stored in any order in the favorite
pages.
The radio with MEM time shift
feature can rewind 20 minutes of
XM content. While listening to the
radio, the content from the current
channel is always being buffered.
When the channel is changed, the
buffer is cleared and automatically
restarted for the current channel.
Content from a previously tuned
station is no longer available.
Up to six channels can be stored in
each favorite page and the number
of available favorite pages can
be set.
Press the k button to pause the
radio. The radio displays the time
shift status bar. The status bar
shows the amount of content that is
stored in the buffer and the current
pause point.
The time shift feature is not
available while recording or with
other sources of playback.
Storing a Channel as a Favorite
To store the channel to a position
in the list, press and hold the
corresponding 1 to 6 button until
the channel can be heard again.
Pausing XM with the Vehicle
Turned Off
To resume playback from the
current pause point, press the k
button again. The radio is no longer
live, but played from the time shift
buffer. A status bar displays below
the channel number.
If XM is paused when the vehicle is
turned off, the radio continues to
buffer the current radio station for
up to 20 minutes. If the vehicle is
turned back on within 20 minutes,
the radio resumes playback from
the paused point.
Retrieving Channels
Press the FAV button to open a
favorite page or to change to
another favorite page. Briefly press
one of the 1 to 6 buttons to retrieve
the channel.
Press and hold the g SEEK or
l SEEK buttons to fast forward or
rewind through the time shift buffer.
Hold l SEEK until the end of
the recorded buffer resumes live
playback.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-18
Infotainment System
No Artist Info: The system
is working properly. No artist
information is available at this
time on this channel.
CAT Not Found: The system is
working properly. There are no
channels available for the selected
category.
XM Messages
XL (Explicit Language
Channels): These channels,
or any others, can be blocked by
request, by calling 1-800-929-2100.
No Title Info: The system is
working properly. No song title
information is available at this
time on this channel.
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,
this message alternates with the
XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label.
This label is needed to activate
the service.
XM Updating: The encryption code
in the receiver is being updated,
no action is required. This process
should take no longer than
30 seconds.
No CAT Info: The system is
working properly. No category
information is available at this
time on this channel.
Unknown: If this message is
received when tuned to channel 0,
there could be a receiver fault.
Consult with your dealer.
Loading XM: The audio system is
acquiring and processing audio and
text data, no action is needed. This
message should disappear shortly.
No Information: The system
is working properly. No text or
informational messages are
available at this time on this
channel.
Check Antenna: If this message
does not clear within a short period
of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer.
Channel Off Air: This channel is
not currently in service. Tune in to
another channel.
No XM Signal: The system is
working properly. The vehicle may
be in a location that where the XM
signal is being blocked. When the
vehicle is moved into an open area,
the signal should return.
XM Not Available: If this message
does not clear within a short period
of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer.
Channel Unauth : This channel is
blocked or cannot be received with
your XM Subscription package.
Channel Unavailable: This
previously assigned channel is no
longer assigned. Tune to another
station.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
Cellular Phone Usage
7-19
AM
Radio Reception
The range for most AM stations is
greater than for FM, especially at
night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere with
each other. Static can occur when
things like storms and power lines
interfere with radio reception. When
this happens, try reducing the treble
on the radio.
Cellular phone usage can cause
interference with the vehicle's radio.
Frequency interference and static
can occur during normal radio
reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience
accessories, and external electronic
devices are plugged into the
accessory power outlet. If there is
interference or static, unplug the
item from the accessory power
outlet.
Multi-Band Antenna
The multi-band antenna is on the
roof of the vehicle. The antenna
is used for the AM/FM radio,
OnStar, the XM Satellite Radio
Service System, and GPS (Global
Positioning System), if the vehicle
has these features. Keep the
antenna clear of obstructions
for clear reception.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
FM
XM Satellite Radio Service gives
digital radio reception from coast
to coast in the 48 contiguous
United States, and in Canada.
Just as with FM, tall buildings or
hills can interfere with satellite radio
signals, causing the sound to fade
in and out. In addition, traveling
or standing under heavy foliage,
bridges, garages, or tunnels may
cause loss of the XM signal for a
period of time.
FM signals only reach about 16 to
65 km (10 to 40 miles). Although the
radio has a built-in electronic circuit
that automatically works to reduce
interference, some static can occur,
especially around tall buildings or
hills, causing the sound to fade in
and out.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-20
Infotainment System
Do not touch the bottom surface of
a disc while handling it; this could
damage the surface. Pick up discs
by grasping the outer edges or the
edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Do not use disc lens cleaners
because they could contaminate the
lens of the disc optics and damage
the CD player.
Audio Players
CD Player
(Radio with CD)
The CD player can play audio CDs
and MP3 CDs.
Notice: If a label is added to a
CD, or more than one CD is
inserted into the slot at a time,
or an attempt is made to play
scratched or damaged CDs, the
CD player could be damaged.
While using the CD player, use
only CDs in good condition
without any label, load one CD at
a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of
foreign materials, liquids, and
debris.
If the bottom surface of a disc is
dirty, take a soft lint free cloth,
or dampen a clean soft cloth in
a mild neutral detergent solution
mixed with water, and clean it.
Wipe the disc from the center
to the outer edge.
The CD player will not play
8 cm (3 in) CDs.
Care of CDs
Sound quality can be reduced due
to disc quality, recording method,
quality of the music recorded, and
how the disc has been handled.
Handle discs carefully and store
them in their original cases or other
protective cases away from direct
sunlight and dust. If the bottom
surface of a disc is damaged, the
disc may not play properly or at all.
Care of the CD Player
Do not add a label to a disc, as it
could get caught in the CD player.
If a label is needed, label the
top of the recorded disc with a
marking pen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-21
Selecting a CD Track
Control Buttons
Inserting a CD
Using the control buttons:
The buttons used to control the CD
player are:
With the printed side facing up,
insert a disc into the CD slot until it
is drawn in.
.
Press the g SEEK or l SEEK
button to select the previous or
next track.
CD: Press to use the CD player.
Removing a CD
l SEEK/ g SEEK : Press to
select tracks or to fast forward or
rewind within a track.
.
Turn the TUNE knob.
Press the Z button.
Using the CD Menu:
The disc is pushed out of the
CD slot.
INFO: Press to display additional
information about the current track
that may be available.
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select Tracks list.
If the disc is not removed after it is
ejected, it is pulled back in after a
few seconds.
TUNE: Turn to select tracks.
3. Select the track.
MENU/SELECT: Turn to enter the
menu, press to select an item.
Playing Tracks in Random Order
Playing a CD or MP3 CD
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob and
then set Shuffle Songs to On.
Press the CD button, if there is a
disc in the player, it begins playing.
Y (Eject): Press to eject the disc.
k : Press to pause a CD or MP3
track, press again to resume
playback.
Fast Forward and Rewind
Information about the disc and
current track is shown on the
display depending on the data
stored.
Press and hold l SEEK or
g SEEK to fast forward or rewind
within the current track.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-22
Infotainment System
Selecting an MP3 Track
Tracks can be searched by:
CD/DVD Player
The CD/DVD player can play
CDs, DVD‐As, MP3/WMA CDs,
MP3/WMA DVDs, and DVD‐Vs.
.
Using the control buttons:
Playlists
.
.
Artists
Press the g SEEK or l SEEK
button to select the previous or
next track.
.
Albums
The CD/DVD player will not play
8 cm (3 in) discs.
.
Song Titles
.
Turn the TUNE knob.
.
Genres
Care of CDs and DVDs
Using the CD Menu:
.
Folder View
Sound quality can be reduced due
to disc quality, recording method,
quality of the music recorded, and
how the disc has been handled.
Handle discs carefully and store
them in their original cases or other
protective cases away from direct
sunlight and dust. If the bottom
surface of a disc is damaged, the
disc may not play properly or at all.
Do not touch the bottom surface of
a disc while handling it; this could
damage the surface. Pick up discs
by grasping the outer edges or the
edge of the hole and the outer edge.
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select Playlists / Folders.
3. Select the playlist or folder.
4. Select the track.
To search for tracks:
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select Search.
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
Song Titles, Genres,
Searching for MP3 Tracks
or Folder View.
The search feature may take some
time to display the information after
reading the disc due to the amount
of information stored on the disc.
FM automatically plays while the
disc is being read.
4. Select the track.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-23
If the bottom surface of a disc is
dirty, take a soft lint free cloth,
or dampen a clean soft cloth in
a mild neutral detergent solution
mixed with water, and clean it.
Wipe the disc from the center
to the outer edge.
Notice: If a label is added to a
CD, or more than one CD is
inserted into the slot at a time,
or an attempt is made to play
scratched or damaged CDs, the
CD player could be damaged.
While using the CD player, use
only CDs in good condition
without any label, load one CD at
a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of
foreign materials, liquids, and
debris.
l SEEK/ g SEEK : Press to
select tracks or to fast forward or
rewind within a track.
INFO: Press to display additional
information about the disc that may
be available.
TUNE: Turn to select tracks.
Care of the CD/DVD Player
MENU/SELECT: Turn to enter the
menu and press to select an item.
Do not add a label to a disc, as it
could get caught in the CD/DVD
player. If a label is needed, label
the top of the recorded disc with a
marking pen.
Y (Eject): Press to eject the disc.
k : Press to pause a CD, DVD‐A,
or DVD‐V, press again to resume
playback. Press and hold to stop a
DVD‐V disc.
Control Buttons
Do not use disc lens cleaners
because they could contaminate the
lens of the disc optics and damage
the CD/DVD player.
The buttons used to control the
CD/DVD player are:
MEM/DVD/AUX: Press to choose
between the MEM, CD/DVD,
and AUX.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-24
Infotainment System
Selecting CD or DVD‐A Tracks
Playing CD or DVD‐A Tracks in
Random Order
Inserting a CD or DVD
Using the control buttons:
With the printed side facing up,
insert a disc into the slot until it is
drawn in.
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob and
then set Shuffle Songs to On.
.
Press the g SEEK or l SEEK
button to select the previous or
next track.
Fast Forward and Rewind
Removing a CD or DVD
.
Turn the TUNE knob.
Press and hold l SEEK or
g SEEK to fast forward or rewind
within the current track.
Press the Y button.
Using the menu:
The disc is pushed out of the
CD/DVD slot.
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select Tracks List.
3. Select the track.
Playing an MP3 CD or DVD
If the disc is not removed after it is
ejected, it is pulled back in after a
few seconds.
Files that are not stored in
folders are displayed in the
root directory (disc).
Pausing a CD or DVD‐A Track
Playing a CD or DVD‐A Disc
The search rate increases
if the MENU/SELECT knob is
continuously turned while searching
in a list.
Press the k button to pause a CD
or DVD‐A track. Press the k button
again to continue playing the track.
Press the MEM/DVD/AUX button
if there is a disc in the player, it
begins playing.
Information about the disc and
current track is shown on the
display depending on the data
stored.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-25
Selecting an MP3 Track
Files that do not have any meta
data stored in the ID3 tag display
as Unknown.
Playing MP3 Tracks in Random
Order
Using the control buttons:
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob and
then set Shuffle Songs to On.
.
Press g SEEK or l SEEK to
select the previous or next track.
Tracks can be searched for by:
.
Playlists
Recording an Audio or MP3
CD to MEM
.
Turn the TUNE knob.
.
Artists
Using the CD or DVD Menu:
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select Folder List.
.
See Mass Storage Media (MEM) on
page 7‑27 for more information.
Albums
.
Song Titles
Playing a DVD‐V
.
Genres
3. Select the folder.
See Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
System on page 7‑38 for information
about how to control a Video DVD
using the wireless remote control.
The number of objects in each
category is shown in parentheses
after the category.
4. Select the track.
Searching for MP3s on a CD
or DVD
To search for tracks:
It is normal for the search feature
to take some time to display the
information after reading the disc
due to the amount of information
stored on the disc. The infotainment
system automatically switches to
FM while the disc is being read.
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select Search.
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
Song Titles, or Genres.
4. Select the track. The search
rate increases if the menu knob
is continuously turned while
searching in a list.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-26
Infotainment System
Selecting a Chapter
3. Select Change Audio Stream.
Use the following actions to
navigate the menu on a DVD‐V Disc
while playing chapters.
Using the control buttons:
4. Press MENU/SELECT to change
the selection.
.
Press g SEEK or l SEEK to
select the previous or next
chapter.
.
Pause (Play)
Select Cancel to exit the menu.
Pausing a DVD
.
Chapter List
.
Title List
.
Turn the TUNE knob.
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
.
DVD/DVD — DVD on both video
Using DVD Menu:
2. Select Pause, to pause the
disc. Select unpause to start
playback.
screens
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select Chapter List.
3. Select the chapter.
.
DVD/AUX — Left video
screen / Right AUX input
Navigating the DVD‐V Disc Menu
.
AUX/DVD — Left AUX
Use the following actions to
navigate the title menu on a
DVD‐V Disc.
input / Right video screen
Selecting a Title
.
AUX/AUX — AUX input on both
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select Title List.
video screens
.
Select / Enter
To navigate the menu:
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select the action.
.
Cursor UP
3. Select the title.
.
Cursor DOWN
Changing the Audio Stream
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select Audio Stream.
.
Cursor RIGHT
.
Cursor LEFT
.
Up Menu
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-27
Recording From Audio CDs
Mass Storage
Media (MEM)
l SEEK/ g SEEK : Press to
select tracks or to fast forward or
rewind within a track.
The infotainment system can record
the current song playing or all songs
from an audio CD to MEM. A status
bar appears on the top of the
display when the recording process
starts and disappears when the
process has ended. Copy protected
CDs cannot be recorded to MEM.
Infotainment systems with MEM
storage are able to record up to
1.1 GB (gigabyte) of music from
Audio CDs, MP3/WMA/AAC discs,
and USB storage devices. The MEM
player can also time shift audio from
AM, FM, and XM™ radio.
INFO: Press to display additional
information about the MEM track
that may be available. Turn to select
tracks.
k : Press to pause the track
currently playing, press again to
resume playback.
Recording to MEM
Music or content that is stored
in MEM that you did not create,
or have the right to distribute, must
be deleted before the sale or end of
the lease of the vehicle.
O REC: Press to record music
from a CD or USB drive.
Press O REC, then select “Record
Current Song” or “Record All Songs
on Disc”. If the track has started
playing, the system will restart the
track and begin recording from the
beginning of the track. When the
song recording is completed, the
message “Song Recorded to MEM”
displays, and there may be a slight
pause.
DEL: Press to delete the current
track from MEM.
Control Buttons
FAV (Favorites): Press to display
MEM favorites.
The buttons used to control the
MEM player are:
1 to 6: Press to select a track or
playlist stored in that numeric
position.
MEM/DVD/AUX: Press to select
the MEM player.
Songs recorded to MEM are stored
as the current date, disc and track
number.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-28
Infotainment System
Re-recording a Previously
Recorded Disc
Stopping the Recording
Recording From MP3/WMA
Discs or USB Storage Devices
Press the O REC button while
recording from an MP3/WMA CD or
USB storage device to display the
stop recording option. Select “Stop
Recording Song to MEM”.
If the disc or track has already been
recorded to MEM, the message
“The Song(s) is Already Recorded”
displays.
USB Host Support
The USB connector uses the USB
standards, 1.1 and 2.0.
USB Supported Devices
Stopping the Recording
Deleting Tracks From MEM
.
USB Flash Drives
Press the O REC button while
recording from an audio CD to
display the stop recording option.
Select “Stop Recording Song
to MEM”.
Individual tracks and all tracks can
be deleted from MEM.
.
Portable USB Hard Drives
Recording to MEM
To delete individual tracks, press
and release the DEL button while
the track is playing.
Press O REC, then select “Record
Current Song” or “ Record All Songs
on Disc”.
Renaming Recorded Discs
To delete all tracks from MEM,
press and hold the DEL button while
a track is playing.
Discs that have been recorded to
MEM can be renamed.
The information stored by MEM is
titled according to the ID3 tag
associated with it.
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select Rename Recorded Discs.
3. Select the disc.
Re-recording a Previously
Recorded Disc
If the disc or track has already
been recorded to MEM the message
“The Song(s) is Already Recorded”
displays.
4. Select Album or Artist to rename
either one.
5. Use the menu knob to enter
the character sequence.
See Operation on page 7‑7
for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-29
The number of objects in each
category is shown in parentheses
after the category.
Playing From MEM
Configuring MEM Favorites
During MEM playback, press the
FAV button to change between
favorite categories. The favorite
categories are:
Playing Back a Previously
Recorded CD
To search for tracks:
Turn the TUNE knob to select a
track if MEM is already playing from
the previously recorded disc.
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select Search.
.
Playlists
.
Artists
1. Select Recorded Disc List.
2. Select the disc.
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
Song Titles, or Genres.
.
Albums
.
4. Select the track. The search rate
increases if the MENU/SELECT
knob is continuously turned
while searching in a list.
Genres
3. Select the track.
To remove MEM favorites
categories:
Searching For a Track
Tracks can be searched for by:
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Radio Settings.
3. Select MEM Favorites.
.
Shuffle Songs
Playlists
.
Select the Shuffle Songs option
from the MEM menu to randomly
play back tracks stored in MEM.
Artists
.
Albums
4. Remove the check mark from
the box to remove that MEM
favorites category.
.
Song Titles
.
Genres
Replace the check mark to re-add
the removed category.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-30
Infotainment System
Creating Playlists
Saving MEM Tracks as
Favorites
To create a playlist using tracks
stored in MEM:
Favorites can be saved by pressing
and holding one of the 1 to 6
buttons. Favorites can be stored
according to the following list:
1. Select Playlist from the MEM
favorites.
2. Select the track to be stored in
the playlist.
Playlist: Adds currently playing
track to the playlist selected.
3. Press and hold one of the 1 to 6
buttons until the track can be
heard again to store the track.
Artist: Saves the artist associated
with the currently playing track in
the indicated favorites position.
4. Repeat steps 1 though 3 to store
additional tracks in the playlist.
The AUX input is located in the
center console.
Album: Saves the album
associated with the currently
playing track in the indicated
favorites position.
3.5 mm Auxiliary Input Jack
Auxiliary Devices
(Radio with CD)
The optional AUX input allows
portable devices to connect to the
vehicle using the 3.5 mm (1/8 in)
input jack, the USB port or
Bluetooth® wireless technology,
if equipped.
Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to
the 3.5 mm auxiliary input jack to
use a portable audio player.
Genre: Saves the genre associated
with the currently playing track in
the indicated favorites position.
Playback of an audio device that is
connected to the 3.5 mm auxiliary
input jack can only be controlled
using the controls on the device.
Portable devices are controlled by
using the menu system described in
Operation on page 7‑7.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-31
Adjusting the Volume
Connecting an iPod
Shuffle
Connect the iPod to the USB port.
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob and
set Shuffle Songs (Random) to On
Turn the VOL/ O knob to adjust the
volume of the infotainment system
after the volume level has been set
on the portable audio device.
Searching For a Track
or Off, then press the 0 BACK
button to return the main screen.
Tracks can be searched for by:
.
Playlists
On: Plays tracks in the current
folder in random order.
USB Port
.
Artists
For vehicles with a USB port, the
following devices may be connected
and controlled by the infotainment
system.
.
Off: Plays tracks in the current
folder in sequential order.
Albums
.
Song Titles
Repeat
.
Podcasts
.
iPods
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob and
set Repeat to On or Off, then press
.
Genres
.
PlaysForSure Devices (PFD)
.
Audiobooks
the 0 BACK button to return the
main screen.
.
USB Drives
.
Composers
.
Zunes
To search for tracks:
On: Repeats the current track.
Not all iPods, PFDs, USB Drives,
and Zunes are compatible with the
infotainment system.
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select Search.
Off: Playback starts from the
beginning of the current track after
the last track finishes.
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
Song Titles, Podcasts, Genres,
Audiobooks, or Composers.
Connecting and Controlling
an iPod™
Not all iPod's can be controlled by
the infotainment system.
4. Select the track.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-32
Infotainment System
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
Song Titles, Podcasts,
or Genres.
Connecting and Controlling a
PlaysForSure Device (PFD)
or Zune™
Connecting and Controlling a
USB Drive
The infotainment system can only
play back .mp3 and .wma files from
a USB drive.
4. Select the track.
Connecting a PFD or Zune
Shuffle Functionality
Connect the PFD or Zune to the
USB port.
Only the first 10,000 songs are
recognized on the device.
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob and
set Shuffle Songs (Random) to On
or Off.
Searching For a Track
When a device is not supported, the
message “No supported data found.
You can safely disconnect the
device” appears.
Tracks can be searched for by:
On: Plays current tracks in random
order.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Playlists
Artists
Off: Plays current tracks in
sequential order.
Connecting a USB Drive
Albums
Connect the USB drive to the
USB port.
Repeat Functionality
Song Titles
Podcasts
Genres
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob and
set Repeat to On or Off.
Searching For a Track
It is normal for the search feature
to take some time to display the
information after reading the device
due to the amount of information
stored.
Repeat On: Repeats the current
track.
To search for tracks:
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select Search.
Repeat Off: Playback starts from
the beginning of the current track
after the last track finishes.
Files that do not have any meta
data stored in the ID3 tag display
as Unknown.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-33
Tracks can be searched for by:
Off: Plays current tracks in
A Bluetooth phone with MP3
sequential order.
capability can not be paired to the
vehicle as a phone and an MP3
player at the same time.
.
Playlists*
Repeat Functionality
.
Artists
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob and
set Repeat to On or Off.
.
Albums
Pairing Information:
.
.
Song Titles
Up to five devices can be paired
Repeat On: Repeats the current
track.
to the system.
.
Genres
.
The pairing process is disabled
.
Folder View
Repeat Off: Playback starts from
the beginning of the current track
after the last track finishes.
Connecting a Bluetooth®
Device
when the vehicle is moving.
*This only displays if a playlist is
found on the device.
.
The infotainment system
automatically links with the first
available paired device in the
order the device was paired.
To search for tracks:
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select Search.
.
Before a Bluetooth device can
be connected to the infotainment
system, it must first be paired to the
system. Not all Bluetooth devices
can be paired to the infotainment
system. Before pairing the Bluetooth
device, become familiar with its
user guide for Bluetooth functions.
The system only connects to
Only one paired device can be
connected to the infotainment
system at a time.
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
Song Titles, Genres,
.
Pairing should only need to be
or Folder View.
completed once, unless changes
to the pairing information have
been made or the device is
deleted.
4. Select the track.
Shuffle Functionality
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob and
set Shuffle Songs (Random) to On
or Off.
Bluetooth devices that support
A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution
Profile) version 1.2.
On: Plays current tracks in random
order.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-34
Infotainment System
Bluetooth Setup Menu
To select the Bluetooth Music Setup
menu when a Bluetooth device is
connected and active:
4. Some devices may require
a PIN number in order to
complete the pairing process.
Locate the device named
“GMusicConnect” in the list on
the Bluetooth device and follow
the instructions on the device to
enter the four digit PIN number
provided by the infotainment
system.
The Bluetooth Setup menu can be
accessed with or without a device
attached to the USB port.
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select Bluetooth Music Setup.
Pairing a Device
To select the Bluetooth Setup menu
when a device is attached to the
USB port and active:
1. Select Connect To New Device
from the Bluetooth Music
Setup menu.
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob
while in the iPod, Zune, PFD,
or USB device main menu.
Connecting to a Device
2. The system asks a series of
Yes/No questions to determine
what type of device is being
paired.
2. Select Bluetooth Music Setup.
Once a device is paired to the
infotainment system, it can be
connected to the infotainment
system.
To select the Bluetooth Music Setup
menu when a device is not attached
to the USB port, or when a device is
attached to the USB port but not
active:
3. After the system determines
what type of Bluetooth device
is being paired, the Bluetooth
device will need to be put into
discovery mode.
To connect a paired device when
no other device is connected to the
infotainment system:
1. Press the AUX button until AUX
is the active source.
1. Select the Select Device option
from the Bluetooth Music
Setup menu.
2. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
3. Select Bluetooth Music Setup.
2. Select the new device.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-35
Controlling a Bluetooth®
Device
To connect a paired device when
another device is connected to the
infotainment system:
Changing the Default PIN
To change the default PIN:
Bluetooth devices that support
AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote
Control Profile) version 1.0 may
be able to be controlled by the
infotainment system.
1. Select Change Default PIN
from the Bluetooth Music
Setup menu.
1. Select the Select Device option
from the Bluetooth Music
Setup menu.
2. Select one of the pre‐defined
PIN numbers, or select Other to
create a PIN.
2. Select the new device.
3. The active device is
disconnected from the system
and the new device is
connected.
Press and release g SEEK /
l SEEK to skip tracks.
To create a PIN:
Other Information
1. Select the length of the PIN
number.
The Bluetooth® word mark and
Removing a Device
logos are owned by the Bluetooth®
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
by General Motors is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names
are those of their respective owners.
2. Enter the character sequence.
1. Select Remove Device from the
Bluetooth Music Setup menu.
Messages
The following messages may
appear on the infotainment screen.
2. Select the device.
3. The device is removed from the
system.
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13‑20 for FCC information.
Poor Bluetooth Signal Quality:
This message displays when the
Bluetooth signal strength is low.
Before connecting to the removed
device again, it will need to paired
to the infotainment system.
This Feature is Unavailable While
Vehicle is Moving: This message
displays when an action is not
allowed while the vehicle is moving.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-36
Infotainment System
3.5 mm Auxiliary Input Jack
Connecting and Controlling
an iPod™
Auxiliary Devices (Radio
with CD/DVD and MEM)
The optional AUX input allows
portable devices to be connected
using the 3.5 mm (1/8 in) input jack
or the USB port.
Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to
the 3.5 mm auxiliary input jack to
use a portable audio player.
Not all iPod's can be controlled by
the infotainment system.
Playback of an audio device that is
connected to the 3.5 mm auxiliary
input jack can only be controlled
using the controls on the device.
Connecting an iPod
Connect the iPod to the USB port.
Portable devices are controlled by
using the menu system described in
Operation on page 7‑7.
Selecting a Track
Adjusting the Volume
Using the control buttons:
.
Turn the VOL/ O knob to adjust the
volume of the infotainment system
after the volume level has been set
on the portable audio device.
Press g SEEK or l SEEK to
select the previous or next track.
.
Turn the TUNE knob to select a
track in the current sub menu.
The track will start to play.
USB Port
Playing Tracks in Random Order
The following devices may be
connected to the USB port and
controlled by the infotainment
system.
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob and
set Shuffle Songs to On or Off.
Shuffle On: Plays current tracks in
random order.
.
iPods
.
USB Mass Storage Devices
Shuffle Off: Plays current tracks in
The AUX input is located in the
center console.
sequential order.
Not all iPods or USB Mass Storage
Devices are compatible with the
infotainment system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-37
Searching For a Track
Selecting a Track
Connecting and Controlling a
USB Drive
Tracks can be searched for by:
Using the control buttons:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Files that are not stored in
folders are displayed in the root
directory (USB).
Playlists
.
Press g SEEK or l SEEK to
select the previous or next track.
Artists
.
Turn the TUNE knob to select a
track in the current sub menu.
The track will start to play.
Albums
Connecting a USB Drive
Song Titles
Genres
Connect the USB drive to the
USB port.
Selecting a track in a different
folder:
Composers
Audiobooks
Disconnecting a USB Drive
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select Folder List.
3. Select the folder.
A USB drive should be ejected from
the USB port before disconnecting
it. To eject a USB drive:
The number of objects in each
category is shown in parentheses
after the category.
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select USB Eject.
4. Select the track.
To search for tracks:
Searching for Tracks
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select Search.
Playing Tracks in Random Order
It is normal for the search feature
to take some time to display the
information after reading the device
due to the amount of information
stored.
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob and
then set Shuffle Songs to On.
3. Select: Playlists, Artists,
Albums, Song Titles, Genres,
Composers, or Audiobooks.
4. Select the track. The search rate
increases if the MENU/SELECT
knob is continuously turned
while searching in a list.
Files that do not have any meta
data stored in the ID3 tag display as
Unknown.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-38
Infotainment System
Tracks can be searched by:
Before Driving
Rear Seat
Infotainment
.
Playlists
The RSE is for rear seat
passengers only. The driver cannot
safely view the video screen while
driving.
.
Artists
.
Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) System
Albums
.
Song Titles
In severe or extreme weather
conditions the RSE system may not
work until the temperature is within
the operating range. The operating
range is above −20°C (−4°F)
and below 60°C (140°F). If the
temperature is outside of this range,
heat or cool the vehicle until it is
within the operating range.
.
The vehicle may have a DVD Rear
Seat Entertainment (RSE) system.
The RSE system works with the
vehicle's infotainment system. The
DVD player is part of the front radio.
The RSE system includes a radio
with a DVD player, two rear seat
video display screens, audio/video
jacks, two wireless headphones,
and a remote control. See CD/DVD
Player on page 7‑22 or the separate
navigation system manual for more
information on the vehicle's DVD
system.
Genres
The number of objects in each
category is shown in parentheses
after the category.
To search for tracks:
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select Search.
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
Song Titles, or Genres.
4. Select the track. The search rate
increases if the MENU/SELECT
knob is continuously turned
while searching in a list.
Recording Tracks to MEM
See Mass Storage Media (MEM) on
page 7‑27 for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
Headphones
7-39
.
.
Insert a DVD video disc.
Global Off
Press the Remote Control power
button.
Depending on the infotainment
system, the RSE system may
have a Global Off feature.
.
Press the MEM/DVD/AUX button
The Global Off feature disables
all RSE system features. Press
and hold the radio power button for
more than three seconds for Global
Off to disable the RSE features.
A padlock icon may display on
the infotainment screen when the
Global Off feature is on. On some
infotainment systems, the Global
Off feature can be turned off by
performing one of the following:
or the k button when a DVD
video disc is in the player.
.
.
Press the SRC button on the
steering wheel when a DVD
video disc is in the player.
Cycle the ignition.
A. Battery cover
.
B. Channel 1 or 2 switch
C. Power button
Press and hold the radio
power button for more than
three seconds.
D. Volume control
E. Power indicator light
.
Insert or eject any disc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-40
Infotainment System
RSE includes two 2-channel
wireless headphones. Channel 1
is dedicated to the DVD player,
and Channel 2 is dedicated to
RSA selections. The headphones
are used to listen to various
multi‐media. If the vehicle is not
equipped with RSA, then channel 2
is dedicated to any external auxiliary
device connected to the rear A/V
jacks. The wireless headphones
have an On/Off button, channel 1
or 2 switch, and a volume control.
Turn the headphones off when not
in use.
Infrared transmitters are on the
top of the left seatback video
Notice: Do not store the
headphones in heat or direct
sunlight. This could damage
the headphones and repairs will
not be covered by the warranty.
Storage in extreme cold can
weaken the batteries. Keep the
headphones stored in a cool,
dry place.
screen. The headphones shut off
automatically to save the battery
power if the RSE system and RSA
are shut off or if the headphones are
out of range of the transmitters for
more than three minutes. Moving too
far forward or stepping out of the
vehicle can cause the headphones
to lose the signal or have static.
If the foam ear pads attached to
the headphones become worn or
damaged, the pads can be replaced
separately from the headphone set.
To purchase replacement ear pads,
call 1‐888‐293‐3332, then prompt
zero (0), or contact your dealer.
To adjust the volume on the
headphones, use the volume
control.
For best audio performance, the
headphones must be worn correctly,
with the headband over the top of
the head. L (Left) and R (Right)
are above the ear pads and
are indicators as to how the
headphones should be placed
on the head.
Push the On/Off button to turn
on the headphones. A light on
the headphones comes on. If the
light does not come on, check the
batteries. Intermittent sound or static
can also indicate weak batteries.
See “Battery Replacement” later in
this section for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-41
Battery Replacement
Changing the Source on the Video
Display Screens
Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks
To change the batteries:
The A/V jacks may be located
on the rear of the floor console.
They allow audio or video cables
to be connected from an auxiliary
device such as a camcorder or a
video game system.
The image from the auxiliary device
can be switched between the video
display screens.
1. Loosen the screw to the battery
door located on the left side of
the headphones.
To change the display:
2. Slide the battery door open.
1. Press the AUX button on the
remote control to change the
source of both video screens
from the DVD player to the
auxiliary device.
3. Replace the two AAA batteries.
The A/V jacks are color coded:
4. Replace the battery door and
tighten the screw.
.
Yellow for video input.
.
White for left audio input.
Remove the batteries if the
headphones are not going to be
used for a long period of time.
.
Red for right audio input.
2. Press the AUX button a second
time to change the left video
screen source to the DVD player
and the right video screen to the
auxiliary device.
Power for auxiliary devices is not
supplied by the radio system.
To use the auxiliary inputs of the
RSE system:
1. Connect the auxiliary device
cables to the A/V jacks.
2. Power on both the auxiliary
device and the RSE video
screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-42
Infotainment System
3. Press the AUX button a third
time to change the left video
screen source to the auxiliary
device and the right video
screen to the DVD player.
Audio Output
Video Screens
Audio from the DVD player or
auxiliary inputs can be heard
through the following:
The video screens are located
in the back of the driver and front
passenger seats.
.
Wireless Headphones
4. Press the AUX button a fourth
time to change the source of
both video screens to the DVD
player.
.
Vehicle Speakers
.
Vehicle wired headphone jacks
on the rear seat audio system,
if the vehicle has this feature.
Changing the RSE Video Screen
Settings
The RSE system transmits the
audio signal to the wireless
headphones if an audio signal is
available. See “Headphones” earlier
in this section for more information.
The screen display mode,
brightness, and language can
be changed from the setup menu
using the remote control. To change
a setting:
Audio can be heard from the wired
headphone jacks on the RSA
system by selecting the desired
source from the RSA system, if the
vehicle has this feature.
1. Press z.
To use the video screen:
1. Push the release button located
on the seatback console.
2. Use n, q, p, o, and r
select the settings.
2. Move the screen to the desired
viewing position.
The front seat passengers are able
to listen to playback from the A/V
jacks through the vehicle speakers
by selecting Rear A/V as the source
on the radio.
3. Press z again to exit the
setup menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
Remote Control
7-43
Push the video screen down into its
locked position when it is not in use.
The screen turns off automatically.
Video Screen Input Jack
Each video screen is equipped
with a video input jack to allow
video cables to be connected
from an auxiliary device such as a
camcorder or a video game system.
This signal will override any video
provided by the RSE system; either
the DVD or Auxiliary A/V jack
source. The RSE system must
be on for this input to operate.
Only the left RSE seatback console
contains the infrared transmitters
for the wireless headphones. They
may be visible as eight illuminated
LEDs. These LEDs are not on the
right video screen. Both seatback
consoles contain an infrared
receiver for the remote control.
They are located at the top of
each console.
Notice: Avoid directly touching
the video screen, as damage may
occur. See “Cleaning the Video
Screen” later in this section for
more information.
To use the remote control, aim it
at the transmitter window at either
seatback console and press the
button. Direct sunlight or very bright
light could affect the ability of the
RSE transmitter to receive signals
from the remote control. Check
the batteries if the remote control
does not seem to be working.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-44
Infotainment System
See “Battery Replacement” later in
this section. Objects blocking the
line of sight could also affect the
function of the remote control.
Remote Control Buttons
n, q , p , o (Menu Navigation
Arrows): Use the arrow buttons to
navigate through a menu.
O (Power): Press to turn the video
screens on and off.
r (Enter): Press to select the
highlighted choice in any menu.
P (Illumination): Press to turn
the remote control backlight on.
The backlight times out after
several seconds if no other
button is pressed.
If a CD, DVD, or MP3 disc is in the
Radio DVD slot, the remote control
O button can be used to turn on
the video screen display and start
the disc. The infotainment system
can also turn on the video screen
display. See CD/DVD Player on
page 7‑22 or the separate
z (Display Menu): Press to
adjust the brightness and screen
display mode, and display the
language menu.
v (Title): Press to return to
the main menu of the DVD. This
function could vary for each disc.
q (Return): Press to exit the
current active menu and return to
the previous menu. This button
operates only when the display
menu or a DVD menu is active.
navigation system manual for
more information.
y (Main Menu): Press to access
the DVD menu. The DVD menu is
different on every DVD. Use the
navigation arrows to move the
cursor. After making a selection
press the enter button. This button
only operates when using a DVD.
Notice: Storing the remote
control in a hot area or in direct
sunlight can damage it, and the
repairs will not be covered by the
warranty. Storage in extreme cold
can weaken the batteries. Keep
the remote control stored in a
cool, dry place.
c (Stop): Press to stop playing,
rewinding, or fast forwarding a
DVD. Press twice to return to the
beginning of the DVD.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-45
s (Play/Pause): Press to start
playing a DVD. Press to pause a
DVD while it is playing. Press again
to continue playing.
u (Next Track/Chapter): Press
to go to the beginning of the next
chapter or track. This button might
not work when the DVD is playing
the copyright information or the
previews.
[ (Fast Forward): Press to fast
forward the DVD or CD. To stop fast
forwarding a DVD video, press s.
To stop fast forwarding a DVD audio
Depending on the infotainment
system in the vehicle, DVD
playback may be slowed down
or CD, release [. This button might
not work when the DVD is playing
the copyright information or the
previews.
r (Fast Reverse): Press to
quickly reverse the DVD or CD.
To stop fast reversing a DVD video,
by pressing s then [. Reverse
slow play by pressing s then r.
Press s again to cancel slow play.
e (Audio): Press to change audio
tracks on DVDs that have this
feature when the DVD is playing.
press s. To stop fast reversing
a DVD audio or CD, release r.
This button might not work when
the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
t (Previous Track/Chapter):
Press to go to the start of the
current track or chapter. Press
again to go to the previous track
or chapter. This button may not
work when the DVD is playing
the copyright information or the
previews.
{ (Subtitles): Press to turn
ON/OFF subtitles and to move
through subtitle options when a
DVD is playing.
AUX (Auxiliary): Press to switch
the video displays between the DVD
player and an auxiliary source.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-46
Infotainment System
The AUX button also controls the
source display between the left and
right video screens as described in
the table below:
Replacing the Remote Control
d (Camera): Press to change the
camera angle on DVDs that have
this feature when the DVD is
playing.
If the remote control becomes
lost or damaged, a new universal
remote control can be purchased.
Use a Toshiba® code set for
replacement universal remote
controls.
Aux
Left
Right
\ (Clear) (If Available): Press this
button within three seconds after
inputting a numeric selection, to
clear all numeric inputs.
Button
Screen
Screen
Press
Battery Replacement
Default
State (No
Press)
DVD
Media
DVD
Media
} 10 (Double Digit Entries)
(If Available): Press this button to
select chapter or track numbers
greater than 9. Press this button
before inputting the number.
To change the remote control
batteries:
First
Aux Video Aux Video
1. Slide back the rear cover on the
remote control.
Press
Source
Source
Second
Press
DVD
Media
Aux Video
Source
2. Replace the two batteries in the
compartment.
1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad):
The numbered keypad provides the
capability of direct chapter or track
number selection.
Third
Press
Aux Video
Source
DVD
Media
3. Replace the battery cover.
Remove the batteries from the
remote control if unused for an
extended period of time.
Return to Return to
Default
State
Fourth
Press
Default
State
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-47
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart
Problem
Recommended Action
No power.
The ignition might not be turned ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY.
The picture does not fill the screen. There are black
borders on the top and bottom or on both sides or it
looks stretched out.
Check the display mode settings in the setup menu by
pressing the display menu button on the remote control.
In auxiliary mode, the picture moves or scrolls.
The remote control does not work.
Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices.
Check to make sure there is no obstruction between the
remote control and the transmitter window.
Check the batteries to make sure they are not dead or
installed incorrectly.
After stopping the player, I push Play but sometimes
the DVD starts where I left off and sometimes at the
beginning.
If the stop button was pressed one time, the DVD player
resumes playing where the DVD was stopped. If the
stop button was pressed two times the DVD player
begins to play from the beginning of the DVD.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-48
Infotainment System
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont'd)
Recommended Action
The auxiliary source is running but there is no picture or Check that the RSE video screen is in the auxiliary
Problem
sound.
source mode by pressing the AUX button on the remote
control.
Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices.
Sometimes the wireless headphone audio cuts out or
buzzes.
Check for obstructions, low batteries, reception range,
and interference from cellular telephone towers or by
using a cellular telephone in the vehicle.
Check that the headphones are on correctly using the
L (left) and R (right) on the headphones.
Check that the headphones are positioned properly with
the headband across the top of the head.
I lost the remote and/or the headphones.
See your dealer for assistance.
The DVD is playing, but there is no picture or sound.
Check that the RSE video screen is sourced to the DVD
player by pressing the AUX button on the remote
control.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-49
It might be necessary to turn off the
DVD player when operating one of
these devices in or near the vehicle.
*Excludes the OnStar® System.
seat passengers are not listening to,
except on radios where dual control
is allowed.
DVD Display Error Messages
The DVD display error message
depends on which radio the vehicle
has. The video screen may display
one of the following:
RSA can function when the front
radio is off. X displays on the
infotainment system when RSA
is on.
Cleaning the RSE Seatback
Console
Disc Load/Eject Error or
Mechanical Error: There are
disc load or eject problems.
Use only a clean cloth dampened
with clean water to clean the RSE
seatback console surface.
Audio can be heard through
wired headphones (not included)
plugged into the jacks on the RSA.
If the vehicle has a Rear Seat
Entertainment system with wireless
headphones, audio can also be
heard on Channel 2 of the wireless
headphones.
Disc Format Error or Unknown
Format: The disc is inserted with
the disc label wrong side up, or the
disc is damaged.
Cleaning the Video Screens
Use only a clean cloth dampened
with clean water. Use care when
touching or cleaning the screens
as damage could result.
Disc Region Error or Disc Error:
The disc is not from a correct
region.
To listen to a portable audio
No Disc Inserted: No disc is
device through the RSA, attach
the portable audio device to either
the front or rear auxiliary input,
if available. Turn the device on,
then choose the front auxiliary input
with the RSA SRCE button.
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
System
Vehicles with this feature allow
the rear seat passengers to listen
to and control any of the music
sources: radio, CDs, DVDs, or other
auxiliary sources. RSA can only
control music sources that the front
present when the Y EJECT or
MEM/DVD/AUX button is pressed
on the radio.
DVD Distortion
Video distortion can occur when
operating cellular phones, scanners,
CB radios, Global Position Systems
(GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax,
or walkie talkies.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-50
Infotainment System
While listening to a disc, press ¨ to
go to the next track or chapter on
the disc. Press © to go back to the
start of the current track or chapter if
more than ten seconds have played.
If the front seat passengers are
listening to a disc, this function may
be inactive on some radios. Press
and hold © or ¨ to fast reverse or
fast forward.
When a DVD video menu is being
displayed, press © or ¨ to cursor up
or down on the menu. Hold © or ¨ to
cursor left or right on the menu.
P (Power): Press to turn the RSA
© ¨ (Seek): While listening to the
radio, press to go to the previous or
to the next station and stay there.
If the front seat passengers are
listening to the radio, this function
may be inactive on some radios.
on or off.
Volume: Turn to increase or
decrease the volume of the wired
headphones. The left knob controls
the left headphones and the right
knob controls the right. Use the
volume control on headphones for
wireless headphones.
PROG (Program): Press to go to
the next preset radio station or
channel set on the main radio. If the
front seat passengers are listening
to the radio, this function may be
inactive on some radios.
Press and hold © or ¨ until “Tune”
displays. Continue to press © or ¨ to
tune to an individual station. Tune
SRCE (Source): Press to select
between the radio, CD, and if these
features are available: DVD, front
or rear auxiliary, HDD, USB. The
front radio may override the rear
selection as required.
stays active until © or ¨ has not
been pressed for several seconds.
If the front seat passengers are
listening to the radio, this function
may be inactive on some radios.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
Bluetooth Controls
7-51
When a CD or DVD audio disc is
playing, press PROG to go to the
beginning of the disc or display disc
info. If the front seat passengers are
listening to a disc, this function may
be inactive on some radios.
Phone
Use the buttons located on the
infotainment system and the
steering wheel to operate the
Bluetooth system.
Bluetooth (Overview)
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system
can use a Bluetooth capable cell
phone with a Hands Free Profile
to make and receive phone calls.
The infotainment system and voice
recognition are used to control
the system. The system can be
used while in ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY. The range of the
Bluetooth system can be up to
9.1 m (30 ft). Not all phones support
all functions and not all phones
work with the Bluetooth system.
See www.gm.com/bluetooth for
more information about compatible
phones.
Steering Wheel Controls
When a disc is playing in the CD
or DVD changer, press and hold
PROG to select the next disc,
if multiple discs are loaded. If the
front seat passengers are listening
to a disc, this function may be
inactive on some radios.
b / g (Push To Talk): Press to
answer incoming calls, confirm
system information, and start voice
recognition.
$ / c (End Call / Mute): Press to
end a call, reject a call, or to cancel
an operation.
The PROG button may be used to
access the menu of an MP3. Once
Infotainment System Controls
in the menu, use © or ¨ to make
selections.
For information about how to
navigate the menu system using the
infotainment controls, see Operation
on page 7‑7.
When a DVD video menu is
displayed, press PROG, or press
and hold PROG to perform the
menu function, ENTER.
PHONE: Press to enter the Phone
main menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-52
Infotainment System
Voice Recognition
Use the VOL/ O knob during a
call to change the volume level.
The adjusted volume level
remains in memory for later
calls. The system maintains a
minimum volume level.
Bluetooth (Infotainment
Controls)
For information about how to
navigate the menu system using the
infotainment controls, see Operation
on page 7‑7.
The voice recognition system uses
commands to control the system
and dial phone numbers.
Noise: The system may not
recognize voice commands if there
is too much background noise.
Other Information
Pairing
The Bluetooth® word mark and
When to Speak: A tone sounds to
indicate that the system is ready for
a voice command. Wait for the tone
and then speak.
logos are owned by the Bluetooth®
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
by General Motors is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names
are those of their respective owners.
A Bluetooth‐enabled cell phone
must be paired to the Bluetooth
system first and then connected to
the vehicle before it can be used.
See the cell phone manufacturer
user guide for Bluetooth functions
before pairing the cell phone. If a
Bluetooth phone is not connected,
calls will be made using OnStar®
Hands‐Free Calling, if available.
Refer to the OnStar Owner's Guide
for more information.
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a
calm and natural voice.
See Radio Frequency
Audio System
Statement on page 13‑20 for
Federal Communications
Commission and Industry
Canada Standards information.
When using the Bluetooth system,
sound comes through the vehicle's
front audio system speakers
and overrides the audio system.
A Bluetooth phone with MP3
capability can not be connected to
the vehicle as a phone and an MP3
player at the same time.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-53
The pairing process can be started
by using the voice recognition
system or the controls on the
infotainment system.
Pairing a Phone
7. The system responds with
“<Phone name> has been
successfully paired” after the
pairing process is complete.
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Phone Settings.
3. Select Bluetooth.
Pairing Information:
8. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 to pair
additional phones.
.
4. Select Pair Device (Phone).
A four‐digit Personal
Up to five cell phones can be
paired to the Bluetooth system.
Listing All Paired and Connected
Phones
Identification Number (PIN)
appears on the display.
.
The pairing process is disabled
when the vehicle is moving.
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Phone Settings.
3. Select Bluetooth.
5. Start the pairing process on the
cell phone that will be paired to
the vehicle. Reference the cell
phone manufacturers user guide
for information on this process.
.
The Bluetooth system links with
the first available paired cell
phone in the order the phone
was paired.
4. Select Device List.
.
Only one paired cell phone can
Deleting a Paired Phone
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Phone Settings.
3. Select Bluetooth.
Locate the device named “Your
Vehicle” in the list on the cell
phone and follow the instructions
on the cell phone to enter the
PIN provided by the system.
be connected to the Bluetooth
system at a time.
.
Pairing should only need to be
completed once, unless changes
to the pairing information have
been made or the phone is
deleted.
4. Select Device List.
6. The system prompts for a name
for the phone and confirms the
name provided. This name is
used to indicate which phone is
connected.
5. Select the phone to delete and
follow the on screen prompts.
To link to a different paired phone,
see “Linking to a Different Phone”
later in this section.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-54
Infotainment System
Linking to a Different Phone
Radio with CD
Making a Call Using
Phone Book
To link to a different phone, the new
phone must be in the vehicle and
available to be connected to the
Bluetooth system before the
process is started.
To make a call using the Phone
Book menu:
For cell phones that support the
phone book feature, the Bluetooth
system can use the contacts stored
on your cell phone to make calls.
See your cell phone's owner's guide
or contact your wireless provider to
find out if this feature is supported
by your phone.
1. Press the PHONE button twice.
2. Select Phone Book.
3. You can search through the list
by selecting the letter group the
phone book entry begins with,
or press the SELECT button
to scroll through the entire
list of names/numbers in the
phone book.
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Phone Settings.
3. Select Bluetooth.
When a cell phone supports the
phone book feature, the Phone
Book and Call Lists menus are
automatically available.
4. Select Device List.
5. Select the new phone to link
to and follow the on screen
prompts.
4. Select the name or number you
want to call.
The Phone Book menu allows you
to access the phone book stored in
the cell phone to make a call.
If delete is selected, the
highlighted phone will be
deleted.
To make a call using the Call
Lists menu:
The Call Lists menu allows you to
access the phone numbers from the
Incoming Calls, Outgoing Calls, and
Missed Calls menus on your cell
phone to make a call.
1. Press the PHONE button twice.
2. Select Call Lists.
3. Select the Incoming Calls,
Outgoing Calls, or Missed
Calls list.
4. Select the name or number you
want to call.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-55
Radio with CD/DVD and MEM
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Select Phone Book.
Accepting a Call
Making a Call
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
“Answer” and press the MENU/
SELECT knob to accept the call.
Radio with CD
1. Press the PHONE button twice.
3. You can search through the list
by selecting the letter group the
phone book entry begins with,
or press the SELECT button
to scroll through the entire list
of names/numbers in the
2. Enter the character sequence.
See “Entering a Character
Declining a Call
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
“Decline” and press the MENU/
SELECT knob to decline the call.
Sequence” in Operation on
page 7‑7 for more information.
3. Select Call to start dialing the
number.
Call Waiting
phone book.
Radio with CD/DVD and MEM
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Select Enter number.
Call waiting must be supported on
the Bluetooth phone and enabled by
the wireless service carrier to work.
4. Select the name or number you
want to call.
To make a call using the Call
Lists menu:
Accepting a Call
3. Enter the character sequence.
See “Entering a Character
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
“Answer” and press the MENU/
SELECT knob to accept the call.
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Select Call Lists.
Sequence” in Operation on
page 7‑7 for more information.
3. Select the Incoming Calls,
Outgoing Calls, or Missed
Calls list.
Declining a Call
4. Select Call to start dialing the
number.
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
“Decline” and press the MENU/
SELECT knob to decline the call.
4. Select the name or number you
want to call.
Accepting or Declining a Call
When an incoming call is received,
the infotainment system mutes and
a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-56
Infotainment System
Switching Between Calls
(Call Waiting Calls Only)
4. After the call has been
placed, turn or press the
MENU/SELECT knob and
choose Merge Calls.
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
(DTMF) Tones
To switch between calls:
The in‐vehicle Bluetooth system can
send numbers during a call. This is
used when calling a menu‐driven
phone system.
1. Turn or press the
MENU/SELECT knob.
5. To add more callers to the
conference call, repeat steps 1
through 4. The number of callers
that can be added are limited by
your wireless service carrier.
2. Select Switch Call from
the menu.
1. Turn or press the MENU/
SELECT knob and select
Enter Number.
Conference Calling
Ending a Call
Conference calling and three‐way
calling must be supported on the
Bluetooth phone and enabled by the
wireless service carrier to work.
2. Enter the character sequence.
See “Entering a Character
Turn or press the MENU/SELECT
knob and select Hang Up.
Sequence” in Operation on
page 7‑7 for more information.
Muting a Call
To Mute a Call
To start a conference while in a
current call:
Turn or press the MENU/SELECT
knob and select Mute Call.
1. Turn or press the
MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select Enter Number.
To Cancel Mute
3. Enter the character sequence
then select Call. See “Entering
a Character Sequence” in
Operation on page 7‑7 for
more information.
Turn or press the MENU/SELECT
knob and select Mute Call.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-57
.
Pairing only needs to be
completed once, unless the
Pairing
Bluetooth (Voice
Recognition)
A Bluetooth cell phone must be
paired to the Bluetooth system and
then connected to the vehicle before
it can be used. See your cell phone
manufacturers user guide for
Bluetooth functions before pairing
the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone
is not connected, calls will be made
using OnStar® Hands‐Free Calling,
if available. Refer to the OnStar
Owner's Guide for more information.
pairing information on the cell
phone changes or the cell phone
is deleted from the system.
Using Voice Recognition
Tbogusbeuvttooincelorceactoegdnoitnionth,eprsetesesrtihneg
wheel. The system responds
differently depending on what
kind of infotainment system the
vehicle has.
.
.
Only one paired cell phone can
be connected to the Bluetooth
system at a time.
If multiple paired cell phones
are within range of the system,
the system connects to the first
available paired cell phone in
the order that they were first
paired to the system. To link
to a different paired phone, see
“Linking to a Different Phone”
later in this section.
For vehicles without a navigation
system, the system responds
“Ready,” followed by a tone.
After the tone, say a command.
Pairing Information
A Bluetooth phone with MP3
capability can not be paired to the
vehicle as a phone and an MP3
player at the same time.
For vehicles with a navigation
system, the system responds with
a tone. After the tone say “Hands
Free” to use the Bluetooth voice
recognition system. The system
then responds with “Ready,”
followed by a tone. After the
tone, say a command.
.
Up to five cell phones can be
paired to the Bluetooth system.
.
The pairing process is disabled
when the vehicle is moving.
For additional information say
“Help” while you are in a voice
recognition menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-58
Infotainment System
Pairing a Phone
5. Locate the device named “Your
Vehicle” in the list on the cell
phone. Follow the instructions
on the cell phone to enter the
PIN number that was provided
in Step 3. After the PIN number
is successfully entered, the
Listing All Paired and Connected
Phones
1. Press b g. For vehicles with a
navigation system, say “Hands
Free,” after the tone.
The system can list all cell phones
paired to it. If a paired cell phone is
also connected to the vehicle, the
system responds with “is connected”
after that phone name.
2. Say “Bluetooth.”
3. Say “Pair.” The system responds
with instructions and a four‐digit
Personal Identification Number
(PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5.
system prompts you to provide a
name for the paired cell phone.
This name will be used to
1. Press b g. For vehicles with a
navigation system, say “Hands
Free,” after the tone.
indicate which phones are
4. Start the pairing process on the
cell phone that you want to pair.
For help with this process, see
your cell phone manufacturer's
user guide.
paired and connected to the
vehicle, see “Listing All Paired
and Connected Phones” later in
this section for more information.
2. Say “Bluetooth.”
3. Say “List.”
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pair
additional phones.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-59
Deleting a Paired Phone
Connecting to a Different Phone
Storing and Deleting Phone
Numbers
If the phone name you want to
delete is unknown, see “Listing All
Paired and Connected Phones.”
To connect to a different cell phone,
the Bluetooth system looks for the
next available cell phone in the
order in which all the available cell
phones were paired. Depending
on which cell phone you want to
connect to, you may have to use
this command several times.
The system can store up to
30 phone numbers as name tags
in the Hands Free Directory that is
shared between the Bluetooth and
OnStar systems.
1. Press b g. For vehicles with a
navigation system, say “Hands
Free,” after the tone.
The following commands are used
delete and store phone numbers.
2. Say “Bluetooth.”
3. Say “Delete.” The system asks
1. Press b g. For vehicles with a
navigation system, say “Hands
Free,” after the tone.
Store: This command will store
a phone number, or a group of
numbers as a name tag.
for which phone to delete.
4. Say the name of the phone you
want to delete.
2. Say “Bluetooth.”
Digit Store: This command allows
a phone number to be stored as a
name tag by entering the digits one
at a time.
3. Say “Change phone.”
.
If another cell phone is
found, the response will be
“<Phone name> is now
connected.”
Delete: This command is used to
delete individual name tags.
.
Delete All Name Tags: This
command deletes all stored name
tags in the Hands Free Calling
Directory and the Destinations
Directory.
If another cell phone is not
found, the original phone
remains connected.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-60
Infotainment System
Using the “Store” Command
3. Say each digit, one at a time,
that you want to store. After
Using the “Delete All Name Tags”
Command
1. Press b g. For vehicles with a
navigation system, say “Hands
Free,” after the tone.
each digit is entered, the system
repeats back the digit it heard
followed by a tone. After the
last digit has been entered,
say “Store”, and then follow the
directions given by the system to
save a name tag for this number.
This command deletes all stored
name tags in the Hands Free
Calling Directory and the
2. Say “Store.”
Destinations Directory.
3. Say the phone number or group
of numbers you want to store all
at once with no pauses, then
follow the directions given by the
system to save a name tag for
this number.
To delete all name tags:
1. Press b g. For vehicles with a
navigation system, say “Hands
Free,” after the tone.
Using the “Delete” Command
1. Press b g. For vehicles with a
navigation system, say “Hands
Free,” after the tone.
2. Say “Delete all name tags.”
Using the “Digit Store” Command
Listing Stored Numbers
If an unwanted number is
recognized by the system, say
“Clear” at any time to clear the
last number.
2. Say “Delete.”
The list command will list all the
stored numbers and name tags.
3. Say the name tag you want to
delete.
Using the “List” Command
To hear all of the numbers
recognized by the system, say
“Verify” at any time.
1. Press b g. For vehicles with a
navigation system, say “Hands
Free,” after the tone.
1. Press b g. For vehicles with a
navigation system, say “Hands
Free,” after the tone.
2. Say “Directory.”
3. Say “Hands Free Calling.”
4. Say “List.”
2. Say “Digit Store.”
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-61
Using the “Digit Dial” Command
Once connected, the person called
will be heard through the audio
speakers.
Making a Call
The digit dial command allows a
phone number to be dialed by
entering the digits one at a time.
After each digit is entered, the
system repeats back the digit it
heard followed by a tone.
Calls can be made using the
following commands.
Using the “Re‐dial” Command
Dial or Call: The dial or
call command can be used
interchangeably to dial a phone
number or a stored name tag.
1. Press b g. For vehicles with a
navigation system, say “Hands
Free,” after the tone.
If an unwanted number is
recognized by the system, say
“Clear” at any time to clear the
last number.
Digit Dial: This command allows
a phone number to be dialed by
entering the digits one at a time.
2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial.”
Once connected, the person called
will be heard through the audio
speakers.
Re‐dial : This command is used to
dial the last number used on the cell
phone.
To hear all of the numbers
recognized by the system,
say “Verify” at any time.
Receiving a Call
When an incoming call is received,
the audio system mutes and a ring
tone is heard in the vehicle.
Using the “Dial” or “Call”
Command
1. Press b g. For vehicles with a
navigation system, say “Hands
Free,” after the tone.
1. Press b g. For vehicles with a
navigation system, say “Hands
Free,” after the tone.
.
Press b g to answer the call.
2. Say “Digit Dial.”
.
Press c to ignore a call.
3. Say each digit, one at a time,
that you want to dial. After each
digit is entered, the system
repeats back the digit it heard
followed by a tone. After the
last digit has been entered,
say “Dial.”
2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”
3. Say the entire number without
pausing or say the name tag.
Once connected, the person called
will be heard through the audio
speakers.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-62
Infotainment System
Call Waiting
Three‐Way Calling
Muting a Call
Call waiting must be supported on
the cell phone and enabled by the
wireless service carrier.
Three‐way calling must be
supported on the cell phone and
enabled by the wireless service
carrier.
During a call, all sounds from inside
the vehicle can be muted so that the
person on the other end of the call
cannot hear them.
.
Press b g to answer an
incoming call when another call
is active. The original call is
placed on hold.
1. While on a call, press b g.
2. Say “Three‐way call.”
To mute a call, press b g, and then
say “Mute Call.”
To cancel mute, press b g, and
then say “Un‐mute Call.”
3. Use the dial or call command to
dial the number of the third party
to be called.
.
Press b g again to return to the
original call.
Transferring a Call
.
To ignore the incoming call, no
4. Once the call is connected,
Audio can be transferred between
the Bluetooth system and the cell
phone.
action is required.
press b g to link all callers
together.
.
Press c $ to disconnect the
current call and switch to the call
on hold.
Ending a Call
The cell phone must be paired
and connected with the Bluetooth
system before a call can be
Press c to end a call.
transferred. The connection process
can take up to two minutes after the
ignition is turned to ON/RUN.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-63
To Transfer Audio From the
Bluetooth System to a Cell Phone
To access contacts stored in the cell
phone:
Sending a Number or Name Tag
During a Call
During a call with the audio in the
vehicle:
1. Press b g. The system
responds “Ready”, followed by
a tone.
1. Press b g. For vehicles with a
navigation system, say “Hands
Free,” after the tone.
1. Press b g.
2. Say “Transfer Call.”
2. Say “Bluetooth.” The system
responds “Bluetooth ready”,
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Dial.”
3. Say the number or name tag
to send.
To Transfer Audio to the Bluetooth
System From a Cell Phone
3. Say “Voice.” The system
responds “OK, accessing
<phone name>.”
Clearing the System
During a call with the audio on the
Unless information is deleted out
of the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system,
it will be retained indefinitely.
This includes all saved name tags in
the phone book and phone pairing
information. For information on how
to delete this information, see the
previous sections on “Deleting a
Paired Phone” and “Deleting
Name Tags.”
cell phone, press b g. The audio
transfers to the vehicle. If the audio
does not transfer to the vehicle,
use the audio transfer feature on
the cell phone. See your cell phone
manufacturers user guide for more
information.
.
The cell phone's normal
prompt messages will
go through their cycle
according to the phone's
operating instructions.
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
(DTMF) Tones
Voice Pass-Thru
Voice pass‐thru allows access to
the voice recognition commands on
the cell phone. See your cell phone
manufacturer's user guide to see if
the cell phone supports this feature.
The Bluetooth system can send
numbers and the numbers stored
as name tags during a call. You can
use this feature when calling a
menu‐driven phone system.
Account numbers can also be
stored for use.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-64
Infotainment System
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
8-1
Climate Control Systems
Climate Controls
Dual Automatic Climate Control System
Climate Control Systems
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Rear Climate Control
The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled with
this system.
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Air Vents
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Maintenance
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
A. Fan Control
G. Driver and Passenger
Temperature Control
B. Power
H. Driver and Passenger Heated
and Ventilated Seats
C. AUTO (Automatic Operation)
D. ZONE
I. Air Conditioning
J. Recirculation
E. Defrost
F. Air Delivery Mode Control
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-2
Climate Controls
K. Outside Air
English units can be changed
to metric units through the
Driver Information Center (DIC).
See Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑40.
Manual Operation
L. Rear Window Defogger
O (Power): Press to turn the
climate control system on or off.
Automatic Operation
D C (Fan Control): Press to
increase or decrease the fan speed.
Pressing either button cancels
automatic operation and the system
goes into manual mode. Press
AUTO to return to automatic
operation.
The system automatically controls
the fan speed, air delivery, air
conditioning and recirculation in
order to heat or cool the vehicle
to the desired temperature.
Q / R (Driver and Passenger
Temperature Control): The
temperature can be adjusted
separately for the driver and the
passenger. Press to increase or
decrease the temperature.
When the indicator light is on, the
system is in full automatic operation.
If the air delivery mode or fan
setting is manually adjusted, the
auto indicator turns off and displays
will show the selected settings.
H G (Air Delivery Mode Control):
Press to change the direction of the
airflow. The current mode appears
in the display screen. Changing
the mode cancels the automatic
operation and the system goes into
manual mode. Press AUTO to
return to automatic operation.
ZONE: Press to link all climate
zone settings to the driver settings.
The ZONE indicator light turns off.
When the passenger settings are
adjusted, the ZONE indicator light
is on.
To place the system in automatic
mode do the following:
1. Press AUTO.
2. Set the temperature. Allow
the system time to stabilize.
Then adjust the temperature
as needed for best comfort.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
8-3
To change the current mode, select
one of the following:
The climate control system may
# (Air Conditioning): Press to
turn the automatic air conditioning
on or off. If the fan is turned off or
the outside temperature falls below
freezing, the air conditioner will
not run.
have a sensor to detect air pollution.
In auto recirculation control, the Air
Quality Control system may operate.
To adjust the sensitivity of the
Air Quality Control, see Climate
and Air Quality under Vehicle
Y (Vent): Air is directed to the
instrument panel outlets.
\ (Bi-Level): Air is divided
between the instrument panel
outlets and the floor outlets.
Press AUTO to return to automatic
operation and the air conditioner
runs as needed. When the indicator
light is on, the air conditioner runs
automatically to cool the air inside
the vehicle or to dry the air needed
to defog the windshield faster.
Personalization on page 5‑40.
C (Tri‐Level): Air is divided
between the windshield, instrument
panel, and floor outlets.
Auto Defog: The climate control
system may have a sensor to
automatically detect high humidity
inside the vehicle. When high
humidity is detected, the climate
control system may adjust to
outside air supply and turn on the
air conditioner. If the climate control
system does not detect possible
window fogging, it returns to normal
operation. To turn Auto Defog off
or on, see Climate and Air Quality
under Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑40.
[ (Floor): Air is directed to the
floor outlets.
h (Recirculation): Press to turn
on recirculation. An indicator light
comes on. Air is recirculated to
quickly cool the inside of the vehicle
or prevent outside air and odors
from entering.
- (Defog): Clears the windows of
fog or moisture. Air is directed to the
windshield and floor outlets.
8 (Upper): Air is directed to the
windshield outlets.
7 (Hi-Level): Air is divided
between the windshield and
instrument panel outlets.
Automatic Air Recirculation:
When the AUTO indicator light
is on, the air is automatically
recirculated as needed to help
quickly cool the inside of the
vehicle.
% (Outside Air): Press to turn
on outside air. An indicator light
comes on. Outside air is circulated
through the vehicle.
0 (Defrost): Clears the
windshield of fog or frost more
quickly. Air is directed to the
windshield.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-4
Climate Controls
The heated outside rearview mirrors
turn on when the rear window
defogger button is on and helps to
clear fog or frost from the surface of
the mirror. See Heated Mirrors on
page 2‑23.
Remote Start Climate Control
Operation: For vehicles with the
remote vehicle start feature, the
climate control system may run
when the vehicle is started remotely.
The system uses the driver's
previous settings to heat or cool the
inside of the vehicle. See Remote
Vehicle Start on page 2‑10.
Rear Window Defogger
= (Rear Window Defogger):
Press to turn the rear window
defogger on or off.
The rear window defogger turns
off automatically after about
10 minutes. If turned on again it
runs for about 5 minutes before
turning off. At higher speeds, the
rear window defogger may stay
on continuously.
Notice: Do not try to clear frost
or other material from the inside
of the front windshield and rear
window with a razor blade or
anything else that is sharp.
This may damage the rear
window defogger grid and affect
your radio's ability to pick up
stations clearly. The repairs
wouldn't be covered by your
warranty.
The rear window defogger turns on
if it is cold outside.
Sensors
The rear window defogger can
be set to automatic operation,
see Climate and Air Quality
The solar sensor located on top
of the instrument panel near the
windshield, monitors the solar heat.
under Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑40. When auto rear defog is
selected, the rear window defogger
turns on automatically when the
interior temperature is cold and the
outside temperature is about 40°F
and below. The auto rear defogger
turns off automatically after about
10 minutes. At higher speeds, the
rear window defogger may stay on
continuously.
The climate control system
uses the sensor information to
adjust the temperature, fan speed,
recirculation, and air delivery mode
for best comfort.
Heated and Ventilated Seats:
Press to heat or ventilate the seat.
See Heated and Ventilated Front
Seats on page 3‑11.
If the sensor is covered the
automatic climate control system
may not work properly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
8-5
climate control system to turn off
Rear Climate Control System
the rear blower and match the rear
settings to the front. The ZONE
indicator light and rear climate
control display will turn off.
For vehicles with the rear heat and air conditioning controls, they are
integrated with the rear seat audio controls located in the center console.
The rear climate control can be
turned off by pressing the C button.
Independent Mode: This mode
directs rear seating airflow
according to the settings of
the rear controls.
The front climate control system
must be on for the rear climate
control to work. To turn on the rear
climate control from rear seating,
press any rear climate control
button.
Rear Climate Control with Rear Seat Audio Controls
A. Fan Control
ZONE: When the rear climate
The rear climate control will not
work if the front climate control
system is in defrost.
control is turned on from the rear,
the ZONE indicator light will turn on.
Press the ZONE button on the front
B. Air Delivery Mode Control
C. Temperature Control
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-6
Climate Controls
Automatic Operation
Air Vents
Maintenance
AUTO: Press N until the AUTO
setting is selected to control the rear
temperature, air delivery, and fan
speed automatically.
Move the sliding knob on the air
outlets up and down or left and
right to direct the airflow. Use the
thumbwheels near the air outlets to
open or close off the airflow.
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter
The filter removes dust, pollen, and
other airborne irritants from outside
air that is pulled into the vehicle.
Manual Operation
Operation Tips
D C (Fan Control): Press these
buttons on the rear seat audio
control panel to increase or
decrease the airflow. Pressing
the fan up button when the system
is off will turn the system on. The
air delivery mode remains in its
previous setting.
.
The filter should be replaced as part
of routine scheduled maintenance.
To find out what type of filter to use,
see Maintenance Replacement
Parts on page 11‑9.
Clear away any ice, snow,
or leaves from air inlets at the
base of the windshield that could
block the flow of air into the
vehicle.
.
1. Open the glove box completely
and remove the four screws
along the upper portion of the
glovebox.
Keep the path under the front
seats clear of objects to help
circulate the air inside the
vehicle more effectively.
+/− (Temperature Control):
Press these buttons to adjust
the temperature of the air flowing
into the passenger area. Press the
+ button for warmer air and press
the − button for cooler air.
.
2. When released, lower the upper
portion of the glovebox.
Use of non‐GM approved hood
deflectors can adversely affect
the performance of the system.
Check with your dealer before
adding equipment to the outside
of the vehicle.
3. Locate the service door for the
passenger compartment air filter.
N (Air Delivery Mode Control):
Press the mode button to change
the direction of the airflow in the
vehicle. Multiple presses will cycle
through the delivery selections.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
8-7
4. Release the two latches holding
the service door. Lower the
service door.
5. Remove the old air filter.
6. Install the new air filter.
7. Close the service door and
latches.
8. Re‐install the upper portion of
the glove box.
See your dealer if additional
assistance is needed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-8
Climate Controls
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-1
Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Shifting Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Parking Over Things
Ride Control Systems
Driving and
Operating
Traction Control
System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . 9-37
Selective Ride Control . . . . . . . 9-37
Driving Information
That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-8
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-11
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Cruise Control
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
Engine Exhaust
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Running the Vehicle While
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Object Detection Systems
Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-40
Rear Vision
Automatic Transmission
Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-26
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Fuel Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Fuel
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . 9-48
California Fuel
Drive Systems
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-49
Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 9-50
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
Filling a Portable Fuel
Brakes
Starting and Operating
Antilock Brake
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-17
Adjustable Throttle and Brake
Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Starting the Gasoline
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 9-33
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-2
Driving and Operating
Towing
General Towing
Driving Information
WARNING (Continued)
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
Driving Characteristics and
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58
Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61
Trailer Sway
Defensive Driving
careless and make mistakes.
Anticipate what they might do
and be ready. In addition:
Defensive driving means “always
expect the unexpected.” The first
step in driving defensively is to wear
your safety belt. See Safety Belts on
page 3‑14.
.
Allow enough following
distance between you and
the driver in front of you.
Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62
.
Conversions and Add-Ons
Add-On Electrical
Focus on the task of driving.
WARNING
{
Driver distraction can cause
collisions resulting in injury or
possible death. These simple
defensive driving techniques
could save your life.
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62
Assume that other road users
(pedestrians, bicyclists, and
other drivers) are going to be
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-3
Police records show that
or heart. This means that
when anyone who has been
Drunk Driving
almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve
alcohol. In most cases, these
deaths are the result of someone
who was drinking and driving.
In recent years, more than
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related
deaths have been associated with
the use of alcohol, with about
250,000 people injured.
drinking — driver or passenger — is
in a crash, that person's chance of
being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not
been drinking.
WARNING
{
Drinking and then driving is
very dangerous. Your reflexes,
perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by
even a small amount of alcohol.
You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive
after drinking. Do not drink and
drive or ride with a driver who has
been drinking. Ride home in a
cab; or if you are with a group,
designate a driver who will not
drink.
Control of a Vehicle
The following three systems
help to control the vehicle while
driving — brakes, steering, and
accelerator. At times, as when
driving on snow or ice, it is easy to
ask more of those control systems
than the tires and road can provide.
Meaning, you can lose control of
the vehicle. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 9‑34 and
StabiliTrak® System on page 9‑35.
For persons under 21, it is against
the law in every U.S. state to drink
alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental
reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the
leading highway safety problem is
for people never to drink alcohol
and then drive.
Death and injury associated with
drinking and driving is a global
tragedy.
Adding non‐dealer accessories
can affect vehicle performance.
See Accessories and Modifications
on page 10‑3.
Medical research shows that alcohol
in a person's system can make
crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord,
Alcohol affects four things that
anyone needs to drive a vehicle:
judgment, muscular coordination,
vision, and attentiveness.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-4
Driving and Operating
And, of course, actual stopping
distances vary greatly with the
surface of the road, whether it is
pavement or gravel; the condition
of the road, whether it is wet, dry,
or icy; tire tread; the condition of the
brakes; the weight of the vehicle;
and the amount of brake force
applied.
If the engine ever stops while
the vehicle is being driven, brake
normally but do not pump the
brakes. If the brakes are pumped,
the pedal could get harder to push
down. If the engine stops, there will
still be some power brake assist but
it will be used when the brake is
applied. Once the power assist is
used up, it can take longer to stop
and the brake pedal will be harder
to push.
Braking
See Brake System Warning Light on
page 5‑22.
Braking action involves perception
time and reaction time. Deciding
to push the brake pedal is
perception time. Actually doing
it is reaction time.
Avoid needless heavy
braking. Some people drive in
spurts — heavy acceleration
Average reaction time is about
three‐fourths of a second. But that
is only an average. It might be
less with one driver and as long
as two or three seconds or more
with another. Age, physical
condition, alertness, coordination,
and eyesight all play a part. So do
alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But
even in three‐fourths of a second,
a vehicle moving at 100 km/h
(60 mph) travels 20 m (66 ft).
That could be a lot of distance
in an emergency, so keeping
enough space between the
followed by heavy braking — rather
than keeping pace with traffic.
This is a mistake. The brakes
might not have time to cool between
hard stops. The brakes will wear
out much faster with a lot of heavy
braking. Keeping pace with the
traffic and allowing realistic following
distances eliminates a lot of
Adding non‐dealer accessories
can affect vehicle performance.
See Accessories and Modifications
on page 10‑3.
unnecessary braking. That means
better braking and longer brake life.
vehicle and others is important.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-5
Steering in Emergencies
Steering
There are times when steering
can be more effective than braking.
For example, you come over a hill
and find a truck stopped in your
lane, or a car suddenly pulls out
from nowhere, or a child darts out
from between parked cars and stops
right in front of you. These problems
can be avoided by braking — if you
can stop in time. But sometimes you
cannot stop in time because there
is no room. That is the time for
evasive action — steering around
the problem.
Power Steering
If power steering assist is lost
because the engine stops or the
power steering system is not
functioning, the vehicle can be
steered but it will take more effort.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a
reasonable speed.
An emergency like this requires
Traction in a curve depends on
the condition of the tires and the
road surface, the angle at which the
curve is banked, and vehicle speed.
While in a curve, speed is the one
factor that can be controlled.
close attention and a quick decision.
If holding the steering wheel at the
recommended 9 and 3 o'clock
positions, it can be turned a full
180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have
to act fast, steer quickly, and just as
quickly straighten the wheel once
you have avoided the object.
The vehicle can perform very well
in emergencies like these. First
apply the brakes. See Braking on
page 9‑4. It is better to remove
as much speed as possible from
a collision. Then steer around
the problem, to the left or right
depending on the space available.
If there is a need to reduce speed,
do it before entering the curve, while
the front wheels are straight.
Try to adjust the speed so you can
drive through the curve. Maintain a
reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until out of the curve,
and then accelerate gently into the
straightaway.
The fact that such emergency
situations are always possible is a
good reason to practice defensive
driving at all times and wear safety
belts properly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-6
Driving and Operating
the vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. Turn the steering
wheel 8 to 13 cm (3 to 5 in), about
one-eighth turn, until the right front
tire contacts the pavement edge.
Then turn the steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
Skidding
Off-Road Recovery
The vehicle's right wheels can drop
off the edge of a road onto the
shoulder while driving.
In a skid, a driver can lose control of
the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid
most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions,
and by not overdriving those
conditions. But skids are always
possible.
Loss of Control
The three types of skids correspond
to the vehicle's three control
Let us review what driving experts
say about what happens when the
three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not
have enough friction where the tires
meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
systems. In the braking skid,
the wheels are not rolling. In the
steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes
tires to slip and lose cornering force.
And in the acceleration skid, too
much throttle causes the driving
wheels to spin.
In any emergency, do not give up.
Keep trying to steer and constantly
seek an escape route or area of
less danger.
If the level of the shoulder is
only slightly below the pavement,
recovery should be fairly easy. Ease
off the accelerator and then, if there
is nothing in the way, steer so that
If the vehicle starts to slide, ease
your foot off the accelerator pedal
and quickly steer the way you
want the vehicle to go. If you start
steering quickly enough, the vehicle
may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
WARNING (Continued)
9-7
Of course, traction is reduced when
water, snow, ice, gravel, or other
material is on the road. For safety,
slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to
slow down on slippery surfaces
because stopping distance is longer
and vehicle control more limited.
Driving on Wet Roads
Rain and wet roads can reduce
vehicle traction and affect your
ability to stop and accelerate.
Always drive slower in these types
of driving conditions and avoid
driving through large puddles and
deep‐standing or flowing water.
Flowing or rushing water creates
strong forces. Driving through
flowing water could cause your
vehicle to be carried away. If this
happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not
ignore police warnings and be
very cautious about trying to
drive through flowing water.
While driving on a surface with
reduced traction, try to avoid
WARNING
{
sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including reducing
vehicle speed by shifting to a lower
gear. Any sudden changes could
cause the tires to slide. You might
not realize the surface is slippery
until the vehicle is skidding. Learn
to recognize warning clues — such
as enough water, ice, or packed
snow on the road to make a
Wet brakes can cause crashes.
They might not work as well in
a quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could
lose control of the vehicle.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water
can build up under the vehicle's
tires so they actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road
is wet enough and you are going
fast enough. When the vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no
contact with the road.
After driving through a large
puddle of water or a car/vehicle
wash, lightly apply the brake
pedal until the brakes work
normally.
mirrored surface — and slow
down when you have any doubt.
Remember: Antilock brakes help
avoid only the braking skid.
(Continued)
There is no hard and fast rule about
hydroplaning. The best advice is to
slow down when the road is wet.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-8
Driving and Operating
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Besides slowing down, other wet
weather driving tips include:
Always be alert and pay attention
to your surroundings while driving.
If you become tired or sleepy, find
a safe place to park the vehicle
and rest.
Driving on steep hills or through
mountains is different than driving
on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for
driving in these conditions include:
.
.
.
Allow extra following distance.
Pass with caution.
.
Keep the vehicle serviced and in
Keep windshield wiping
Other driving tips include:
good shape.
equipment in good shape.
.
.
Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
Check all fluid levels and brakes,
.
.
Keep the windshield washer fluid
reservoir filled.
tires, cooling system, and
transmission.
.
Keep interior temperature cool.
.
Keep your eyes moving — scan
Have good tires with proper
tread depth. See Tires on
page 10‑54.
.
Shift to a lower gear when going
the road ahead and to the sides.
down steep or long hills.
.
Check the rearview mirror and
.
vehicle instruments often.
Turn off cruise control.
WARNING
{
If you do not shift down, the
brakes could get so hot that they
would not work well. You would
then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could
crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-9
.
Pay attention to special road
signs (falling rocks area, winding
roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take
appropriate action.
Try not to break the fragile traction.
If you accelerate too fast, the drive
wheels will spin and polish the
WARNING
{
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)
or with the ignition off is
dangerous. The brakes will
surface under the tires even more.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS)
on page 9‑30 improves vehicle
stability during hard stops on
have to do all the work of slowing
down and they could get so hot
that they would not work well.
You would then have poor braking
or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Always have the
engine running and the vehicle in
gear when going downhill.
Winter Driving
slippery roads, but apply the brakes
sooner than when on dry pavement.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Drive carefully when there is snow
or ice between the tires and the
road, creating less traction or grip.
Wet ice can occur at about 0°C
(32°F) when freezing rain begins to
fall, resulting in even less traction.
Avoid driving on wet ice or in
freezing rain until roads can be
treated with salt or sand.
Allow greater following distance on
any slippery road and watch for
slippery spots. Icy patches can
occur on otherwise clear roads in
shaded areas. The surface of a
curve or an overpass can remain
icy when the surrounding roads
are clear. Avoid sudden steering
maneuvers and braking while
on ice.
.
.
Stay in your own lane. Do not
swing wide or cut across the
center of the road. Drive at
speeds that let you stay in
your own lane.
Drive with caution, whatever the
condition. Accelerate gently so
traction is not lost. Accelerating too
quickly causes the wheels to spin
and makes the surface under the
tires slick, so there is even less
traction.
Turn off cruise control, if equipped,
on slippery surfaces.
Top of hills: Be
alert — something could be in
your lane (stalled car, accident).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-10
Driving and Operating
Blizzard Conditions
WARNING (Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
Being stuck in snow can be a
serious situation. Stay with the
vehicle unless there is help nearby.
If possible, use the Roadside
Service (U.S. and Canada) on
page 13‑8 or Roadside Service
(Mexico) on page 13‑10. To get
help and keep everyone in the
vehicle safe:
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
For more information about
carbon monoxide, see Engine
Exhaust on page 9‑24.
.
Clear away snow from around
the base of your vehicle,
especially any that is blocking
the exhaust pipe.
Snow can trap exhaust gases
under your vehicle. This can
cause deadly CO (Carbon
.
Check again from time to
Monoxide) gas to get inside.
CO could overcome you and kill
you. You cannot see it or smell it,
so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle,
especially any that is blocking the
exhaust.
time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
.
Turn on the hazard warning
.
Open a window about
flashers.
5 cm (2 in) on the side of
the vehicle that is away from
the wind to bring in fresh air.
.
Tie a red cloth to an outside
mirror.
.
Fully open the air outlets
WARNING
{
on or under the instrument
panel.
Snow can trap engine exhaust
under the vehicle. This may
cause exhaust gases to get
inside. Engine exhaust contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which
cannot be seen or smelled. It can
cause unconsciousness and even
death.
Run the engine for short periods
only as needed to keep warm, but
be careful.
.
Adjust the climate control
system to a setting that
circulates the air inside
the vehicle and set the fan
speed to the highest setting.
See Climate Control System
in the Index.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-11
To save fuel, run the engine for only
short periods as needed to warm
the vehicle and then shut the engine
off and close the window most of
the way to save heat. Repeat this
until help arrives but only when you
feel really uncomfortable from the
cold. Moving about to keep warm
also helps.
Rocking the Vehicle to Get
it Out
If the Vehicle is Stuck
Slowly and cautiously spin the
wheels to free the vehicle when
stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
Turn the steering wheel left and
right to clear the area around the
front wheels. Turn off any traction
system. Shift back and forth
If stuck too severely for the traction
system to free the vehicle, turn the
traction system off and use the
rocking method.
between R (Reverse) and a forward
gear, spinning the wheels as little as
possible. To prevent transmission
wear, wait until the wheels stop
spinning before shifting gears.
Release the accelerator pedal
while shifting, and press lightly on
the accelerator pedal when the
transmission is in gear. Slowly
spinning the wheels in the forward
and reverse directions causes a
rocking motion that could free the
vehicle. If that does not get the
vehicle out after a few tries, it might
need to be towed out. If the vehicle
does need to be towed out, see
Towing the Vehicle on page 10‑98.
If it takes some time for help to
arrive, now and then when you run
the engine, push the accelerator
pedal slightly so the engine runs
faster than the idle speed. This
keeps the battery charged to restart
the vehicle and to signal for help
with the headlamps. Do this as little
as possible to save fuel.
WARNING
{
If the vehicle's tires spin at high
speed, they can explode, and
you or others could be injured.
The vehicle can overheat,
causing an engine compartment
fire or other damage. Spin the
wheels as little as possible and
avoid going above 55 km/h
(35 mph).
For information about using tire
chains on the vehicle, see Tire
Chains on page 10‑76.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-12
Driving and Operating
Tire and Loading Information
Label
Vehicle Load Limits
WARNING
{
It is very important to know how
much weight the vehicle can
carry. This weight is called the
vehicle capacity weight and
includes the weight of all
Do not load the vehicle any
heavier than the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR), or either the
maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
If you do, parts on the vehicle
can break, and it can change
the way the vehicle handles.
These could cause you to
lose control and crash. Also,
overloading can shorten the
life of the vehicle.
occupants, cargo and all
nonfactory‐installed options.
Two labels on the vehicle
show how much weight it may
properly carry, the Tire and
Loading Information label
and the Certification label.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and
Loading Information label is
attached to the vehicle's center
pillar (B-pillar). With the driver's
door open, you will find the label
attached near the door lock
post. The Tire and Loading
Information label shows the
number of occupant seating
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-13
positions (A), and the maximum
vehicle capacity weight (B) in
kilograms and pounds.
Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit
the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs (1400 − 750
1. Locate the statement
“The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on your vehicle's
placard.
(5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
The Tire and Loading
Information label also shows
the tire size of the original
equipment tires (C) and the
recommended cold tire inflation
pressures (D). For more
information on tires and inflation
see Tires on page 10‑54 and
Tire Pressure on page 10‑61.
5. Determine the combined
weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
2. Determine the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
6. If your vehicle will be towing
a trailer, the load from your
trailer will be transferred to
your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo
and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
There is also important loading
information on the Certification
label. It tells you the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
and the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for the front
and rear axle. See “Certification
Label” later in this section.
3. Subtract the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals
the available amount of cargo
and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs
See Trailer Towing on page 9‑58
for important information on
towing a trailer, towing safety
rules and trailering tips.
and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-14
Driving and Operating
Example 1
Example 2
Example 3
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 1 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs).
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 2 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs).
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 3 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs).
B. Subtract Occupant Weight
@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 =
136 kg (300 lbs).
B. Subtract Occupant Weight
@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 =
340 kg (750 lbs).
B. Subtract Occupant Weight
@ 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 =
453 kg (1,000 lbs).
C. Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight = 317 kg
(700 lbs).
C. Available Cargo
C. Available Cargo
Weight = 0 kg (0 lbs).
Weight = 113 kg (250 lbs).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-15
Refer to the vehicle's Tire and
Loading Information label for
specific information about the
vehicle's capacity weight and
seating positions. The combined
weight of the driver, passengers,
and cargo should never exceed
the vehicle's capacity weight.
The label shows the size of the
vehicle's original tires and the
inflation pressures needed to
obtain the gross weight capacity
of the vehicle. This is called
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The GVWR includes
the weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, fuel, and cargo.
If the vehicle is carrying a heavy
load, it should be spread out.
See “Steps for Determining
Correct Load Limit” earlier in
this section.
WARNING
{
Do not load the vehicle any
heavier than the Gross
Certification Label
The Certification/Tire label also
tells you the maximum weights
for the front and rear axles,
called Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR). To find out the actual
loads on the front and rear
axles, you need to go to a weigh
station and weigh the vehicle.
Your dealer can help you with
this. Be sure to spread out the
load equally on both sides of the
center line.
Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR), or either the
maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
If you do, parts on the vehicle
can break, and it can change
the way the vehicle handles.
These could cause you to
lose control and crash. Also,
overloading can shorten the
life of the vehicle.
Label Example
Never exceed the GVWR for the
vehicle, or the GAWR for either
the front or rear axle.
Your warranty does not cover
parts or components that fail
because of overloading.
A vehicle specific Certification/
Tire label is attached to the
rear edge of the driver's door.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-16
Driving and Operating
The label will help you decide
how much cargo and installed
equipment your vehicle can
carry.
WARNING
WARNING (Continued)
{
.
.
.
Things you put inside the
vehicle can strike and injure
people in a sudden stop or
turn, or in a crash.
Do not leave an
unsecured child restraint
in the vehicle.
Using heavier suspension
components to get added
durability might not change
your weight ratings. Ask your
dealer to help you load your
vehicle the right way.
When you carry something
inside the vehicle, secure
it whenever you can.
.
Put things in the cargo
area of the vehicle. In the
cargo area, put them as
far forward as you can.
Try to spread the weight
evenly.
Do not leave a seat folded
down unless you need to.
If you put things inside your
vehicle – like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything
else – they will go as fast as the
vehicle goes. If you have to stop
or turn quickly, or if there is a
crash, they will keep going.
.
Never stack heavier
things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above
the tops of the seats.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-17
can be used. Vehicle speeds
above 110 km/h (68 mph)
should be limited to
Adjustable Throttle and
Brake Pedal
If the vehicle has this feature, the
position of the throttle and brake
pedals can be adjusted.
Starting and
Operating
five minutes per use.
New Vehicle Break-In
.
Avoid making hard stops for
the first 322 km (200 miles) or
so. During this time the new
brake linings are not yet
broken in. Hard stops with
new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this
breaking-in guideline every
time you get new brake
linings.
Notice: The vehicle does not
need an elaborate break-in. But it
will perform better in the long run
if you follow these guidelines:
.
Do not drive at any one
constant speed, fast or
slow, for the first 805 km
(500 miles). Do not make
full-throttle starts. Avoid
downshifting to brake or
slow the vehicle.
.
Do not tow a trailer during
break-in. See Driving
.
During the first 1 000 km
Characteristics and Towing
Tips on page 9‑54 for the
trailer towing capabilities
of your vehicle and more
information.
(600 miles), avoid using more
than moderate acceleration
in lower gears and avoid
vehicle speeds above
The switch used to adjust the
pedals is located on the right side
of the steering column, below the
wiper stalk. Pull the switch toward
you to move the pedals further from
the floor, or push the switch away
from you to move the pedals closer
to the floor.
110 km/h (68 mph).
Following break‐in, engine
speed and load can be gradually
increased.
.
Between the first 1 000 km
(600 miles) and 5 000 km
(3,000 miles), heavy
acceleration in lower gears
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-18
Driving and Operating
Adjust the throttle and brake pedals
while the vehicle is in P (Park)
without pressing on the pedals.
The pedals cannot be adjusted
while the vehicle is in R (Reverse)
or when cruise control is engaged.
The throttle and brake pedals can
also be adjusted while driving.
Pressing the button cycles it through
three modes, ACC/ACCESSORY,
ON/RUN/START and STOPPING
THE ENGINE/OFF.
If the vehicle is in P (Park), the
ignition will turn OFF, and Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) will remain
active. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 9‑22 for
more information.
If the push-button start is not
working, the vehicle may be near a
strong radio antenna signal causing
interference to the keyless entry
system. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 5‑28 for
more information.
If the vehicle is not in P (Park),
the ignition will return to ACC/
ACCESSORY and display the
message SHIFT TO PARK in the
Driver Information Center (DIC).
See Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 5‑28 for more information.
When the vehicle is shifted into
P (Park), the ignition system will
switch to OFF.
Ignition Positions
To shift out of P (Park), the vehicle
must be in ACC/ACCESSORY or
ON/RUN mode and the brake pedal
must be applied.
STOPPING THE ENGINE/OFF
(No LED Lights): When the
vehicle is stopped, press the engine
START/STOP button once to turn
the engine off.
Do not turn the engine off when the
vehicle is moving. This will cause
a loss of power assist in the brake
and steering systems and disable
the airbags.
The vehicle has an electronic
keyless ignition with push‐button
start.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-19
In an emergency:
With the ignition off, pressing the
button one time without the brake
pedal applied, will place the ignition
system in ACC/ACCESSORY.
Starting the Gasoline
Engine
Place the transmission in the proper
gear by moving the shift lever to
P (Park) or N (Neutral). To restart
the engine when the vehicle is
already moving, use N (Neutral).
1. Brake using a firm and steady
pressure. Do not pump the
brakes repeatedly. This may
deplete power assist, requiring
increased brake pedal force.
The ignition will switch from
ACC/ACCESSORY to OFF after
five minutes to prevent battery
run down.
2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).
This can be done while the
vehicle is moving. After shifting
to N (Neutral), firmly apply the
brakes and steer the vehicle to
a safe location.
Notice: Do not try to shift to
ON/RUN/START (Green LED
Light): This mode is for driving and
starting. With the ignition off, and
the brake pedal applied, pressing
the button once will place the
ignition system in ON/RUN/START.
Once engine cranking begins,
release the button. Engine cranking
will continue until the engine starts.
See Starting the Gasoline Engine
on page 9‑19 for more information.
The ignition will then remain in
ON/RUN.
P (Park) if the vehicle is moving.
If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to P (Park)
only when the vehicle is stopped.
3. Come to a complete stop, shift
to P (Park), and turn the ignition
to OFF. On vehicles with an
automatic transmission, the shift
lever must be in P (Park) to turn
the ignition switch to the OFF
position.
The keyless access transmitter must
be inside the vehicle for the ignition
to work.
Cell phone chargers can interfere
with the operation of the Keyless
Access System. Battery chargers
should not be plugged in when
starting or turning off the engine.
4. Set the parking brake. See
Parking Brake on page 9‑31.
ACC/ACCESSORY (Amber LED
Light): This mode allows you to
use some electrical accessories
when the engine is off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-20
Driving and Operating
To start the vehicle:
3. Do not race the engine
immediately after starting
it. Operate the engine and
transmission gently until the
oil warms up and lubricates
all moving parts.
Notice: Cranking the engine for
long periods of time, by pressing
the START button immediately
after cranking has ended,
can overheat and damage the
cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds
between each try, to allow the
cranking motor to cool down.
Starting Procedure
1. With the brake pedal applied,
press the START button located
on the instrument panel. See
Ignition Positions on page 9‑18.
4. If the engine does not start and
no DIC message is displayed,
wait 15 seconds before trying
again to let the cranking motor
cool down.
2. When the engine begins
cranking, let go of the button and
the engine cranks automatically
until it starts.
When the engine starts, let go of
the accelerator. If the vehicle starts
briefly but then stops again, do the
same thing. This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine.
If the transmitter is not in
If the engine does not start
after 5-10 seconds, especially
in very cold weather (below
−18°C or 0°F), it could be
flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing the accelerator
pedal all the way to the floor
while cranking for up to
the vehicle or something is
interfering with the transmitter,
the Driver Information Center
(DIC) will display NO REMOTE
DETECTED. See Driver
The vehicle has a
Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in
starting the engine and protects
components. Once cranking has
been initiated, the engine continues
cranking for a few seconds or until
the vehicle starts. If the engine does
not start, cranking automatically
stops after 15 seconds to prevent
cranking motor damage. To prevent
gear damage, this system also
prevents cranking if the engine is
already running.
Information Center (DIC) on
page 5‑28 for more information.
15 seconds.
If the battery in the keyless
access transmitter needs
replacing, the DIC displays
Replace Battery In Remote Key.
The vehicle can still be driven.
See Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation on
page 2‑4 for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-21
Notice: The engine is designed
to work with the electronics in
the vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could
change the way the engine
operates. Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your
dealer. If you do not, the engine
might not perform properly. Any
resulting damage would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
To Use The Engine Coolant
Heater
WARNING (Continued)
1. Turn off the engine.
Plug the cord into a properly
grounded three-prong 110-volt AC
outlet. If the cord will not reach,
use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least
15 amps.
2. Open the hood and unwrap
the electrical cord. The cord is
located near the air cleaner.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded
110-volt AC outlet.
4. Before starting the engine, be
sure to unplug and store the
cord as it was before to keep
it away from moving engine
parts. If you do not it could be
damaged.
WARNING
{
Engine Heater
The engine coolant heater,
Plugging the cord into an
ungrounded outlet could cause
an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord
could overheat and cause a fire.
You could be seriously injured.
if available, can help in cold weather
conditions at or below −18°C (0°F)
for easier starting and better fuel
economy during engine warm-up.
Plug in the coolant heater at least
four hours before starting the
vehicle. An internal thermostat in
the plug-end of the cord will prevent
engine coolant heater operation at
temperatures above −18°C (0°F).
The length of time the heater should
remain plugged in depends on
several factors. Ask a dealer in the
area where you will be parking the
vehicle for the best advice on this.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-22
Driving and Operating
Power to the power windows,
sunroof and outlets under the
climate control system, inside
the center floor console, and on
the rear of the center floor console
will continue to operate for up to
10 minutes or until any door is
opened.
Retained Accessory
Power (RAP)
These vehicle accessories can be
used for up to 10 minutes after the
engine is turned off:
WARNING (Continued)
running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure the vehicle will
not move, even when you are on
fairly level ground, use the steps
that follow.
.
Audio System
.
Power Windows
All these features will work when the
vehicle is in ON/RUN/START.
.
Sunroof (if equipped)
.
1. Hold the brake pedal down and
set the parking brake.
Power outlets under the climate
Shifting Into Park
control system, inside the center
floor console, and on the rear of
the center floor console.
See Parking Brake on page 9‑31
for more information.
WARNING
{
Power to the audio system will
continue to operate for up to
10 minutes or until the driver
door is opened.
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)
by pushing the lever all the way
toward the front of the vehicle.
It can be dangerous to get out of
the vehicle if the shift lever is not
fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine
3. Turn the ignition off.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-23
If you have to leave the vehicle
with the engine running, be sure
the vehicle is in P (Park) and the
parking brake is firmly set before
you leave it. After you have moved
the shift lever into P (Park), hold
down the regular brake pedal.
See if you can move the shift lever
away from P (Park) without first
pulling it toward you. If you can,
it means that the shift lever was
not fully locked into P (Park).
transmission into P (Park) is not
done properly and then it is difficult
to shift out of P (Park). To prevent
torque lock, set the parking brake
and then shift into P (Park). To find
out how, see "Shifting Into P (Park)"
listed previously.
Leaving the Vehicle With the
Engine Running
WARNING
{
It can be dangerous to leave the
vehicle with the engine running.
The vehicle could move suddenly
if the shift lever is not fully in
P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. And, if you leave the
vehicle with the engine running,
it could overheat and even catch
fire. You or others could be
If torque lock does occur, your
vehicle may need to be pushed
uphill by another vehicle to relieve
the parking pawl pressure, so you
can shift out of P (Park).
Torque Lock
If you are towing a trailer and
parking on a hill, see Driving
Characteristics and Towing Tips on
page 9‑54.
Torque lock is when the weight
of the vehicle puts too much
force on the parking pawl in the
transmission. This happens when
parking on a hill and shifting the
injured. Do not leave the vehicle
with the engine running.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-24
Driving and Operating
If you still are unable to shift out of
P (Park):
Shifting Out of Park
Engine Exhaust
This vehicle is equipped with an
electronic shift lock release system.
The shift lock release is designed to
prevent movement of the shift lever
out of P (Park), unless the ignition is
in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY
and the brake pedal is applied
1. Fully release the shift lever
button.
WARNING
{
Engine exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be
seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
can cause unconsciousness and
even death.
2. Hold the brake pedal down and
press the shift lever button
again.
3. Move the shift lever to the
desired position.
The shift lock release is always
functional except in the case of an
uncharged or low voltage (less than
9 volt) battery.
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
If you still cannot move the shift
lever from P (Park), consult your
dealer or a professional towing
service.
.
The vehicle idles in areas
with poor ventilation (parking
garages, tunnels, deep snow
that may block underbody
airflow or tail pipes).
If the vehicle has an uncharged
battery or a battery with low voltage,
try charging or jump starting the
battery. See Jump Starting on
page 10‑94.
Parking Over Things
That Burn
.
The exhaust smells or
sounds strange or different.
To shift out of P (Park):
.
WARNING
{
The exhaust system leaks
1. Apply the brake pedal.
2. Press the shift lever button.
due to corrosion or damage.
Things that can burn could touch
hot exhaust parts under the
vehicle and ignite. Do not park
over papers, leaves, dry grass,
or other things that can burn.
.
The vehicle’s exhaust system
has been modified, damaged
or improperly repaired.
3. Move the shift lever to the
desired position.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-25
Running the Vehicle
While Parked
It is better not to park with the
engine running. But if you ever have
to, here are some things to know.
WARNING (Continued)
WARNING
{
.
There are holes or openings
in the vehicle body from
damage or after-market
modifications that are not
completely sealed.
It can be dangerous to get out
of the vehicle if the automatic
transmission shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when
the engine is running unless
you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground,
always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park).
WARNING
{
If unusual fumes are detected or
if it is suspected that exhaust is
coming into the vehicle:
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed
area with poor ventilation is
dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness
and even death. Never run the
engine in an enclosed area
that has no fresh air ventilation.
For more information, see Engine
Exhaust on page 9‑24.
.
Drive it only with the windows
completely down.
.
Have the vehicle repaired
immediately.
Never park the vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed
area such as a garage or a
building that has no fresh air
ventilation.
Follow the proper steps to be
sure the vehicle will not move.
See Shifting Into Park on
page 9‑22.
If parking on a hill and pulling a
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips on page 9‑54.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-26
Driving and Operating
Make sure the shift lever is fully in
P (Park) before starting the engine.
The vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control
system. You must fully apply the
regular brakes first and then press
the shift lever button before you can
shift from P (Park) when the ignition
is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift
out of P (Park), ease pressure on
the shift lever and push the shift
lever all the way into P (Park) as
you maintain brake application.
Then press the shift lever button
and move the shift lever into
Automatic
Transmission
The shift lever is located on the
center console between the front
seats.
WARNING
{
It is dangerous to get out of the
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when
the engine is running unless
you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground,
always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park).
See Shifting Into Park on
another gear. See Shifting Out of
Park on page 9‑24.
page 9‑22. If you are pulling a
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips on page 9‑54.
There are several different positions
for the shift lever.
P (Park): This position locks the
front wheels. It is the best position
to use when you start the engine
because the vehicle cannot move
easily.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-27
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)
while the vehicle is moving
forward could damage the
transmission. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse)
only after the vehicle is stopped.
D (Drive): This position is for
WARNING
{
normal driving. It provides the best
fuel economy. If you need more
power for passing, and you are:
Shifting into a drive gear while the
engine is running at high speed
is dangerous. Unless your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal, the
vehicle could move very rapidly.
You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift
into a drive gear while the engine
is running at high speed.
.
Going less than 35 mph
(55 km/h), push the accelerator
pedal about halfway down.
R (Reverse): Use this gear to
back up.
.
Going about 35 mph (55 km/h)
or more, push the accelerator all
the way down.
At low vehicle speeds, R (Reverse)
can be used to rock the vehicle
back and forth to get out of snow,
ice, or sand without damaging your
transmission. See If the Vehicle is
Stuck on page 9‑11 for additional
information.
The transmission will shift down
to a lower gear and have more
power.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park)
or N (Neutral) with the engine
running at high speed may
Downshifting the transmission in
slippery road conditions could result
in skidding, see Skidding under
Loss of Control on page 9‑6
damage the transmission.
N (Neutral): In this position, the
engine does not connect with the
wheels. To restart when the vehicle
is already moving, use N (Neutral)
only. You can also use N (Neutral)
when the vehicle is being towed.
The repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Be sure
the engine is not running at high
speed when shifting the vehicle.
Notice: Spinning the tires or
holding the vehicle in one
place on a hill using only the
accelerator pedal may damage
the transmission. If you are
stuck, do not spin the tires.
When stopping on a hill, use
the brakes to hold the vehicle
in place.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-28
Driving and Operating
SPORT MODE ON will be
3. To return to Sport Mode from
M (Manual Mode), press and
briefly hold the shift lever
forward.
Manual Mode
displayed in the DIC. See Ride
Control System Messages on
page 5‑37. The word “sport”
will display below the odometer.
The gear position will also be
indicated in the tachometer.
Driver Shift Control (DSC)
Notice: If you drive the vehicle
at a high rpm without upshifting
while using Driver Shift Control
(DSC), you could damage the
vehicle. Always upshift when
necessary while using DSC.
Within Sport Mode there is a
further performance feature
called Performance Mode Lift
Foot (PMLF) Mode. The feature
is activated automatically when
sports oriented driving is
detected, based on cornering
and on/off throttle application.
PMLF allows the transmission to
hold the current gear instead of
upshifting when the throttle is
lifted.
Driver Shift Control (DSC)
allows you to shift an automatic
transmission similar to a manual
transmission. To use the DSC
feature:
The tachometer display on the
instrument panel cluster will
show which gear the vehicle is in.
The number indicates the requested
gear range when moving the
shift lever forward or rearward.
See Tachometer on page 5‑12
for more information.
1. Move the shift lever to
the left from D (Drive) to
M (Manual Mode).
If you do not move the shift lever
forward or rearward, the vehicle
will be in Sport Mode. When you
are in Sport Mode the vehicle
will still shift automatically.
The transmission may remain
in a gear longer than it would in
the normal driving mode based
on braking, throttle input, and
vehicle lateral acceleration.
While using the DSC feature, the
vehicle will have firmer, quicker
shifting. You can use this for
sport driving or when climbing or
descending hills, to stay in gear
longer, or to down shift for more
power or engine braking.
2. To enter M (Manual Mode), press
the shift lever forward to upshift
or rearward to downshift.
An M will be displayed in
the DIC.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-29
The transmission will only allow
you to shift into gears appropriate
for the vehicle speed and engine
Revolutions Per Minute (RPM).
The transmission will not
automatically shift to the next
lower gear if the engine RPM
is too high, nor to the next higher
gear when the maximum engine
RPM is reached.
in the instrument cluster will come
on. See Fuel Economy Light on
page 5‑26. Pressing the button a
second time will turn fuel economy
mode off.
Fuel Economy Mode
The vehicle may have a fuel
economy mode. When engaged,
fuel economy mode can improve
the vehicle's fuel economy.
When fuel economy mode is on:
.
The transmission will upshift
sooner, and downshift later.
.
The torque converter will
lock–up sooner, and stay on
longer.
If shifting is prevented for any
reason, the currently selected gear
will flash multiple times, indicating
that the transmission has not shifted
gears.
.
The gas pedal will be less
sensitive.
.
The vehicle's computers will
more aggressively shut off fuel
to the engine under deceleration.
While in the DSC mode, the
transmission will automatically
downshift when the vehicle comes
to a stop. This will allow for more
power during take-off.
Pressing the eco button by the
shift lever will engage fuel economy
mode. When activated, the eco light
When accelerating the vehicle from
a stop in snowy and icy conditions,
you may want to shift into second
gear. A higher gear ratio allows you
to gain more traction on slippery
surfaces.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-30
Driving and Operating
If driving safely on a wet road
and it becomes necessary to
slam on the brakes and continue
braking to avoid a sudden obstacle,
a computer senses that the wheels
are slowing down. If one of the
wheels is about to stop rolling,
the computer will separately work
the brakes at each wheel.
Drive Systems
Brakes
All-Wheel Drive
Antilock Brake
System (ABS)
This vehicle has the Antilock
Brake System (ABS), an advanced
electronic braking system that helps
prevent a braking skid.
Vehicles with this feature always
send engine power to all four
wheels. It is fully automatic, and
adjusts itself as needed for road
conditions.
ABS can change the brake pressure
to each wheel, as required, faster
than any driver could. This can help
the driver steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
When using a compact spare tire
on an AWD vehicle, the system
automatically detects the compact
spare and disables AWD. To restore
AWD operation and prevent
excessive wear on the system,
replace the compact spare with a
full-size tire as soon as possible.
See Compact Spare Tire on
When the engine is started and the
vehicle begins to drive away, ABS
checks itself. A momentary motor or
clicking noise might be heard while
this test is going on, and it might
even be noticed that the brake
As the brakes are applied, the
computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls
braking pressure accordingly.
pedal moves a little. This is normal.
page 10‑93 for more information.
If there is a problem with ABS, this
warning light stays on. See Antilock
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
on page 5‑23.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-31
Remember: ABS does not change
the time needed to get a foot up to
the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too
close to the vehicle in front of you,
there will not be enough time to
apply the brakes if that vehicle
suddenly slows or stops. Always
leave enough room up ahead to
stop, even with ABS.
draining the battery, do not cycle the
EPB too often without the engine
running. The EPB can be left
Parking Brake
applied while the vehicle is parked.
The system has a Park Brake
Status light and a Park Brake
Warning light. See Brake System
Warning Light on page 5‑22.
There are also three Driver
Information Center (DIC) messages.
See Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 5‑28 for more information.
In case of insufficient electrical
power, the EPB cannot be applied
or released.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
the brake pedal down firmly and let
ABS work. You might hear the ABS
pump or motor operating and feel
the brake pedal pulsate, but this is
normal.
The vehicle has an Electric
Before leaving the vehicle, check
the park brake status lamp to
ensure the park brake is applied.
Parking Brake (EPB). The switch
for the EPB is in the center console.
The EPB can always be activated,
even if the ignition is OFF. To avoid
Braking in Emergencies
ABS allows the driver to steer and
brake at the same time. In many
emergencies, steering can help
more than even the very best
braking.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-32
Driving and Operating
If the park brake status light flashes
continuously, the EPB is only
partially applied or released,
or there is a problem with the
EPB. The DIC message SERVICE
PARKING BRAKE will be displayed.
If this light flashes continuously,
release the EPB, and attempt to
apply it again. If this light continues
to flash, do not drive the vehicle.
See your dealer.
EPB Apply
EPB Release
The EPB can be applied any time
the vehicle is stopped. The EPB is
applied by momentarily lifting up on
the EPB switch. Once fully applied,
the park brake status light will be
on. While the brake is being applied,
the status lamp will flash until full
apply is reached. If the light does
not come on, or remains flashing,
you need to have the vehicle
serviced. Do not drive the vehicle
if the park brake status light is
flashing. See your dealer. See
Brake System Warning Light on
page 5‑22 for more information.
To release the EPB, place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position,
apply and hold the brake pedal,
and push down momentarily on
the EPB switch. If you attempt to
release the EPB without the brake
pedal applied, a chime will sound,
and the DIC message STEP ON
BRAKE TO RELEASE PARK
BRAKE will be displayed. The EPB
is released when the park brake
status light is off.
If the park brake warning light is on,
the EPB has detected an error in
another system and is operating
with reduced functionality. To apply
the EPB when this light is on, lift up
on the EPB switch and hold it in the
up position. Full application of the
parking brake by the EPB system
may take a longer period of time
than normal when this light is on.
Continue to hold the switch until the
park brake status light remains on.
If the park brake warning light is on,
see your dealer.
If the park brake warning light is
on, the EPB has detected an
error in another system and is
operating with reduced functionality.
To release the EPB when this light
is on, push down on the EPB switch
and hold it in the down position.
EPB release may take a longer
period of time than normal when
this light is on. Continue to hold the
switch until the park brake status
light is off. If the light is on, see your
dealer.
If the EPB is applied while the
vehicle is in motion, a chime will
sound, and the DIC message
“Release Park Brake” will be
displayed. The vehicle will
decelerate as long as the switch is
held in the up position. Releasing
the EPB switch during the
deceleration will release the parking
brake. If the switch is held in the up
position until the vehicle comes to a
stop, the EPB will remain applied.
If the EPB fails to apply, the rear
wheels should be blocked to
prevent vehicle movement.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
9-33
Notice: Driving with the parking
brake on can overheat the brake
system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system
parts. Make sure that the parking
brake is fully released and the
brake warning light is off before
driving.
Brake Assist
This vehicle has a brake assist
feature designed to assist the
driver in stopping or decreasing
vehicle speed in emergency
driving conditions. This feature
uses the stability system hydraulic
brake control module to supplement
the power brake system under
conditions where the driver has
quickly and forcefully applied the
brake pedal in an attempt to quickly
stop or slow down the vehicle.
The stability system hydraulic brake
control module increases brake
pressure at each corner of the
vehicle until the ABS activates.
Minor brake pedal pulsation or
pedal movement during this time
is normal and the driver should
continue to apply the brake pedal
as the driving situation dictates.
The brake assist feature will
automatically disengage when
the brake pedal is released or
brake pedal pressure is quickly
decreased.
This vehicle has a Hill Start Assist
(HSA) feature, which may be useful
when the vehicle is stopped on a
grade. This feature is designed to
prevent the vehicle from rolling,
either forward or rearward, during
vehicle drive off. After driver
completely stops and holds the
vehicle in a complete standstill on
a grade, HSA will be automatically
activated. During the transition
period between when the driver
releases the brake pedal and starts
to accelerate to drive off on a grade,
HSA holds the braking pressure
to ensure that there is no rolling
back. The brakes will automatically
release when the accelerator pedal
is applied within the two second
window. It will not activate if the
vehicle is in a drive gear and facing
downhill or if the vehicle is facing
uphill and in R (Reverse).
Automatic EPB Release
The EPB will automatically release
if the vehicle is running, placed into
gear and an attempt is made to
drive away. Avoid rapid acceleration
when the EPB is applied, to
preserve park brake lining life.
If you are towing a trailer and
parking on a hill, see Driving
Characteristics and Towing Tips on
page 9‑54 for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-34
Driving and Operating
conditions, the system should
always be left on. But, TCS can
be turned off if needed.
Notice: Do not repeatedly brake
or accelerate heavily when TCS is
off. The vehicle's driveline could
be damaged.
Ride Control Systems
Traction Control
System (TCS)
If d comes on and stays on, reset
The vehicle has a Traction Control
System (TCS) that limits wheel spin.
On a front-wheel-drive vehicle,
the system operates if it senses
that one or both of the front wheels
are spinning or beginning to lose
traction. On an All-Wheel-Drive
(AWD) vehicle, the system will
operate if it senses that any of the
wheels are spinning or beginning to
lose traction. When this happens,
the system brakes the spinning
wheel(s) and/or reduces engine
power to limit wheel spin.
the system by:
1. Stopping the vehicle.
2. Turning the engine off and
waiting 15 seconds.
d flashes to indicate that the
3. Starting the engine.
traction control system is active.
If d still comes on and stays on at a
speed above 20 km/h (13 mph), see
your dealer for service.
If there is a problem detected
with TCS, SERVICE TRACTION
CONTROL and SERVICE
STABILITRAK may be displayed on
the Driver Information Center (DIC)
A chime may also sound when the
light comes on steady.
and d will be on. See Ride Control
System Messages on page 5‑37.
When this message is displayed
The g is located on the console.
The system may be heard or felt
while it is working, but this is
normal.
and d comes on and stays on,
the vehicle is safe to drive but the
system is not operational. Driving
should be adjusted accordingly.
TCS is on whenever the vehicle
is started. To limit wheel spin,
especially in slippery road
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
StabiliTrak® System
9-35
When TCS is turned off on AWD
vehicles, the system may still make
noise. This is normal and necessary
with AWD hardware.
The vehicle has a vehicle stability
enhancement system called
StabiliTrak. It is an advanced
computer controlled system that
assists with directional control of
the vehicle in difficult driving
conditions.
It may be necessary to turn the
system off if the vehicle ever gets
stuck in sand, mud or snow and
rocking the vehicle is required.
See If the Vehicle is Stuck on
The TCS off light comes on and
“TRACTION CONTROL OFF” is
displayed on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) to indicate that the
traction control system has been
turned off. See Ride Control System
Messages on page 5‑37.
StabiliTrak activates when the
computer senses a difference
between the intended path and the
direction the vehicle is actually
traveling. StabiliTrak selectively
applies braking pressure to the
vehicle's brakes to help steer the
vehicle in the intended direction.
page 9‑11 for more information.
See also Winter Driving on page 9‑9
for information on using TCS when
driving in snowy or icy conditions.
TCS can be turned off by pressing
If cruise control is being used when
TCS activates, cruise control will
automatically disengage. Press the
cruise control button to re‐engage
when road conditions allow.
and releasing g. When TCS is
turned off, i comes on and
the system will not limit wheel
spin. Driving should be adjusted
StabiliTrak is on automatically
whenever the vehicle is started.
To assist with directional control of
the vehicle, the system should
always be left on.
See Cruise Control on page 9‑38.
accordingly. Press and release g
Adding non‐GM accessories can
affect the vehicle's performance.
See Accessories and Modifications
on page 10‑3 for more information.
again to turn the system back on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-36
Driving and Operating
Messages on page 5‑32. When
this message is displayed and/or d
comes on and stays on, the vehicle
is safe to drive but the system is
not operational. Driving should be
adjusted accordingly. See Ride
Control System Messages on
page 5‑37.
When the stability control system
activates, the Traction Control
System (TCS)/StabiliTrak light
will flash on the instrument panel.
This also occurs when traction
control is activated. A noise may
be heard or vibration may be felt
in the brake pedal. This is normal.
Continue to steer the vehicle in the
intended direction.
g is located on the console.
StabiliTrak can be turned off
if needed by pressing and
If d comes on and stays on, reset
the system by:
holding g until g and i come on the
instrument panel. When StabiliTrak
is turned off, the system will not
assist with directional control of the
vehicle or limit wheel spin. Driving
should be adjusted accordingly.
1. Stopping the vehicle.
2. Turning the engine off and
waiting 15 seconds.
3. Starting the engine.
Press and release g again to turn
the system back on.
If there is a problem detected
with StabiliTrak, SERVICE
STABILITRAK is displayed on the
Driver Information Center (DIC)
If d still comes on and stays on at a
speed above 20 km/h (13 mph), see
your dealer for service.
and d will stay on. See Vehicle
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-37
If cruise control is being used when
StabiliTrak activates, the cruise
control will automatically disengage.
Press the cruise control button to
reengage when road conditions
allow. See Cruise Control on
SPORT: Use where road conditions
or personal preference demand
more control. This setting provides
more “feel”, or response to road
conditions through increased
steering effort and suspension
control. Transmission shift
points and shift firmness are
also enhanced. See Manual
Mode on page 9‑28 in Automatic
Transmission.
Selective Ride Control
The vehicle may have a ride
control system called Selective
Ride Control. The setting can be
changed at any time. Based on road
conditions, steering wheel angle
and the vehicle speed, the system
automatically adjusts to provide the
best handling while providing a
smooth ride. The Tour and Sport
modes will feel similar on a
page 9‑38 for more information.
Limited-Slip Rear Axle
Vehicles with a limited-slip rear axle
can give more traction on snow,
mud, ice, sand, or gravel. When
traction is low, this feature allows
the drive wheel with the most
If there is a problem detected with
Selective Ride Control, “SERVICE
SUSPENSION SYSTEM” displays
on the Driver Information Center
(DIC). See Ride Control System
Messages on page 5‑37. Driving
should be adjusted accordingly.
smooth road.
To switch from TOUR to SPORT
mode, move the shift lever to the
left while the transmission is in
D (Drive).
traction to move the vehicle.
The limited-slip rear axle also gives
the driver enhanced control when
cornering hard or completing a
maneuver, such as a lane change.
TOUR: Use for normal city and
highway driving. This setting
provides a smooth, soft ride.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-38
Driving and Operating
If the vehicle has the StabiliTrak®
system and begins to limit wheel
spin while using cruise control,
the cruise control automatically
disengages. See StabiliTrak®
System on page 9‑35 or Traction
Control System (TCS) on
page 9‑34. When road conditions
allow the cruise control to be safely
used, you can apply the cruise
control again.
+ RES (Resume/Accelerate):
Press briefly to make the vehicle
resume to a previously set speed or
press and hold to accelerate.
Cruise Control
WARNING
{
−SET (Set/Coast): Press to set the
speed and activate cruise control or
make the vehicle decelerate.
Cruise control can be dangerous
where you cannot drive safely at
a steady speed. So, do not use
the cruise control on winding
roads or in heavy traffic.
[ (Cancel): Press to disengage
cruise control without erasing the
set speed from memory.
Cruise control can be dangerous
on slippery roads. On such roads,
fast changes in tire traction can
cause excessive wheel slip, and
you could lose control. Do not use
cruise control on slippery roads.
Setting Cruise Control
If the cruise button is on when not in
use, it could get bumped and go into
cruise when not desired. Keep the
cruise control switch off when cruise
is not being used.
With cruise control, a speed of
about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more can
be maintained without keeping your
foot on the accelerator. Cruise
control does not work at speeds
below about 40 km/h (25 mph).
Cruise Control
If the brakes are applied, the cruise
control shuts off.
T (On/Off): Press to turn the
system on and off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-39
.
To slow down in small amounts,
press the −SET button on the
steering wheel briefly. Each time
this is done, the vehicle goes
about 1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.
The cruise control light on the
instrument panel cluster comes on
after the cruise control has been set
to the desired speed.
Increasing Speed While Cruise
Control is at a Set Speed
If the cruise control system is
already activated,
.
1. Press T.
2. Get up to the desired speed.
Press and hold the +RES button
Passing Another Vehicle While
Using Cruise Control
on the steering wheel until the
desired speed is reached, then
release it.
3. Press and release the −SET
button located on the steering
wheel.
Use the accelerator pedal to
increase the vehicle speed. When
you take your foot off the pedal,
the vehicle will slow down to the
previous set cruise speed.
.
To increase vehicle speed in
small amounts, press the +RES
button. Each time this is done,
the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h
(1 mph) faster.
4. Take your foot off the
accelerator.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
Resuming a Set Speed
How well the cruise control will work
on hills depends upon the vehicle
speed, load, and the steepness
of the hills. When going up steep
hills, you might have to step on
the accelerator pedal to maintain
the vehicle speed. When going
downhill, you might have to brake
or shift to a lower gear to keep the
vehicle speed down. If the brake
is applied the cruise control
Reducing Speed While Cruise
Control is at a Set Speed
If the cruise control is set at a
desired speed and then the brakes
are applied, the cruise control is
disengaged without erasing the
set speed from memory.
If the cruise control system is
already activated,
.
Press and hold the −SET button
Once the vehicle speed reaches
about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more,
press the +RES button on the
steering wheel. The vehicle returns
to the previous set speed and stays
there.
on the steering wheel until the
desired lower speed is reached,
then release it.
disengages.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-40
Driving and Operating
Ending Cruise Control
Object Detection
Systems
WARNING
{
There are three ways to end cruise
control:
The Ultrasonic Front and Rear
Park Assist (UFRPA) system
does not replace driver vision.
It cannot detect:
.
Step lightly on the brake pedal.
Ultrasonic Parking Assist
.
Press the [ button on the
For vehicles with the Ultrasonic
Front and Rear Parking Assist
(UFRPA) system, it assists the
driver with parking and avoiding
objects. UFRPA operates at speeds
less than 8 km/h (5 mph), and the
sensors on the front and rear
bumper detect objects up to 1.2 m
(4 ft) in front of the vehicle and 2.5 m
(8 ft) behind the vehicle, and at least
25.4 cm (10 in) off the ground.
steering wheel.
.
objects that are below the
.
bumper, underneath the
vehicle, or if they are too
close or far from the vehicle
Press the T button on the
steering wheel.
Erasing Speed Memory
.
children, pedestrians,
bicyclists, or pets.
The cruise control set speed is
erased from memory by pressing
If you do not use proper care
before moving forward and while
backing; vehicle damage, injury,
or death could occur. Even with
UFRPA, always check in front of
the vehicle before moving forward
and behind the vehicle before
backing up. While moving forward
and backing, be sure to look for
objects and check the vehicle's
mirrors.
the T button or if the ignition is
turned off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-41
High-toned beeps heard from the
front speakers are for objects
detected near the front bumper.
Low-toned beeps heard from the
rear speakers are for objects
detected near the rear bumper.
Front Display
How the System Works
When the vehicle is shifted into
R (Reverse) the front and rear
sensors are automatically turned on,
after the vehicle is shifted out of
R (Reverse), the rear sensors are
turned off and the front sensors
stay on until the vehicle is above
a certain speed. The front sensors
may also be turned on by pressing
the park assist button located next
to the shift lever without shifting
into R (Reverse) while the vehicle
is traveling at a low speed.
When an object is detected, high or
low‐tone beeps are heard. As the
vehicle gets closer to an object, the
time between the beeps becomes
shorter. When the distance is less
than 30 cm (11.8 in), beeping is
continuous. The distance may
be less during warmer or humid
weather.
The front display is located in the
instrument panel in the center of
the speedometer and has four bars
to provide distance and system
information.
See “Turning the System On
and Off” later in this section.
PARK ASSIST OFF displays on
the Driver Information Center (DIC)
to indicate that UFRPA is off.
The message disappears after
a short period of time.
When the vehicle is in N (Neutral),
the system may be active. If the
vehicle is in a car wash, the sensors
may detect objects in the car wash.
See “Turning the System On and
Off” later in this section to turn the
system off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-42
Driving and Operating
.
A trailer was attached to the
vehicle, or an object was
hanging out of the liftgate during
the last drive cycle. Once the
attached object is removed,
UFRPA will return to normal
operation.
The following describes how the UFRPA front display lights appear as the
vehicle gets closer to a detected object:
Description
one amber bar
Metric
1.2 m
1.0 m
0.6 m
0.3 m
English
4 ft
two amber bars
40 in
23 in
1 ft
.
.
.
three amber bars
If an object is attached to the
front of the vehicle.
three amber bars and one red bar
A tow bar is attached to the
vehicle.
Turning the System On and Off
When the System Does Not
Seem to Work Properly
The vehicle's bumper is
damaged. Take the vehicle to
your dealer to repair the system.
The UFRPA system can be turned
on and off by pressing the park
assist button located next to the
shift lever.
If UFRPA does not turn on due to a
temporary condition, the message
PARK ASSIST OFF displays on the
DIC, and the light on the park assist
button turns off. This can occur
under the following conditions:
.
Other conditions may affect
system performance, such as
vibrations from a jackhammer or
the compression of air brakes on
a very large truck.
.
The ultrasonic sensors are
not clean. Keep the vehicle's
bumpers free of mud, dirt, snow,
ice and slush. For cleaning
instructions, see Exterior Care
on page 10‑101.
The park assist button lights up
when the system is on and turns
off when it has been disabled.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-43
Vehicles Without a Navigation
System
Rear Vision
Camera (RVC)
WARNING (Continued)
When the vehicle is on and the
driver shifts into R (Reverse),
the video image automatically
appears on the inside rearview
mirror. Once the driver shifts out
of R (Reverse), the video image
automatically disappears from the
inside rearview mirror.
Do not back the vehicle by only
looking at the RVC screen, or use
the screen during longer, higher
speed backing maneuvers or
where there could be cross-traffic.
Your judged distances using the
screen will differ from actual
distances.
The vehicle may have a Rear Vision
Camera system. Read this entire
section before using it.
The rear vision camera system can
assist the driver when backing up by
displaying a view of the area behind
the vehicle.
Turning the Rear Vision Camera
System Off or On
WARNING
If you do not use proper care
before backing up, you could
hit a vehicle, child, pedestrian,
bicyclist, or pet, resulting in
vehicle damage, injury, or death.
Even though the vehicle has
the RVC system, always check
carefully before backing up by
checking behind and around the
vehicle.
{
The Rear Vision Camera (RVC)
system does not replace driver
vision. RVC does not:
To turn off the RVC system, press
and hold z, located on the inside
rearview mirror, until the left
indicator light turns off. The RVC
display is now disabled.
.
Detect objects that are
outside the camera's field
of view, below the bumper,
or underneath the vehicle.
To turn the RVC system on again,
press and hold z until the left
indicator light illuminates. The RVC
system display is now enabled and
the display will appear in the mirror
normally.
.
Detect children, pedestrians,
bicyclists, or pets.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-44
Driving and Operating
Turning the Rear Vision Camera
System On or Off
Symbols
Vehicles With a Navigation
System
The navigation system may have a
feature that lets the driver view
symbols on the navigation screen
while using the rear vision camera.
The Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist
(URPA) system must not be
disabled to use the caution symbols.
The error message “Rear Parking
Assist Symbols Unavailable” may
display if URPA has been disabled
and the symbols have been turned
on. See Ultrasonic Parking Assist
on page 9‑40.
To turn the rear vision camera
system on or off:
An image appears on the navigation
screen with the message “Check
Surroundings for Safety” when the
vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
The navigation screen goes to the
previous screen after approximately
10 seconds once the vehicle is
shifted out of R (Reverse).
1. Shift into P (Park).
2. Press the CONFIG button.
3. Select Display.
To cancel the delay, do one of the
following:
.
Press a hard key on the
navigation system.
.
Shift in to P (Park).
.
Reach a vehicle speed of
8 km/h (5 mph).
4. Select Camera. When a check
mark appears next to the
Camera option, then the RVC
system is on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-45
The symbols appear and may
cover an object when viewing the
navigation screen when an object is
detected by the URPA system.
Guidelines
Rear Vision Camera Location
The RVC system has a guideline
overlay that can help the driver align
the vehicle when backing into a
parking spot.
To turn the symbols on or off:
1. Shift into P (Park).
To turn the guidelines on or off:
1. Shift into P (Park).
2. Press the CONFIG button.
3. Select Display.
2. Press the CONFIG button.
3. Select Display.
4. Select Symbols. When a
check mark appears next to the
Symbols option, symbols will
appear.
4. Select Guidelines. When a
check mark appears next to
the Guidelines option, guidelines
will appear.
The camera is located above the
license plate.
Rear Vision Camera Error
Messages
SERVICE REAR VISION CAMERA
SYSTEM: This message can
display when the system is not
receiving information it requires
from other vehicle systems.
If any other problem occurs or if a
problem persists, see your dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-46
Driving and Operating
The area displayed by the camera is
limited.
When the System Does Not
Seem To Work Properly
It does not display objects that are
close to either corner or under the
bumper and can vary depending
on vehicle orientation or road
conditions. The distance of the
image that appears on the screen is
different from the actual distance.
The rear vision camera system may
not work properly or display a clear
image if:
.
The RVC is turned off.
See “Turning the Rear Camera
System On or Off” earlier in this
section.
The following illustration shows
the field of view that the camera
provides.
.
It is dark.
.
The sun or the beam of
headlights is shining directly
into the camera lens.
.
Ice, snow, mud, or anything else
builds up on the camera lens.
Clean the lens, rinse it with
water, and wipe it with a soft
cloth.
.
The back of the vehicle is in
an accident, the position and
mounting angle of the camera
can change or the camera can
be affected. Be sure to have
the camera and its position and
mounting angle checked at your
dealer.
A. View displayed by the camera.
B. Corner of the rear bumper.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-47
Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge
and a yellow fuel cap can use either
unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel
containing up to 85% ethanol (E85).
See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on
page 9‑50. For all other vehicles,
use only the unleaded gasoline
described under Recommended
Fuel on page 9‑47.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel
is an important part of the proper
maintenance of this vehicle. To help
keep the engine clean and maintain
optimum vehicle performance, we
recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline.
Recommended Fuel
If the vehicle has the 3.0L V6 engine
(VIN Code Y), use regular unleaded
gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 87 or higher. If the octane
rating is less than 87, an audible
knocking noise, commonly referred
to as spark knock, might be heard
when driving. If this occurs, use
a gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher as soon as possible. If heavy
knocking is heard when using
Look for the TOP TIER label on the
fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets
enhanced detergency standards
developed by auto companies. A list
of marketers providing TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline can be found at
www.toptiergas.com.
The 8th digit of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) shows
the code letter or number that
identifies the vehicle's engine.
The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) on
page 12‑1.
gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher, the engine needs service.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-48
Driving and Operating
If the vehicle has the 2.8L V6 engine
(VIN Code 4), use premium
unleaded gasoline with a posted
octane rating of 91 or higher.
For best performance, use
Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should
meet ASTM specification
California Fuel
Requirements
If the vehicle is certified to meet
California Emissions Standards,
it is designed to operate on fuels
that meet California specifications.
See the underhood emission control
label. If this fuel is not available in
states adopting California emissions
standards, the vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting
D 4814 in the United States or
CAN/CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 in Canada.
Some gasolines contain an
octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend
against the use of gasolines
containing MMT. See Fuel Additives
on page 9‑49 for additional
information.
premium unleaded gasoline with a
posted octane rating of 93. In an
emergency, you can use regular
unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating of 87 or higher. If 87 octane
fuel is used, do not perform any
aggressive driving maneuvers such
as wide open throttle applications.
You might also hear audible spark
knock during acceleration. Refill
the tank with premium fuel as soon
as possible to avoid damaging the
engine. If heavy knocking is heard
when using gasoline rated at
91octane or higher, the engine
needs service.
federal specifications, but emission
control system performance might
be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp could turn on and the
vehicle might fail a smog‐check test.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 5‑19. If this occurs, return to
your authorized dealer for diagnosis.
If it is determined that the condition
is caused by the type of fuel used,
repairs might not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-49
detergency standards developed
by the auto companies. A list of
marketers providing TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline can be found
at www.toptiergas.com.
Fuels in Foreign
Countries
If you plan on driving in another
country outside the United States
or Canada, the proper fuel might
be hard to find. Never use leaded
gasoline or any other fuel not
recommended in the previous text
on fuel. Costly repairs caused by
use of improper fuel would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Fuel Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines
in the United States are now
required to contain additives
that help prevent engine and fuel
system deposits from forming,
allowing the emission control
system to work properly. In most
cases, nothing should have to
be added to the fuel. However,
some gasolines contain only the
minimum amount of additive
required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations.
To help keep fuel injectors and
intake valves clean, or if the vehicle
experiences problems due to dirty
injectors or valves, look for gasoline
that is advertised as TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline. Look for the
TOP TIER label on the fuel pump
to ensure gasoline meets enhanced
For customers who do not use
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel
System Treatment PLUS, added
to the fuel tank at every engine oil
change, can help clean deposits
from fuel injectors and intake
valves. GM Fuel System Treatment
PLUS is the only gasoline additive
recommended by General Motors.
It is available at your dealer.
To check the fuel availability, ask
an auto club, or contact a major oil
company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
Gasolines containing oxygenates,
such as ethers and ethanol,
and reformulated gasolines
might be available in your area.
We recommend that you use these
gasolines, if they comply with the
specifications described earlier.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-50
Driving and Operating
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and
other fuels containing more than
10% ethanol must not be used in
vehicles that were not designed for
those fuels.
Some gasolines that are
not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an
octane-enhancing additive
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)
Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge
and a yellow fuel cap can use either
unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel
containing up to 85% ethanol (E85).
For all other vehicles, use only the
unleaded gasoline described under
Recommended Fuel on page 9‑47.
called methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT);
ask the attendant where you buy
gasoline whether the fuel contains
MMT. We recommend against
the use of such gasolines. Fuels
containing MMT can reduce the life
of spark plugs and the performance
of the emission control system
could be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp might turn on. If this
occurs, return to your dealer for
service.
Notice: This vehicle was not
designed for fuel that contains
methanol. Do not use fuel
containing methanol. It can
corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic
and rubber parts. That damage
would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty.
We encourage the use of E85 in
vehicles that are designed to use it.
The ethanol in E85 is a “renewable”
fuel, meaning it is made from
renewable sources such as corn
and other crops.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-51
Many service stations will not have
an 85% ethanol fuel (E85) pump
available. The U.S. Department of
Energy has an alternative fuels
website (www.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/
locator/stations/) that can help you
find E85 fuel. Those stations that
do have E85 should have a label
indicating ethanol content. Do not
use the fuel if the ethanol content is
greater than 85%.
To ensure quick starts in the
E85 has less energy per liter
wintertime, the E85 fuel must be
formulated properly for your climate
according to ASTM specification
D 5798. If you have trouble starting
on E85, it could be because the
E85 fuel is not properly formulated
for your climate. If this happens,
switching to gasoline or adding
gasoline to the fuel tank can
improve starting. For good starting
and heater efficiency below 0°C
(32°F), the fuel mix in the fuel tank
should contain no more than 70%
ethanol. It is best not to alternate
repeatedly between gasoline and
E85. If you do switch fuels, it is
recommended that you add as
much fuel as possible — do not
add less than 11 L (three gallons)
when refueling. You should drive the
vehicle immediately after refueling
for at least 11 km (seven miles) to
allow the vehicle to adapt to the
change in ethanol concentration.
(gallon) than gasoline, so you will
need to refill the fuel tank more
often when using E85 than when
you are using gasoline. See Filling
the Tank on page 9‑52.
Notice: Some additives are not
compatible with E85 fuel and can
harm the vehicle's fuel system.
Do not add anything to E85.
Damage caused by additives
would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
At a minimum, E85 should meet
ASTM Specification D 5798.
By definition, this means that fuel
labeled E85 will have an ethanol
content between 70% and 85%.
Filling the fuel tank with fuel
mixtures that do not meet ASTM
specifications can affect driveability
and could cause the malfunction
indicator lamp to come on.
Notice: This vehicle was not
designed for fuel that contains
methanol. Do not use fuel
containing methanol. It can
corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic
and rubber parts. That damage
would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-52
Driving and Operating
When reinstalling the cap, turn
it clockwise until it clicks once,
otherwise the Malfunction
Indicator Lamp could turn on.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 5‑19.
Filling the Tank
WARNING
{
Fuel vapor burns violently and a
fuel fire can cause bad injuries.
To help avoid injuries to you and
others, read and follow all the
instructions on the fuel pump
island. Turn off the engine when
refueling. Do not smoke near fuel
or when refueling the vehicle.
Do not use cellular phones. Keep
sparks, flames, and smoking
materials away from fuel. Do not
leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling the vehicle. This
is against the law in some places.
Do not re-enter the vehicle while
pumping fuel. Keep children away
from the fuel pump; never let
children pump fuel.
WARNING
{
Fuel can spray out on you if
you open the fuel cap too
quickly. If you spill fuel and then
something ignites it, you could
be badly burned. This spray can
happen if the tank is nearly full,
and is more likely in hot weather.
Open the fuel cap slowly and wait
for any hiss noise to stop. Then
unscrew the cap all the way.
The tethered fuel cap is located
behind a hinged fuel door on the
passenger side of the vehicle.
To open the fuel door, push the
rearward center edge in and release
and it will open.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it
slowly counterclockwise.
While refueling, hang the tethered
fuel cap from the hook on the
fuel door.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-53
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not
top off or overfill the tank and wait a
few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the
nozzle. Clean fuel from painted
surfaces as soon as possible.
Notice: If a new fuel cap is
needed, be sure to get the right
type of cap from your dealer.
The wrong type fuel cap might
not fit properly, might cause the
malfunction indicator lamp to
light, and could damage the
fuel tank and emissions system.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 5‑19.
WARNING (Continued)
and the vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you
and others:
See Exterior Care on page 10‑101.
.
Dispense fuel only into
approved containers.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it
clockwise until it clicks once. Make
sure the cap is fully installed. The
diagnostic system can determine if
the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. This would
allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 5‑19.
.
Do not fill a container while
it is inside a vehicle, in a
vehicle's trunk, pickup bed,
or on any surface other than
the ground.
Filling a Portable Fuel
Container
.
Bring the fill nozzle in contact
WARNING
{
with the inside of the fill
opening before operating the
nozzle. Contact should be
maintained until the filling is
complete.
Never fill a portable fuel
container while it is in the vehicle.
Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the fuel
vapor. You can be badly burned
WARNING
{
If a fire starts while you are
refueling, do not remove the
nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel
by shutting off the pump or by
notifying the station attendant.
Leave the area immediately.
.
Do not smoke while
pumping fuel.
(Continued)
.
Do not use a cellular phone
while pumping fuel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-54
Driving and Operating
For information on towing a disabled
vehicle, see Towing the Vehicle on
page 10‑98. For information on
towing the vehicle behind another
vehicle such as a motor home, see
Recreational Vehicle Towing on
page 10‑98.
Towing
WARNING (Continued)
General Towing
Information
Only use towing equipment that
has been designed for the vehicle.
Contact your dealer or trailering
dealer for assistance with preparing
the vehicle for towing a trailer.
the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer
only if all the steps in this section
have been followed. Ask your
dealer for advice and information
about towing a trailer with the
vehicle.
Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips
The vehicle can tow a trailer when
equipped with the proper trailer
towing equipment. For trailering
capacity, see Trailer Towing on
page 9‑58. Trailering changes
handling, acceleration, braking,
durability and fuel economy.
With the added weight, the engine,
transmission, wheel assemblies and
tires are forced to work harder and
under greater loads. The trailer also
adds wind resistance, increasing
the pulling requirements. For safe
trailering, correctly use the proper
trailering equipment.
See the following trailer towing
information in this section:
WARNING
{
.
For information on driving
The driver can lose control when
pulling a trailer if the correct
equipment is not used or the
vehicle is not driven properly.
For example, if the trailer is
too heavy, the brakes may not
work well — or even at all. The
driver and passengers could be
seriously injured. The vehicle may
also be damaged; the resulting
repairs would not be covered by
while towing a trailer, see
“Driving Characteristics and
Towing Tips.”
.
For maximum vehicle and trailer
weights, see “Trailer Towing.”
.
For information on equipment
to tow a trailer, see “Towing
Equipment.”
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
Driving with a Trailer
9-55
.
During the first 800 km
The following information has
important trailering tips and rules
for your safety and that of your
passengers. Read this section
carefully before pulling a trailer.
(500 miles) that a trailer is
towed, do not drive over 80 km/h
(50 mph) and do not make starts
at full throttle. This reduces wear
on the vehicle.
Towing a trailer requires experience.
Get familiar with handling and
braking with the added trailer
weight. The vehicle is now longer
and not as responsive as the
vehicle is by itself.
Pulling a Trailer
.
The vehicle can tow in
Here are some important points:
D (Drive). Use a lower gear if the
transmission shifts too often.
Check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains,
.
There are many laws, including
.
.
speed limit restrictions that apply
to trailering. Check for legal
requirements.
Do not use the Fuel Economy
Mode when towing.
electrical connectors, lamps, tires
and mirror adjustments. If the trailer
has electric brakes, start the vehicle
and trailer moving and then apply
the trailer brake controller by hand
to be sure the brakes are working.
Obey speed limit restrictions.
Do not drive faster than the
maximum posted speed for
trailers, or no more than 90 km/h
(55 mph), to reduce wear on the
vehicle.
.
Do not tow a trailer at all during
the first 1 600 km (1,000 miles)
the new vehicle is driven.
The engine, axle or other parts
could be damaged.
During the trip, check regularly to be
sure that the load is secure, and the
lamps and trailer brakes are working
properly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-56
Driving and Operating
Towing with a Stability Control
System
Backing Up
Turn Signals When Towing a
Trailer
Hold the bottom of the steering
wheel with one hand. To move the
trailer to the left, move that hand to
the left. To move the trailer to the
right, move your hand to the right.
Always back up slowly and,
if possible, have someone
When towing, the sound of the
stability control system might be
heard. The system is reacting to the
vehicle movement caused by the
trailer, which mainly occurs during
cornering. This is normal when
towing heavier trailers.
The turn signal indicators on the
instrument panel flash whenever
signaling a turn or lane change.
Properly hooked up, the trailer
lamps also flash, telling other
drivers the vehicle is turning,
changing lanes or stopping.
guide you.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on
the instrument panel flash for turns
even if the bulbs on the trailer are
burned out. Check occasionally to
be sure the trailer bulbs are still
working.
Making Turns
Following Distance
Notice: Making very sharp turns
while trailering could cause the
trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. The vehicle could be
damaged. Avoid making very
sharp turns while trailering.
Stay at least twice as far behind the
vehicle ahead as you would when
driving the vehicle without a trailer.
This can help to avoid situations
that require heavy braking and
sudden turns.
When turning with a trailer, make
wider turns than normal so the
trailer will not strike soft shoulders,
curbs, road signs, trees or other
objects. Use the turn signal well in
advance and avoid jerky or sudden
maneuvers.
Passing
More passing distance is needed
when towing a trailer. Because the
rig is longer, it is necessary to go
farther beyond the passed vehicle
before returning to the lane.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-57
3. When the wheel chocks are in
place, release the brake pedal
until the chocks absorb the load.
Driving on Grades
Parking on Hills
Reduce speed and shift to a
lower gear before starting down
a long or steep downgrade. If the
transmission is not shifted down,
the brakes might have to be used
so much that they would get hot
and no longer work well.
WARNING
{
4. Reapply the brake pedal.
Then apply the parking brake
and shift into P (Park).
Parking the vehicle on a hill
with the trailer attached can be
dangerous. If something goes
wrong, the rig could start to move.
People can be injured, and both
the vehicle and the trailer can be
damaged. When possible, always
park the rig on a flat surface.
5. Release the brake pedal.
Leaving After Parking on a Hill
The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).
Use a lower gear if the transmission
shifts too often.
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal
while you:
.
When towing at high altitude on
steep uphill grades, engine coolant
boils at a lower temperature than
at normal altitudes. If the engine is
turned off immediately after towing
at high altitude on steep uphill
grades, the vehicle could show
signs similar to engine overheating.
To avoid this, let the engine run
while parked, preferably on level
ground, with the transmission in
P (Park) for a few minutes before
turning the engine off. If the
Start the engine.
.
Shift into a gear.
If parking the rig on a hill:
.
Release the parking brake.
1. Press the brake pedal, but
do not shift into P (Park) yet.
Turn the wheels into the curb if
facing downhill or into traffic if
facing uphill.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is
clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up
and store the chocks.
2. Have someone place chocks
under the trailer wheels.
overheat warning comes on, see
Engine Overheating on page 10‑22.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-58
Driving and Operating
on the vehicle, and the amount of
tongue weight the vehicle can carry.
See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue”
later in this section for more
information.
Maintenance When Trailer
Towing
Trailer Towing
Before pulling a trailer, there are
three important considerations that
have to do with weight:
The vehicle needs service more
often when pulling a trailer. See this
manual's Maintenance Schedule or
index for more information. Things
that are especially important in
trailer operation are automatic
transmission fluid, engine oil, axle
lubricant, belts, cooling system and
brake system. Inspect these before
and during the trip.
.
The weight of the trailer
Maximum trailer weight is calculated
assuming only the driver is in
the tow vehicle and it has all the
required trailering equipment.
The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in
the tow vehicle must be subtracted
from the maximum trailer weight.
.
The weight of the trailer tongue
.
The total weight on the vehicle's
tires
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
Check periodically to see that all
hitch nuts and bolts are tight.
It depends on how the rig is used.
For example, speed, altitude, road
grades, outside temperature and
how much the vehicle is used to
pull a trailer are all important. It can
depend on any special equipment
Use the following chart to determine
how much the vehicle can weigh,
based upon the vehicle model and
options.
Engine Cooling When Trailer
Towing
The cooling system may temporarily
overheat during severe operating
conditions. See Engine Overheating
on page 10‑22.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-59
Maximum Trailer
Weight
Maximum Tongue
Weight
Vehicle
2.8L Engine, AWD
GCWR*
1 588 kg (3,500 lbs)
1134 kg (2,500 lbs)
1 588 kg (3,500 lbs)
1134 kg (2,500 lbs)
1 588 kg (3,500 lbs)
3 725 kg (8,212 lbs)
159 kg (350 lbs)
113 kg (250 lbs)
159 kg (350 lbs)
159 kg (350 lbs)
159 kg (350 lbs)
3.0L Engine, FWD without Trailering
Package
3 185 kg (7,022 lbs)
3 640 kg (8,025 lbs)
3 270 kg (7,209 lbs)
3 725 kg (8,212 lbs)
3.0L Engine, FWD with Trailering Package
3.0L Engine, AWD without Trailering
Package
3.0L Engine, AWD with Trailering Package
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not be
exceeded.
Ask your dealer for trailering
information or advice.
the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue
weight the vehicle can carry, which
will also reduce the trailer weight the
vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,
the tongue load must be added to
the GVW because the vehicle will
be carrying that weight, too. See
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑12
for more information about the
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is
an important weight to measure
because it affects the total gross
weight of the vehicle. The Gross
Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes
the curb weight of the vehicle, any
cargo carried in it, and the people
who will be riding in the vehicle.
If there are a lot of options,
See Customer Assistance Offices
(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑5
or Customer Assistance Offices
(Mexico) on page 13‑5 for more
information.
vehicle's maximum load capacity.
equipment, passengers or cargo in
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-60
Driving and Operating
After loading the trailer, weigh
the trailer and then the tongue,
separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they are not, adjustments
might be made by moving some
items around in the trailer.
Total Weight on the Vehicle's
Tires
Be sure the vehicle's tires are
inflated to the upper limit for cold
tires. These numbers can be found
on the Certification label or see
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑12
for more information. Make sure
not to go over the GVW limit for the
vehicle, or the GAWR, including the
weight of the trailer tongue. If using
a weight distributing hitch, make
sure not to go over the rear axle
limit before applying the weight
distribution spring bars.
Trailering may be limited by the
vehicle's ability to carry tongue
weight. Tongue weight cannot cause
the vehicle to exceed the GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or
the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating). The effect of
additional weight may reduce the
trailering capacity more than the
total of the additional weight.
If a weight-carrying hitch or a
weight-distributing hitch is being
used, the trailer tongue (A) should
weigh 10‐15 percent of the total
loaded trailer weight (B).
It is important that the vehicle
does not exceed any of its
ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR,
Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue
Weight. The only way to be sure it is
not exceeding any of these ratings
is to weigh the vehicle and trailer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-61
Hitch Cover
To reinstall the hitch cover:
Towing Equipment
1. Hold the cover at a 45 degree
angle to the vehicle and push
the upper tabs in the hitch cover
into the slots in the fascia.
Hitches
It is important to have the correct
hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large
trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why the right hitch is
needed.
2. Move the bottom of the cover
forward until the lower tabs line
up with the lower fascia slots.
.
The rear bumper on the vehicle
3. Snap the hitch cover into place
by pushing the upper corners
forward.
is not intended for hitches.
Do not attach rental hitches or
other bumper-type hitches to
it. Use only a frame-mounted
hitch that does not attach to the
bumper.
4. Turn the fasteners on the lower
tabs 90 degrees clockwise to
lock the cover in place.
The vehicle may have a hitch cover.
To remove the hitch cover:
.
Will any holes be made in the
Safety Chains
1. Turn the fasteners on
the lower tabs 90 degrees
counterclockwise.
body of the vehicle when the
trailer hitch is installed? If there
are, then be sure to seal the
holes later when the hitch is
removed. If the holes are not
sealed, dirt, water, and deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) from
the exhaust can get into the
vehicle. See Engine Exhaust on
page 9‑24.
Always attach chains between the
vehicle and the trailer. Cross the
safety chains under the tongue
of the trailer to help prevent the
tongue from contacting the road if it
becomes separated from the hitch.
Always leave just enough slack so
the rig can turn. Never allow safety
chains to drag on the ground.
2. Lift the lower edge of the cover
about 45 degrees.
3. Pull the cover downward
to disengage the upper
attachments.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-62
Driving and Operating
Trailer Brakes
Trailer Sway
Control (TSC)
The vehicle has a Trailer Sway
Control (TSC) feature as part of the
StabiliTrak system. If TSC detects
that the trailer is swaying, the
vehicle's brakes are automatically
applied.
Conversions and
Add-Ons
A loaded trailer that weighs more
than 450 kg (1,000 lbs) needs to
have its own brake system that is
adequate for the weight of the
trailer. Be sure to read and follow
the instructions for the trailer brakes
so they are installed, adjusted and
maintained properly.
Add-On Electrical
Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything
electrical to the vehicle unless
you check with your dealer first.
Some electrical equipment can
damage the vehicle and the
damage would not be covered
by the vehicle's warranty. Some
add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from
working as they should.
Because the vehicle has anti-lock
brakes, do not tap into the vehicle's
brake system. If you do, both brake
systems will not work well, or at all.
Trailer Wiring Harness
All of the electrical circuits required
for the trailer lighting system can be
accessed at a connector mounted to
the frame, behind the rear bumper
cover.
When TSC is applying the brakes,
the TCS/StabiliTrak indicator light
flashes to notify the driver to
reduce speed. See Traction Control
System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light on
page 5‑25. If the trailer continues to
sway, StabiliTrak will reduce engine
torque to help slow the vehicle.
Add-on equipment can drain the
vehicle's 12‐volt battery, even if the
vehicle is not operating.
The vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to add anything
electrical to the vehicle, see
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3‑44 and Adding
Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3‑44.
TSC will not function if StabiliTrak is
turned off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-1
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-29
Automatic Transmission Shift
Lock Control Function
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Ignition Transmission Lock
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Park Brake and P (Park)
Electrical System
Electrical System
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Engine Compartment Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
Rear Compartment Fuse
Vehicle Care
General Information
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
California Proposition
65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
California Perchlorate
Materials Requirements . . . . 10-3
Accessories and
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-30
Wiper Blade
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Wheels and Tires
Vehicle Checks
Doing Your Own
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-55
Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Tire Terminology and
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Engine Compartment
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Engine Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-14
Automatic Transmission
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-16
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-22
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-24
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
Tire Pressure for High-Speed
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
Tire Pressure Monitor
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63
Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64
Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
When It Is Time for New
Bulb Replacement
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
High Intensity Discharge
(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-44
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-2
Vehicle Care
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70
Different Size Tires and
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-75
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-77
Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79
Storing the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86
Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-93
California Proposition
65 Warning
General Information
For service and parts needs,
visit your dealer. You will receive
genuine GM parts and GM-trained
and supported service people.
Most motor vehicles, including this
one, contain and/or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. Engine
exhaust, many parts and systems,
many fluids, and some component
wear by-products contain and/or
emit these chemicals.
Genuine GM parts have one of
these marks:
Jump Starting
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-94
Towing
Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-98
Recreational Vehicle
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-98
Appearance Care
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-101
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-106
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-3
covered under the terms of the
California Perchlorate
Materials Requirements
Accessories and
Modifications
Adding non‐dealer accessories
to the vehicle can affect vehicle
performance and safety, including
such things as airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling,
emissions systems, aerodynamics,
durability, and electronic systems
like antilock brakes, traction control,
and stability control. Some of these
accessories could even cause
malfunction or damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty.
vehicle warranty and may affect
remaining warranty coverage for
affected parts.
Certain types of automotive
applications, such as airbag
initiators, seat belt pretensioners,
and lithium batteries contained
in remote keyless transmitters,
may contain perchlorate materials.
Special handling may be necessary.
For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate.
GM Accessories are designed to
complement and function with other
systems on the vehicle. Your GM
dealer can accessorize the vehicle
using genuine GM Accessories.
When you go to your GM dealer
and ask for GM Accessories, you
will know that GM-trained and
supported service technicians will
perform the work using genuine
GM Accessories.
Damage to vehicle components
resulting from the installation or use
of non‐GM certified parts, including
control module modifications, is not
Also, see Adding Equipment to
the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 3‑44.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-4
Vehicle Care
This vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to do your own
service work, see Servicing the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 3‑44.
Vehicle Checks
WARNING (Continued)
Doing Your Own
Service Work
.
Be sure to use the proper
nuts, bolts, and other
fasteners. English and
metric fasteners can be
easily confused. If the wrong
fasteners are used, parts
can later break or fall off.
You could be hurt.
Keep a record with all parts receipts
and list the mileage and the date
of any service work performed.
See Maintenance Records on
page 11‑10.
WARNING
{
You can be injured and the
vehicle could be damaged if you
try to do service work on a vehicle
without knowing enough about it.
.
Be sure you have sufficient
If doing some of your own service
work, use the proper service
manual. It tells you much more
about how to service the vehicle
than this manual can. To order the
proper service manual, see Service
Publications Ordering Information
on page 13‑15.
knowledge, experience,
the proper replacement
parts, and tools before
attempting any vehicle
maintenance task.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-5
Hood
To open the hood:
2. Move the secondary hood
release lever up to release the
striker. The lever is located near
the middle of the hood.
1. Pull the release handle with the
above symbol on it. It is located
below the instrument panel to
the left of the steering wheel.
3. Lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all
the filler caps are on properly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-6
Vehicle Care
Engine Compartment Overview
2.8 L V6 Engine
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-7
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
page 10‑16.
G. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and
Pressure Cap. See Engine
Coolant on page 10‑19.
B. Power Steering Reservoir and
Cap. See Power Steering Fluid
on page 10‑24.
H. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.
See Jump Starting on
page 10‑94.
C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine
Oil on page 10‑10.
I. Remote Negative (−) Terminal
(Out of View). See Jump
D. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of
View). See Engine Oil on
page 10‑10.
Starting on page 10‑94.
J. Engine Compartment Fuse
Block on page 10‑46.
E. Brake Master Cylinder
Reservoir. See Brakes on
page 10‑25.
K. Windshield Washer Fluid
Reservoir. See Washer Fluid on
page 10‑24.
F. Battery (Out of View).
See Battery on page 10‑28.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-8
Vehicle Care
3.0 L V6 Engine
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
Engine Cover
10-9
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
page 10‑16.
H. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and
Pressure Cap. See Engine
Coolant on page 10‑19.
B. Power Steering Reservoir and
Cap (Under engine cover).
See Power Steering Fluid on
page 10‑24.
I. Battery (Out of View).
See Battery on page 10‑28.
J. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.
See Jump Starting on
page 10‑94.
C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine
Oil on page 10‑10.
D. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of
View). See Engine Oil on
page 10‑10.
K. Remote Negative (−) Terminal
(Out of View). See Jump
Starting on page 10‑94.
E. Engine Cover on page 10‑9.
L. Engine Compartment Fuse
Block on page 10‑46.
Engine Cover (3.0 L V6)
A. Oil Fill Cap
F. Transmission Fluid Cap and
Dipstick. See Automatic
Transmission Fluid on
page 10‑15.
M. Windshield Washer Fluid
Reservoir. See Washer Fluid on
page 10‑24.
B. Engine Cover Bolt
C. Engine Cover
G. Brake Master Cylinder
Reservoir. See Brakes on
page 10‑25.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-10
Vehicle Care
To remove:
Checking Engine Oil
Engine Oil
To ensure proper engine
performance and long life, careful
attention must be paid to engine
oil. Following these simple, but
important steps will help protect
your investment:
1. Remove the oil fill cap (A).
It is a good idea to check the engine
oil level at each fuel fill. In order
to get an accurate reading, the
vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle
is a yellow loop. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
2. Remove the engine cover
bolt (B).
3. Raise the engine cover (C) to
release from the retainers.
4. Lift and remove the engine
cover.
.
Always use engine oil approved
page 10‑6 for the location of
the engine oil dipstick.
to the proper specification and
of the proper viscosity grade.
See “Selecting the Right
Engine Oil.”
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 to
reinstall engine cover.
1. If the engine has been running
recently, turn off the engine and
allow several minutes for the oil
to drain back into the oil pan.
Checking your oil level too soon
after engine shut off will not
provide an accurate oil level
reading.
.
Check the engine oil level
regularly and maintain the
proper oil level. See “Checking
Engine Oil” and “When to Add
Engine Oil.”
.
Change the engine oil at the
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean
it with a paper towel or cloth,
then push it back in all the way.
Remove it again, keeping the tip
down, and check the level.
appropriate time. See Engine Oil
Life System on page 10‑14.
.
Always dispose of engine oil
properly. See “What to Do With
Used Oil.”
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-11
operating range, i.e. the engine
has so much oil that the oil level
gets above the cross-hatched
area that shows the proper
operating range, the engine could
be damaged. You should drain
out the excess oil or limit your
driving of the vehicle and seek a
service professional to remove
the excess amount of oil.
When to Add Engine Oil
Selecting the Right Engine Oil
If the oil is below the cross-hatched
area at the tip of the dipstick, add
one liter/quart of the recommended
oil and then recheck the level.
See “Selecting the Right Engine Oil”
for an explanation of what kind of
oil to use. For engine oil crankcase
capacity, see Capacities and
Selecting the right engine oil
depends on both the proper oil
specification and viscosity grade:
Specification (3.0L V6 Engine)
Use and ask for engine oils with
the dexos™ certification mark.
Oils meeting the requirements
of your vehicle should have the
dexos™ certification mark on the
container. This certification mark
indicates that the oil has been
approved to the dexos™
Specifications on page 12‑2.
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10‑6 for the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
Notice: Do not add too much
oil. Oil levels above or below
the acceptable operating range
shown on the dipstick are harmful
to the engine. If you find that
you have an oil level above the
Add enough oil to put the level
somewhere in the proper operating
range. Push the dipstick all the way
back in when through.
specification.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-12
Vehicle Care
Use of Substitute Engine Oils if
dexos™ is unavailable: In the
event that dexos™ approved engine
oil is not available at an oil change
or for maintaining proper oil level,
you may use substitute engine oil
displaying the API Starburst symbol
and of SAE 5W-30 viscosity grade.
Use of oils that do not meet the
dexos™ specification, however,
may result in reduced performance
under certain circumstances.
Your vehicle was filled at the factory
with dexos™ approved engine oil.
Your vehicle was filled at the factory
with dexos™ approved engine oil.
Notice: Use only engine oil
that is approved to the dexos™
specification or an equivalent
engine oil of the appropriate
viscosity grade. Engine oils
approved to the dexos™
specification will show
the dexos™ symbol on the
container. Failure to use the
recommended engine oil or
equivalent can result in engine
damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty. If you are
unsure whether your oil is
approved to the dexos™
specification, ask your
Notice: Use only engine oil
that is approved to the dexos™
specification or an equivalent
engine oil of the appropriate
viscosity grade. Engine oils
approved to the dexos™
specification will show the
dexos™ symbol on the container.
Failure to use the recommended
engine oil or equivalent can
result in engine damage not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
If you are unsure whether your
oil is approved to the dexos™
specification, ask your service
provider.
Specification (2.8L V6 Engine)
Use and ask for engine oils with
the dexos™ certification mark.
Oils meeting the requirements
of your vehicle should have the
dexos™ certification mark on the
container. This certification mark
indicates that the oil has been
approved to the dexos™
specification.
service provider.
Use of Substitute Engine Oils if
dexos™ is unavailable for top-up
only: Engine oil not meeting the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-13
dexos™ specification or equivalent
should not be used for an oil
change. In the event that dexos™
approved engine oil is not available
for maintaining proper oil level,
however, you may use substitute
engine oil displaying the API
Starburst symbol and of SAE 5W-30
viscosity grade. Extensive use of
oils that do not meet the dexos™
specification, however, may
Cold Temperature Operation: In
an area of extreme cold, where
the temperature falls below
−29°C (−20°F), an SAE 0W-30
oil should be used. An oil of this
viscosity grade will provide easier
cold starting for the engine at
extremely low temperatures.
When selecting an oil of the
appropriate viscosity grade,
be sure to always select an oil that
meets the required specification,
dexos™. See “Specification” for
more information.
result in reduced performance or
engine damage under certain
circumstances.
Maintaining the proper oil level is
very important. However, if you
use a substitute oil for any reason,
we recommend that you perform
a complete oil change back to
dexos™ as soon as possible to
protect the engine and maintain
the engine's peak performance.
Engine Oil Additives/Engine
Oil Flushes
Do not add anything to the oil.
The recommended oils with the
dexos™ specification and displaying
the dexos™ certification mark
are all that is needed for good
performance and engine protection.
Viscosity Grade
Engine oil system flushes are not
recommended and could cause
engine damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty.
SAE 5W-30 is the best viscosity
grade for the vehicle. Do not
use other viscosity oils such as
SAE 10W‐30, 10W‐40, or 20W-50.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-14
Vehicle Care
It is possible that, if driving under
the best conditions, the oil life
system might indicate that an oil
change is not necessary for up to a
year. The engine oil and filter must
be changed at least once a year
and at this time the system must
be reset. Your dealer has trained
service people who will perform
this work and reset the system.
It is also important to check the
oil regularly over the course of
an oil drain interval and keep it
at the proper level.
What to Do with Used Oil
Engine Oil Life System
Used engine oil contains certain
elements that can be unhealthy for
your skin and could even cause
cancer. Do not let used oil stay on
your skin for very long. Clean your
skin and nails with soap and water,
or a good hand cleaner. Wash or
properly dispose of clothing or rags
containing used engine oil. See the
manufacturer's warnings about the
use and disposal of oil products.
When to Change Engine Oil
This vehicle has a computer system
that indicates when to change the
engine oil and filter. This is based
on engine revolutions and engine
temperature, and not on mileage.
Based on driving conditions, the
mileage at which an oil change is
indicated can vary considerably.
For the oil life system to work
properly, the system must be reset
every time the oil is changed.
Used oil can be a threat to the
environment. If you change your
own oil, be sure to drain all the
oil from the filter before disposal.
Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash or pouring it on the
ground, into sewers, or into streams
or bodies of water. Recycle it by
taking it to a place that collects
used oil.
If the system is ever reset
accidentally, the oil must be
changed at 5 000 km (3,000 miles)
since the last oil change.
Remember to reset the oil life
system whenever the oil is
changed.
When the system has calculated
that oil life has been diminished,
it indicates that an oil change is
necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE
OIL SOON message comes on. See
Engine Oil Messages on page 5‑35.
Change the oil as soon as possible
within the next 1 000 km (600 miles).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-15
The oil life system can also be reset
as follows:
How to Reset the Engine Oil
Life System
Automatic Transmission
Fluid
1. Turn the ignition on with the
engine off.
Reset the system whenever the
engine oil is changed so that the
system can calculate the next
engine oil change. To reset the
system:
How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid
2. Fully press and release the
accelerator pedal three times
within five seconds.
It is not necessary to check
the transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the
only reason for fluid loss. If a leak
occurs, take the vehicle to your
dealer service department and
have it repaired as soon as
possible.
1. Using the DIC MENU button and
thumbwheel on the turn signal
lever, display REMAINING OIL
LIFE on the DIC. See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 5‑28 and Engine Oil
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
SOON message is not on, the
system is reset.
The system is reset when the
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message is off.
Messages on page 5‑35.
There is a special procedure
for checking and changing the
transmission fluid. Because this
procedure is difficult, you should
have this done at your dealer
service department. Contact your
dealer for additional information
or the procedure can be found in
the service manual. To purchase
a service manual, see Service
Publications Ordering Information
on page 13‑15.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message comes back on when the
vehicle is started, the engine oil life
system has not been reset. Repeat
the procedure.
2. Press the SET button to reset
the oil life at 100%.
Be careful not to reset the oil
life display accidentally at any
time other than after the oil is
changed. It cannot be reset
accurately until the next oil
change.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-16
Vehicle Care
Change the fluid and filter at
the intervals listed in Scheduled
Maintenance on page 11‑2, and
be sure to use the fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and
3.0 L V6 Shown, 2.8 L V6 Similar
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter,
remove the filter from the vehicle
and lightly shake the filter to release
loose dust and dirt. If the filter
remains caked with dirt, a new filter
is required. Never use compressed
air to clean the filter.
Lubricants on page 11‑7.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10‑6 for the location of the
engine air cleaner/filter.
To inspect or replace the engine air
cleaner/filter:
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
1. Open the hood. See Hood on
page 10‑5.
A. Air Duct Clamp
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at
the scheduled maintenance
2. Locate the air filter housing on
the front of the passenger side
of the engine compartment.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 10‑6.
B. Electrical Connectors
C. Retaining Clips
intervals and replace it at the first
oil change after each 80 000 km
(50,000 mi) interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 11‑2 for more
information. If driving in dusty/dirty
conditions, inspect the filter at
each engine oil change.
3. Disconnect the outlet duct by
loosening the air duct clamp (A).
4. Disconnect the electrical
connectors (B).
5. Lift the retaining clips (C) on the
air filter housing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-17
6. Turn and tilt cover slightly
upwards and slide cover away
from outside edge of vehicle.
Remove the air filter.
7. To install the air filter, place filter
inside box where the pleats fit in
between the tabs located inside
the lower box. Ensure that the
cover cut outs (A) on both sides
match the air filter tabs (B) on
both sides.
WARNING (Continued)
backfires. Use caution when
working on the engine and do not
drive with the air cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is
off, dirt can easily get into the
engine, which could damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter
in place when you are driving.
8. Replace air cleaner cover by
inserting tabs appropriately
into slots. Lower cover to meet
bottom of box. Place clips on
retention features and clip
closed.
Notice: Installing an air
cleaner different than the one
recommended in Maintenance
Replacement Parts may cause
engine damage not covered by
the vehicle warranty.
9. Retighten the air duct clamp.
10. Reconnect the electrical
connectors.
A. Cover Cut Outs
B. Air Filter Tabs
WARNING
{
Operating the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off can cause you
or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it
helps to stop flames if the engine
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-18
Vehicle Care
Cooling System
When it is safe to lift the hood:
WARNING
WARNING
{
{
An electric engine cooling fan
under the hood can start up even
when the engine is not running
and can cause injury. Keep
Heater and radiator hoses, and
other engine parts, can be very
hot. Do not touch them. If you do,
you can be burned.
hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
Do not run the engine if there
is a leak. If you run the engine, it
could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you
could be burned. Get any leak
fixed before you drive the vehicle.
If the coolant inside the coolant
surge tank is boiling, do not do
anything else until it cools down.
The vehicle should be parked on
a level surface.
If there seems to be no leak,
with the engine on, check to
see if the electric engine cooling
fan is running. If the engine is
overheating, the fan should be
running. If it is not, the vehicle
needs service. Turn off the engine.
3.0 L V6 Engine Shown,
2.8 L V6 Engine Similar
The coolant level should be
between the MIN and MAX lines.
If it is not, the vehicle may have
a leak at the radiator hoses, heater
hoses, radiator, water pump,
or somewhere else in the cooling
system.
A. Engine Cooling Fan
(Out of View)
B. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and
Pressure Cap
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-19
Notice: Using coolant other
than DEX-COOL® can cause
premature engine, heater core,
or radiator corrosion. In addition,
the engine coolant could require
changing sooner, at 50 000 km
(30,000 miles) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Any
repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Always
use DEX-COOL (silicate-free)
coolant in the vehicle.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
What to Use
drinkable water and DEX-COOL
coolant. If using this mixture,
nothing else needs to be added.
This mixture:
WARNING
{
Adding only plain water or some
other liquid to the cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water
and other liquids, can boil before
the proper coolant mixture will.
The vehicle's coolant warning
system is set for the proper
coolant mixture. With plain water
or the wrong mixture, the engine
could get too hot but you would
not get the overheat warning.
The engine could catch fire and
you or others could be burned.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL
coolant.
.
Gives freezing protection down
to −37°C (−34°F), outside
temperature.
.
Gives boiling protection up
to 129°C (265°F), engine
temperature.
.
Protects against rust and
Engine Coolant
corrosion.
.
The cooling system in the vehicle
is filled with DEX-COOL® engine
coolant. This coolant is designed to
remain in the vehicle for 5 years or
240 000 km (150,000 mi), whichever
occurs first.
Will not damage aluminum parts.
.
Helps keep the proper engine
temperature.
Notice: If an improper coolant
mixture is used, the engine could
overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Too much water in the mixture
can freeze and crack the engine,
radiator, heater core, and other
parts.
The following explains the cooling
system and how to check and add
coolant when it is low. If there is a
problem with engine overheating,
see Engine Overheating on
page 10‑22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-20
Vehicle Care
Checking Coolant
How to Add Coolant to the
Coolant Surge Tank
WARNING
{
The vehicle must be on a level
surface when checking the coolant
level.
Steam and scalding liquids from a
hot cooling system can blow out
and burn you badly. They are
under pressure, and if you turn
the coolant surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — they can
come out at high speed. Never
turn the cap when the cooling
system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap, is hot.
Wait for the cooling system and
coolant surge tank pressure cap
to cool if you ever have to turn
the pressure cap.
Notice: This vehicle has a
specific coolant fill procedure.
Failure to follow this procedure
could cause the engine to
overheat and be severely
damaged.
Check to see if coolant is visible
in the coolant surge tank. If the
coolant inside the coolant surge
tank is boiling, do not do anything
else until it cools down. If coolant
is visible but the coolant level is
not at the indicated mark, add a
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and DEX-COOL coolant at the
coolant surge tank, but be sure the
cooling system is cool before this is
done. See Engine Overheating on
page 10‑22 for more information.
If no problem is found, check to see
if coolant is visible in the coolant
surge tank. If coolant is visible
but the coolant level is not at
the indicated level mark, add a
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and DEX-COOL coolant at
the coolant surge tank, but be sure
the cooling system, including the
coolant surge tank pressure cap,
is cool before you do it.
The coolant surge tank is located
in the engine compartment on
the driver side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10‑6 for more information
on location.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-21
WARNING
WARNING
{
{
Adding only plain water or some
other liquid to the cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water
and other liquids, can boil before
the proper coolant mixture will.
The vehicle's coolant warning
system is set for the proper
coolant mixture. With plain water
or the wrong mixture, the engine
could get too hot but you would
not get the overheat warning.
The engine could catch fire and
you or others could be burned.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL
coolant.
You can be burned if you spill
coolant on hot engine parts.
Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts
are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant on a hot engine.
3.0 L V6 Engine
1. Remove the coolant surge tank
pressure cap when the cooling
system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap and
upper radiator hose, is no
longer hot.
Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise about
Notice: In cold weather, water
can freeze and crack the engine,
radiator, heater core and other
parts. Use the recommended
coolant and the proper coolant
mixture.
one-quarter of a turn. If you
hear a hiss, wait for that to stop.
This will allow any pressure
still left to be vented out the
discharge hose.
2.8 L V6 Engine
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-22
Vehicle Care
2. Then keep turning the pressure
cap slowly and remove it.
Check the level in the coolant surge
tank when the cooling system has
cooled down. If the coolant is not
at the proper level, repeat Steps 1
through 3 and reinstall the pressure
cap. If the coolant still is not at the
proper level when the system cools
down again, see your dealer.
If the decision is made to lift the
hood, make sure the vehicle is
parked on a level surface.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank
with the proper DEX-COOL
coolant mixture to the indicated
level mark.
Then check to see if the engine
cooling fans are running. If the
engine is overheating, both fans
should be running. If they are not,
do not continue to run the engine
and have the vehicle serviced.
4. With the coolant surge tank
pressure cap off, start the
engine and let it run until you
can feel the upper radiator hose
getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
Engine Overheating
The vehicle has an indicator to warn
of engine overheating.
Notice: Engine damage from
running the engine without
coolant is not covered by the
warranty.
There is an engine coolant
temperature warning light on
the vehicle's instrument panel.
See Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge on page 5‑15.
By this time, the coolant level
inside the coolant surge tank
may be lower. If the level is
lower, add more of the proper
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture
to the coolant surge tank until
the level reaches the indicated
level mark.
Notice: If the engine catches
fire because of being driven
with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty.
If the decision is made not to lift the
hood when this warning appears,
but instead get service help right
away. See Roadside Service (U.S.
and Canada) on page 13‑8 or
Roadside Service (Mexico) on
page 13‑10.
5. Then replace the pressure cap.
Be sure the pressure cap is
hand-tight.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-23
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine
idle in N (Neutral) while stopped.
If it is safe to do so, pull off
the road, shift to P (Park) or
N (Neutral) and let the
If Steam Is Coming from the
Engine Compartment
If No Steam Is Coming from
the Engine Compartment
If an engine overheat warning is
displayed but no steam can be seen
or heard, the problem may not be
too serious. Sometimes the engine
can get a little too hot when the
vehicle:
WARNING
{
engine idle.
Steam from an overheated engine
can burn you badly, even if you
just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear
steam coming from it. Just turn it
off and get everyone away from
the vehicle until it cools down.
Wait until there is no sign of
steam or coolant before you
open the hood.
If the temperature overheat gauge
is no longer in the overheat zone
or an overheat warning no longer
displays, the vehicle can be driven.
Continue to drive the vehicle slowly
for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
vehicle distance from the vehicle in
front. If the warning does not come
back on, continue to drive normally.
.
Climbs a long hill on a hot day
.
Stops after high-speed driving
.
Idles for long periods in traffic
.
Tows a trailer
If the overheat warning displays with
no sign of steam:
If the warning continues, pull over,
stop, and park the vehicle
right away.
If you keep driving when your
engine is overheated, the liquids
in it can catch fire. You or others
could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out
of the vehicle until the engine
is cool.
1. Turn the air off.
2. Turn the heater on to the highest
temperature and to the highest
fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary.
If there is no sign of steam,
idle the engine for three minutes
while parked. If the warning is still
displayed, turn off the engine until it
cools down.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-24
Vehicle Care
How to Check Power Steering
Fluid
What to Use
Power Steering Fluid
To determine what kind of fluid to
use, see Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑7. Always
use the proper fluid.
To check the power steering fluid:
1. Turn the key off and let the
engine compartment cool down.
2. Remove the engine cover,
if required. See Engine Cover on
page 10‑9.
Washer Fluid
What to Use
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10‑6 for reservoir location.
When windshield washer fluid
is needed, be sure to read the
manufacturer's instructions before
use. If operating the vehicle in an
area where the temperature may
fall below freezing, use a fluid that
has sufficient protection against
freezing.
3. Wipe the cap and the top of the
reservoir clean.
When to Check Power Steering
Fluid
4. Unscrew the cap and wipe the
dipstick with a clean rag.
It is not necessary to regularly
check power steering fluid unless
a leak is suspected in the system
or unusual noise is heard. A fluid
loss in this system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
5. Replace the cap and completely
tighten it.
6. Remove the cap again and look
at the fluid level on the dipstick.
The level should be within the
HOT mark. If necessary, add only
enough fluid to bring the level within
the mark.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-25
.
Do not mix water with
The sound can come and go or
be heard all the time the vehicle is
moving, except when applying the
brake pedal firmly.
Adding Washer Fluid
ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution
to freeze and damage the
washer fluid tank and other
parts of the washer system.
Also, water does not clean
as well as washer fluid.
The WASHER FLUID LOW ADD
FLUID message appears on the
Driver Information Center (DIC)
when the fluid level is low.
WARNING
{
The brake wear warning sound
means that soon the brakes will
not work well. That could lead to
a crash. When the brake wear
warning sound is heard, have the
vehicle serviced.
.
Fill the washer fluid tank
only three-quarters full
when it is very cold. This
allows for fluid expansion
if freezing occurs, which
could damage the tank if
it is completely full.
Open the cap with the washer
symbol on it. Add washer fluid
up to the fill mark. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
Notice: Continuing to drive with
worn-out brake pads could result
in costly brake repair.
.
Do not use engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the windshield
washer. It can damage the
windshield washer system
and paint.
page 10‑6 for reservoir location.
Some driving conditions or climates
can cause a brake squeal when the
brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean
Notice:
.
When using concentrated
washer fluid, follow the
manufacturer's instructions
for adding water.
Brakes
This vehicle has disc brakes.
something is wrong with the brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear
indicators that make a high-pitched
warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-26
Vehicle Care
Properly torqued wheel nuts are
necessary to help prevent brake
pulsation. When tires are rotated,
inspect brake pads for wear and
evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to torque
specifications in Capacities and
Specifications on page 12‑2.
Replacing Brake System Parts
Brake Fluid
The braking system on a vehicle is
complex. Its many parts have to be
of top quality and work well together
if the vehicle is to have really good
braking. The vehicle was designed
and tested with top-quality brake
parts. When parts of the braking
system are replaced, be sure to get
new, approved replacement parts.
If this is not done, the brakes might
not work properly. For example,
installing disc brake pads that are
wrong for the vehicle, can change
the balance between the front and
rear brakes — for the worse. The
braking performance expected can
change in many other ways if the
wrong replacement brake parts are
installed.
Brake linings should always be
replaced as complete axle sets.
The brake master cylinder reservoir
is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid as
indicated on the reservoir cap.
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10‑6 for the location of the
reservoir.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal
does not return to normal height,
or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a
sign that brake service might be
required.
There are only two reasons why
the brake fluid level in the reservoir
might go down:
.
The brake fluid level goes down
Brake Adjustment
because of normal brake lining
wear. When new linings are
installed, the fluid level goes
back up.
Every time the brakes are applied,
with or without the vehicle moving,
the brakes adjust for wear.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-27
.
A fluid leak in the brake
hydraulic system can also
cause a low fluid level. Have
the brake hydraulic system
fixed, since a leak means that
sooner or later the brakes will
not work well.
When the brake fluid falls to a low
level, the brake warning light comes
on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 5‑22.
Notice:
.
Using the wrong fluid
can badly damage brake
hydraulic system parts.
For example, just a few
What to Add
drops of mineral-based oil,
such as engine oil, in the
brake hydraulic system can
damage brake hydraulic
system parts so badly that
they will have to be replaced.
Do not let someone put in
the wrong kind of fluid.
Use only new DOT 3 brake
fluid from a sealed container.
See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑7.
Do not top off the brake fluid.
Adding fluid does not correct a
leak. If fluid is added when the
linings are worn, there will be too
much fluid when new brake linings
are installed. Add or remove brake
fluid, as necessary, only when work
is done on the brake hydraulic
system.
Always clean the brake fluid
reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it.
This helps keep dirt from entering
the reservoir.
.
If brake fluid is spilled on the
vehicle's painted surfaces,
the paint finish can be
damaged. Be careful not
to spill brake fluid on the
vehicle. If you do, wash it
off immediately.
WARNING
{
WARNING
{
With the wrong kind of fluid in
the brake hydraulic system,
the brakes might not work well.
This could cause a crash. Always
use the proper brake fluid.
If too much brake fluid is added,
it can spill on the engine and
burn, if the engine is hot enough.
You or others could be burned,
and the vehicle could be
damaged. Add brake fluid only
when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-28
Vehicle Care
Vehicle Storage
Battery
All-Wheel Drive
Refer to the replacement number
shown on the original battery label
when a new battery is needed.
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10‑6 for battery location.
Transfer Case
WARNING
{
When to Check and Change
Lubricant
Batteries have acid that can burn
you and gas that can explode.
You can be badly hurt if you are
not careful. See Jump Starting on
page 10‑94 for tips on working
around a battery without
The transfer case is filled with oil
during manufacture, which then
does not require changing. It is not
necessary to regularly check the
transfer case fluid unless there is a
leak suspected or an unusual noise
is heard. A fluid loss could indicate
a problem. It is recommended to
have the transfer case serviced
at your dealer by trained service
technicians.
DANGER
{
Battery posts, terminals, and
getting hurt.
related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California
to cause cancer and reproductive
harm. Wash hands after handling.
Infrequent Usage: Remove the
black, negative (−) cable from the
battery to keep the battery from
running down.
Extended Storage: Remove the
black, negative (−) cable from the
battery or use a battery trickle
charger.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-29
3. Try to start the engine in each
gear. The vehicle should start
only in P (Park) or N (Neutral).
If the vehicle starts in any other
position, contact your dealer for
service.
2. Firmly apply the parking
Starter Switch Check
brake. See Parking Brake on
page 9‑31.
WARNING
{
Be ready to apply the regular
brake immediately if the vehicle
begins to move.
When you are doing this
inspection, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be
injured.
3. With the engine off, turn the
ignition on, but do not start the
engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the
shift lever out of P (Park) with
normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of P (Park), contact
your dealer for service.
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lock Control
Function Check
1. Before starting this check, be
sure there is enough room
around the vehicle.
WARNING
{
When you are doing this
inspection, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be
injured.
2. Firmly apply both the parking
brake and the regular brake.
See Parking Brake on
page 9‑31.
Do not use the accelerator
pedal, and be ready to turn off
the engine immediately if it
starts.
1. Before starting this check, be
sure there is enough room
around the vehicle. It should be
parked on a level surface.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-30
Vehicle Care
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the
vehicle facing downhill. Keeping
your foot on the regular brake, set
the parking brake.
Ignition Transmission
Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking
brake set, try to turn the ignition
to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever
position.
Park Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check
WARNING
{
.
To check the parking brake's
holding ability: With the engine
running and the transmission in
N (Neutral), slowly remove foot
pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
When you are doing this check,
the vehicle could begin to move.
You or others could be injured
and property could be damaged.
Make sure there is room in front
of the vehicle in case it begins to
roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake at once should the vehicle
begin to move.
.
The ignition should turn to
LOCK/OFF only when the
shift lever is in P (Park).
Contact your dealer if service is
required.
.
To check the P (Park)
mechanism's holding ability:
With the engine running, shift
to P (Park). Then release the
parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Contact your dealer if service is
required.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-31
3. Remove the wiper blade.
Front Wiper Blade
Replacement
Wiper Blade Replacement
4. Reverse steps 1 through 3 for
wiper blade replacement.
Windshield wiper blades should
be inspected for wear or cracking.
See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 11‑2 for more information.
To replace the wiper blade
assembly:
Rear Wiper Blade Replacement
1. Pull the windshield wiper
assembly away from the
windshield.
The rear wiper blade and wiper
arm have a cover for protection.
The cover must be removed before
the wiper blade can be replaced.
It is a good idea to clean or replace
the wiper blade assembly on a
regular basis or when worn.
For proper windshield wiper blade
length and type, see Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 11‑9.
To remove the cover:
Notice: Allowing the wiper blade
arm to touch the windshield
when no wiper blade is installed
could damage the windshield.
Any damage that occurs would
not be covered by your warranty.
Do not allow the wiper blade arm
to touch the windshield.
1. Slide a plastic tool under cover
and push upward to unsnap.
2. Slide cover towards wiper
blade tip to unhook from blade
assembly.
2. Press the button in the middle
of the wiper arm connector, and
pull the wiper blade away from
the arm connector.
3. Remove the cover.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-32
Vehicle Care
4. After wiper blade replacement,
ensure that cover hook slides
into slot in blade assembly.
2. Push the release lever (B) to
disengage the hook and push
the wiper arm (A) out of the
blade assembly (C).
Headlamp Aiming
The headlamp aiming system has
been preset at the factory.
5. Snap cover down to secure.
To remove the wiper blade:
If the vehicle is damaged in an
accident, the aim of the headlamps
can be affected and adjustment
could be necessary.
3. Push the new blade assembly
securely on the wiper arm until
the release lever clicks into
place.
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the
windshield.
It is recommended that a dealer
adjust the headlamps. To re-aim
the headlamps yourself, use the
following procedure.
4. Replace wiper cover.
A. Wiper Arm
B. Release Lever
C. Blade Assembly
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-33
The vehicle should be properly
prepared as follows:
Headlamp aiming is done with the
vehicle's low-beam headlamps.
The high-beam headlamps will be
correctly aimed if the low-beam
headlamps are aimed properly.
.
The vehicle should be placed so
the headlamps are 7.6 m (25 ft)
from a light‐colored wall.
To adjust the vertical aim:
.
The vehicle must have all four
tires on a level surface which is
level all the way to the wall.
1. Open the hood. See Hood on
page 10‑5 for more information.
.
The vehicle should be placed so
it is perpendicular to the wall.
.
The vehicle should not have any
Up-level Vehicle
snow, ice, or mud on it.
2. Locate the aim point at
the center inner projector
.
The vehicle should be fully
assembled and all other work
stopped while headlamp aiming
is being performed.
condensing lens of the low-beam
headlamp, not the outer lens.
3. Measure the distance from the
ground to the aim dot on the
low‐beam headlamp. Record
the distance.
.
The vehicle should be normally
loaded with a full tank of fuel and
one person or 75 kg (160 lbs)
sitting on the driver seat.
Base Vehicle
.
Tires should be properly inflated.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-34
Vehicle Care
5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B)
on the wall the width of the
vehicle at the height of the
mark in Step 4.
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp
to improve beam cut-off when
aiming. Covering a headlamp may
cause excessive heat build-up
which may cause damage to the
headlamp.
6. Turn on the low-beam
headlamps and place a piece
of cardboard or equivalent in
front of the headlamp not being
adjusted. This allows only the
beam of light from the headlamp
being adjusted to be seen on the
flat surface.
4. At the wall, measure from
the ground upward (A) to
the recorded distance from
Step 3 and mark it.
7. Locate the vertical headlamp
adjusters, which are under the
hood near each headlamp
assembly.
For the vehicle equipped with a
base level lamp (halogen bulb),
there will be one vertical
headlamp adjuster (V1).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-35
8. For the base vehicle, turn the
vertical adjuster (V1) until the
headlamp beam is aimed to
the horizontal tape line. Turn it
clockwise or counterclockwise
to raise or lower the angle of
the beam.
For the up-level vehicle, turn the
vertical adjusters (V1 and V2)
simultaneously until the
headlamp beam is aimed to the
horizontal tape line. Turn them
clockwise or counterclockwise
to raise or lower the angle of
the beam.
For the vehicle equipped with an
up-level headlamp (HID), there
will be two vertical headlamp
adjusters (V1 and V2).
9. Make sure that the light from the
headlamp is positioned at the
bottom edge of the horizontal
tape line. The lamp on the
left (A) shows the correct
Some vehicles have
headlamp aim. The lamp on
the right (B) shows the incorrect
headlamp aim.
funnel‐shaped caps on the
adjusters for easier access of
a Number 2 Phillips screwdriver
to turn the adjusters.
10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for
the opposite headlamp.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-36
Vehicle Care
High Intensity Discharge
(HID) Lighting
Headlamps
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement
bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on
page 10‑45.
WARNING
{
For any bulb changing procedure
not listed in this section, contact
your dealer.
The low beam high intensity
discharge lighting system
operates at a very high voltage.
If you try to service any of the
system components, you could
be seriously injured. Have your
dealer or a qualified technician
service them.
Halogen Bulbs
WARNING
{
Halogen bulbs have pressurized
gas inside and can burst if you
drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure
to read and follow the instructions
on the bulb package.
Base Headlamp Assembly
(Front View Passenger Side)
After an HID headlamp bulb has
been replaced, the beam might be a
slightly different shade than it was
originally. This is normal.
A. Low‐Beam Headlamp/Daytime
Running Lamp (DRL)
B. High‐Beam Headlamp
C. Turn Signal Lamp
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-37
Base Headlamp Assembly
(Rear View Passenger Side)
Up–Level Headlamp Assembly
(Front View Driver Side)
Up–Level Headlamp Assembly
(Rear View Driver Side)
A. Low‐Beam Headlamp/Daytime
A. High/Low‐Beam Headlamp
A. High/Low‐Beam Headlamp
Running Lamp (DRL)
(To be replaced at dealer only)
(To be replaced at dealer only)
B. High‐Beam Headlamp
B. Daytime Running Lamp (DRL)
C. Turn Signal Lamp
B. Daytime Running Lamp (DRL)
C. Turn Signal Lamp
C. Turn Signal Lamp
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-38
Vehicle Care
Driver Side
Passenger Side
The removal of the underhood
electrical center is required for the
replacement of one of these bulbs:
The removal of the air filter/cleaner
assembly and base is required for
the replacement of one of these
bulbs:
1. Open the hood. See Hood on
page 10‑5.
1. Open the hood. See Hood on
page 10‑5.
WARNING
{
Liquids from environment or
spillage and/or tools placed on
top of or used in the underhood
electrical center while the cover
is removed can pose a risk of
electrical shock/burn to anyone in
the vicinity. These conditions can
also cause damage to electrical
components on the vehicle. Keep
liquids and tools away from the
underhood electrical center when
the cover is removed.
2. Unlatch three clips and lift up
the underhood electrical center
cover to remove.
A. Air Duct Clamp
B. Connector Lock
C. Sensor Connectors
D. Retaining Clips
2. Disconnect the outlet duct by
loosening the air duct clamp (A).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-39
3. Remove the connector lock (B)
located at the bottom of the
sensor connector (C).
Low-Beam Headlamps/Daytime
Running Lamps (DRL),
High-Beam Headlamps (Base)
4. Press on the top and bottom of
the sensor connectors (C) and
remove.
5. Lift the three retaining clips (D)
on the air filter housing.
6. Turn and tilt cover slightly
upwards and slide cover away
from outside edge of vehicle.
Lift the cover away from base.
2. From the back side of the
headlamp assembly, remove
the bottom cap to replace the
high-beam headlamp bulb.
1. From the back side of the
headlamp assembly, remove the
top cap to replace the low-beam
headlamp/DRL bulb.
3. Disconnect electrical connector.
4. Remove the bulb socket from
the headlamp assembly.
5. Replace the bulb in the bulb
socket.
6. Install the bulb socket in the
headlamp assembly.
7. Connect the electrical connector.
7. Lift the air cleaner/filter base to
disengage from three pins.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-40
Vehicle Care
8. Install the cap with the down
arrow pointing down in the back
of the headlamp assembly.
3. Remove the DRL bulb socket
from the headlamp assembly.
Daytime Running Lamp (DRL)
(Up-Level)
4. Replace the bulb in the bulb
socket.
9. For driver side, reinstall the
underhood electrical center
cover by latching three clips.
5. Install the bulb socket in the
headlamp assembly.
10. For passenger side, reinstall
the air filter/cleaner assembly
base by pushing to seat. Verify
the base is seated securely,
then install the engine air
6. Connect the electrical connector.
7. Install the cap with the down
arrow pointing down in the back
of the headlamp assembly.
filter/cleaner assembly.
8. For driver side, reinstall the
underhood electrical center
cover by latching three clips.
High/Low‐Beam Headlamps
(Up-Level)
9. For passenger side, reinstall the
air filter/cleaner assembly base
by pushing to seat. Verify the
base is seated securely, then
install the engine air filter/
cleaner assembly.
1. From the back side of the
headlamp assembly, remove
the bottom cap to replace the
DRL bulb.
The high/low beam headlamps on
the up-level are High Intensity
Discharge (HID) and should be
replaced at the dealer.
2. Disconnect electrical connector.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-41
Front Turn Signal Lamp
(Base and Up-Level)
Fog Lamps
To replace the fog lamp bulb:
To replace the Front Turn
Signal Lamp:
1. Locate the bulb assembly under
the front fascia.
1. Remove the turn signal lamp
bulb socket from the headlamp
assembly.
2. Disconnect the electrical
connector from the bulb
assembly.
2. Remove the turn signal lamp
bulb from the socket.
3. Remove the bulb by turning it
counterclockwise and pulling it
straight out of the assembly.
3. Replace the bulb in the bulb
socket.
A. Push Pin
B. Taillamp Cover
4. Install the new bulb by turning it
clockwise into the assembly.
4. Install the bulb socket in the
headlamp assembly.
5. Reconnect the electrical
2. Pull on push pin (A) to release
the taillamp cover (B).
5. For driver side, reinstall the
underhood electrical center
cover by latching three clips.
connector to the bulb assembly.
3. Remove the taillamp cover from
the lamp assembly by pulling
rearward from the top to
Turn Signal Lamps
To replace one of these bulbs:
6. For passenger side, reinstall the
air filter/cleaner assembly base
by pushing to seat. Verify the
base is seated securely, then
install the engine air filter/
cleaner assembly.
unfasten from snap tabs.
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate
(Manual) on page 2‑14 or
Liftgate (Power) on page 2‑15.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-42
Vehicle Care
7. Pull the bulb straight out from
the socket.
8. Press a new bulb into the
socket, insert it into the taillamp
assembly and turn the bulb
socket clockwise until it clicks.
9. Reinstall the taillamp assembly
and tighten the screws.
10. Reinstall the taillamp cover by
snapping it into place.
11. Push the push pin to secure
the taillamp cover.
A. Turn Signal Lamp
4. Remove the two screws from the
taillamp assembly.
B. Back-Up Bulb/Socket
5. Pull the taillamp assembly
straight back to remove.
6. Turn the turn signal lamp (A)
bulb socket counterclockwise
to remove it from the taillamp
assembly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-43
3. Remove the taillamp cover from
the lamp assembly by pulling
rearward from the top to
Back-Up Lamps
To replace one of these bulbs:
unfasten from snap tabs.
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate
(Manual) on page 2‑14 or
Liftgate (Power) on page 2‑15.
A. Turn Signal Lamp
B. Back–Up Bulb/Socket
6. Disconnect the wire harness
from the back–up bulb/
socket (B).
4. Remove the two screws from the
taillamp assembly.
7. Turn the back–up bulb socket
counterclockwise to remove it
from the taillamp assembly.
A. Push Pin
5. Pull the taillamp assembly
straight back to remove.
B. Taillamp Cover
2. Pull on push pin (A) to release
the taillamp cover (B).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-44
Vehicle Care
8. Press a new bulb/socket into the
taillamp assembly and turn the
bulb/socket clockwise until it
clicks.
9. Reinstall the taillamp assembly
and tighten the screws.
10. Reinstall the taillamp cover by
snapping it into place.
11. Push the push pin to secure
the taillamp cover.
A. Bulb Socket
B. Bulb
Passenger side shown, driver side
similar
License Plate Lamp
To replace one of these bulbs:
2. Push the left end of the lamp
assembly towards the right.
C. Lamp Assembly
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate
(Manual) on page 2‑14 or
Liftgate (Power) on page 2‑15
for more information.
4. Turn the bulb socket (A)
counterclockwise to remove
from lamp assembly (C).
3. Turn the lamp assembly down to
remove from liftgate.
5. Pull the bulb (B) straight out of
the bulb socket.
6. Push the replacement bulb
straight into the bulb socket and
turn the bulb socket clockwise to
install into lamp assembly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-45
7. Turn the lamp assembly into the
liftgate engaging the clip side
first.
Fuses and circuit breakers protect
the following in the vehicle:
Electrical System
.
Headlamp Wiring
Electrical System
Overload
The vehicle has fuses and circuit
breakers to protect against an
electrical system overload.
8. Push on the lamp side opposite
the clip until the lamp assembly
snaps into place.
.
Windshield Wiper Motor
.
Power Windows and Other
Power Accessories
Replacement Bulbs
Replace a bad fuse with a new one
of the identical size and rating.
When the current electrical load is
too heavy, the circuit breaker opens
and closes, protecting the circuit
until the current load returns to
normal or the problem is fixed.
This greatly reduces the chance
of circuit overload and fire caused
by electrical problems.
Bulb
Number
Exterior Lamp
If there is a problem on the road
and a fuse needs to be replaced,
the same amperage fuse can be
borrowed. Choose some feature of
the vehicle that is not needed to use
and replace it as soon as possible.
Daytime
Running Lamp
7443
Fog Lamp
H10
Headlamp
High-Beam
9005
Headlamp Wiring
Headlamp
Low-Beam
An electrical overload may cause
the lamps to go on and off, or in
some cases to remain off. Have
the headlamp wiring checked right
away if the lamps go on and off or
remain off.
H10
License Plate Lamp
Turn Signal Front
194LL
7440
Tail/Turn
Signal Rear
7440
For replacement bulbs not listed
here, contact your dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-46
Vehicle Care
To identify and check fuses,
Windshield Wipers
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are
protected from short circuits by a
combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces
the chance of damage caused
by electrical problems.
circuit breakers, and relays, see
Engine Compartment Fuse Block on
page 10‑46 and Rear Compartment
Fuse Block on page 10‑51.
If the wiper motor overheats due to
heavy snow or ice, the windshield
wipers will stop until the motor cools
and will then restart.
Although the circuit is protected
from electrical overload, overload
due to heavy snow or ice may
cause wiper linkage damage.
Always clear ice and heavy snow
from the windshield before using
the windshield wipers.
Engine Compartment
Fuse Block
To remove the fuse block cover,
press the clips on the cover and lift
it straight up.
To check a fuse, look at the
silver-colored band inside the fuse.
If the band is broken or melted,
replace the fuse. Be sure to replace
a bad fuse with a new one of the
identical size and rating.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any
electrical component on the
vehicle may damage it. Always
keep the covers on any electrical
component.
If the overload is caused by an
electrical problem and not snow
or ice, be sure to get it fixed.
Fuses of the same amperage can
be temporarily borrowed from
another fuse location, if a fuse goes
out. Replace the fuse as soon as
you can.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-47
J-Case
Usage
Fuses
Rear Electrical
Center 2
26
27
41
42
43
44
45
Not Used
Cooling Fan 2 (LF1)
Starter
Not Used
Not Used
Cooling Fan 1 (LF1)
Secondary
AIR Pump
59
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
Mini Fuses
Usage
The vehicle may not be equipped
with all of the fuses, relays, and
features shown.
Engine Control
Module Battery
J-Case
Fuses
Usage
1
Transmission
Control Module
Battery
Anitlock Brake
System Pump
24
25
J-Case
Fuses
Usage
2
3
Rear Electrical
Center 1
6
Wiper
Vacuum Pump
Mass Air Flow
Sensor
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-48
Vehicle Care
Mini Fuses
Usage
Not Used
Mini Fuses
Usage
Mini Fuses
Usage
Front Fog Lamps
Horn
4
Transmission
Control Module Run
Crank
50
51
19
Engine Control
Module Run Crank
5
Fuel System Control
Module
52
53
54
Rear Electrical
Center Run Crank
Post–Catalytic
Converter O2
Sensor
20
7
Headlamp Level
23
30
Heater Motor
Sensing Diagnostic
Module Ignition
Pre–Catalytic
Converter O2
Sensor
Switch Back Light
8
9
Battery Sense
(Regulated Voltage
Control)
High Beam
Headlamp–Right
32
55
56
57
65
66
Engine Control
Module Powertrain
High Beam
Headlamp–Left
Adaptive Forward
Lighting/Adaptive
Headlamp Leveling
Module
10
11
13
Fuel Injectors–Even
Fuel Injectors–Odd
Washer
33
Ignition Steering
Column Lock
Trailer Right
Stop Lamp
Body Control
Module 7
34
35
46
47
Instrument Panel
Cluster/Malfunction
Indicator Lamp/
Ignition
16
Trailer Left
Stop Lamp
Electronic Brake
Control Module
67
68
69
Spare
Spare
Spare
Low Beam
Headlamp‐Right
17
18
Air Quality Sensor
Headlamp Washer
Low Beam
Headlamp‐Left
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-49
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block
Mini Fuses
Usage
Usage
Micro
Relays
Usage
70
71
72
Spare
Spare
Spare
2
4
Vacuum Pump
Wiper Control
Wiper Speed
Starter
5
Mini Relays
10
12
14
7
9
Powertrain
Cool Fan 3 (LF1)
Low Beam/HID
Cooling Fan 2 (LF1)
Cooling Fan 1 (LF1)
Run/Crank
13
15
U Micro
Relays
Usage
Secondary
AIR Pump
16
8
Headlamp Washer
The instrument panel fuse block
is located in the center console
between the driver and passenger
seats. To access the fuses, open
the fuse panel door from the
passenger side by pulling it out.
To reinstall the door, push the door
back into its original location.
The vehicle may not be equipped
with all of the fuses, relays and
features shown.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-50
Vehicle Care
Mini Fuses
DISPLY
Usage
Display
S/ROOF
Sun Roof
Rear Vision
Camera Mirror
RVC MIRR
Universal
Handsfree Phone
UHP
RDO
Radio
Auxiliary Power
Outlet ‐ Instrument
Panel
APO ‐ IP
Auxiliary Power
APO ‐ CNSL Outlet ‐ Floor
Console
Body Control
BCM 3
Module 3
Body Control
BCM 4
Module 4
Body Control
BCM 5
Module 5
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
OnStar® System
ONSTAR
(If Equipped)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-51
Rear Compartment Fuse
Block
Mini Fuses
Usage
Mini Fuses
Usage
RAIN SNSR Rain Sensor
AMP/RDO Amplifier/Radio
Body Control
BCM 6
Heating Ventilation
HVAC
Module 6
& Air Conditioning
Electronic Steering
Column Lock
ESCL
AIRBAG
DLC
J—Case
Fuses
Usage
Sensing and
Diagnostic Module
Body Control
Module 8
BCM 8
Data Link
Connection
FRT BLWR Front Blower
Instrument Panel
Cluster
IPC
Relays Usage
LOGIC RLY Logistics Relay
SPARE
BCM 1
Not Used
The rear compartment fuse block is
located in the cargo area, on the
driver side of the vehicle behind the
lower trim panel. To open, turn the
latch with a flat bladed tool and pull
the trim panel from the edges to fold
it down.
Retained
RAP/
Body Control
Module 1
Accessory Power/
ACCY RLY
Accessory Relay
Body Control
Module 2
BCM 2
The vehicle may not be equipped
with all of the fuses, relays, and
features shown.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-52
Vehicle Care
Fuses
Usage
SPARE
FUSES
Spare Fuses
Automatic Occupant
Sensing Module
AOS MDL
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
PASS DR Passenger Door
WDO SW Window Switch
DRV
Driver Power Seat
PWR SEAT
PASS DR Passenge/Driver
PWR SEAT Power Seats
MDL TRLR Trailer Module
Rear Parking Assist
RPA MDL
Module
Rear Compartment Fuse Block
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-53
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
CAMERA Rear Vision Camera
FRT Front Ventilated
Usage
Fuses
* TRLR 2 Trailer 2
Universal Garage
Door Opener
Usage
RDM
Rear Drive Module
PRK
LPS TRLR
Trailer Park Lamps
UGDO
VENT SEAT Seats
FUEL
PUMP
TRLR MDL Trailer Module
RT WDO Right Window
PRK
BRK MDL
Fuel Pump
Security
Semi Active
SADS MDL Damping System
Module
Park Brake Module
* SEC
INFOTMNT Infotainment
* TRLR EXP Trailer Export
WPR REAR Rear Wiper
SPARE
Not Used
RR
LT WDO
Left Window
Rear Heated Seats
HTD SEAT
IGN/
THEFT 1
FRT
Ignition/Theft 1
Front Heated Seats
HTD SEAT
MIR
Mirror Window
WDO MDL Module
LGATE
MDL
THEFT
Liftgate Module
Theft Horn
HORN
* SPARE
Not Used
IGN/
THEFT 2
CNSTR
VENT
* LGATE
SHUNT
Liftgate
Shunt
Ignition/Theft 2
Not Used
Canister Vent
SPARE
LGM
LOGIC
Lift Gate Module
Logic
REAR
DEFOG
Rear Defog
HTD MIR Heated Mirror
Auxiliary Power
AUX PWR
* BCM
THEFT
Body Control
Module Theft
Outlet
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-54
Vehicle Care
Wheels and Tires
Relays
Usage
WARNING (Continued)
SPARE
Not Used
and a serious accident.
See Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑12.
Tires
* FUEL
PUMP
Fuel Pump
Your new vehicle comes with
high-quality tires made by
.
WPR
CONTRL
Under inflated tires pose the
same danger as overloaded
tires. The resulting crash
could cause serious injury.
Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure
should be checked when
your tires are cold.
Wiper Control
a leading tire manufacturer.
If you ever have questions about
your tire warranty and where to
obtain service, see your vehicle
Warranty booklet for details.
For additional information refer
to the tire manufacturer.
* RUN RLY Run Relay
Logistic Relay
(Export)
LOGIC
DEFOG
REAR
Rear Window
Defogger
.
WARNING
*‐Denotes up‐level content.
{
Over inflated tires are more
likely to be cut, punctured,
or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you
hit a pothole. Keep tires at
the recommended pressure.
.
Poorly maintained and
improperly used tires are
dangerous.
.
Overloading your tires can
cause overheating as a
result of too much flexing.
You could have a blowout
.
Worn or old tires can cause a
crash. If your tread is badly
worn, replace them.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-55
aspect ratio, construction type,
and service description. See the
“Tire Size” illustration later in this
section for more detail.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
WARNING (Continued)
Useful information about a
tire is molded into its sidewall.
The examples below show a
typical passenger vehicle tire
and a compact spare tire
sidewall.
.
.
Replace any tires that have
been damaged by impacts
with potholes, curbs, etc.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire
Performance Criteria
Improperly repaired tires can
cause a crash. Only your
dealer or an authorized tire
service center should repair,
replace, dismount, and mount
the tires.
Specification): Original
equipment tires designed to
GM's specific tire performance
criteria have a TPC specification
code molded onto the sidewall.
GM's TPC specifications meet
or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
.
Do not spin the tires in
excess of 55 km/h (35 mph)
on slippery surfaces such
as snow, mud, ice, etc.
Excessive spinning may
cause the tires to explode.
(C) DOT (Department
of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation
(DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with
the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
See Tire Pressure for High-Speed
Operation on page 10‑62 for
inflation pressure adjustment
for high-speed driving.
Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire Example
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is
a combination of letters and
numbers used to define a
particular tire's width, height,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-56
Vehicle Care
(D) Tire Identification
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation
Load Limit: Maximum load
that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed
to support that load.
(3,000 miles) and should not be
driven at speeds over 105 km/h
(65 mph). The compact spare
tire is for emergency use when
a regular road tire has lost air
and gone flat. If your vehicle
has a compact spare tire,
see Compact Spare Tire on
page 10‑93 and If a Tire Goes
Flat on page 10‑77.
Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following the DOT
(Department of Transportation)
code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows
the manufacturer and plant
code, tire size, and date the tire
was manufactured. The TIN is
molded onto both sides of the
tire, although only one side may
have the date of manufacture.
(C) Tire Identification
Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following the DOT
(Department of Transportation)
code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows
the manufacturer and plant
code, tire size, and date the tire
was manufactured. The TIN is
molded onto both sides of the
tire, although only one side may
have the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type
of cord and number of plies in
the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality
Grading (UTQG): Tire
Compact Spare Tire Example
manufacturers are required
to grade tires based on three
performance factors: treadwear,
traction, and temperature
resistance. For more information
see Uniform Tire Quality
(A) Tire Ply Material: The type
of cord and number of plies in
the sidewall and under the tread.
(B) Temporary Use Only:
The compact spare tire or
temporary use tire has a tread
life of approximately 5 000 km
Grading on page 10‑73.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-57
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation
Load Limit: Maximum load
that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed
to support that load.
criteria have a TPC specification
code molded onto the sidewall.
GM's TPC specifications meet
or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
vehicle tire engineered to
standards set by the U.S.
Tire and Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three‐digit
number indicates the tire section
width in millimeters from
(E) Tire Inflation: The
Tire Designations
temporary use tire or compact
spare tire should be inflated
to 420 kPa (60 psi). For more
information on tire pressure and
inflation see Tire Pressure on
page 10‑61.
sidewall to sidewall.
Tire Size
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digit
number that indicates the tire
height‐to‐width measurements.
For example, if the tire size
aspect ratio is 60, as shown in
item C of the illustration, it would
mean that the tire's sidewall is
60 percent as high as it is wide.
The following illustration
shows an example of a typical
passenger vehicle tire size.
(F) Tire Size: A combination of
letters and numbers define a
tire's width, height, aspect ratio,
construction type, and service
description. The letter T as the
first character in the tire size
means the tire is for temporary
use only.
(D) Construction Code: A
letter code is used to indicate
the type of ply construction in
the tire. The letter R means
radial ply construction; the
letter D means diagonal or
bias ply construction; and the
letter B means belted‐bias ply
construction.
(A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire:
The United States version of
a metric tire sizing system. The
letter P as the first character in
the tire size means a passenger
(G) TPC Spec (Tire
Performance Criteria
Specification): Original
equipment tires designed to
GM's specific tire performance
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-58
Vehicle Care
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of
the wheel in inches.
power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air
conditioning.
before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Tire Pressure
on page 10‑61.
(F) Service Description: These
characters represent the load
index and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents
the load carrying capacity a tire
is certified to carry. The speed
rating is the maximum speed a
tire is certified to carry a load.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship
of a tire's height to its width.
Curb Weight: The weight of a
motor vehicle with standard and
optional equipment including
the maximum capacity of fuel,
oil, and coolant, but without
passengers and cargo.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of
cords that is located between
the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other
reinforcing materials.
DOT Markings: A code
molded into the sidewall of
a tire signifying that the tire
is in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation
(DOT) motor vehicle safety
standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric
designator which can also
identify the tire manufacturer,
production plant, brand, and
date of production.
Bead: The tire bead contains
steel wires wrapped by steel
cords that hold the tire onto
the rim.
Tire Terminology and
Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount
of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch
of the tire. Air pressure is
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic
tire in which the plies are laid
at alternate angles less than
90 degrees to the centerline
of the tread.
expressed in psi (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascal).
Accessory Weight: This
means the combined weight
of optional accessories.
Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic
transmission, power steering,
Cold Tire Pressure: The
amount of air pressure in a tire,
measured in kPa (kilopascal)
or psi (pounds per square inch)
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 9‑12.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-59
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle
Weight Rating for the front axle.
See Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑12.
Maximum Inflation Pressure:
The maximum air pressure to
which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is
molded onto the sidewall.
Outward Facing Sidewall:
The side of an asymmetrical tire
that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted
on a vehicle. The side of the
tire that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering, or bears
manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is
higher or deeper than the same
moldings on the other sidewall
of the tire.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle
Weight Rating for the rear axle.
See Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑12.
Maximum Load Rating:
The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation
pressure for that tire.
Intended Outboard Sidewall:
The side of an asymmetrical tire,
that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle
Weight: The sum of curb
weight, accessory weight,
vehicle capacity weight, and
production options weight.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:
A tire used on passenger cars
and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric
unit for air pressure.
Normal Occupant Weight:
The number of occupants a
vehicle is designed to seat
multiplied by 68 kg (150 lbs).
See Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑12.
Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: A
tire used on light duty trucks and
some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Recommended Inflation
Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer's recommended
tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
See Tire Pressure on
Load Index: An assigned
number ranging from 1 to 279
that corresponds to the load
carrying capacity of a tire.
Occupant Distribution:
Designated seating positions.
page 10‑61 and Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑12.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-60
Vehicle Care
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic
tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of
the tread.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
bands, sometimes called wear
bars, that show across the
tread of a tire when only 1.6 mm
(1/16 inch) of tread remains.
See When It Is Time for New
Tires on page 10‑69.
Vehicle Capacity Weight:
The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by
68 kg (150 lbs) plus the rated
cargo load. See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9‑12.
Rim: A metal support for a tire
and upon which the tire beads
are seated.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the
Tire: Load on an individual tire
due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and
cargo weight.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire
Quality Grading Standards):
A tire information system
that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire's traction,
temperature, and treadwear.
Ratings are determined by
tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures.
The ratings are molded into
the sidewall of the tire.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire
between the tread and the bead.
Speed Rating: An
Vehicle Placard: A label
permanently attached to
a vehicle showing the vehicle's
alphanumeric code assigned to
a tire indicating the maximum
speed at which a tire can
operate.
capacity weight and the
original equipment tire size
and recommended inflation
pressure. See “Tire and Loading
Information Label” under Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑12.
Traction: The friction between
the tire and the road surface.
The amount of grip provided.
See Uniform Tire Quality
Grading on page 10‑73.
Tread: The portion of a tire
that comes into contact with
the road.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-61
If your tires have too much air
(over‐inflation), you can get
the following:
For additional information
Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount
of air pressure to operate
effectively.
regarding how much weight
your vehicle can carry, and an
example of the Tire and Loading
Information label, see Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑12.
How you load your vehicle
affects vehicle handling and
ride comfort. Never load your
vehicle with more weight than
it was designed to carry.
.
Unusual wear.
.
Poor handling.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell
you that under‐inflation or
over‐inflation is all right. It is
not. If your tires do not have
enough air (under‐inflation),
you can get the following:
.
Rough ride.
.
Needless damage from
road hazards.
A vehicle-specific Tire and
Loading Information label
.
Tire overloading and
When to Check
is attached to your vehicle.
This label shows your vehicle's
original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for
your tires when they are cold.
The recommended cold tire
inflation pressure, shown on
the label, is the minimum
over-heating which could
lead to a blowout.
Check your tires once a month
or more. Do not forget to
check the compact spare
tire, if the vehicle has one.
The compact spare should
be at 420 kPa (60 psi).
For additional information
regarding the compact spare
tire, see Compact Spare
Tire on page 10‑93.
.
Premature or
irregular wear.
.
.
Poor handling.
Reduced fuel economy.
amount of air pressure needed
to support your vehicle's
maximum load carrying capacity.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-62
Vehicle Care
How to Check
If the cold tire inflation pressure
matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and
Loading Information label, no
further adjustment is necessary.
If the inflation pressure is low,
add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
Tire Pressure for
High-Speed Operation
Use a good quality pocket-type
gauge to check tire pressure.
You cannot tell if your tires are
properly inflated simply by
looking at them. Radial tires may
look properly inflated even when
they are under‐inflated. Check
the tire's inflation pressure when
the tires are cold. Cold means
your vehicle has been sitting for
at least three hours or driven no
more than 1.6 km (1 mile).
WARNING
{
Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h
(100 mph) or higher, puts
an additional strain on tires.
Sustained high-speed driving
causes excessive heat build up
and can cause sudden tire failure.
You could have a crash and you
or others could be killed. Some
high-speed rated tires require
inflation pressure adjustment
for high speed operation. When
speed limits and road conditions
are such that a vehicle can be
driven at high speeds, make sure
the tires are rated for high speed
operation, in excellent condition,
and set to the correct cold tire
inflation pressure for the
If you overfill the tire, release air
by pushing on the metal stem
in the center of the tire valve.
Re‐check the tire pressure with
the tire gauge.
Remove the valve cap from the
tire valve stem. Press the tire
gauge firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement.
Be sure to put the valve caps
back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by
keeping out dirt and moisture.
vehicle load.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-63
Vehicles with P235/65R18,
pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly
under‐inflated.
Tire Pressure Monitor
System
P235/55R20, or 235/55R20 size
tires require inflation pressure
adjustment when driving
The Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS) uses radio and sensor
technology to check tire pressure
levels. The TPMS sensors monitor
the air pressure in your tires and
transmit tire pressure readings to
a receiver located in the vehicle.
Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them
to the proper pressure. Driving on
a significantly under‐inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire failure. Under‐inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and
tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle's handling and stopping
ability.
your vehicle at speeds of
160 km/h (100 mph) or higher.
Set the cold inflation pressure to
the maximum inflation pressure
shown on the tire sidewall,
or 260 kPa (38 psi), whichever
is lower. When you end this
high-speed driving, return the tires
to the cold tire inflation pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑12 and
Tire Pressure on page 10‑61.
Each tire, including the spare
(if provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label. (If your vehicle has
tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or
tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.)
Please note that the TPMS is
not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver's
responsibility to maintain correct
tire pressure, even if under‐inflation
has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
You will find the maximum load and
inflation pressure molded on the
tire's sidewall, in small letters,
near the rim flange. It will read
something like this: Maximum load
690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi)
Max. Press.
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a
tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
Your vehicle has also been
equipped with a TPMS malfunction
indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-64
Vehicle Care
The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start‐ups as
long as the malfunction exists.
Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and
Industry Canada
See Radio Frequency
Statement on page 13‑20 for
information regarding Part 15
of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and
Industry Canada Standards
RSS-210/220/310.
When a low tire pressure condition
is detected, the TPMS illuminates
the low tire pressure warning light
located on the instrument panel
cluster. If the warning light comes
on, stop as soon as possible and
inflate the tires to the recommended
pressure shown on the tire loading
information label. See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9‑12.
When the malfunction indicator
is illuminated, the system may
not be able to detect or signal low
tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation
of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation
This vehicle may have a Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
The TPMS is designed to warn the
driver when a low tire pressure
condition exists. TPMS sensors are
mounted onto each tire and wheel
assembly, excluding the spare tire
and wheel assembly. The TPMS
sensors monitor the air pressure in
the vehicle's tires and transmit the
tire pressure readings to a receiver
located in the vehicle.
At the same time a message to
check the pressure appears on the
Driver Information Center (DIC)
display. The low tire pressure
warning light and the DIC warning
message come on at each ignition
cycle until the tires are inflated to
the correct inflation pressure.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation on page 10‑64 for
additional information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-65
Using the DIC, tire pressure levels
can be viewed by the driver.
For additional information and
details about the DIC operation
and displays see Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 5‑28.
Your vehicle's TPMS can warn you
about a low tire pressure condition
but it does not replace normal tire
maintenance. See Tire Inspection
on page 10‑68, Tire Rotation on
page 10‑68 and Tires on
TPMS Malfunction Light and
Message
The TPMS will not function properly
if one or more of the TPMS sensors
are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the
low tire warning light flashes for
about one minute and then stays
on for the remainder of the ignition
cycle. A DIC warning message is
also displayed. The low tire warning
light and DIC warning message
come on at each ignition cycle until
the problem is corrected. Some of
the conditions that can cause the
malfunction light and DIC message
to come on are:
page 10‑54.
The low tire pressure warning
light may come on in cool weather
when the vehicle is first started, and
then turn off as you start to drive.
This could be an early indicator that
the air pressure in the tire(s) are
getting low and need to be inflated
to the proper pressure.
Notice: Tire sealant materials are
not all the same. A non-approved
tire sealant could damage the Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors. TPMS sensor damage
caused by using an incorrect
tire sealant is not covered by
the vehicle warranty. Always use
only the GM approved tire sealant
available through your dealer or
included in the vehicle.
A Tire and Loading Information
label, attached to your vehicle,
shows the size of your vehicle's
original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressure for your
vehicle's tires when they are cold.
See Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑12, for an example of the
Tire and Loading Information label
and its location on your vehicle.
Also see Tire Pressure on
.
One of the road tires has been
Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kits
use a GM approved liquid tire
sealant. Using non-approved tire
sealants could damage the TPMS
sensors. See Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit on page 10‑79 for
information regarding the inflator
kit materials and instructions.
replaced with the spare tire.
The spare tire does not have
a TPMS sensor. The TPMS
malfunction light and DIC
message should go off once
you re‐install the road tire
containing the TPMS sensor.
page 10‑61.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-66
Vehicle Care
.
.
The TPMS sensor matching
process was started but not
completed or not completed
successfully after rotating the
vehicle's tires. The DIC message
and TPMS malfunction light
should go off once the TPMS
sensor matching process
Replacement tires or wheels do
not match your vehicle's original
equipment tires or wheels. Tires
and wheels other than those
recommended for your vehicle
could prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. See Buying
New Tires on page 10‑70.
TPMS Sensor Matching
Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique
identification code. Any time you
rotate your vehicle's tires or replace
one or more of the TPMS sensors,
the identification codes will need to
be matched to the new tire/wheel
position. The sensors are matched
to the tire/wheel positions in the
following order: driver side front tire,
passenger side front tire, passenger
side rear tire, and driver side rear
tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool.
See your dealer for service.
is performed successfully.
See “TPMS Sensor Matching
Process” later in this section.
.
Operating electronic devices or
being near facilities using radio
wave frequencies similar to the
TPMS could cause the TPMS
sensors to malfunction.
.
One or more TPMS sensors are
missing or damaged. The DIC
message and the TPMS
malfunction light should go
off when the TPMS sensors
are installed and the sensor
matching process is performed
successfully. See your dealer
for service.
If the TPMS is not functioning it
cannot detect or signal a low tire
condition. See your dealer for
service if the TPMS malfunction
light and DIC message comes
on and stays on.
The TPMS sensors can also be
matched to each tire/wheel position
by increasing or decreasing the
tire's air pressure. If increasing the
tire's air pressure, do not exceed
the maximum inflation pressure
indicated on the tire's sidewall.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-67
To decrease air-pressure out of a
tire you can use the pointed end of
the valve cap, a pencil-style air
pressure gauge, or a key.
5. Press and hold SET to begin the
sensor matching process.
10. Proceed to the passenger
side rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 5.
6. Press SET to confirm selection.
The horn sounds twice to signal
the receiver is in relearn mode
and TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
message displays on the DIC
screen.
11. Proceed to the driver side rear
tire, and repeat the procedure
in Step 5. The horn sounds
two times to indicate the
You have two minutes to match
the first tire/wheel position, and
five minutes overall to match all
four tire/wheel positions. If it takes
longer than two minutes, to match
the first tire and wheel, or more than
five minutes to match all four tire
and wheel positions the matching
process stops and you need to
start over.
sensor identification code has
been matched to the driver
side rear tire, and the TPMS
sensor matching process
is no longer active. The TIRE
LEARNING ACTIVE message
on the DIC display screen
goes off.
7. Start with the driver side
front tire.
8. Remove the valve cap from the
valve cap stem. Activate the
TPMS sensor by increasing
or decreasing the tire's air
pressure for five seconds,
or until a horn chirp sounds.
The horn chirp, which may
take up to 30 seconds to
sound, confirms that the sensor
identification code has been
matched to this tire and wheel
position.
The TPMS sensor matching process
is outlined below:
12. Press STOP to turn the
ignition off.
1. Set the parking brake.
13. Set all four tires to the
recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information label.
2. Place the vehicle power mode in
ON/RUN/START. See Ignition
Positions on page 9‑18.
3. Select the vehicle information
menu using the menu button.
14. Put the valve caps back on the
valve stems.
9. Proceed to the passenger
side front tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 5.
4. Select the tire pressure screen
using the up/down thumbwheel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-68
Vehicle Care
.
.
The tire has a bump, bulge,
or split.
See When It Is Time for New
Tires on page 10‑69 and Wheel
Replacement on page 10‑75.
Tire Inspection
We recommend that you
regularly inspect your vehicle's
tires, including the spare tire,
if the vehicle has one, for signs
of wear or damage at least once
a month.
The tire has a puncture, cut,
or other damage that cannot
be repaired well because of
the size or location of the
damage.
Always remove the tires if
any of the following statements
are true:
Tire Rotation
Tires should be rotated
every 12 000 km (7,500 miles).
See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 11‑2.
.
You can see the indicators at
three or more places around
the tire.
The purpose of a regular tire
rotation is to achieve a uniform
wear for all tires on the vehicle.
This will ensure that the vehicle
continues to perform most like it
did when the tires were new.
.
You can see cord or fabric
When rotating the vehicle's tires,
always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
showing through the tire's
rubber.
.
The tread or sidewall is
Do not include the compact
spare tire in the tire rotation.
cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord
or fabric.
Any time you notice unusual
wear, rotate the tires as soon
as possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for
damaged tires or wheels.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-69
After the tires have been
When It Is Time for New
Tires
WARNING (Continued)
rotated, adjust the front and rear
inflation pressures as shown on
the Tire and Loading Information
label. See Tire Pressure on
page 10‑61 and Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9‑12.
after time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When
changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the
wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure
to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if needed, to get all the rust
or dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flat
on page 10‑77.
Various factors, such as
maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading,
and road conditions influence
when you need new tires.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor
System. See Tire Pressure
Monitor Operation on
page 10‑64.
Make certain that all wheel
nuts are properly tightened.
See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on
page 12‑2.
Lightly coat the center of the
wheel hub with wheel bearing
grease after a wheel change or
tire rotation to prevent corrosion
or rust build-up. Do not get
grease on the flat wheel
WARNING
{
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
parts to which it is fastened, can
make wheel nuts become loose
One way to tell when it is time for
new tires is to check the treadwear
indicators, which appear when the
tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)
or less of tread remaining.
mounting surface or on
the wheel nuts or bolts.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-70
Vehicle Care
See Tire Inspection on page 10‑68
and Tire Rotation on page 10‑68 for
additional information.
Vehicle Storage
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and
matched specific tires for
your vehicle. The original
equipment tires installed on
your vehicle, when it was
new, were designed to
Tires age when stored normally
mounted on a parked vehicle.
Park a vehicle that will be stored
for at least a month in a cool, dry,
clean area away from direct sunlight
to slow aging. This area should be
free of grease, gasoline, or other
substances that can deteriorate
rubber.
The rubber in tires ages over time.
This is also true for the spare tire,
if the vehicle has one, even if it is
not being used. Multiple conditions
affect how fast this aging takes
place, including temperatures,
loading conditions, and inflation
pressure maintenance. Tires will
typically need to be replaced due to
wear before they may need to be
replaced due to age. Consult the tire
manufacturer for more information
on when tires should be replaced.
meet General Motors
Tire Performance Criteria
Specification (TPC Spec)
system rating. If you need
replacement tires, GM strongly
recommends that you get tires
with the same TPC Spec rating.
This way, your vehicle will
continue to have tires that are
designed to give the same
performance and vehicle safety,
during normal use, as the
original tires.
Parking for an extended period
can cause flat spots on the tires
that may result in vibrations while
driving. When storing a vehicle for
at least a month, remove the tires
or raise the vehicle to reduce the
weight from the tires.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-71
GM's exclusive TPC Spec
performing most like it did
when the tires were new.
WARNING
{
system considers over a dozen
critical specifications that impact
the overall performance of
your vehicle, including brake
system performance, ride
and handling, traction control,
and tire pressure monitoring
performance. GM's TPC Spec
number is molded onto the
tire's sidewall near the tire size.
If the tires have an all‐season
tread design, the TPC Spec
number will be followed by an
MS for mud and snow. See Tire
Sidewall Labeling on page 10‑55
for additional information.
Replacing less than a full set
of tires can affect the braking
and handling performance of
your vehicle. See Tire Inspection
on page 10‑68 and Tire Rotation
on page 10‑68 for information
on proper tire rotation.
Mixing tires could cause you
to lose control while driving.
If you mix tires of different
sizes, brands, or types
(radial and bias-belted tires),
the vehicle may not handle
properly, and you could have
a crash. Using tires of different
sizes, brands, or types may
also cause damage to your
vehicle. Be sure to use the
correct size, brand, and type
of tires on all wheels. It is
all right to drive with your
compact spare temporarily, as
it was developed for use on
your vehicle. See Compact
Spare Tire on page 10‑93.
WARNING
{
Tires could explode during
improper service. You or others
could be injured or killed if you
attempt to mount or dismount
a tire. Only your dealer or an
authorized tire service center
should mount and dismount
the tires.
GM recommends replacing tires
in sets of four. This is because
uniform tread depth on all tires
will help keep your vehicle
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-72
Vehicle Care
WARNING
Vehicles that have a tire
pressure monitoring system
could give an inaccurate
Different Size Tires and
Wheels
{
If you use bias-ply tires on the
vehicle, the wheel rim flanges
could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire
and/or wheel could fail
suddenly, causing a crash.
Use only radial-ply tires with
the wheels on the vehicle.
If you add wheels or tires that are
a different size than your original
equipment wheels and tires, this
could affect the way your vehicle
performs, including its braking,
ride and handling characteristics,
stability, and resistance to rollover.
Additionally, if your vehicle has
electronic systems such as antilock
brakes, rollover airbags, traction
control, and electronic stability
control, the performance of these
systems can be affected.
low‐pressure warning if
non‐TPC Spec rated tires
are installed on your vehicle.
Non‐TPC Spec rated tires may
give a low‐pressure warning
that is higher or lower than the
proper warning level you would
get with TPC Spec rated tires.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
System on page 10‑63.
If you must replace your
vehicle's tires with those that do
not have a TPC Spec number,
make sure they are the same
size, load range, speed rating,
and construction type (radial
and bias‐belted tires) as your
vehicle's original tires.
Your vehicle's original
equipment tires are listed on
the Tire and Loading Information
label. See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9‑12 for more
information about the Tire and
Loading Information label and
its location on your vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-73
Grading (UTQG) system
does not apply to deep
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading
Quality grades can be found
where applicable on the tire
sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
For example:
WARNING
{
tread, winter-type snow tires,
space-saver, or temporary use
spare tires, tires with nominal
rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm), or to some
If you add different sized wheels,
your vehicle may not provide
an acceptable level of
performance and safety if tires
not recommended for those
wheels are selected. You may
increase the chance that you will
crash and suffer serious injury.
Only use GM specific wheel and
tire systems developed for your
vehicle, and have them properly
installed by a GM certified
technician.
limited-production tires.
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
While the tires available on
General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary
with respect to these grades,
they must also conform to
federal safety requirements and
additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
The following information relates
to the system developed by the
United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA), which grades tires
by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance.
This applies only to vehicles
sold in the United States.
The grades are molded on the
sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality
See Buying New Tires on
page 10‑70 and Accessories
and Modifications on page 10‑3
for additional information.
All Passenger Car Tires Must
Conform to Federal Safety
Requirements In Addition
To These Grades.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-74
Vehicle Care
Treadwear
Traction – AA, A, B, C
Temperature – A, B, C
The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based
on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified
government test course.
For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and a
half (1½) times as well on
the government course as a
tire graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in
driving habits, service practices
and differences in road
The traction grades, from
highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. Those grades represent
the tire's ability to stop on
wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions
on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based
on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
The temperature grades
are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire's resistance
to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all
passenger car tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B
and A represent higher levels
of performance on the
characteristics and climate.
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-75
Warning: The temperature grade
for this tire is established for a
tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation,
or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and
possible tire failure.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent,
cracked, or badly rusted or
corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and
wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it,
except some aluminum wheels,
which can sometimes be repaired.
See your dealer if any of these
conditions exist.
WARNING
{
Using the wrong replacement
wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel
nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the
braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control.
You could have a collision in
which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct
wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel
nuts for replacement.
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance
Your dealer will know the kind of
wheel you need.
The tires and wheels on the vehicle
were aligned and balanced carefully
at the factory to give the longest tire
life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and
tire balancing will not be necessary
on a regular basis. However, if there
is unusual tire wear or the vehicle
pulls to one side or the other, the
alignment should be checked. If the
vehicle vibrates when driving on a
smooth road, the tires and wheels
might need to be rebalanced. See
your dealer for proper diagnosis.
Each new wheel should have
the same load-carrying capacity,
diameter, width, offset, and be
mounted the same way as the
one it replaces.
Notice: The wrong wheel can
also cause problems with
bearing life, brake cooling,
speedometer or odometer
calibration, headlamp aim,
bumper height, vehicle ground
clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and
chassis.
If you need to replace any of the
wheels, wheel bolts, wheel nuts,
or Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS) sensors, replace them only
with new GM original equipment
parts. This way, you will be sure to
have the right wheel, wheel bolts,
wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors for
the vehicle.
See If a Tire Goes Flat on
page 10‑77 for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-76
Vehicle Care
Used Replacement Wheels
Tire Chains
WARNING (Continued)
WARNING
{
WARNING
{
Use another type of traction
device only if its manufacturer
recommends it for use on the
vehicle and tire size combination
and road conditions. Follow that
manufacturer's instructions.
To help avoid damage to the
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust
or remove the device if it is
contacting the vehicle, and do not
spin the vehicle's wheels. If you
do find traction devices that will
fit, install them on the front tires.
Putting a used wheel on the
vehicle is dangerous. You cannot
know how it has been used or
how far it has been driven.
It could fail suddenly and cause
a crash. If you have to replace a
wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
Do not use tire chains. There is
not enough clearance. Tire chains
used on a vehicle without the
proper amount of clearance can
cause damage to the brakes,
suspension or other vehicle parts.
The area damaged by the tire
chains could cause you to lose
control of the vehicle and you or
others may be injured in a crash.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-77
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle
under control by steering the way
you want the vehicle to go. It may
be very bumpy and noisy, but you
can still steer. Gently brake to a
stop, well off the road, if possible.
If a Tire Goes Flat
WARNING
{
It is unusual for a tire to blowout
while you are driving, especially if
you maintain your vehicle's tires
properly. If air goes out of a tire,
it is much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have
a blowout, here are a few tips about
what to expect and what to do:
Lifting a vehicle and getting
under it to do maintenance or
repairs is dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and
training. If a jack is provided with
the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for
anything else, you or others could
be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
is provided with the vehicle, only
use it for changing a flat tire.
WARNING
{
Driving on a flat tire will cause
permanent damage to the tire.
Re-inflating a tire after it has
been driven on while severely
under-inflated or flat may cause
a blowout and a serious crash.
Never attempt to re-inflate a tire
that has been driven on while
severely under-inflated or flat.
Have your dealer or an authorized
tire service center repair or
replace the flat tire as soon
as possible.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire
creates a drag that pulls the vehicle
toward that side. Take your foot
off the accelerator pedal and grip
the steering wheel firmly. Steer to
maintain lane position, and then
gently brake to a stop, well off the
road, if possible.
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
and wheel damage by driving slowly
to a level place, well off the road,
if possible. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 6‑5.
A rear blowout, particularly on a
curve, acts much like a skid and
may require the same correction
you would use in a skid. In any rear
blowout remove your foot from the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-78
Vehicle Care
WARNING
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),
use the following example as a
guide to assist you in the placement
of wheel blocks (A).
WARNING (Continued)
{
Changing a tire can be
To be certain the vehicle will not
move, put blocks at the front
and rear of the tire farthest away
from the one being changed.
That would be the tire on the
other side, at the opposite end
of the vehicle.
dangerous. The vehicle can
slip off the jack and roll over
or fall on you or other people.
You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level
place to change your tire. To help
prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
This vehicle may come with a
jack and spare tire or a tire sealant
and compressor kit. To use the
jacking equipment to change
a spare tire safely, follow the
instructions below. Then see Tire
Changing on page 10‑86. To use
the tire sealant and compressor kit,
see Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit on page 10‑79.
2. Put an automatic
transmission shift lever in
P (Park), or shift a manual
transmission to 1 (First) or
R (Reverse).
A. Wheel Block
B. Flat Tire
3. Turn off the engine and do
not restart while the vehicle
is raised.
The following information explains
how to repair or change a tire.
4. Do not allow passengers to
remain in the vehicle.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-79
If this vehicle has a tire sealant and
compressor kit, there may not be a
spare tire, tire changing equipment,
and on some vehicles there may not
be a place to store a tire.
Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit
WARNING
{
Over-inflating a tire could cause
the tire to rupture and you
or others could be injured.
Be sure to read and follow the
tire sealant and compressor kit
instructions and inflate the tire
to its recommended pressure.
Do not exceed the recommended
pressure.
WARNING
{
The tire sealant and compressor
can be used to temporarily seal
punctures up to 6 mm (¼ in) in the
tread area of the tire. It can also be
used to inflate an under inflated tire.
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed
area with poor ventilation is
dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness
and even death. Never run the
engine in an enclosed area
that has no fresh air ventilation.
For more information, see Engine
Exhaust on page 9‑24.
If the tire has been separated from
the wheel, has damaged sidewalls,
or has a large puncture, the tire is
too severely damaged for the tire
sealant and compressor kit to be
effective. See Roadside Service
(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑8
or Roadside Service (Mexico) on
page 13‑10.
WARNING
{
Storing the tire sealant and
compressor kit or other
equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store the tire
sealant and compressor kit in
its original location.
Read and follow all of the tire
sealant and compressor kit
instructions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-80
Vehicle Care
The kit includes:
A. Selector Switch
Replacement sealant canisters
are available at your local dealer.
See “Removal and Installation of
the Sealant Canister” following.
(Sealant/Air or Air Only)
B. On/Off Button
C. Pressure Gauge
There is only enough sealant to
seal one tire. After usage, the
sealant canister and sealant/air
hose assembly must be replaced.
See “Removal and Installation of
the Sealant Canister” following.
D. Pressure Deflation Button
E. Tire Sealant Canister
F. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)
G. Air Only Hose (Black)
H. Power Plug
Using the Tire Sealant
and Compressor Kit to
Temporarily Seal and Inflate
a Punctured Tire
Tire Sealant
Read and follow the safe handling
instructions on the label adhered to
the sealant canister.
Follow the directions closely for
correct sealant usage.
Check the tire sealant expiration
date on the sealant canister.
The sealant canister should be
replaced before its expiration date.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-81
When using the tire sealant
and compressor kit during cold
temperatures, warm the kit in a
heated environment for five minutes.
This will help to inflate the tire
faster.
3. Place the kit on the ground.
Make sure the tire valve stem is
positioned close to the ground
so the hose will reach it.
4. Remove the valve stem cap
from the flat tire by turning it
counterclockwise.
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
and wheel damage by driving slowly
to a level place. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard
5. Attach the sealant/air hose (F)
onto the tire valve stem. Turn it
clockwise until it is tight.
Warning Flashers on page 6‑5.
6. Plug the power plug (H) into the
accessory power outlet in the
vehicle. Unplug all items from
other accessory power outlets.
See Power Outlets on page 5‑9.
See If a Tire Goes Flat on
page 10‑77 for other important
safety warnings.
Do not remove any objects that
have penetrated the tire.
If the vehicle has an accessory
power outlet, do not use the
cigarette lighter.
1. Remove the tire sealant and
compressor kit from its storage
location. See Storing the Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit on
page 10‑86.
If the vehicle only has a cigarette
lighter, use the cigarette lighter.
Do not pinch the power plug
cord in the door or window.
2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F)
and the power plug (H).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-82
Vehicle Care
7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle
must be running while using the
air compressor.
on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Tire
Pressure on page 10‑61.
11. Press the on/off button (B) to
turn the tire sealant and
compressor kit off.
8. Turn the selector switch (A)
counterclockwise to the
Sealant + Air position.
The pressure gauge (C) may
read higher than the actual tire
pressure while the compressor
is on. Turn the compressor off
to get an accurate pressure
reading. The compressor may
be turned on/off until the
The tire is not sealed and
will continue to leak air until
the vehicle is driven and the
sealant is distributed in the tire,
therefore, Steps 12 through 18
must be done immediately after
Step 11.
9. Press the on/off (B) button to
turn the tire sealant and
compressor kit on.
The compressor will inject
sealant and air into the tire.
correct pressure is reached.
Be careful while handling the
tire sealant and compressor
kit as it could be warm after
usage.
Notice: If the recommended
pressure cannot be reached after
approximately 25 minutes, the
vehicle should not be driven
farther. The tire is too severely
damaged and the tire sealant and
compressor kit cannot inflate the
tire. Remove the power plug from
the accessory power outlet and
unscrew the inflating hose from
the tire valve. See Roadside
Service (U.S. and Canada) on
page 13‑8 or Roadside Service
(Mexico) on page 13‑10.
The pressure gauge (C) will
initially show a high pressure
while the compressor pushes the
sealant into the tire. Once the
sealant is completely dispersed
into the tire, the pressure will
quickly drop and start to rise
again as the tire inflates with
air only.
12. Unplug the power plug (H) from
the accessory power outlet in
the vehicle.
13. Turn the sealant/air hose (F)
counterclockwise to remove it
from the tire valve stem.
10. Inflate the tire to the
recommended inflation
14. Replace the tire valve
stem cap.
pressure using the pressure
gauge (C). The recommended
inflation pressure can be found
15. Replace the sealant/air
hose (F), and the power
plug (H) back in their original
location.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-83
19. Stop at a safe location and
check the tire pressure.
Refer to Steps 1 through 11
under “Using the Tire Sealant
and Compressor Kit without
Sealant to Inflate a Tire
20. Wipe off any sealant from the
wheel, tire, and vehicle.
21. Dispose of the used sealant
canister (E) and sealant/air
hose (F) assembly at a local
dealer or in accordance with
local state codes and practices.
(Not Punctured).”
16. If the flat tire was able to
inflate to the recommended
inflation pressure, remove the
maximum speed label from the
sealant canister (E) and place
it in a highly visible location.
Do not exceed the speed on
this label until the damaged
tire is repaired or replaced.
If the tire pressure has fallen
more than 68 kPa (10 psi)
below the recommended
inflation pressure, stop driving
the vehicle. The tire is too
severely damaged and the
tire sealant cannot seal the
tire. See Roadside Service
(U.S. and Canada) on
22. Replace it with a new canister
available from your dealer.
23. After temporarily sealing the
tire using the tire sealant
and compressor kit, take the
vehicle to an authorized dealer
within 161 km (100 miles) of
driving to have the tire repaired
or replaced.
17. Return the equipment to its
original storage location in the
vehicle.
page 13‑8 or Roadside Service
(Mexico) on page 13‑10.
Using the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit without
Sealant to Inflate a Tire
(Not Punctured)
If the tire pressure has not
dropped more than 68 kPa
(10 psi) from the recommended
inflation pressure, inflate the
tire to the recommended
inflation pressure.
18. Immediately drive the vehicle
8 km (5 miles) to distribute the
sealant in the tire.
To use the air compressor to inflate
a tire with air only and not sealant:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-84
Vehicle Care
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
and wheel damage by driving slowly
to a level place. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard
6. Plug the power plug (H) into the
accessory power outlet in the
vehicle. Unplug all items from
other accessory power outlets.
See Power Outlets on page 5‑9.
Warning Flashers on page 6‑5.
See If a Tire Goes Flat on
page 10‑77 for other important
safety warnings.
If the vehicle has an accessory
power outlet, do not use the
cigarette lighter.
1. Remove the tire sealant and
compressor kit from its storage
location. See Storing the Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit on
page 10‑86.
If the vehicle only has a cigarette
lighter, use the cigarette lighter.
Do not pinch the power plug
cord in the door or window.
7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle
must be running while using the
air compressor.
2. Unwrap the air only hose (G)
and the power plug (H).
3. Place the kit on the ground.
8. Turn the selector switch (A)
clockwise to the Air Only
position.
Make sure the tire valve stem is
positioned close to the ground
so the hose will reach it.
9. Press the on/off (B) button to
turn the compressor on.
4. Remove the tire valve stem cap
from the flat tire by turning it
counterclockwise.
The compressor will inflate the
tire with air only.
5. Attach the air only hose (G) onto
the tire valve stem by turning it
clockwise until it is tight.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-85
10. Inflate the tire to the
recommended inflation
11. Press the on/off button (B)
to turn the tire sealant and
compressor kit off.
pressure using the pressure
gauge (C). The recommended
inflation pressure can be
found on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Tire
Pressure on page 10‑61.
Be careful while handling the
tire sealant and compressor
kit as it could be warm after
usage.
12. Unplug the power plug (H) from
the accessory power outlet in
the vehicle.
The pressure gauge (C) may
read higher than the actual tire
pressure while the compressor
is on. Turn the compressor off
to get an accurate reading.
The compressor may be turned
on/off until the correct pressure
is reached.
13. Disconnect the air only
hose (G) from the tire
The tire sealant and compressor kit
has an accessory adapter located in
a compartment on the bottom of its
housing that may be used to inflate
air mattresses, balls, etc.
valve stem, by turning it
counterclockwise, and replace
the tire valve stem cap.
14. Replace the air only hose (G)
and the power plug (H) and
cord back in its original
location.
If you inflate the tire higher
than the recommended
pressure you can adjust
the excess pressure by
pressing the pressure deflation
button (D) until the proper
pressure reading is reached.
This option is only functional
when using the air only
hose (G).
15. Place the equipment in the
original storage location in the
vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-86
Vehicle Care
Removal and Installation of the
Sealant Canister
Storing the Tire Sealant
and Compressor Kit
Tire Changing
Removing the Spare Tire and
Tools
To remove the sealant canister:
1. Unwrap the sealant hose.
To access the spare tire and tools:
2. Press the canister release
button.
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate
(Manual) on page 2‑14 or
3. Pull up and remove the canister.
Liftgate (Power) on page 2‑15.
4. Replace with a new canister
which is available from your
dealer.
5. Push the new canister into
place.
This vehicle may have a tire sealant
and compressor kit in place of a
jack or spare tire. It is located
in a foam container in the rear
compartment storage area. If the
vehicle has a cargo cover, see
Cargo Management System on
page 4‑5 for instructions on how
to access the tire sealant and
compressor kit.
2. Press on the bottom of the
handle assembly to unlatch it
and lift up on the handle.
The prop rod locks into place
when open.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-87
3. Remove the spare tire cover.
4. Remove the nut retaining the
spare tire.
6. Remove the wing nut (D).
7. Remove the extension (A),
jack (B) and wheel wrench (C)
and place them near the tire
being changed.
5. Remove the spare tire and place
it next to the tire being changed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-88
Vehicle Care
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
Take off the wheel cover or center
cap, if the vehicle has one, to reach
the wheel bolts.
1. Do a safety check before
proceeding. See If a Tire Goes
Flat on page 10‑77 for more
information.
2. Turn the wheel wrench
counterclockwise to loosen and
remove the wheel nut caps.
4. Turn the wheel wrench
counterclockwise to loosen all
the wheel nuts, but do not
remove them yet.
6. Position the jack lift head at the
jack location nearest the flat tire.
Do not try to remove plastic caps
from the cover or center cap.
The jacking location is indicated
by a V-shaped notch in the
plastic molding. The jack must
not be used in any other
position.
3. Pull the cover or center cap
away from the wheel. Store the
wheel cover in the cargo area
until you have the flat tire
repaired or replaced.
5. Place the jack near the flat tire.
Notice: Make sure that the jack
lift head is in the correct position
or you may damage your vehicle.
The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-89
WARNING
WARNING
{
{
Getting under a vehicle when it is
jacked up is dangerous. If the
vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed.
Never get under a vehicle when it
is supported only by a jack.
Lifting a vehicle and getting
under it to do maintenance or
repairs is dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and
training. If a jack is provided with
the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for
anything else, you or others could
be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
is provided with the vehicle, only
use it for changing a flat tire.
WARNING
{
7. Insert the hooked end of the
extension handle through the
jack and the flat end through the
wheel wrench.
Raising your vehicle with the
jack improperly positioned can
damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help
avoid personal injury and vehicle
damage, be sure to fit the jack
lift head into the proper location
before raising the vehicle.
8. Turn the extension with the
wheel wrench clockwise to raise
the jack lift head until the jack
just fits under the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-90
Vehicle Care
WARNING (Continued)
an emergency, use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure
to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if needed, to get all the rust
or dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flat
on page 10‑77.
9. Raise the vehicle by turning the
wheel wrench clockwise until the
slots in the jack head fit into the
metal flange located behind the
triangle on the plastic moulding.
Remove all of the wheel nuts.
11. Remove the flat tire.
WARNING
{
Notice: Using a jack to raise the
vehicle without positioning it
correctly could damage your
vehicle. When raising your
vehicle on a jack, be sure to
position it correctly under the
frame and avoid contact with
the plastic molding.
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
parts to which it is fastened, can
make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When
changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
12. Remove any rust or dirt from
the wheel bolts, mounting
surfaces, and spare wheel.
10. Put the compact spare tire
near you.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-91
13. Place the compact spare tire
on the wheel-mounting surface.
WARNING (Continued)
to the proper torque specification
after replacing. Follow the torque
specification supplied by the
aftermarket manufacturer when
using accessory locking wheel
nuts. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 12‑2 for
original equipment wheel nut
torque specifications.
WARNING
{
Never use oil or grease on bolts
or nuts because the nuts might
come loose. The vehicle's wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
14. Reinstall the wheel nuts.
Tighten each nut by hand until
the wheel is held against
the hub.
16. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly
in a crisscross sequence, as
shown.
Notice: Improperly tightened
wheel nuts can lead to brake
pulsation and rotor damage.
To avoid expensive brake repairs,
evenly tighten the wheel nuts
in the proper sequence and to
the proper torque specification.
See Capacities and Specifications
on page 12‑2 for the wheel nut
torque specification.
15. Lower the vehicle by
turning the jack handle
counterclockwise.
17. Lower the jack all the way and
remove the jack from under the
vehicle.
WARNING
18. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly
with the wheel wrench.
{
Wheel nuts that are improperly or
incorrectly tightened can cause
the wheels to become loose or
come off. The wheel nuts should
be tightened with a torque wrench
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-92
Vehicle Care
When reinstalling the wheel cover
or center cap on the full-size tire,
tighten all five plastic caps hand
snug with the aid of the wheel
wrench and tighten them with
the wheel wrench an additional
one‐quarter of a turn.
To store the flat or spare tire and
tools:
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate
(Manual) on page 2‑14 or
Liftgate (Power) on page 2‑15
for more information.
2. Put back all tools as they
were stored in the rear storage
compartment and put the
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit
on your vehicle's compact spare.
If you try to put a wheel cover on
the compact spare, the cover or
the spare could be damaged.
compartment cover back on.
For more information, see
“Storing the Compact Spare Tire
and Tools” next in this section.
5. Attach the strap to the cargo
tie-down in the rear of the
vehicle.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
3. Install the cargo cover.
For more information, see
Cargo Management System on
page 4‑5.
WARNING
{
Storing a jack, a tire, or other
equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store all these in
the proper place.
4. Place the tire, lying flat, in the
rear storage compartment.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-93
full-size tire repaired or replaced at
your convenience. Of course, it is
best to replace the spare with a
full-size tire as soon as possible.
The spare tire will last longer and
be in good shape in case it is
needed again.
Compact Spare Tire
WARNING
{
Driving with more than one
compact spare tire at a time
could result in loss of braking
and handling. This could lead
to a crash and you or others
could be injured. Use only one
compact spare tire at a time.
Notice: When the compact
spare is installed, do not take
the vehicle through an automatic
car wash with guide rails. The
compact spare can get caught on
the rails which can damage the
tire, wheel and other parts of the
vehicle.
6. Route the strap through the
wheel, as shown.
If this vehicle has a compact
spare tire, it was fully inflated when
the vehicle was new; however, it
can lose air after a time. Check the
inflation pressure regularly. It should
be 420 kPa (60 psi).
7. Attach the strap to the other
cargo tie-down in the rear of the
vehicle.
Do not use the compact spare on
other vehicles.
Do not mix the compact spare tire
or wheel with other wheels or tires.
They will not fit. Keep the spare tire
and its wheel together.
8. Tighten the strap.
After installing the compact
The compact spare is for temporary
use only. Replace the compact
spare tire with a full-size tire as
soon as you can.
spare on the vehicle, stop as
soon as possible and make sure
the spare tire is correctly inflated.
The compact spare is made to
perform well at speeds up to
105 km/h (65 mph) for distances up
to 5 000 km (3,000 miles), so you
can finish your trip and have the
Notice: Tire chains will not fit the
compact spare. Using them can
damage the vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Do not
use tire chains on the compact
spare.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-94
Vehicle Care
Notice: Ignoring these steps
could result in costly damage to
the vehicle that would not be
covered by the warranty.
your vehicle, and the bad
grounding could damage the
electrical systems.
Jump Starting
For more information about the
vehicle battery, see Battery on
page 10‑28.
To avoid the possibility of the
vehicles rolling, set the parking
brake firmly on both vehicles
involved in the jump start
procedure. Put the transmission
in P (Park) before setting the
parking brake.
Trying to start the vehicle by
pushing or pulling it will not
work, and it could damage the
vehicle.
If the vehicle battery has run down,
you may want to use another
vehicle and some jumper cables to
start your vehicle. Be sure to use
the following steps to do it safely.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must
have a 12-volt battery with a
negative ground system.
Notice: If you leave the radio or
other accessories on during the
jump starting procedure, they
could be damaged. The repairs
would not be covered by the
warranty. Always turn off the
radio and other accessories
when jump starting the vehicle.
WARNING
{
Notice: Only use vehicles with
12-volt systems with negative
grounds to jump start your
vehicle. If the other vehicle's
system is not a 12-volt system
with a negative ground, both
vehicles can be damaged.
Batteries can hurt you. They can
be dangerous because:
.
They contain acid that can
burn you.
.
They contain gas that can
3. Turn off the ignition on both
vehicles. Unplug unnecessary
accessories plugged into the
cigarette lighter or the accessory
power outlet. Turn off the radio
and all lamps that are not
needed. This will avoid sparks,
helping save both batteries and
the radio.
explode or ignite.
2. Get the vehicles close enough
so the jumper cables can reach,
but be sure the vehicles are not
touching each other. If they
.
They contain enough
electricity to burn you.
If you do not follow these steps
exactly, some or all of these
things can hurt you.
are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want.
You would not be able to start
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-95
4. Open the hood on the
other vehicle and locate the
positive (+) and negative (−)
terminal locations on that
vehicle.
positive (+) terminal is located
in the engine compartment on
the driver side of the vehicle,
above the rear of the battery.
The remote negative (−) terminal
is a stud located in the engine
compartment on the driver side
of the vehicle, on the front tie
bar. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 10‑6 for more
information on location.
WARNING
{
Using an open flame near a
battery can cause battery gas to
explode. People have been hurt
doing this, and some have been
blinded. Use a flashlight if you
need more light.
Open the hood on your vehicle
and find the remote positive (+)
and remote negative (−) jump
starting terminals.
Be sure the battery has enough
water. You do not need to add
water to the battery installed in
your new vehicle. But if a battery
has filler caps, be sure the right
amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that
first. If you do not, explosive gas
could be present.
To uncover the remote
positive (+) terminal, lift open
the access panel on the battery
cover indicated by the (+) sign.
WARNING
{
An electric fan can start up even
when the engine is not running
and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
Battery fluid contains acid that
can burn you. Do not get it on
you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush
the place with water and get
medical help immediately.
Your vehicle is equipped with a
remote positive (+) terminal (A)
and a remote negative (−)
terminal (B). The remote
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-96
Vehicle Care
WARNING
Do not connect the negative (−)
cable to the negative (−) terminal
on the dead battery because this
can cause sparks.
Do not let the other end touch
anything until the next step.
The other end of the negative (−)
cable does not go to the dead
battery. It goes to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or
to a remote negative (−) terminal
on the vehicle with the dead
battery.
{
Fans or other moving engine
parts can injure you badly. Keep
your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
6. Connect the red positive (+)
cable to the positive (+) terminal
on the vehicle with the
dead battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the
vehicle has one.
5. Check that the jumper cables
do not have loose or missing
insulation. If they do, you could
get a shock. The vehicles could
also be damaged.
9. Connect the other end of the
negative (−) cable away from
the dead battery, but not
7. Do not let the other end
touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the
good battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the
vehicle has one.
near engine parts that move.
The electrical connection is just
as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the
battery is much less.
Before you connect the cables,
here are some basic things you
should know. Positive (+) will go
to positive (+) or to a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
has one. Negative (−) will go to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine
part or to a remote negative (−)
terminal if the vehicle has one.
8. Now connect the black
negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the
good battery. Use a remote
negative (−) terminal if the
vehicle has one.
Your vehicle has a remote (−)
terminal for this purpose.
Do not connect positive (+) to
negative (−) or you will get a
short that would damage the
battery and maybe other parts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-97
10. Now start the vehicle with
the good battery and run the
engine for a while.
To disconnect the jumper cables
from both vehicles, do the following:
1. Disconnect the black
negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead
battery.
11. Try to start the vehicle that
had the dead battery. If it will
not start after a few tries, it
probably needs service.
2. Disconnect the black
negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
Notice: If the jumper cables are
connected or removed in the
wrong order, electrical shorting
may occur and damage the
vehicle. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always connect and remove the
jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the
cables do not touch each other
or other metal.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+)
cable from the vehicle with the
good battery.
Jumper Cable Removal
4. Disconnect the red positive (+)
cable from the other vehicle.
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine
Part or Remote Negative (−)
Terminal
5. Close the access panel on the
battery cover, if applicable.
B. Good Battery or Remote
Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote
Positive (+) Terminal
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-98
Vehicle Care
.
.
What is the distance that will be
travelled? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how
long they can tow.
Recreational Vehicle
Towing
Towing
Towing the Vehicle
Recreational vehicle towing means
towing the vehicle behind another
vehicle – such as behind a motor
home. The two most common types
of recreational vehicle towing are
known as dinghy towing and dolly
towing. Dinghy towing is towing the
vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground. Dolly towing is towing the
vehicle with two wheels on the
ground and two wheels up on a
device known as a dolly.
Notice: To avoid damage,
the disabled vehicle should
be towed with all four wheels
off the ground. Care must be
taken with vehicles that have
low ground clearance and/or
special equipment. Always
flatbed on a car carrier.
Is the proper towing equipment
going to be used? See your
dealer or trailering professional
for additional advice and
equipment recommendations.
.
Is the vehicle ready to be
towed? Just as preparing the
vehicle for a long trip, make
sure the vehicle is prepared
to be towed.
Consult your dealer or a
professional towing service if the
disabled vehicle must be towed.
See Roadside Service (U.S. and
Canada) on page 13‑8 or Roadside
Service (Mexico) on page 13‑10.
Dinghy Towing
Here are some important things to
consider before recreational vehicle
towing:
Front-wheel‐drive and
all-wheel-drive vehicles may
be dinghy towed from the front.
These vehicles can also be towed
by placing them on a platform
trailer with all four wheels off of the
ground. For other towing options,
see “Dolly Towing” following in this
section.
.
What is the towing capacity
To tow the vehicle behind another
vehicle for recreational purposes,
such as behind a motor home, see
“Recreational Vehicle Towing” in this
section.
of the towing vehicle?
Be sure to read the tow
vehicle manufacturer's
recommendations.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-99
Vehicles with an 2.8 L V 6 engine
can be dinghy towed only for
service and are restricted to a
maximum distance of 100 km
(60 miles) and not to exceed
80 km/h (50 mph).
3. With the vehicle OFF, press
the brake pedal and press the
START/STOP switch to start the
engine (the green LED on the
switch will illuminate).
4. Put the vehicle in N (Neutral).
Vehicles with the 3.0 L V 6 engine
can be dinghy towed without
distance restrictions.
5. Press the START/STOP switch
again. The engine will stop, the
DIC will display Shift to Park and
the amber LED on the switch
illuminates. See Transmission
Messages on page 5‑39.
Notice: If 105 km/h (65 mph)
is exceeded while towing the
vehicle, it could be damaged.
Never exceed 105 km/h (65 mph)
while towing the vehicle.
To tow the vehicle from the front
with all four wheels on the ground:
1. Position the vehicle that will
be towed and secure it to the
towing vehicle.
For vehicles being dinghy towed,
the vehicle should be run at the
beginning of each day and at each
RV fuel stop for about five minutes.
This will ensure proper lubrication
of transmission components.
2. Open the drivers door.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-100
Vehicle Care
6. Remove the following fuses:
BCM 1, BCM 2 and BCM 3.
Notice: Too much or too
Dolly Towing
(Front-Wheel‐Drive Vehicles)
little fluid can damage the
transmission. Be sure that
the transmission fluid is at the
proper level before towing with
all four wheels on the ground.
The START/STOP switch LED's
will be off. See Instrument Panel
Fuse Block on page 10‑49.
7. Close the drivers door.
Notice: Do not tow a vehicle
with the front drive wheels on
the ground if one of the front
tires is a compact spare tire.
Towing with two different tire
sizes on the front of the vehicle
can cause severe damage to the
transmission.
Notice: If the vehicle is
towed without performing
each of the steps listed under
“Dinghy Towing,” the automatic
transmission could be damaged.
Be sure to follow all steps of the
dinghy towing procedure prior to
and after towing the vehicle.
Dolly Towing
(All-Wheel‐Drive Vehicles)
Once the destination has been
reached:
To tow the vehicle from the front
with the rear wheels on the ground,
do the following:
All-wheel‐drive vehicles should not
be towed with two wheels on the
ground. To properly tow these
vehicles, they should be placed on
a platform trailer with all four wheels
off of the ground or dinghy towed
from the front. See Dinghy Towing
earlier in this section.
1. Shift the vehicle to P (Park).
2. Reinstall the BCM fuses.
See Instrument Panel Fuse
Block on page 10‑49.
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
2. Move the shift lever to P (Park).
See Shifting Into Park on
page 9‑22.
3. Disconnect the vehicle from the
tow vehicle.
3. Set the parking brake.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-101
4. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.
Appearance Care
5. Follow the dolly manufacturer's
instructions for preparing the
vehicle and dolly for towing.
Exterior Care
Cleaning Exterior
Lamps/Lenses
6. Release the parking brake.
Towing the Vehicle From
the Rear
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a
soft cloth, and a car washing soap
to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under “Washing
the Vehicle” later in this section.
Notice: Towing the vehicle from
the rear could damage it. Also,
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Never have
the vehicle towed from the rear.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing
of the vehicle by hand may be
necessary to remove residue from
the paint finish. Approved cleaning
products can be obtained from your
dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-102
Vehicle Care
If the vehicle has a basecoat/
clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoat
gives more depth and gloss to the
colored basecoat. Always use
waxes and polishes that are
Foreign materials such as calcium
chloride and other salts, ice melting
agents, road oil and tar, tree sap,
bird droppings, chemicals from
industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage the vehicle's finish if
they remain on painted surfaces.
Wash the vehicle as soon as
possible. If necessary, use
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal
Parts
Bright metal parts should be
cleaned regularly to keep their
luster. Wash with water or use
chrome polish on chrome or
stainless steel trim, if necessary.
non-abrasive and made for a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.
Notice: Machine compounding
or aggressive polishing on a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
may damage it. Use only
non-abrasive waxes and polishes
that are made for a basecoat/
clearcoat paint finish on the
vehicle.
Use special care with aluminum
trim. To avoid damaging protective
trim, never use auto or chrome
polish, steam, or caustic soap
to clean aluminum. A coating of
wax, rubbed to high polish, is
recommended for all bright metal
parts.
non-abrasive cleaners that are
marked safe for painted surfaces
to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are
subject to aging, weather, and
chemical fallout that can take their
toll over a period of years. To keep
the paint finish looking new, keep
the vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-103
or damage may occur and it
would not be covered by the
warranty.
High pressure car washes could
cause water to enter the vehicle.
Avoid using high pressure washes
closer than 30 cm (12 in) to the
surface of the vehicle. Use of power
washers exceeding 8,274 kPa
(1,200 psi) can result in damage
or removal of paint and decals.
Washing the Vehicle
To preserve the vehicle's finish,
keep it clean by washing it often.
Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based or that contain
acid or abrasives, as they can
damage the paint, metal, or plastic
on the vehicle. Approved cleaning
products can be obtained from
your dealer. Follow all manufacturer
directions regarding correct
product usage, necessary safety
precautions, and appropriate
disposal of any vehicle care
product.
Do not wash the vehicle in
direct sunlight and use a car
washing soap.
Notice: Do not use cleaning
agents that are petroleum based
or that contain acid or abrasives,
as they can damage the paint,
metal, or plastic on the vehicle.
Approved cleaning products
can be obtained from your
dealer. Follow all manufacturer
directions regarding correct
product usage, necessary safety
precautions, and appropriate
disposal of any vehicle care
product. Certain cleaners contain
chemicals that can damage the
emblems or nameplates on the
vehicle. Check the cleaning
Notice: Conveyor systems on
some automatic car washes could
damage the vehicle. There may
not be enough clearance for the
undercarriage. Check with the car
wash manager before using the
automatic car wash.
Rinse the vehicle well, before
washing and after, to remove all
cleaning agents completely. If they
are allowed to dry on the surface,
they could stain.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips
will make them last longer, seal
better, and not stick or squeak.
Apply silicone grease with a clean
cloth. During very cold, damp
weather frequent application may be
required. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 11‑7.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean
chamois or an all-cotton towel to
avoid surface scratches and water
spotting.
product label. If it states that it
should not be used on plastic
parts, do not use it on the vehicle
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-104
Vehicle Care
chrome-plated wheels, because
the surface could be damaged.
The repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Use only
approved cleaners on aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels.
Wheels and Trim — Aluminum
or Chrome
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield
with glass cleaner.
The vehicle may have either
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.
Clean the rubber blades using a
lint‐free cloth or paper towel soaked
with windshield washer fluid or a
mild detergent. Wash the windshield
thoroughly when cleaning the
blades. Bugs, road grime, sap,
and a buildup of vehicle wash/wax
treatments may cause wiper
Keep the wheels clean using a soft,
clean cloth with mild soap and
water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft,
clean towel. A wax may then be
applied.
Notice: Never drive a vehicle that
has aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels through an automatic car
wash that uses silicone carbide
tire cleaning brushes, as this
could cause damage. The repairs
would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Notice: Chrome wheels and
other chrome trim may be
streaking. Replace the wiper blades
if they are worn or damaged.
damaged if the vehicle is not
washed after driving on roads
that have been sprayed with
magnesium, calcium or sodium
chloride. These chlorides are
used on roads for conditions
such as ice and dust. Always
wash the vehicles chrome with
soap and water after exposure.
Wipers can be damaged by:
Notice: Driving the vehicle
.
Extreme dusty conditions
through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, could damage
the aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Never drive a vehicle that has
aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels through an automatic
car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
.
Sand and salt
.
Heat and sun
.
Snow and ice, without proper
removal
Notice: Do no use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes,
cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-105
At least every spring, flush these
materials from the underbody
with plain water. Clean any areas
where mud and debris can collect.
Dirt packed in close areas of the
frame should be loosened before
being flushed. Your dealer or an
underbody car washing system
can do this.
Tires
Finish Damage
Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to
clean the tires.
Any stone chips, fractures, or deep
scratches in the finish should be
repaired right away. Bare metal will
corrode quickly and may develop
into major repair expense.
Notice: Using petroleum-based
tire dressing products on the
vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying
a tire dressing, always wipe off
any overspray from all painted
surfaces on the vehicle.
Minor chips and scratches can be
repaired with touch-up materials
available from your dealer. Larger
areas of finish damage can be
corrected in your dealer's body
and paint shop.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric
conditions can create a chemical
fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall
upon and attack painted surfaces on
the vehicle. This damage can take
two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped
discolorations, and small, irregular
dark spots etched into the paint
surface.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and
requires sheet metal repair or
replacement, make sure the body
repair shop applies anti-corrosion
material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion
protection.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow
removal and dust control can collect
on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can
develop on the underbody parts
such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though
they have corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement
parts will provide the corrosion
protection while maintaining the
vehicle warranty.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-106
Vehicle Care
.
.
Never use a stiff brush. It can
cause damage to the vehicle's
interior surfaces.
to the cleaning cloth to prevent
over-spray. Remove any accidental
over-spray from other surfaces
immediately.
Interior Care
The vehicle's interior will continue
to look its best if it is cleaned often.
Dust and dirt can accumulate on
the upholstery and cause damage
to the carpet, fabric, leather, and
plastic surfaces. Stains should be
removed quickly as extreme heat
could cause them to set rapidly.
Never apply heavy pressure or
rub aggressively with a cleaning
cloth. Use of heavy pressure can
damage the interior and does
not improve the effectiveness of
soil removal.
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners
when cleaning glass surfaces on
the vehicle, could scratch the
glass and/or cause damage to
the rear window defogger. When
cleaning the glass on the vehicle,
use only a soft cloth and glass
cleaner.
.
Use only mild, neutral-pH
soaps. Avoid laundry detergents
or dishwashing soaps with
degreasers. Using too much
soap will leave a residue that
leaves streaks and attracts
dirt. For liquid cleaners, about
20 drops per 3.78 L (1 gal) of
water is a good guide.
Lighter colored interiors may
require more frequent cleaning.
Newspapers and garments that can
transfer color to home furnishings
can also transfer color to the
vehicle's interior.
Cleaners can contain solvents that
can become concentrated in the
vehicle's interior. Before using
cleaners, read and adhere to all
safety instructions on the label.
While cleaning the vehicle's interior,
maintain adequate ventilation by
opening the vehicle's doors and
windows.
Remove dust from small buttons
and knobs with a small brush with
soft bristles.
.
.
Do not heavily saturate the
upholstery while cleaning.
Your dealer has products for
cleaning the vehicle's interior.
When cleaning the vehicle's interior,
only use cleaners specifically
designed for the surfaces that are
being cleaned. Permanent damage
can result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not
intended. Apply the cleaner directly
Cleaners that contain solvents
can damage the vehicle's
interior.
Do not clean the interior using the
following cleaners or techniques:
.
Never use a knife or any other
sharp object to remove a soil
from any interior surface.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-107
3. Start on the outside edge of the
soil and gently rub toward the
center. Continue cleaning, using
a clean area of the cloth each
time it becomes soiled.
Fabric/Carpet
Leather
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft
brush attachment to remove dust
and loose dirt. A canister vacuum
with rotating brushes in the nozzle
may only be used on floor carpet
and carpeted floor mats. For soils,
always try to remove them first with
plain water or club soda. Before
cleaning, gently remove as much of
the soil as possible using one of the
following techniques:
Leather, and lighter colored leather
in particular, will need more frequent
cleaning to prevent the buildup of
dust, dirt, and colors transferred
from other items so that these do
not become permanent stains.
4. Continue to gently rub the
soiled area.
5. If the soil is not completely
removed, use a mild soap
solution and repeat the cleaning
process with plain water.
To remove dust, a soft cloth
dampened with water can be used.
If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a soft cloth dampened
with a mild soap solution can be
used. Your dealer has a GM
approved leather cleaner available
that provides superior cleaning
performance when used regularly
on finished automotive leathers.
Allow the leather to dry naturally.
If any of the soil remains, a
.
For liquids: gently blot the
commercial fabric cleaner or spot
lifter may be necessary. Test a small
hidden area for colorfastness before
using a commercial upholstery
cleaner or spot lifter. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression
that a ring formation may result,
clean the entire surface.
remaining soil with a paper
towel. Allow the soil to absorb
into the paper towel until no
more can be removed.
.
For solid dry soils: remove as
much as possible and then
vacuum.
A paper towel can be used to blot
excess moisture from the fabric or
carpet after the cleaning process.
To clean:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white
cloth with water or club soda.
2. Remove excess moisture.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-108
Vehicle Care
Do not use heat, steam, spot
may permanently change the
appearance and feel of the
interior and are not recommended.
Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing
organic solvents to clean the
vehicle's interior because they can
alter the appearance by increasing
the gloss in a non-uniform manner.
WARNING (Continued)
lifters or spot removers, or shoe
polish on leather. Many commercial
leather cleaners and coatings that
are sold to preserve and protect
leather may permanently change
the appearance and feel of the
leather and are not recommended.
Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing
to provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Floor Mats
Some commercial products may
increase gloss on the instrument
panel. The increase in gloss may
cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult
to see through the windshield under
certain conditions.
WARNING
{
organic solvents to clean the
vehicle's interior because they can
alter the appearance by increasing
the gloss in a non-uniform manner.
If a floor mat is the wrong size or
is not properly installed, it can
interfere with the accelerator
pedal and/or brake pedal.
Interference with the pedals can
cause unintended acceleration
and/or increased stopping
distance which can cause a crash
and injury. Make sure the floor
mat does not interfere with the
accelerator or brake pedal.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and
Other Plastic Surfaces
Care of Safety Belts
To remove dust, a soft cloth
dampened with water can be
Keep belts clean and dry.
used. If a more thorough cleaning
is necessary, a clean soft cloth
dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove
dust and dirt. Never use spot lifters
or removers on plastic surfaces.
Many commercial cleaners and
coatings that are sold to preserve
and protect soft plastic surfaces
WARNING
{
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
It may severely weaken them.
In a crash, they might not be able
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-109
Use the following guidelines for
proper floor mat usage.
2. Reinstall by lining up the floor
mat retainer openings over the
carpet retainers and snapping
into position.
Removing and Replacing the
Floor Mats
.
The original equipment floor
The drivers side floor mat is held in
place by two button-type retainers.
The passenger side floor mat is held
in place by one button-type retainer.
mats were designed for your
vehicle. If the floor mats need
replacing, it is recommended
that GM certified floor mats be
purchased. Non-GM floor mats
may not fit properly and may
interfere with the accelerator or
brake pedal. Always check that
the floor mats do not interfere
with the pedals.
3. Make sure the floor mat is
properly secured and verify that
it does not interfere with the
accelerator or brake pedal.
.
Use the floor mat with the
correct side up. Do not turn
it over.
.
Do not place anything on top of
the driver side floor mat.
.
Use only a single floor mat on
1. Pull up on the rear of the floor
mat to unlock each retainer and
remove.
the driver side.
.
Do not place one floor mat on
top of another.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-110
Vehicle Care
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Maintenance
11-1
Because of all the different ways
people use vehicles, maintenance
needs vary. The vehicle might need
more frequent checks and services.
Please read the information under
Scheduled Maintenance. To keep
the vehicle in good condition, see
your dealer.
General Information
Notice: Maintenance
Service and
Maintenance
intervals, checks, inspections,
recommended fluids, and
lubricants are necessary to
keep this vehicle in good
working condition. Damage
caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance might
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
General Information
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Scheduled Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . 11-2
The maintenance schedule is for
vehicles that:
Recommended Fluids,
Lubricants, and Parts
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Maintenance Replacement
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
.
Carry passengers and cargo
within recommended limits on
the Tire and Loading Information
label. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 9‑12.
As the vehicle owner, you are
responsible for the scheduled
maintenance in this section.
We recommend having your
dealer perform these services.
Proper vehicle maintenance helps
to keep the vehicle in good working
condition, improves fuel economy,
and reduces vehicle emissions for
better air quality.
.
Are driven on reasonable road
surfaces within legal driving
limits.
Maintenance Records
Maintenance Records . . . . . . 11-10
.
Use the recommended fuel.
See Recommended Fuel on
page 9‑47.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-2
Service and Maintenance
The proper replacement parts,
Scheduled
Maintenance
When the Change Engine Oil
Soon Message Displays
WARNING
{
fluids, and lubricants to use are
listed in Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 11‑7 and
Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 11‑9. We recommend the use
of genuine parts from your dealer.
Performing maintenance work can
be dangerous. Some jobs can
cause serious injury. Perform
maintenance work only if you
have the required know-how and
the proper tools and equipment.
If in doubt, see your dealer to
have a qualified technician do
the work. See Doing Your Own
Service Work on page 10‑4.
Change engine oil and filter.
See Engine Oil on page 10‑10.
An Emission Control Service.
Rotation of New Tires
To maintain ride, handling, and
performance of the vehicle, it is
important that the first rotation
service for new tires be performed.
Tires should be rotated every
12 000 km/7,500 miles. See Tire
Rotation on page 10‑68.
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
SOON message displays, service
is required for the vehicle as
soon as possible, within the next
1 000 km/600 miles. If driving under
the best conditions, the engine oil
life system might not indicate the
need for vehicle service for more
than a year. The engine oil and filter
must be changed at least once a
year and the oil life system must
be reset. Your dealer has trained
service technicians who will perform
this work and reset the system.
At your dealer, you can be
certain that you will receive the
highest level of service available.
Your dealer has specially trained
service technicians, uses genuine
replacement parts, as well as,
up‐to‐date tools and equipment
to ensure fast and accurate
diagnostics.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Maintenance
11-3
.
.
.
Windshield washer fluid level
check. See Washer Fluid on
page 10‑24.
Engine air cleaner filter
inspection. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 10‑16.
If the engine oil life system is reset
accidentally, service the vehicle
within 5 000 km/3,000 miles since
the last service. Reset the oil life
system whenever the oil is changed.
See Engine Oil Life System on
page 10‑14.
.
.
Windshield wiper blade
Brake system inspection
(or every 12 months, whichever
occurs first).
inspection for wear, cracking,
or contamination and windshield
and wiper blade cleaning,
if contaminated. See Exterior
Care on page 10‑101. Worn
or damaged wiper blade
Steering and suspension
inspection. Visual inspection
for damaged, loose, or missing
parts or signs of wear.
Every Engine Oil Change
.
Change engine oil and
filter. Reset oil life system.
See Engine Oil on page 10‑10
and Engine Oil Life System on
page 10‑14. An Emission
Control Service.
replacement. See Wiper Blade
Replacement on page 10‑31.
.
Body hinges and latches,
key lock cylinders, folding
seat hardware, and sunroof
(if equipped) lubrication.
.
Tire inflation pressures
check. See Tire Pressure on
page 10‑61.
See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 11‑7.
More frequent lubrication may
be required when the vehicle
is exposed to a corrosive
environment. Applying silicone
grease on weatherstrips with a
clean cloth makes them last
longer, seal better, and not stick
or squeak.
.
Engine coolant level check.
.
.
Tire wear inspection. See Tire
Inspection on page 10‑68.
See Engine Coolant on
page 10‑19.
Rotate tires if necessary.
See Tire Rotation on
page 10‑68.
.
Engine cooling system
inspection. Visual inspection
of hoses, pipes, fittings, and
clamps and replacement,
if needed.
.
Fluids visual leak check
(or every 12 months, whichever
occurs first). A leak in any
system must be repaired and
the fluid level checked.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-4
Service and Maintenance
.
Restraint system component
check. See Safety System
Check on page 3‑29.
At Each Fuel Stop
Once a Year
.
.
Engine oil level check.
See Starter Switch Check on
See Engine Oil on page 10‑10.
page 10‑29.
.
.
Fuel system inspection for
damage or leaks.
.
.
Engine coolant level check.
See Automatic Transmission
Shift Lock Control Function
Check on page 10‑29.
See Engine Coolant on
page 10‑19.
Exhaust system and nearby heat
shields inspection for loose or
damaged components.
.
.
.
Windshield washer fluid level
See Ignition Transmission Lock
Check on page 10‑30.
check. See Washer Fluid on
page 10‑24.
Additional Required Services
Every 12 000 km/7,500 Miles
See Park Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check on
page 10‑30.
Once a Month
.
.
Rotate tires. Tires should
Tire inflation check. See Tire
.
.
Accelerator pedal check for
damage, high effort, or binding.
Replace if needed.
be rotated every 12 000 km/
7,500 miles. See Tire Rotation
on page 10‑68.
Pressure on page 10‑61.
.
Tire wear inspection. See Tire
Inspection on page 10‑68.
If the vehicle has a Tire Sealant
and Compressor Kit, check the
sealant expiration date printed
on the instruction label of the
kit. See Tire Sealant and
.
Sunroof track and seal
inspection, if equipped.
See Sunroof on page 2‑28.
Compressor Kit on page 10‑79.
.
Underbody flushing service.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Maintenance
11-5
.
All‐wheel drive only: Transfer
case fluid change (severe
First Engine Oil Change After
Every 40 000 km/25,000 Miles
First Engine Oil Change After
Every 80 000 km/50,000 Miles
service) for vehicles mainly
driven when frequently towing
a trailer, or used for taxi, police,
or delivery service. Check
vent hose at transfer case for
kinks and proper installation.
Check to be sure vent hose is
unobstructed, clear, and free of
debris. During any maintenance,
if a power washer is used to
clean mud and dirt from the
underbody, care should be taken
to not directly spray the transfer
case output seals. High pressure
water can overcome the seals
and contaminate the transfer
case fluid. Contaminated fluid
will decrease the life of the
transfer case and should be
replaced.
.
.
Passenger compartment
Engine air cleaner filter
replacement. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 10‑16.
air filter replacement (or every
24 months, whichever occurs
first). More frequent replacement
may be needed if you drive
in areas with heavy traffic,
areas with poor air quality,
or areas with high dust levels.
Replacement may also be
needed if you notice reduced
air flow, windows fogging up,
or odors. Your dealer can help
you determine when it is the
right time to replace the filter.
.
Automatic transmission fluid
change (severe service)
for vehicles mainly driven
in heavy city traffic in hot
weather, in hilly or mountainous
terrain, when frequently towing
a trailer, or used for taxi,
police, or delivery service.
See Automatic Transmission
Fluid on page 10‑15.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-6
Service and Maintenance
.
.
Evaporative control system
Spark plug replacement and
spark plug wires inspection.
An Emission Control Service.
First Engine Oil Change After
Every 160 000 km/100,000 Miles
inspection. Check all fuel and
vapor lines and hoses for proper
hook‐up, routing, and condition.
Check that the purge valve,
if the vehicle has one, works
properly. Replace as needed.
An Emission Control Service.
The U.S. Environmental
.
Automatic transmission fluid
First Engine Oil Change After
Every 240 000 km/150,000 Miles
change (normal service).
See Automatic Transmission
Fluid on page 10‑15.
.
Engine cooling system drain,
.
flush, and refill (or every
five years, whichever occurs
first). See Cooling System on
page 10‑18. An Emission
Control Service.
All‐wheel drive only: Transfer
case fluid change (normal
service). Check vent hose at
transfer case for kinks and
proper installation. Check to be
sure vent hose is unobstructed,
clear, and free of debris. During
any maintenance, if a power
washer is used to clean mud
and dirt from the underbody,
care should be taken to not
directly spray the transfer case
output seals. High pressure
water can overcome the seals
and contaminate the transfer
case fluid. Contaminated fluid
will decrease the life of the
transfer case and should be
replaced.
Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board
has determined that the failure
to perform this maintenance
item will not nullify the emission
warranty or limit recall liability
prior to the completion of
.
Engine drive belts inspection
for fraying, excessive cracks,
or obvious damage (or every
10 years, whichever occurs
first). Replace, if needed.
the vehicle's useful life.
We, however, urge that all
recommended maintenance
services be performed at the
indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Maintenance
11-7
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
The engine requires engine oil approved to the dexos™ specification. Oils
meeting this specification can be identified with the dexos™ certification
mark. Look for and use only an engine oil that displays the dexos™
certification mark of the proper viscosity grade. See Engine Oil on
page 10‑10.
Engine Oil
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.
See Engine Coolant on page 10‑19.
Engine Coolant
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 88863461,
in Canada 88863462).
Hydraulic Brake System
Windshield Washer
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Hydraulic Power Steering System
DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Automatic Transmission
(3.0L V6 Engine)
DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-8
Service and Maintenance
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Automatic Transmission
(2.8L V6 Engine)
AW‐1 Automatic Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. 19256039, in
Canada 19256040).
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or
lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Chassis Lubrication
Key Lock Cylinders
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary
Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and
Release Pawl
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 12346293, in Canada 992723)
or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Hood, Door, and Folding Seat Hinges
Power Liftgate Actuator Ball Joint
Weatherstrip Conditioning
Multi-Purpose Lubricant (GM Part No. 89021668, in Canada 89021674).
Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) or
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 992887).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Maintenance
11-9
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part
GM Part Number
ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
20897358
A3147C
2.8L V6 Engine
12593333
89017525
13271191
PF457G
PF63
3.0L V6 Engine
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element
Spark Plugs
CF176
2.8L V6 Engine
12622561
12622561
41–109
41–109
3.0L V6 Engine
Wiper Blades
Driver Side – 65.0 cm (25.6 in)
Passenger Side – 42.5 cm (16.7 in)
Rear – 30.0 cm (11.8 in)
25979378
25979379
20825882
—
—
—
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-10
Service and Maintenance
Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Date
Serviced By
Maintenance Stamp
Services Performed
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Maintenance
11-11
Maintenance Record (cont'd)
Serviced By Maintenance Stamp
Odometer
Reading
Date
Services Performed
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-12
Service and Maintenance
Maintenance Record (cont'd)
Serviced By Maintenance Stamp
Odometer
Reading
Date
Services Performed
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Data
12-1
Engine Identification
Vehicle Identification
Technical Data
The eighth character in the VIN
is the engine code. This code
identifies the vehicle engine,
specifications, and replacement
parts. See “Engine Specifications”
under Capacities and Specifications
on page 12‑2 for the vehicle
engine code.
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Service Parts Identification
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4
Service Parts
Identification Label
This label, on the inside of the rear
side cargo management cover, has
the following information:
This legal identifier is in the front
corner of the instrument panel, on
the left side of the vehicle. It can be
seen through the windshield from
outside. The VIN also appears on
the Vehicle Certification and Service
Parts labels and certificates of title
and registration.
.
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
.
.
.
Model designation
Paint information
Production options and special
equipment
Do not remove this label from the
vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-2
Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
Capacities
Application
Metric
English
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant label located under the
hood. See your dealer for more information.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Engine Cooling System
2.8L V6 Engine
3.0L V6 Engine
Engine Oil with Filter
2.8L V6 Engine
3.0L V6 Engine
Fuel Tank
12.4 L
11.9 L
13.1 qt
12.6 qt
5.7 L
5.7 L
6.0 qt
6.0 qt
79.5 L
21.0 gal
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Data
12-3
Capacities
English
Application
Metric
Transmission Fluid
2.8L V6 6–Speed Automatic (Transmission Requires No
Fluid Replacement)
—
—
3.0L V6 6–Speed Automatic* (Drain and Refill)
9.0 L
9.5 qt
Wheel Nut Torque
150 Y
110 ft lb
*See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 10‑15 for information on checking fluid level.
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Engine
2.8L V6 (LAU)
3.0L V6 (LF1)
VIN Code
Transmission
Automatic
Spark Plug Gap
1.10 mm (0.043 in)
1.10 mm (0.043 in)
6
Y
Automatic
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-4
Technical Data
Engine Drive Belt Routing
2.8L, 3.0L V6 Engines
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
13-1
Courtesy Transportation
Customer Information
Customer
Information
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Collision Damage Repair . . . 13-13
Service Publications
Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-15 Procedure
Customer Satisfaction
Customer Information
(U.S. and Canada)
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to
the United States
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Reporting Safety Defects to
the Canadian
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Customer Satisfaction
Your satisfaction and goodwill are
important to your dealer and to
Cadillac. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the
operation of the vehicle will be
resolved by the dealer's sales or
service departments. Sometimes,
however, despite the best intentions
of all concerned, misunderstandings
can occur. If your concern has not
been resolved to your satisfaction,
the following steps should be taken:
Procedure (U.S. and
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure (Mexico) . . . . . . . . 13-3
Customer Assistance Offices
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Customer Assistance Offices
(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-6
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-6
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Roadside Service (U.S. and
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Roadside Service
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-18
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . 13-19
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-19
Radio Frequency
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
STEP ONE: Discuss your
concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally,
concerns can be quickly resolved
at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the
sales, service or parts manager,
contact the owner of the dealership
or the general manager.
(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Scheduling Service
Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-2
Customer Information
STEP TWO: If after contacting a
member of dealership management,
it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without
further help, in the U.S., call the
Cadillac Customer Assistance
Center at 1‐800‐458‐8006.
In Canada, call the Canadian
Cadillac Customer Communication
Centre at 1-888-446-2000.
When contacting Cadillac,
remember that your concern will
likely be resolved at a dealer's
facility. That is why we suggest
following Step One first.
case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with
the decision given in your case,
you may reject it and proceed with
any other venue for relief available
to you.
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:
Both General Motors and your
dealer are committed to making
sure you are completely satisfied
with your new vehicle. However,
if you continue to remain unsatisfied
after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two,
you can file with the Better Business
Bureau (BBB) Auto Line® Program
to enforce your rights.
You may contact the BBB Auto
Line Program using the toll-free
telephone number or write them
at the following address:
We encourage you to call the
toll-free number in order to give your
inquiry prompt attention. Have the
following information available to
give the Customer Assistance
representative:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business
Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
.
Vehicle Identification Number
The BBB Auto Line Program is an
out of court program administered
by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive
disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may
be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior
to filing a court action, use of the
program is free of charge and your
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
www.dr.bbb.org/goauto
(VIN). This is available from the
vehicle registration or title, or
the plate at the top left of the
instrument panel and visible
through the windshield.
This program is available in all
50 states and the District of
Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
vehicle age, mileage and other
factors. General Motors reserves
the right to change eligibility
limitations and/or discontinue its
participation in this program.
.
Dealership name and location.
.
Vehicle delivery date and
present mileage.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
13-3
STEP THREE — Canadian
For further information concerning
eligibility in the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
call toll-free 1-800-207-0685,
or call the General Motors
Customer Communication Centre,
1-800-263-3777 (English),
1-800-263-7854 (French),
or write to:
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure (Mexico)
Owners: In the event that you
do not feel your concerns have
been addressed after following the
procedure outlined in Steps One
and Two, General Motors of Canada
Limited wants you to be aware
of its participation in a no-charge
mediation/arbitration program.
General Motors of Canada Limited
has committed to binding arbitration
of owner disputes involving
factory-related vehicle service
claims. The program provides for
the review of the facts involved
by an impartial third party arbiter,
and may include an informal hearing
before the arbiter. The program is
designed so that the entire dispute
settlement process, from the time
you file your complaint to the final
decision, should be completed
in approximately 70 days. We
believe our impartial program offers
advantages over courts in most
jurisdictions because it is informal,
quick, and free of charge.
Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication
Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Did you get the Warranty Extension
Plan? This plan is recommended by
General Motors to supplement the
warranty included with your new
vehicle purchase.
See your dealer for details.
Your inquiry should be accompanied
by the Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-4
Customer Information
If you have a problem that has not
been satisfactorily handled through
the normal means, we suggest the
following steps:
STEP THREE
Customer Assistance
Procedure
If your case is not resolved in a
reasonable amount of time by your
dealer, please call the General
Motors Customer Assistance
Center (CAC) and provide the
following information:
Owner satisfaction and goodwill are
very important to your dealer and
General Motors.
STEP ONE
Explain your case to the dealer
service agent, service manager,
dealer sales agent, or sales
Normally, any problem with the
transaction, sale, or usage of
your vehicle must be handled
by your dealer sales or service
departments. However, we
recognize that despite the good
intentions of all parties involved,
sometimes a misunderstanding
may occur.
.
Name
manager, depending on your case.
.
.
.
.
.
Address
Make sure that they have all
necessary information. They
are interested in your continual
satisfaction.
Phone number
Model year
Brand
STEP TWO
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
If you are not satisfied, please
contact the general manager or the
dealership owner to ask for their
help. If they are not able to resolve
your case, ask them to contact the
right people at General Motors for
support, if needed.
.
.
.
.
.
Mileage
Delivery date
Description of the problem
Dealership name
Dealership address
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
13-5
See Customer Assistance Offices
(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑5
or Customer Assistance Offices
(Mexico) on page 13‑5 for more
information.
From Puerto Rico:
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and
U.S. Virgin Islands)
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
General Motors de Mexico,
S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Av. Ejercito Nacional #843
Col. Granada
Customer Assistance
Offices (U.S. and Canada)
Cadillac encourages customers
to call the toll-free number for
assistance. However, if a customer
wishes to write or e-mail Cadillac,
the letter should be addressed to:
Canada
General Motors of Canada Limited
Canadian Cadillac Customer
Communication Centre, Mail Code:
CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
www.gm.ca
C.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-466-0805
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0805
Customer Assistance
Offices (Mexico)
United States
1-888-446-2000
Cadillac Customer Assistance
Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
www.Cadillac.com
1-800-263-3830 (For Text
Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance:
1-800-882-1112
To contact the Customer Assistance
Center (CAC), use the phone
numbers listed in this section.
Customer assistance is available
Monday through Friday, 08:00 to
20:00 hours, and Saturdays from
08:00 to 15:00 hours.
Overseas
1-800-458-8006
Please contact the local
General Motors Business Unit.
1-800-833-2622 (For Text
Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance:
1-800-882-1112
All e-mail inquiries to the Customer
Assistance Center (CAC) should be
sent to: [email protected].
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-6
Customer Information
Mexico
El Salvador
Online Owner Center
800-6273
From Mexico City
Cadillac Owner
Center (U.S.) —
www.cadillacownercenter.com
5329-0816
Honduras
800-0122-6101
From Other Mexico Locations
Information and services
customized for your specific
vehicle — all in one convenient
place.
01-800-466-0816
Customer Assistance for
Text Telephone (TTY)
Users
To assist customers who
are deaf, hard of hearing,
or speech-impaired and who use
Text Telephones (TTYs), Cadillac
has TTY equipment available at
its Customer Assistance Center.
Any TTY user can communicate
with Cadillac by dialing:
United States and Canada
1-866-466-8195
.
Digital owner manual, warranty
Costa Rica
information, and more
.
00-800-052-1005
Store online service and
maintenance records
Guatemala
.
Cadillac dealer locator for
1-800-999-5252
service nationwide
Panama
.
Exclusive privileges and offers
00-800-052-0001
.
Recall notices for your specific
1-800-833-2622. TTY users in
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.
vehicle
Dominican Republic
.
OnStar and GM Cardmember
1-888-751-5301
Services Earnings summaries
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
GM Mobility
13-7
Other Helpful Links:
Here are a few of the valuable
tools and services you will have
access to:
Cadillac — www.cadillac.com
Reimbursement Program
Cadillac Merchandise —
www.cadillaccollection.com
.
My Showroom: Find and save
information on vehicles and
current offers in your area.
Help Center — www.cadillac.com/
pages/mds/helpcenter/faq.do
.
My Dealers: Save details such
.
FAQ (Frequently Asked
as address and phone number
for each of your preferred GM
dealers.
Questions)
.
Contact Us
This program is available to
qualified applicants for cost
reimbursement of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment
required for your vehicle, such as
hand controls or a wheelchair/
scooter lift for the vehicle.
.
My Driveway: Access quick
My GM Canada — www.gm.ca
links to parts and service
estimates, check trade-in
values, or schedule a service
appointment by adding the
vehicles you own to your
driveway profile.
My GM Canada is a
password-protected section
of www.gm.ca where you can
save information on GM vehicles,
get personalized offers, and use
handy tools and forms with
greater ease.
For more information on the limited
offer, visit www.gmmobility.com or
call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935.
.
My Preferences: Manage your
profile and use tools and forms
with greater ease.
Text Telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
To sign up, visit the My GM.ca
section within www.gm.ca.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-8
Customer Information
General Motors of Canada
also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)
for details. TTY users call
1-800-263-3830.
Calling for Service
Coverage
When calling Roadside Service,
have the following information
ready:
Services are provided up to
5 years/160 000 km (100,000 miles),
whichever comes first.
.
Your name, home address, and
In the U.S., anyone driving the
vehicle is covered. In Canada, a
person driving the vehicle without
permission from the owner is not
covered.
home telephone number
Roadside Service
(U.S. and Canada)
In the United States or Canada,
call 1-800-882-1112.
.
Telephone number of your
location
.
Location of the vehicle
Roadside Service is not a part of
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Cadillac and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to
make any changes or discontinue
the Roadside Service program at
any time without notification.
.
Model, year, color, and license
Text Telephone (TTY), U.S. only,
call 1-888-889-2438.
plate number of the vehicle
.
Odometer reading, Vehicle
Service is available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year.
Identification Number (VIN), and
delivery date of the vehicle
.
Description of the problem
Cadillac and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right
to limit services or payment to an
owner or driver if they decide the
claims are made too often, or the
same type of claim is made many
times.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
13-9
properly inflated. It is your
responsibility for the repair or
replacement of the tire if it is not
covered by the warranty.
Cadillac Owner Privileges™
Cadillac Technician Roadside
Service (U.S. only)
.
Emergency Fuel Delivery:
Delivery of enough fuel for the
vehicle to get to the nearest
service station.
Cadillac's exceptional Roadside
Service is more than an auto club
or towing service. It provides every
Cadillac owner in the United States
with the advantage of contacting
a Cadillac advisor and, where
available, a Cadillac trained dealer
technician who can provide on-site
service.
.
.
Battery Jump Start: Service to
jump start a dead battery.
.
Lock‐Out Service: Service to
Trip Routing Service: Detailed
maps of North America are
provided when requested
either with the most direct
route or the most scenic route.
Additional travel information
is also available. Allow three
weeks for delivery.
unlock the vehicle if you are
locked out. A remote unlock may
be available if you have OnStar.
For security reasons, the driver
must present identification
before this service is given.
A dealer technician will travel to
your location within a 30 mile
.
Emergency Tow From a Public
radius of a participating Cadillac
dealership. If beyond this radius, we
will arrange to have your car towed
to the nearest Cadillac dealership.
Each technician travels with a
specially equipped service vehicle
complete with the necessary
Road or Highway: Tow to
the nearest Cadillac dealer for
warranty service, or if the vehicle
was in a crash and cannot be
driven. Assistance is also given
when the vehicle is stuck in the
sand, mud, or snow.
.
Trip Interruption Benefits
and Service: If your trip is
interrupted due to a warranty
failure, incidental expenses
may be reimbursed during
the 5 years/160 000 km
(100,000 miles) Powertrain
warranty period. Items
Cadillac parts and tools required
to handle most roadside repairs.
.
Flat Tire Change: Service to
change a flat tire with spare tire.
The spare tire, if equipped,
must be in good condition and
considered are hotel, meals,
and rental car.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-10
Customer Information
.
Trip Interruption Benefits and
Service: Pre-authorization,
original detailed receipts, and
a copy of the repair orders are
required. Once authorization has
been received, the Roadside
Service advisor will help you
make arrangements and explain
how to receive payment.
Services Not Included in
Roadside Service
Roadside Service
(Mexico)
Roadside Service is available
24 hours a day, 365 days of
the year.
.
Impound towing caused by
violation of any laws.
.
Legal fines.
.
Mounting, dismounting,
For detailed information about
Roadside Service, please see
the brochure provided with your
new vehicle or visit our website
at: www.cadillac.com.mx.
Navigate the site and click on
“Asistencia en el Camino.” E-mail
correspondence should be sent
to: [email protected].
or changing of snow tires,
chains, or other traction devices.
.
Alternative Service: If
assistance cannot be provided
right away, the Roadside
Service advisor may give
you permission to get local
emergency road service.
You will receive payment, up to
$100, after sending the original
receipt to Roadside Service.
Mechanical failures may be
covered, however any cost for
parts and labor for repairs not
covered by the warranty are
the owner responsibility.
.
Towing or services for vehicles
driven on a non-public road or
highway.
Services Specific to
Canadian‐Purchased Vehicles
.
To contact Roadside Service by
phone, use the following numbers:
Fuel delivery: Reimbursement
is approximately $5 Canadian.
Diesel fuel delivery may be
restricted. Propane and other
fuels are not provided through
this service.
Mexico
01-800-466-0805
United States
.
Lock-Out Service: Vehicle
1-866-466-8906
registration is required.
Canada
.
Trip Routing Service: Limit of
six requests per year.
1-800-268-6800
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
Transportation Options
13-11
Scheduling Service
Appointments
Courtesy Transportation
Program
Warranty service can generally
be completed while you wait.
When your vehicle requires
warranty service, contact
your dealer and request an
appointment. By scheduling
a service appointment and
advising your service consultant
of your transportation needs,
your dealer can help minimize
your inconvenience.
To enhance your ownership
However, if you are unable to
wait, GM helps to minimize your
inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending
on the circumstances, your dealer
can offer you one of the following:
experience, we and our participating
dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support
program for vehicles with the
Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty
Coverage period in Canada),
extended powertrain, and/or
Shuttle Service
hybrid‐specific warranties in
both the U.S. and Canada.
Shuttle service is the preferred
means of offering Courtesy
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled
into the service department
Several Courtesy Transportation
options are available to assist in
reducing your inconvenience when
warranty repairs are required.
Transportation. Dealers may provide
shuttle service to get you to your
destination with minimal interruption
of your daily schedule. This includes
one‐way or round‐trip shuttle service
within reasonable time and distance
parameters of the dealer's area.
immediately, keep driving it until
it can be scheduled for service,
unless, of course, the problem is
safety related. If it is, please call
your dealership, let them know this,
and ask for instructions.
Courtesy Transportation is not a
part of the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. A separate booklet
entitled “Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information” furnished
with each new vehicle provides
detailed warranty coverage
information.
If the dealer requests you to bring
the vehicle for service, you are
urged to do so as early in the work
day as possible to allow for the
same day repair.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-12
Customer Information
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Additional Program
Information
Your dealer may arrange to
provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you
for a rental vehicle that you obtain
if your vehicle is kept for an
overnight warranty repair. Rental
reimbursement will be limited and
must be supported by original
receipts. This requires that you
sign and complete a rental
If your vehicle requires overnight
warranty repairs, and public
All program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at
every dealer. Please contact your
dealer for specific information
about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will
be administered by appropriate
dealer personnel.
transportation is used instead of
the dealer's shuttle service, the
expense must be supported by
original receipts and can only
be up to the maximum amount
allowed by GM for shuttle service.
In addition, for U.S. customers,
should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited
reimbursement for reasonable
fuel expenses may be available.
Claim amounts should reflect actual
costs and be supported by original
receipts. See your dealer for
General Motors reserves the
right to unilaterally modify,
agreement and meet state/
provincial, local, and rental
change, or discontinue Courtesy
Transportation at any time and
to resolve all questions of claim
eligibility pursuant to the terms and
conditions described herein at its
sole discretion.
vehicle provider requirements.
Requirements vary and may
include minimum age requirements,
insurance coverage, credit card,
etc. You are responsible for fuel
usage charges and may also be
responsible for taxes, levies, usage
fees, excessive mileage, or rental
usage beyond the completion of
the repair.
information regarding the allowance
amounts for reimbursement of fuel
or other transportation costs.
It may not be possible to provide a
like vehicle as a courtesy rental.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
13-13
Recycled original equipment
durability/corrosion problems,
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in
parts may also be used for repair.
These parts are typically removed
from vehicles that were total losses
in prior crashes. In most cases,
the parts being recycled are from
undamaged sections of the vehicle.
A recycled original equipment GM
part may be an acceptable choice
to maintain your vehicle's originally
designed appearance and safety
performance; however, the history of
these parts is not known. Such parts
are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any
related failures are not covered by
that warranty.
and may not perform properly in
subsequent collisions. Aftermarket
parts are not covered by your GM
New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and
any vehicle failure related to such
parts is not covered by that
warranty.
a collision and it is damaged,
have the damage repaired by
a qualified technician using the
proper equipment and quality
replacement parts. Poorly performed
collision repairs diminish your
vehicle's resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised
in subsequent collisions.
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you
choose a collision repair facility that
meets your needs before you ever
need collision repairs. Your dealer
may have a collision repair center
with GM-trained technicians and
state‐of‐the‐art equipment, or be
able to recommend a collision
repair center that has GM-trained
technicians and comparable
equipment.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new
parts made with the same materials
and construction methods as the
parts with which your vehicle
was originally built. Genuine
GM Collision parts are your best
choice to ensure that your vehicle's
designed appearance, durability,
and safety are preserved. The use
of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Aftermarket collision parts are also
available. These are made by
companies other than GM and
may not have been tested for your
vehicle. As a result, these parts
may fit poorly, exhibit premature
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-14
Customer Information
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing
company may require you to have
insurance that ensures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or
Genuine Manufacturer replacement
parts. Read your lease carefully, as
you may be charged at the end of
your lease for poor quality repairs.
Gather the following information:
Insuring Your Vehicle
.
Driver's name, address, and
Protect your investment in your
GM vehicle with comprehensive
and collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences
in the quality of coverage afforded
by various insurance policy terms.
Many insurance policies provide
reduced protection to your GM
vehicle by limiting compensation
for damage repairs by using
telephone number
.
Driver's license number
.
Owner's name, address, and
telephone number
.
Vehicle license plate number
.
Vehicle make, model, and
If a Crash Occurs
model year
If there has been an injury, call
emergency services for help. Do not
leave the scene of a crash until all
matters have been taken care of.
Move the vehicle only if its position
puts you in danger, or you are
instructed to move it by a police
officer.
.
aftermarket collision parts. Some
insurance companies will not
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
specify aftermarket collision parts.
When purchasing insurance, we
recommend that you ensure that
your vehicle will be repaired with
GM original equipment collision
parts. If such insurance coverage
is not available from your current
insurance carrier, consider switching
to another insurance carrier.
.
Insurance company and policy
number
.
General description of the
damage to the other vehicle
Choose a reputable repair facility
that uses quality replacement parts.
See “Collision Parts” earlier in this
section.
Give only the necessary information
to police and other parties involved
in the crash.
For emergency towing see
If the airbag has inflated, see What
Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates? on page 3‑37.
Roadside Service (U.S. and
Canada) on page 13‑8 or Roadside
Service (Mexico) on page 13‑10.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
13-15
initially value the repair using
Managing the Vehicle Damage
Repair Process
Service Publications
Ordering Information
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with
your repair professional, and insist
on Genuine GM parts. Remember,
if your vehicle is leased, you may
be obligated to have the vehicle
repaired with Genuine GM parts,
even if your insurance coverage
does not pay the full cost.
In the event that your vehicle
requires damage repairs, GM
recommends that you take an
active role in its repair. If you
have a pre-determined repair
facility of choice, take your vehicle
there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any
required replacement collision parts
be original equipment parts, either
new Genuine GM parts or recycled
original GM parts. Remember,
recycled parts will not be covered
by your GM vehicle warranty.
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis
and repair information on the
engines, transmission, axle,
suspension, brakes, electrical,
steering, body, etc.
If another party's insurance
Service Bulletins
company is paying for the repairs,
you are not obligated to accept
a repair valuation based on that
insurance company's collision
policy repair limits, as you have no
contractual limits with that company.
In such cases, you can have control
of the repair and parts choices as
long as the cost stays within
reasonable limits.
Service Bulletins give additional
technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service
General Motors cars and trucks.
Each bulletin contains instructions
to assist in the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair,
but you must live with the repair.
Depending on your policy limits,
your insurance company may
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-16
Customer Information
Owner Information
Current and Past Models
Reporting Safety
Defects
Owner publications are written
specifically for owners and intended
to provide basic operational
information about the vehicle.
The Owner Manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all
models.
Technical Service Bulletins and
Manuals are available for current
and past model GM vehicles.
Reporting Safety Defects
to the United States
Government
ORDER TOLL FREE:
1-800-551-4123 Monday - Friday
8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time
If you believe that your vehicle
has a defect which could cause
a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
General Motors.
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit
Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,
Owner Manual, and Warranty
Booklet.
Or you can write to:
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling
and shipping fees
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Without Portfolio: Owner
Manual only.
Prices are subject to change
without notice and without incurring
obligation. Allow ample time for
delivery.
If NHTSA receives similar
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling
and shipping fees
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign.
Note to Canadian Customers: All
listed prices are quoted in U.S.
funds. Canadian residents are to
make checks payable in U.S. funds.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
13-17
However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual
problems between you, your
dealer, or General Motors.
Reporting Safety Defects
to the Canadian
Government
If you live in Canada, and you
believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, notify Transport
Canada immediately, and notify
General Motors of Canada Limited.
Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or
write to:
Reporting Safety Defects
to General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA
(or Transport Canada) in a situation
like this, notify General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may
call the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or
write to:
Call 1-800-458-8006, or write:
Cadillac Customer Assistance
Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
Transport Canada
Administrator, NHTSA
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Washington, D.C. 20590
In Canada, call 1‐888‐446‐2000,
or write:
You can also obtain other
information about motor
vehicle safety from
Canadian Cadillac Customer
Communication Centre, Mail Code:
CA1-163-005
General Motors of Canada Limited
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
http://www.safercar.gov.
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-18
Customer Information
This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances
in which crashes and injuries occur.
Event Data Recorders
Vehicle Data
Recording and
Privacy
Your GM vehicle has a number of
sophisticated computers that record
information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven.
For example, your vehicle uses
computer modules to monitor and
control engine and transmission
performance, to monitor the
conditions for airbag deployment
and deploy airbags in a crash, and,
if so equipped, to provide antilock
braking to help the driver control the
vehicle. These modules may store
data to help your dealer technician
service your vehicle. Some modules
may also store data about how you
operate the vehicle, such as rate of
fuel consumption or average speed.
These modules may also retain the
owner’s personal preferences, such
as radio pre-sets, seat positions,
and temperature settings.
This vehicle has an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose
of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations,
such as an airbag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that
will assist in understanding how
a vehicle's systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and
safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed
to record such data as:
Important: EDR data is recorded
by your vehicle only if a non-trivial
crash situation occurs; no data is
recorded by the EDR under normal
driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age,
and crash location) is recorded.
However, other parties, such as
law enforcement, could combine
the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data
routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
.
How various systems in your
To read data recorded by an EDR,
special equipment is required, and
access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the
information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
vehicle were operating
.
Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened
.
How far, if at all, the driver was
pressing the accelerator and/or
brake pedal
.
How fast the vehicle was
traveling
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
13-19
OnStar®
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
GM will not access this data or
share it with others except: with the
consent of the vehicle owner or,
if the vehicle is leased, with the
consent of the lessee; in response
to an official request by police or
similar government office; as part
of GM's defense of litigation through
the discovery process; or, as
If your vehicle is equipped with
an active OnStar system, that
system may also record data in
crash or near crash‐like situations.
The OnStar Terms and Conditions
provides information on data
collection and use and is available
in the OnStar glove box kit,
RFID technology is used in some
vehicles for functions such as tire
pressure monitoring and ignition
system security, as well as in
connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door
locking/unlocking and starting, and
in-vehicle transmitters for garage
door openers. RFID technology in
GM vehicles does not use or record
personal information or link with
any other GM system containing
personal information.
required by law. Data that GM
at www.onstar.com (U.S.) or
www.onstar.ca (Canada), or
collects or receives may also be
used for GM research needs or may
be made available to others for
research purposes, where a need is
shown and the data is not tied to a
specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
by pressing the Q button and
speaking to an advisor.
Navigation System
If the vehicle has a navigation
system, use of the system may
result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and
other trip information. Refer to the
navigation system operating manual
for information on stored data and
for deletion instructions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-20
Customer Information
Radio Frequency
Statement
This vehicle has systems that
operate on a radio frequency that
comply with Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and with Industry Canada
Standards RSS‐210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. The device may not cause
interference.
2. The device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation of the
device.
Changes or modifications to any
of these systems by other than an
authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-1
Airbag System
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-46
How Does an Airbag
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36
Passenger Sensing
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39
What Makes an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36
What Will You See After
an Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . .3-37
When Should an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-33
Airbags
Alarm System
A
Anti-Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . 10-28, 9-30
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Antenna
Multi-Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-19
Anti-Theft
Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Alarm System Messages . . . . .5-38
Antilock Brake
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Appearance Care
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-101
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-106
Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20
CD/DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-22
Accessories and
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Adaptive Forward
Lighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Adaptive Forward Lighting
(AFL) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Add-On Electrical
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62
Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 3-44
Adjustable Throttle and
Brake Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Adjustments
Lumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Thigh Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-16
Air Filter, Passenger
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Adding Equipment to the
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44
Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-18
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Servicing Airbag-Equipped
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-2
INDEX
Audio System
Brake
Pedal and Adjustable
C
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-19
Rear Seat (RSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-49
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2
Automatic
Dimming Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 9-26
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28
Automatic Transmission
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
California
Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17
Brake System Warning Light . . . 5-22
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30
Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
High Intensity Discharge
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-48
Perchlorate Materials
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Camera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iii
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Carbon Monoxide
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14, 2-15
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Cargo
Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Management System . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Tie Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Cargo Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Cautions, Danger, and
Shift Lock Control
Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . 7-30, 7-36
B
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-94
Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Voltage and Charging
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-31
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . 7-51, 7-52, 7-57
(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-44
Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-3
CD
DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-22
Cleaning
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Courtesy Transportation
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Covers
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Text Telephone (TTY)
Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6
Customer Assistance
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Customer Information
Service Publications
Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-15
Customer Satisfaction
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-101
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-106
Climate Control Systems
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-19
Check
Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Ignition
Transmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-30
Child Restraints
Infants and Young
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-49
Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-56
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-47
Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-64, 3-66
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-51
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Dual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7, 5-8
Cluster, IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-13
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-93
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Compressor Kit, Tire
Sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Coolant
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Engine Temperature
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1, 13-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-4
INDEX
Driving
Characteristics and
D
E
Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-13
Danger, Warnings, and
E85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50
ECO Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Economy Mode
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-8
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Dual Automatic Climate
Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
DVD
Rear Seat Entertainment
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-38
DVD/CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-18
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . 7-30, 7-36
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Door
Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Rear Seat Pass-Through . . . . .3-14
Drive Systems
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29
Electric Parking Brake Light . . . 5-23
Electrical Equipment,
Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62
Electrical System
Engine Compartment
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Rear Compartment Fuse
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . 10-28, 9-30
Driver Information
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-5
Engine
Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Front Seats
Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Check and Service Engine
Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Coolant Temperature
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Cooling System Messages . . .5-34
Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9
Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24
Gasoline Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-25
Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Engine Oil
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Heated and Ventilated . . . . . . . . 3-11
Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-49
E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . . . . . . .9-50
Economy Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Filling a Portable Fuel
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-53
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-52
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .9-49
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-48
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-27
Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-47
Requirements, California . . . . .9-48
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Fuel Economy Gauge . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Fuel Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
F
Features
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-5
Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77
Flat Tire, Changing . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-108
Fluid
Automatic Transmission . . . . 10-15
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Fog Lamps
Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-18
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Front Fog Lamps
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-6
INDEX
Fuses
Gauges (cont.)
Headlamps (cont.)
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Warning Lights and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
General Information
Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
High Intensity Discharge
Engine Compartment
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
Rear Compartment Fuse
(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-27
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .5-28
Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Twilight Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Heated
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
Heated and Ventilated Front
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Heater
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . 10-62
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-8
Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
How to Wear Safety Belts
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
G
Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46
Gasoline
H
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-5
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Adaptive Forward
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48
Gasoline Engine, Starting . . . . . . 9-19
Gauge
Turbo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Gauges
Lighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Engine Coolant
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-7
Light
Adaptive Forward Lighting
I
L
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Ignition Transmission Lock
Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-55
Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Lamps
(AFL) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-22
Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . .5-23
StabiliTrak® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Lighting
Adaptive Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Lights
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Infants and Young Children,
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii, 7-1
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-3
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Front Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-19
On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
LATCH System
Replacing Parts After a
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-64
Latch, Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
Liftgate
Carbon Monoxide . . . . . . .2-14, 2-15
J
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-94
Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Antilock Brake System
K
(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-36
Keyless Entry
Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-4
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-8
INDEX
Lights (cont.)
Messages (cont.)
M
High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-15
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Traction Control System
Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Starting the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Mirrors
Maintenance
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-10
Maintenance Schedule
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-19
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Mass Storage Media (MEM) . . . 7-27
Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Messages
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . .5-38
Battery Voltage and
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-34
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Object Detection System . . . . .5-37
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Locks
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-27
Lower Anchors and Tethers
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-23
Automatic Dimming
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24
Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23
Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22
Tilt in Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23
Monitor System, Tire
for Children (LATCH
SYSTEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63
Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-9
OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Operation, Infotainment
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Outlets
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Overview, Infotainment
Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-39
Perchlorate Materials
Requirements, California . . . . . 10-3
Phone
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . 7-51, 7-52, 7-57
Power
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22
Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-22
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Pregnancy, Using Safety
Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Privacy
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-19
Program
Courtesy Transportation . . . . .13-11
Proposition 65 Warning,
N
Navigation System
Vehicle Data Recording
and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
Net
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3, 7-5
P
O
Park
Object Detection System
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24
Parking
Assist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31
Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-30
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-24
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Off-Road
Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Oil
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-14
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-47
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-10
INDEX
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Records
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-10
Recreational Vehicle
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-98
Reimbursement Program,
GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3, 2-4
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Replacement Parts
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-46
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-46
Replacing LATCH System
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
Replacing Safety Belt
Reporting Safety Defects
R
Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-17
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Restraints
Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-53
Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Ride Control Systems
Limited Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . .9-37
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Selective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37
Roads
Driving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Roadside Service . . . . . . . 13-8, 13-10
Roof
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4
Running the Vehicle While
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-19
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
Radios
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12
CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-22
Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-19
Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Rear Axle
Limited-Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37
Rear Climate Control System . . . 8-5
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
Rear Seat Entertainment
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) . . . . . . .7-49
Rear Seat
Pass-Through Door . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-43
Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 5-5
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-24
System Parts After a
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-11
Seats (cont.)
Servicing the
S
Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Heated, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-7
Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-4
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Securing Child
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64, 3-66
Security
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Selective Ride Control . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Service
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 3-44
Shift Lock Control Function
Check, Automatic
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Shifting
Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22
Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24
Signals, Turn and
Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Spare Tire
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Replacing After a Crash . . . . . .3-29
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-28
Safety Defects Reporting
Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-17
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . 11-2
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 13-11
Sealant Kit, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79
Seats
Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93
Specifications and
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Accessories and
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4
Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-10
Maintenance, General
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1
Publications Ordering
StabiliTrak®
OFF Light . . . . . . . . . 5-24
StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Starting the Gasoline
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Starting the Vehicle
Messsages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Heated and Ventilated
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Scheduling Appointments . . . .13-11
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-12
INDEX
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Storage
Tires (cont.)
Sealant and
T
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-6
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-20
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Thigh Support Adjustment . . . . . . 3-8
Throttle, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7, 5-8
Tires
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79
Sealant and Compressor
Kit, Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86
Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Terminology and
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-75
When It Is Time for New
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69
Towing
Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-54
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-61
General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-54
Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-98
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-58
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . .9-62
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-98
Mass Media (MEM) . . . . . . . . . . .7-27
Storage Areas
Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Cargo Management System . . . 4-5
Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Storing the Tire Sealant
and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . 10-86
Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
System
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93
Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-77
Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-64
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-63
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-13
Traction
Vehicle Care
Storing the Tire Sealant
and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . 10-86
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
Service Parts Identification
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
Vehicle Reminder
U
Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . .9-34
Control System (TCS)/
Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 9-40
Uniform Tire Quality
StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . .9-37
Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Selective Ride Control . . . . . . . .9-37
Trailer
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-46
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-49
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46
Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . .9-62
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58
Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26
Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Transportation Program,
Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Turbo Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Twilight Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
V
Vehicle
Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-14
INDEX
When It Is Time for New
W
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69
Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-53
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Windshield
Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-31
Wipers
Warning
Brake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Warning Lights, Gauges,
and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . . . 5-40
Washer, Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Wheels
Rear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|